BOOK - Design of Reinforced Concrete Structure Mashhour Ahmed GhoneimV02

RIC F.
rames
DESIGN OF REINFORCED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Volume 2
MashhourAhmed Ghoneim
Professor of Concrete Structures
Cairo University
Mahmoud Tharwat EI-Mihilmy
Associate Professor of Concrete Structures
Cairo University
Second Ec:Jition
2008
PREFACE
Teaching reinforced concrete design, carrying out research relevant to the behavior of
reinforced concrete members, as well as designing concrete structures motivated the
preparation of this book. The basic objective of this book is to furnish the reader with
the basic understanding of the mechanics and design of reinforced concrete. The
contents of the book conform to the latest edition of the Egyptian Code for the Design
and Construction of Concrete Structures The authors strongly recommend
that the Code be utilized as a companion publication to this book
The book is aimed at two different groups. First, by treating the material in a logical
and unified form, it is hoped that it can serve as a useful text for undergraduate and
graduate student courses on reinforced concrete. Secondly, as a result of the continuing
activity in the design and construction of reinforced concrete structures, it will be of
value to practicing structural engineers.
Numerous illustrative examples are given, the solution of which has been supplied so
as to supplement the theoretical background and to familiarize the reader with the
steps involved in actual design problem solving.
ill writing the book, the authors are conscious of a debt to many sources, to friends,
colleagues, and co-workers in the field. Finally, this is as good a place as any for the
authors to express their indebtedness to their honomble professors of Egypt, Canada
and the U.S.A. Their contributions in introducing the authors to the field will always
be remembered with the deepest gratitude.
This volume contains the following chapters
Solid slabs
Hollow block slabs
Paneled beams
Flat slabs
Reinforced concrete stairs
Short columns
Eccentric sections
Slender columns
Reinforced concrete Frames
It also includes appendices containing design aids.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SOLID SLABS
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ '" ........ 1
1.2 One-Way Solid Slabs ............................................................................ ............. 2
1.2.1 Definition .. ; .............................. ................................................................ 2
1.2.2 Structural Behavior. ................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 Effective Span ........................................................................................... 4
1.2.4 Minimum Thickness .................................................................................. 5
1.2.5 Bending moments ...................................................................................... 6
Example 1.1 ....................................................................................................... 8
1.3 Two-Way Slabs ................... , ............................................................................. 13
1.3.1 Definition .................................................................................................. 13
1.3.2 Elastic Analysis of Plates .......................................................................... 13
1.3.3 Load Distribution Factors According to ECP 203 ..................................... 16
1.3.4 Minimum Thickness .................................................................................. 18
1.3.5 Related Code Provisions ............................................................................ 19
1.3.6 Comer Reinforcement ............................................................................... 21
Example 1.2 ....................................................................................................... 22
2. HOLLOW BLOCK SLABS
2.1 Introduction ................................................................. ............................................ 29
2.2 One-Way Hollow Block Slabs .................................................................................. 31
2.2.1 GeneraL .................................................................................................... 31
2.2.2 Arrangement of blocks .............................................................................. 32
2.2.3 Code Provisions ........................................................................................ 35
2.2.4 Design of One-way Hollow Block Slabs ................................................... 36
2.2.4.1 Design of Ribs ................... ............................................................. 36
2.2.4.2 Design of Hidden Beams ............................................................... 38
Example 2.1 ....................................................................................................... 40
2.3 Two-Way Hollow Block Slabs ............................................................................ : .... 51
2.3.1 Method of Analysis ................................................................................... 53
2.3.2 Design oftwo-way hollow slabs with projected beams ............................. 53
2.3.2.1 Design of ribs ............................................. ................................... 53
2.3.2.2 Design of Projected beams ............................................................. 54
Example 2.2 ....................................................................................................... 58
ii
3. PANELED BEAMS
3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 70
3.2 Load Distribution ............................................................ :C ....................................... 72
3.3 Code Provisions ................................................................................................. ....... 75
304 Simplified Design Method ........................................................................................ 76
3.5 Design of Skew Paneled Beams ................................................................................ 81
Example 3.1 ....................................................................................................... 82
4. FLAT SLABS
4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 102
4.2 Statical Equilibrium of Flat Slabs ............................................................................. 104
4.3 Minimum Dimensions According to ECP 203 .......................................................... 105
404 Analysis of Flat Slabs ............................................................................................... 108
4.5 Direct Design Method ............................................................................................... 108
4.5.1 Limitation ofthe direct method ................................................................. 108
4.5.2 Definition of colunm strip and field strip .................................................. 108
4.5.3 Calculation of slab load ............................................................................. 108
4.504 Statical Moment Mo .................................................................................. 11 0
4.5.5 Distribution of the Statical Moment ......................................................... 111
4.5.6 Moment Correction ................................................................................... 114
4.5.7 Provision for Pattern Loading .................................................................... 115
4.5.8 Design Steps According to the Direct Design Method .............................. 115
4.6 Reinforcement of Flat Slabs ...................................................................................... 116
4.6.1 General. ..................................................................................................... 116
4.6.2 Column Head Reinforcement ....................................... ............................ 120
4.6.3 Reinforcement at Openings in Flat Slabs .................................................. 121
4.7 Punching Shear Strength of Flat Slabs ...................................................................... 122
4.7.1 General. ........................................................................... ; ......................... 122
4.7.2 Critical Sections ........................................................................................ 123
4.7.3 Concrete Punching Shear Strength ............................................................ 125
4.704 Detailed Analysis ...................................................................................... 126
4.704.1 Introduction ................................................................................... 126
4.704.2 Calculations ofthe Punching Stresses ............................................ 126
4.7.5 Simplified Method .................................................................................... 131
4.8 One-Way Shear Strength .......................................................................................... 133
Example 4.1 ....................................................................................................... 134
Example 4.2 ....................................................................................................... 147
Example 4.3 ................................ , ................ ..................................................... 162
Example 4.4 ....................................................................................................... 163
4.9 The Equivalent Frame Method ........................................................................ .......... 165
. 4.9.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 165
4.9.2 Structural.Analysis .................................................................................... 165
Example 4.5 ; ...................................................................................................... 170
4.10 Computer Model of Flat Slabs ........... ; .................................................................... 172
iii
5. REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRS
5.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 174
5.2 Structural Systems of Stairs ...................................................................................... 177
5.2 Cantilever Type ........................................................................................................ 178
Example 5.1 ....................................................................................................... 18
1
5.3 Slab Type ..................................................................... ........................................ 194
Example 5.2 ....................................................................................................... 19
8
Example 5.3 ....................................................................................................... 207
6. SHORT COLUMNS SUBJECTED TO CONCENTRIC
COMPRESSION
6.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 223
6.2 Axially Loaded Tied Columns .................................................................................. 224
6.2.1 Behavior and Strength ........................................... .. ............. .. .. .......... 224
6.2.2 Code Provisions for Tied Columns ........................................................... 226
6.2.3 Splicing of Vertical Reinforcement .......................... .... .. .. .. ...... 229
Example 6.1 .................................................................. .. .. ........................... 232
Example 6.2 .................................................................. .. .. .. .... .................... 234
6.3 Axially Loaded Spiral Colun1ns ................................................................................ 235
6.3.1 Behavior and Strength ............................................ . .. .... .. ............... 235
6.3.2 Minimum Spiral Reinforcement .............................. .. .. .............. 237
6.3.3 Code Provisions for Spiral Columns ......................................................... 239
Example 6.3 ....................................................................................................... 241
Example 604 ....................................................................................................... 243
604 Design of Composite Columns ........................................................ : .. ; ..................... 245
604.1 Design Guidelines ..... , ............................................................................... 245
Example 6.5 ....................................................................................................... 252
Example 6.6 ....................................................................................................... 254
Example 6.7 ....................................................................................................... 257
6.5 Calculation of Axial Loads on Columns ................................................................... 259
6.5.1 Area Method ............................................................................................. 259
6.5.2 Reaction Method ............................................ .. .. .. .... ...................... 261
7. DESIGN OF SECTIONS SUBJECTED TO ECCENTRIC
FORCES
7.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 262
7.2 Interaction Diagrams ..................................................... .. .. ................................. 264
7.2.1 Definition ................................................................................................... 264
7.2.2 Modes of Failure ........................... : ........................................................... 265
7.2.3 Development of the Interaction Diagram ................................................... 267
iv
7.2.4 Plastic Centroid ......................................................................................... 270
8. SLENDER COLUMNS
Example 7.1 ............................ ' .................................................... : ...................... 271
Example 7. 2 ...................................................................................................... 273
Example 7.3 ....................................................................................................... 274
7.3 Sections SubjecttoEccentric Compression Forces .................................................. 281
7.3.1 Design Ul!ing mteraction Diagrams ............................................... : ........... 282
Example 7.4 ........................................................ , .............................................. 286
7 .3.2Design Using MUS Approach ................................................................... 288
Example 7.5 ....................................................................................................... 292
7.3.3 Design Curves For Eccentric Sections ....................................................... 294
Example 7.6 ....................................................................................................... 296
7.4 Sections Subjected to Eccentric Tension Forces ....................................................... 299
7.4.1 Sections Subject to Small Eccentric Tension Forces ..................... ; ........... 300
Example 7.7 ....................................................................................................... 301
7.4.2 Sections Subjected to Big Eccentric TensionForces ................................. 303
Example 7.8 .......................................................................... ........................... 304
7.5 T-Sections Subjected To Eccentric Forces ................................................................ 305
Example 7.9 ....................................................................................................... 306
Example 7.10 ..................................................................................................... 308
Example 7.11 .................................. ................................................................... 310
7.6 Analysis of Irregular Sections ................................................................................... 312
8.1 Definition of Slender Colurrms ................................................................................. 369
82 Classification of Buildings ................................ .. ........................................... 372
8:3 Braced and Unbraced Colurrms ..................................... ................................. 375
8.4 Slenderness Considerations in the Egyptian Code ............................. : ... 376
8.4.1 Code Definition of Slender Colurrms ............. ; .......................................... 376
8.4.2 Unsupported Height ofa Compression Member (Ho) ............................... 377
8.4.3 Effective Height ofa Compression Member (He) ..................................... 378
8.5 Design Moments in Slender Braced Colurrms .................... ; ........... ........... 383
8.5.1 Calculation ofthe Additional Moments ..................................... ...... 383
8.5.2 Design Moments ....................................................................................... 384
8.6 Design Moments in Unbraced Slender Colurrms ...................................... ....... 387
8.6.1 Additional moment ...... , ........... : ................................................................ 387
8.6.2 Design moments ........................................................................................ 387
!:l \\\: H: \\\\)\\\\i\\\\:: \:\ \\: \\ \ \\ \ \\\: \\\\\)::\::\\) \:\\) \\\ \ \:\:\:::\:: :\\\::\ )\\ \\
7.6.1 General. ..................................................................................................... 312
7.Q.2 Strength of Shear Walls ............................................................................. 313 9. REINFORCED CONCRETE FRAMES
Example 7.12 ..................................................................................................... 315
7.7 mteraction Diagrams For Circular Colurrms ............................................................. 320
Example 7.13 .................................................................................................... 323
Example 7.14 ..................................................................................................... 325
Example 7.15 ..................................................................................................... 327
7.8 mteraction Diagrams For Box Sections .................................................................... 329
Example 7.16 ..................................................................................................... 331
7.9 Colurrms Subjected to Biaxial Bending ..................................................................... 334
7.9.1 General ...................................................................................................... 334
9.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 419
9.2 Definition of the Frame ............................................................................................. 420
9.3 The Choice of the Type ofthe Frame .......................................... ...................... .422
9.4 of a Hall Supported by RIC Frames ............................................................. .425
9.5 Reinforcement Detailing of Rigid Frames ..................................... ............... .427
9.6
7.9.2 Exact Analysis of Biaxial Bending ............................................................ 335
7.9.3 Minimum Eccentricity for Biaxially Loaded Columns .............................. 343
APPENDICES
Example 7.17 ..................................................................................................... 344
7.9.4 Biaxial mteraction Diagrams ..................................................................... 345
7.9.5 The use of Biaxial Interaction Diagrams ................................................... 345
Example 7.18 ..................................................................................................... 347
7.9.6 ECP-203 Design Procedure for Biaxial Bending ....................................... 349
Example 7.19 ..................................................................................................... 353
7.9.7 Biaxial Bending in Unsymmetrically Reinforced Sections ........................ 355
Example 7.20 ...................................................................................................... 359
7.9.8 Circular Colurrms under Biaxial Bending .................................................. 362
Example 7.21 ..................................................................................................... 363
7.9.9 mteraction Diagrams for L-Sections .......................................................... 365
Appendix A Design Charts for Sections Subjected to Flexure ...................................... .465
Appendix B mteraction Diagrams Top and bottom steel ...................................... .. .4 73
Appendix C mteraction Diagrams Uniform steeL ................. : ............................. ........ 522
Appendix D Design Charts for Sections Subjected to EccentrIC Forces ......................... 535
Appendix E Interaction Diagrams for Circular S.ections ...... : .................................... : .... 560
Appendix F Interaction Diagrams for Hollow SectlOns ...................................
573
. Appendix G Interaction Diagrams for Box SectlOns .............. : ....................................... 581
Appendix H Interaction Diagrams for Biaxially Loaded SectlOns ................................. 586
Appendix I Interaction Diagrams for L-Sections ............................... .............. 615
v
vi
1
SOLID SLABS
Photo 1.1 Burj Dubai during construction 2 0 0 7 ) ~ ______
1.1 Introduction
Reinforced concrete solid slabs are used in floors, roofs and as decks of bridges as
shown in Photo 1.1. Slabs may span in one direction or in two directions depending on
the slab dimensions and the surrounding supporting elements. Slabs spanning in one
direction are referred to as one-way slabs while those spanning in two directions are
referred to as two-way slabs.
1.2
1.2.1
One-Way Solid Slabs
Definition
One-way solid s l a b ~ are extensively used in buildings, especially for spans less than 4
meters. To be classified as a one-way slab, the ratio of the long side to the short side
of the slab panel must exceed 2. They are referred to as one-way slabs because the
bending is mainly in the short direction. Typically, a 1m wide strip of the slab is
analyzed and the reinforcement required for this strip is used in all parts ofthe slab.
cantilever slabs main direction
7 r
/
I
~
"
I I !
-I
---------------1
.-._._.
--I-
t
I
t '
I
i 1:' <: i
<:
I
i
~ 9 . .5g
S E ! '"
<> I
i
E ~
i
<> ... I
'8
I &'8 i i
I i i
i
!
i
!
---
I
t
I
I i
i i
i
<=
.S .g
I
I
'"
<> i
i
E ~
I
'8
i I
!
I
main direction
I
---
-_.
~
.. ... ... ...
I !
main
i
t
I
i i <= i
direction
i i
.5g i
I I
'"
<>
secondary
E ~ I
i I ... -..
'8 I
~ ~
1
direction
~
I I
Fig. 1.1 One-way slabs
2
1.2.2 Structural Behavior
The direction in which the slab bends is called the main direction as shown in Fig 1.1.
The main reinforcement is placed in this direction as illustrated in Fig. 1.2.
For a one-way slab supported on four beams like the one shown in Fig. 1.2, the strip
near the middle acts as a one-way slab. However, at the slab parts near the edges,
some of the load is transferred in the longitudinal direction producing a two-way slab
action. Thus, top reinforcement should be added on each side of the girder to account
for this action. If this reinforcement is ignored, wide cracks may develop on the top of
the slab along edges (A-B) and (A'-B')
A
Main reinforcement
direction
beams
Secondary reinforcement
direction
Fig. 1.2 Structural action of one-way slabs
The load transferred to the perpendicular direction is almost equal to zero except near
the edge beams (Beams AB and A'Bl Thus, a secondary mesh is required in this
direction (as shown in Figs. 1.2 and 1.3) to carry this small portion and to keep the
main reinforcement in place. Also, the secondary reinforcement is place.d to control
cracks produced by shrinkage or temperature changes and to help in distribl,lting
concentrated loads transversely.
3
a- Simply supported b- Coutiuuous
Fig. 1.3 One-way slabs supported on two sides
It should be noted that if a slab panel is supported only on two sides, it would act as
one-way slab regardless of the ratio Of the long side to the short side. Figures 1.3.a and
1.3.b show examples of slabs act as one way because of having supporting beams on
two sides only.
1.2.3 Effective Span
The effective span (Lef!) for solid slabs is given by the follOwing equation
{
{
Lelet" +t
max of s
Lef! = min of. 1.05xLc/",,, for simple or continuous slabs ...................... (1.1)
CLto CL (L)
L . if {Lei"'" +ts c. '1 I b
eff = mIll 0 edge to CL (L) canb ever s a s .............................................. (1.2)

i I
i L i
i I
L
Continuous span Cantilever span
Fig. 1.4 Effective spans for solid slabs
4
1.2.4 Minimum Thickness
The depth of solid slabs is usually controlled by deflection rather than flexural
strength requirements. The ECP-203 gives the minimum thickness for one-way slabs
reinforced with high grade steel in which the deflection calculations can be ignored as
listed in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1 (Loft)< ratios for members spanning less than 10 meters or cantilevers
spanning less. than 2m ({y=400 N/mm
2
). (Deflection calculations can be ignored)
Element
Simply One end Two ends Cantilever
supported continuous continuous
Solid slabs
25 30 36 10
Hidden Beams
20 25 28 8
and hollow blocks
. *Lo is the clear span.
The values listed in Table (1.1) are valid when using high grade steel 400/600. In the
case of using other types of reinforcing steel, the values mentioned in Table 1.1 should
be divided by factor S, given by:
4 = 0.40 + {;o ................................. ; ...................... (1.2)
Where.!;, is the yield strength of reinforcing steel in Nlrnm
2

The code also provides an absolute minimum thickness for one-way slabs
1
L 130 simple span
tmin = L /35 continuous from one end ......................... (1.3)
L 140 continuous from two ends
where L is the effective span
In addition, the absolute minimum thickness should not be less than 80 mm for slabs
subjected to static loads and 120 mm for slabs subjected to dynamic loads. The
aforementioned thickness can be reduced in case of prefabricated slabs. To satisfY
serviceability requirements for corrosion and fire protection, the concrete cover should
not be less than 20mm.
5
1.2.5 Bending moments
The exact solution for determining the bending moment distribution of solid slabs is
complicated. ill the case of equal spans with a maximum difference of 20% with equal
uniform loads and the live loads are less than the dead loads (p<g), the Egyptian Code
gives the following values:
For slabs with two spans
Wu =1.4(yc xt, +j7ooring)+1.6w LL
The value of the factor k is given in Fig. 1.5.
10 10
Fig. 1.5 k-factor for continuous slabs with two spans,
For slabs with three spans or more
M =wuxL!rr
u k
The value of the factor k is given in Fig. 1.6.
10 12 12
~
10 12 12
Fig. 1.6 k-factor for continuous slabs with three spans or more
ill the case of unequal continuous one-way slabs, the bending moment can be obtained
using classical structural analysis or computer programs. ill this case, the negative
bending moment over supports can be reduced according to a parabolic distribution by
MI/2, where MI is the difference between the bending at the centerline and that at the
support face as shown in Fig. 1. 7.
6
('
Beam or
It;-1
Fig. 1.7 Negative moment reduction in solid slabs
The structural analysis of the slabs shown in Fig. 1.8 may lead to a negative moment
at midspan of the interior bay. However, the Egyptian Code requires that a minimum
positive bending moment at any span should not be less than WU L2116 as shown in
Fig. 1.8.
WuL
Wum
WIIR
1:
, ,
I I
'1'
I I
III
, ,
I I I
'1
LL Lm LR
moment obtained from
Fig. 1.8 Minimum positive bending moments in one way slabs
ill case of slabs subjected to heavy live loads, the sections at midspan should be
designed to withstand a negative bending moments in addition to a positive bending
moment. The negative moment at midspan equals
g _ ~ ) L 2
M min = ................................................. (1.4)
24
where g is the dead loads, p is the live loads, and L is the effective span
7
Example 1.1
Compute and draw the reinforcement details for the reinforced concrete floor shown
in the figure below. The floor is to be designed to carry a live load of 3 kN/m
2
and a
flooring material of 1.5 kN/m
2
using concrete strength of 30 N/mm2 and yield strength
of steel of 400 N/mm
2
. Consider the width of all beams to be 250 mm.
ttJ=:. = .. ::::;:::.:::::;._.:=:;::. t::::=.::=:. =._._::::;:::.:::::; .. :=:;::._::::j. .. =.::::;:::. :::::; .. :=:;::o::11._._._._._.
=. 0::::;:::0:::::;' 1='::=:'0=_'::::;:::':::::;' .:::::;::_.::;3. .. :=:.=.:::::; .. .. -.-.-.-.-.
1
____ ______ _______ ____ +-______ ____
i
Floor plan
Solution
Step 1: Estimate the thickness of the slab
The plan consists of one way slabs. Assume that the slab thickness ts is 120 mm for all
slabs in the floor and will be checked as follows'.
For one way slab, the minimum thickness is given by
{
L 130 simple span
tmin = L 135 continuousfrom one end
L 140 continuous from two ends
Slabs SI and S3 are one way slabs continuous from one end thus
8
,..
L 3.0xlOOO
tmin = 35 = 35 = 86 mm ts .... o.k)
Also for deflection calculations may be ignored if the thickness is greater than the
values listed in Table 1.1. For the solid slab panel that is continuous from one side
withh=400 N/mm
2
t . = Lele/IT == (3.0 - 0.25) x 1000
30
91.67 mm < ts (Deflection calculation is not necessary)
o
Lc=2.75 m r-:
1
w=1I.1 kNlm'! w=JloI kN/m'
1
3.0 3.0
w=ll.l kNlm'
3.0

Step 2: Calculate the effective span
Since the width of all beams is 250 m:rn, the clear span is equal to
L
clear
=L-0.25
where L is the centerline to centerline distance
For the interior panel, the effective span is equal to
{
{
(Leleter + t s
max of
Lif! =min 1.05x L
clear
CL---+CL
. {max Of{(3 - 0.25) + 0.12 = 2.87 m
Leff = mm 1.05x(3-0.25) = 2.89 m
3m
Le.o= 2.89 m
9
Step 3: Calculate the Loads
g, = slab weight + flooring = rc xt, + flooring = 25 x 0.12 + 1.5 = 4.5kN 1m
2
p, = Live loads =3kN / m
2
wu =l.4gs +1.6ps
w u = 1.4 x 4.5 + 1.6 x 3 = ILl 0 kN 1m
2
Taking a strip width of 1m (b=1000 mm), the load acting on this strip is equal to
w,u = Wu xl= 1 1. 10 kN 1m'
Load transferred in x-direction = 11.1 kN/m
2
Load transferred in y-direction = 0
Step 4: Bending Moments
(main direction)
(secondary direction)
Since the slab is continuous with equal spans and equal loading, the bending moments
can be obtained using code coefficients as follows
W X[2
M = u ejf
u k
Wulrib=l1.JO /cNlm'
Loading
11
Moment
factor
Bending
moments
(kN.m)
Critical
sections
1-1 --2.89--1--1 --2.89 ----1If--- 2.89
I
-24 -10 -10 -24
,/;Sf
+10
Af7
+12
Af7
+10
:A
9.25 9.25

9.25 7.71 9.25
,/;Sf
i ct
Af7 :A
10
Step 5: Design of reinforcement
Assuming concrete cover of 20 mm
d= 120 -20 =100 mm
A,min = 0.6 xbxd 150 mm
2
. fy 400
Design of Section 1
M.ve= 9.25 kN.m, using the design aids namely R-oo curve
9.25xl0
6
f""bd
2
30x 1000x 100
2
0.0308
From the curve, 00=0.037
f. 30
As = OJ -E!..bxd = 0.037 -xl000x100 = 276 mm
2
>A
s
.min
fJ' 400
use ( 2.5 <l> 10 + 2.5 <l> 81m')
Design of Section 2
As.chosen=322 mm
2
M+ve=7.71 kN.m, and using R-ro curve
R 7.71x10
6
=0.0257
fcubd2 30x 1000x 100
2
From the curve, 00=0.030
f 30
A =m...E1Lbxd =0.030-xlOOOxl00=229mm
2
>A
s
.mil1
'fJ' 400
use (5 <l> 81m' ) As.chosen=250mm2
Because the slabs are one-way in the x-direction, the moment in the y-direction equals
to zero. However, a secondary reinforcement mesh with cross sectional area of at least
25% ofthe main steel should be provided.
Use (5 <l> 81m').
11
::::r:. '=4' =:;: .. m=:'=' =:;: .. :q:. :::::;:.
I 101m'
I
2.5<1> 81m'
I'
2.5<1> 81m'
2.5<1> 81m'
2.5<1> lOin
2.5<1> 81m
-
1fE=' .::;:: .. ::b;. .. .. :::;::. 3 E' .:=:::. = ..
I
______ ____
i I
Reinforcement details
Photo 1.2 Cantilever solid slab in a hotel building.
12
1.3
1.3.1
Two-Way Slabs
Definition
To classify a slab as a two-way slab, the length of the long side should be less than
twice the length of the short side. The short direction is considered the main direction
because most of the load is transferred in this direction. The main reinforcement is
arranged in the short direction and the secondary reinforcement is arranged in the long
direction. Two-way slabs are those that bend in double curvature as shown in Fig. 1.9,
and thus require steel reinforcement in two directions to prevent excessive cracking
and to limit deflections. The reinforcement is normally positioned parallel to the side
of the slab in both directions. The position of the reinforcement is determined by the
curvature of the slab. The top steel is placed in the negative curvature areas and the
bottom steel in the positive curvature areas ..
Fig. 1.9 Main and secondary reinforcement in two-way slabs
1.3.2 Elastic Analysis of Plates
Textbooks dealing with the theory of elasticity such as the one by Timoshenko and
Krieger contain exact solutions for two-way slabs. The fundamental assumption used
in the analysis of plates under pure bending is that the deflection of the plate (z) is
small in comparison to its thickness t. The basic differential equation for the uniformly
loaded-simply supported rectangular plate shown in Fig. 1.10 is given by
=; ............................................. (1.5)
where z is the deflection of the plate, w is the uniform load and D is the flexural
rigidity of the plate (similar to El in beams) and is given by
E (3
D = 12(1- v
2
) (1.6)
13
where E is the modulus of elasticity of the plate, t is the plate thickness and v is
Poisson's ratio.
o
y
x
z
a
y
Fig. 1.10 Elastic analysis of plates
Solving the previous differential equation gives the deflection of the plate. The
solution must satisfY the conditions at the boundaries of the plate. For example, for a
simply supported plate the deflection z along the edges must equal to zero (z=O and
Mx=O @ x=O and x=a). Levy presents one of the famous solutions for this problem in
1899 in the form ofa series of sin curves as follows:
'" . m1C x .
Z = LY m Slll-- ......................................................... (1.7)
m=1 a
where Y m is function of y only and determined to satisfY the boup.dary condition.
Having determined the deflection equation, the developed bending moments in the
plate can be obtained using the following relations:
Mx =-D (::2 +v .............................................. (1.8)
My =-D +v ::2) .............................................. (1.9)
. 8
2
z
MXY =-M
yx
=D(l-v) 8x 8y ..................................... (1.10)
14

where iiz/ax? is the curvature of the slab in x direction, and iizlay? is the curvature in
y direction. A positive curvature corresponds to a curve that is concave downwards.
The magnitude ot the moment is proportional to curvature. Equation 1.5 can be
written in the following form:
8
2
M 8
2
M 8
2
M
__ x -2 .<y +--y =--W ..................................... (1.11)
8x 2 8x ay ay2
This form indicates that in plates the load w results in:
Bending moments in strips running in the x-direction (Mx)
Bending moments in strips running in the y-direction (My)
Torsional moments (M.<y)
Photo 1.3 Preparation of reinforcement of solid slabs
15
1.3.3 Load Distribution Factors According to ECP 203
As has been shown in 1.3.2, the exact analysis of two-way slabs is complicated and
involves many mathematical computations. However, for SImplicity a strip of LO m
width can be analyzed in each direction as a wide beam. The bending moments
resulting from the analysis of such a strip is quite different from those obtained using
the exact plate analysis mentioned in section 1.3.2. This is attributed to the disregard
of the torsional moment represented by the term ffzJfJxfJy. For example, for a
uniformly loaded-simply supported square slab, the load transferred in x direction
equals the load transferred in y direction (=w/2). Thus, the maximum bending
moments developed in a strip of 1.0 m width of the slab is equal
(w 12)xa
2
w xa
2
M = = O.5x-- .................................... (1.12)
max 8 8
However, according to the theory of plates the maximum bending for square plate
(v=0.2, Poisson's ratio for concrete) is only equal to
w xa
2
M max/heo =0.044wa
2
=0.35x-
8
- ............................... (1.13)
The difference is quite large (%30) and attributed to the torsional moments developed
in the plate. As the rectangularity ratio increases the load transferred in the short
direction increases and the load transferred in the long direction decreases. The
theoretical analysis of the plates is the basis of the values adopted in the Egyptian
code in which the bending moment of a simply supported slab equals
M a = (w ;)a
2
(shon direction)
.............................. (1.14)
M b = (w fJ)b 2 (long direction)
8
where a. and 13 represent the percentage of loads causing bending moments in each
direction.
Comparing Eq. 1.13 to Eq. 1.14 gives 0.=0.35 for square plates, which is identical to
the value adopted by the Egyptian code. Table 1.2 shows the ECP 203 values for a.
and 13 for different plate rectangularity ratios. The slab load Wu transferred in the short
direction is denoted as Wa and the load transferred in the longitudinal direction is
denoted as wl3 as shown in Fig. 1.11, where
wa = aw u (1.15.a)
wp=fJw
u
(1.15.b)
The distribution factors a. and 13 can be also represented by following set of equations
16
{ "

2 ..................................................... (1. 16.a)
fJ = 0.35 ........................................................ (1.16.b)
r2
in which r is the rectangularity ratio given by Eq. 1.17
,
;l
.D
1m 0- 1-'---'--
._-

-t
. .
I
a
Y
Fig. 1.11 Load distribution for two-way slabs
Table 1.2 Values of a. and 13 for solid slab with live loads less than 5 kN/m
2
r 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2
a 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85
/3
0.35 0.29 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.08
The load transferred in each direction is affected by the continuity condition of the
adjacent slabs. This was taken into consideration when determining the rectangularity
ratio of slabs by using the coefficient m. The value of m depends on the support
condition and is defined as the ratio between the two inflection points to the effective
span. This coefficient is applied in each direction (a, b) to determine the effective
rectangularity ratio r as follows
r = mb xb ......................................................... (1".17)
milxa
where
"{1.0 simple span
mil or mb = 0.87 continuousfrom one end ......................... (1.18)
0.76 continuous from two ends
17
The use of the values listed in Table 1.2 is limited to slabs with live loads not more
than 5 kN/m
2
lfthe live loads exceed this limit, the value of a and 13 should be taken
from Table 2.4 in which the torsional moment is neglected.
Two-way slabs designed according to the previously mentioned have
proven over the years a very satisfactory performance under service loads. This is
attributed to the stress redistribution at higher loads. As a result, the design of two-
way slabs is generally based on empirical moment coefficients even for unequal
spans, which might not give actual prediction of the stresses but give the total amount
of reinforcement. That is why they say, "the total amount of reinforcement in a slab
seems more important than the exact distribution ". The designer can clearly establish
his design on numerical analysis or on a finite element method as long as they meet all
the ECP 203 requirements for deflection, cracking and reinforcement.
1.3.4
Minimum Thickness
To control cracking, deflection and to ensure good performance for two-way slab, the
code states that the minimum thickness tmin should be
{
a 135 simple span
t min = a 140 continuous from one end
a 145 continuous from two ends
where a is the short effective span
........................ (1.19)
Although thin reinforced concrete two-way slabs have high flexural resistance, their
deflections are often large. From the deflection point of view, the thickness is
considered acceptable if it is greater than t calculated using the following equation

1600
t = ;:: 100 mm ................................ (1.20)
15 + 20/(b I a) + 10 fJ
p
Where a is the span in the short direction, b is the span in the long direction, I3
p
is the
ratio between the perimeter of the continuous edges to the total perimeter, and fy is the
steel yield strength N/mm
2
It is clear that the slab thickness required for deflection
considerations is higher in case of square slabs with large spans. For example, a slab
reinforced with high-grade steel and continuous from all edges with dimensions of
(5rnx5m) requires 122 mm thickness, while a slab with dimensions of (6m x6m)
requires 146 mm.
18
r--
-r---
I a' 111
-J. m
_<t'=t
,
fy=400 N/mm
2
.
-
from all
1.2 < 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
Rectangularity ratio, J3
Fig. 1.12 Minimum thickness of 2-way slabs for deflection control
1.3.5 Related Code Provisions
The minimum area of steel for one and two-way slabs is given by

Or
A
s
min
=
A . = 0.6 b d
i
y
for all types of steel ......................... (l.21a)
0.25 b xd for mild steel (fy =240 and 280N/mm2)
100
0.15 b xd for high gradesteel(f
y
=360 and 400 N/mm
2
)
100
.............. (1.21b)
At least one third of the reinforcement must extend from the support to the
support.
The maximum distance between bars is 200 mm
The area of the secondary steel mesh should be at least 2Q% of the main
area of steel with a minimum of 4 bars per meter.
The minimum bar diameter is 6 mm for straight bars and 8mm for bars.
Slabs with a thickness of more than 160 mm should be reinforced With top
steel mesh not less than 20% of the main steel with a minimum of 51j>8/m'
for mild steel and 51j>6/m' for high grade steel.
Under normal conditions and for spans that do not differ more than 20%,
half of the reinforcement can be bent at the fifth of the clear span and
extends to the adjacent span one fourth the bigger of the two spans as shown
in Fig. 1.13.
19
bigger of bigger of
L.:1/4 or La/4 L.:1/4 Or Lc2/4
,- ., ,- -,

___ __ _____ __
A. Minimum code requirement for bar extension
I
i
i
i
I
i
i
i
i
i
!o<I.
Fig: 1:13a Reinforcement details for solid slabs
._ . ...,......c-.c:;
.- .......
l l
I
I
i
101m'
I
3 101m' r- .
3 101m'
....... = ..... .
i
3 101m'
.1-. . . .. .-1
I
I i I
_.. ._ .. _ . _ .. _ . _ .. _ ._ . _. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. Li _ .. _ .. _ .. _ . .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _Ii .. _ ..
B. Example of reinforcement for two-way slabs
Fig. l.13b Reinforcement details for solid slabs
20
1.3.6 Comer Reinforcement
Twisting moments are developed at the comers of exterior two-way slabs. The
magnitude of these moments is usually small for slabs spanning less than 4 to 5
meters. However, for bigger spans (>5 ms) these moments tend to crack the slab.
Special reinforcement should be added to control cracking and to resist the torsional
moments. Bottom bars are placed perpendicular to the slab diagonal while top bars are
placed in the direction of the diagonal as shown in Fig. 1. 14.a. Alternatively, the
diagonal reinforcement can be replaced by top and bottom mats as shown in Fig.
1. 14.b. The amount of this reinforcement can be taken as the same area and the
spacing as the main positive reinforcement (per meter). The reinforcement should
extend about one fifth of the clear span in either direction as shown in Fig. 1.14.
"
" "
" " "
" " " "-
" " " ' '- " ..
"' " ..
, ::s> Top b= ,
" " :
" !
" i

tension tension
top ...... on bottom!
i
. -"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-'
a- using skewed bars
Top and Botto\D
mats
I .. \. -->--L ...... I
+I-+--+--f.-I-
S

Lel5 .,
Lc= longer clear span
I
I
.. '- .-.. - .. _ .. _ .. - .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. -:
b-using top and bottom
Fig. 1.14 Corner reinforcement at an exterior two-way slab
21
Example 1.2
A reinforced concrete floor is to be constructed as shown in .Fig. EX 1.2 . .Beams with
a cross section of (250 mm x 600 mm) are provided on all column lines. The floor is
to be designed to carry a live load of 3 kN/m
2
and a flooring material of2 kN/m
2
using
concrete strength of 25 N/mm2 and reinforcing steel having a yield strength of 360
N/mm
2
. Calculate and draw the reinforcement required for the floor. ..
Solution
Step 1: Estimate the thickness of the slab
The plan consists of one way, two way and cantilever slabs. Assume that the slab
thiclmess ts is 120 mm for all slabs of the floor.
For one way slab
l
Ll30 simpiesp_,
tmin = L / 35 continuous from one end
L140 continuous from two ends
Since slabs S6 and Sg are one-way slabs continuous from two ends, the minimum
thiclmess is given by
L 2AxlOOO
tmin = 40 = 40 = 60 mm ts ... o.k)
Also for deflection calculations to be the thiclmess should be at least:
,; = OAo+iL = 0.40+ 360 = 0.95
650 650
L. (2.4 - 0.25) x 1000
t. =--= 56.73 mm ts .... o.k)
mm (36/0.95)
For two way slabs
The biggest slab is SIO (4.8x 5.4 m)
{
a' /35 simp/espan
t min = a' 140 continuous from one end
a' 145 continuous from, nyo ends
a* is the short span
This span is considered continuous from one end thus
a 4.8xlOOO
tmin = 40 = . 40 = 120 mm (=ts o.k)
22
I
----+-- --cD
I
I
I
S2
S3
I
0
00
I .,f
I
@--
--0
S5
S7
8 0
0
N
N

-0
S6
--=
---(D
S8 S9
0
\0
@--
,.;
----0
0
N
.,f
--0
J)
Fig. EX 1.2 Structural Plan
23
For cantilever slabs
There is no direct recommendation for the minimum thickness for cantilever slabs
except for deflection calculations. The minimum thickness for cantilever slabs
reinforced with high grade steel (fy=360 N/mm2) equals
L 1.6 x 1000
t =-= = 160 mm>t
s
mm 10
10
From economic point of view, it is better to use thickness of 120 mm and to check the
deflection.
Step 2: Effective span
Since the width of all beams are 250 mm, the clear span equals
L
elear
=L-0.25
where L is th,.;: centerline to centerline distance
For interior span, the effective length equals to
{ r{L- +t, {r{(L-O.2S)+O."
. rnaxo . rnaxo
LeJf = nun 1.05 x L
elear
= nun 1.05x(L -0.25)
CLtoCL L'
For cantilever slabs
Lc = min {Lelear +t, =.min
iff edgetoCL .' L
Slab Lx Lc1ear,x Lclear,x 1.05 x LelT.x Ly Lclear,y Lc1ear,y 1.05 x LelT.y
+ts LeI"",x
+ts Lc1ear,y
S1 3.60 - - - 3.60 1.20 1.08 1.20 1.13 1.20
S2 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 4.78 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 4.78
S3 3.60 3.3.5 3.47 3.52 3.52 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 4.78
;
S4 1.60 1.48 1.60 1.55 1.60 3.60 - - - 3.60
S5 4.80 4,55 4.67 4.78 . 4.78
3.35 3.47 3.52 3.52
S6 __ 1.80 1.55 1.67 1.63 1.67. 7.20 6.95 7.07 7.30 7.20
S7 4.00 3.75 3.87 3.94 3:94 .3.60 _ 3.35 3.47 3.52 3.52
S8 4.80 4.55 4.67 4.78 .4.78 2.40 2.15 2.27 2.26 2.27
S9 4.00 3.75 3.87 3.94 3.94 3.60 3.35 3.47 3.52 3.52
','
S10 4.80 4.55 4.67 '4.78 ''4'.78 5.40 5.15 5:27 5.41 5.40
S11 1.80 1.55 1.67 1.63 1.67 '4.20 3.95 4.07 4.15 4.15
24
Step 3: Calculation of loads
Wu =1.4 gs +1.6 Ps= 1.4 (25 x ts + flooring) + 1.6 x LL
WU = 1.4x(25 x Q.120+ 2.0) + 1.6 x 3 = 11.8 kN I m
2
Taking a strip of 1m, the load acting on this strip equals t()
..
W,U = Wu xl = 11.80kN I m' and b=1000 mm
For one-way and cantilever slabs
.
Wo.=Wsu and wll=O
For, two-way slabs
1
The load distribution factors are determined using the rectangularity ratio'r
r=
mb x b(bigger)
ma x a (smaller)
where b and a are the effective spans and
r
simpZespan
ma or m
h
= 0.87
continuous from one end
0.76 continuous from two ends
The values of a and 13 are obtained from Table 1.2
Wa= a. Wsu
wj3= p. Wsu
Please note that Wo. is the load tnmsferred in the short direction (not x-direction) and
wll is the load transferred in the long direction. For example for slab S8 Wo. runs in y-
direction andWIl in x-direction,JlVhile[or slab SlO Wa. runs in x-direction and wil in y-
direction.
Slab Leff,x mx Leff,y my r a
13
Via. wil
S1
3.60 1 1.20 0.87 3.46 1.00 0.00 11.80 0.00
S2
' 4.78 0.87 4.78 0.87 1.00 0.35 0.35 4.13 4.13
S3
3.52 0.87 4.78 0.87
.
1.36 0.53 0.19 6.24 2.24
S4
1.60 0.87 3.60 1 2.59 1.00 0.00 11.80 0.00
S5
4.78 0.76 3.52 0.76 1.36 0.53 0.19 6.24 2.24
S6
1.67 0.76 7.20 0.87 4.94 1.00 ,0.00
,11':80 . 0.00
S7
3.94 0.87 3.52 0.87 1.12 0.41 0.28 4.83 -3.30 .
S8
4.78 0.87 2.27 0.76 2.41 1.00 0.00 11.80 0.00
.
S9
3.94 0.87 3.52 0.87 1:12 0:41 0.28 4.83 3.30
S1.0
4.78 1 5.40 0.87 1.02 0.36 0.34 4.23 3.99
S11
1.67 1 4.15 1 2.48 1.00 0.00 11.80 0.00
In Y - direction, slab S3 is not continuous with S6 (one way slab inX- direction).
25
as:
Bending moment and reinforcement
The floor slab considered in this example has panels that contain variation in loads
spans of more than 20%. Exact analysis of such a floor is lengthy and quite
tedIOUS. Due to the fact that RIC slabs have an ability to redistribute the moments it
has become a common practice to extend the use of the moment
mentioned in 1.2.5 to most types of floors.
The procedure followed to obtain the design moments in the floor of this example:
1. The positive moment in any span equals to
W XL2
M = u ejJ
u k
2. The negative moment developed at the support connecting two adjacent unequal
spans is conservatively taken as the larger of Mul and Mu2 given by
M = W
U1
xL: M = W
U2
xL;
ul kl u2 k2
the larger of

M _ wul xL;
ul - 12
For cantilever slabs and assuming that the hand rail weight is 1 5 kN/m' the bendin t
equals to . , g momen
Wu xL!.tr
Mu 2 + 1.5x Leff
The effective depth equals
d = 1.-15 = 105 mm in the main direction (0:)
d= 1.-25 = 95 mm in the secondary direction (/3)
R Mu
x106
Mu
x106
=M
u
x 40
feu b d
2
25xlOOOx d
2
d
2
A feu b d 25
x =mx-xl000xd =69.44xmxd >A "
300
A
0.6 0.6 .".
s.min =-bd =-x 1000x 105= 175 mm
2
360
26
Design of Slabs in X-Direction
Slab Leff.x Wux k Mux
(m) (kN/m') (kN.m)
S1 3.60 0.00 0 0.00
S2
4.78 4.13 10 9.43
S3 3.52 6.24 10 7.72
S4
1.60 11.80 2 17.40
S5
4.78 2.24 10 5.11
S6
1.67 11.80 12 2.74
S7 3.94 3.30 10 5.11
S8 4.78 0.00 0 0.00
S9 3.94 3.30 10 5.11
S10 4.78 3.99 8 11.39
S11 1.67 11.80 8 4.11
Design of Slabs in Y -Direction
Slab Leff,y Wuy k Muy
(m) (kN/m') (kN.m)
S1 1.20 11.80 2 10.3
S2 4.78 4.13 10 9.43
S3 4.78 2.24 10 5.11
S4 3.60 0.00 - 0.00
S5 3.52 6.24 12 6.44
S6 7.20 0.00 - 0.00
S7 3.52 4.83 10 5.98
S8 2.27 11.80 12 5.07
S9 3.52 4.83 10 5.98
S10 5.40 4.23 10 12.33
S11 4.15 0.00 - 0.00
M u = 11.8 X 1.22 / 2 + 1.5 x 1.2
d R ill As As
mm required chosen
95 0.0000 0.000 - 5 81m'
105 0.0342 0.041 299 3 8/m'+
,
3 101m'
105 0.0280 0.033 243 6 81m'
3 10/m'+
105 0.0631 0.079 573
3 121m'
3 8/m'+
95 0.0226 0.027 176
3 101m'
3 8/m'+
105 0.0099 0.012 175
3 101m'
95 0.0226 0.027 176 6 81m'
95 0.0000 0.000 175 6 81m'
95 0.0226 0.027 176 6 81m'
" 95 0.0505 0.062 408 6 101m'
105 0.0149 0.017 175 5 81m'
"d R ill As As
mm required chosen
105 0.0374 0.045 325 3 8/m'+
3 101m'
95 0.0418 0.051 333 3 8/m'+
3 101m'
95 0.0226 0.027 176 6 81m'
95 0.0000 0.000 175 5 81m'
105 0.0234 0.028 201 6 81m'
95 0.0000 0.000 175 5 81m'
105 0.0217 0.026 187 6 81m'
105 0.0184 0.022 175 3 8/m'+
3 101m'
105 0.0217 0.026 187 6 81m'
105 0.0447 0.054 396 6 101m'
95 0.0000 0.000 175 5 81m'
27
---

,
I
,
, '
"] J I
i
- - -
I

t- , '
I ---r-Q)
I
--
I
- -
I , ,
I
a
,
Cit;;
I
i

, <">
I
,
I
,
3D'1O/m
"3fJil/m
,
"" , -
Ii
I
i
-
28
.
"
0
4.
i

<">
3f1JS/m /1-
3K;J87in
II
,
I a'a
,
,<,,><">
,
I
,
I
,
,
,
I
,
I
,
I
,
I
i
,-0
I
,
I
Hollow Block Slabs
, ,
Photo 2.1 Reinforcement placement in ribbed slab during construction
2.1 Introduction
Hollow block floors are formed typically using blocks made of concrete with
lightweight aggregate. The void in the blocks reduces the total weight of the
significantly.
Themaln advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in weight by removing the
part' of the concrete beloW the neutral axis. An additional advantage is the ease of
construction, especially if the floor is designed with no projected beams (hidden
beams). Hollow block floors proved economic for spans of more than 5m with light or
moderate live loads, such as hospitals, office or residential buildings. They are not
suitable for structures having heavy live loads such as warehouses or parking garages.
29
The blocks do not contribute to the strength of the slab; as a matter of fact it is an
additional weight on the slab. Thus, in recent years these blocks were made of
polystyrene which is 1/15 of the weight of concrete blocks as shown in Fig. 2.1. Thus,
a reduction in the reinforcement can be achieved. The values listed in Table 2.1
include the weight of the concrete ribs and 50mm top concrete slab. If for any reason
the thickness of the top flange was increased more than 50 mm, the additional weight
be included in the calculations. The total ultimate load for per square meter Wsu
IS gIven by
W u = 1.4 x [weight of blocks / m 2 (Table 2.1) +flooring] + 1.6 w LL (2.1)
cement mortar (20-30 mm)
:I ----l/
400mm
Foam block, w=0.I6 kN/m
2
(polystyrene)
Concrete block, w=2.7 kN/th2
(without concrete slab weight)
Fig. 2.1 Weight comparison between concrete and foam blocks.
Table 2.1 Weight of material used in hollow block floors' (kN/m
2
)
Concrete blocks Concrete blocks Concrete blocks Foam blocks
400x200x150 400x200x200 400x200x250 500x400x200
One way Two-way One-way Two-way One-way Two-way One-way Two-way
3.03 3.36 3.30 3.80 4.10 4.78 0.70 1.20
include the weight of the concrete ribs and 50mm top concrete slab
Hollow block slabs are classified into: a)one-way hollow block slabs or b)two-way
hollow block slabs depending on the arrangement of the ribs on plan. Fig. 2.2.A shows
a one-way hollow block slab in which the ribs are arranged in one direction. Fig. 2.2.B
on the other hand, shows a two-way hollow block slabs in which the ribs are arranged
in two directions
To avoid failure, the blocks are terminated near the support andreplaced by solid
parts. SolId parts are also made under partitions, brick walls and concentrated loads.
30

111111111111111111111
"11111 II 111111111111
111111111111111111111
Hidden beam )/ 111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111
ribs 111111111111111111111
11111 rill 11111 11111 II
111111111111111111111
INIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
111111111111111111111
rnrn lim'!
A. One-way hollow blocks with hidden beams
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
projected
"" beam
ITI B ITI BITI B ITIB ITI=--+-lf-rib_s
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
ITIBITIBITIBITIBITI
B. Two-way hollow blocks with projected beams
Fig. 2.2 One and two-way hollow block slabs
2.2 One-Way Hollow Block Slabs
2.2.1 General
One-way hollow blocks are used frequently in construction even .for slabs with. a
rectangularity ratio less than 2. This is attributed to the ease of placmg the blocks III
one direction. The arrangement of the ribs controls the direction of the slab regardless
of its rectangularity ratio. The ribs are positioned in the shorter direction, thus all the
loads are transferred in this direction as shown in Fig. 2.2.A
31
2.2.2 Arrangement of blocks
The number of blocks in each direction must be specified on the construction
drawings. Thus, the layout of the blocks must be positioned so that enough solid parts
are present near the supporting beams. For floors with hidden beams, the solid part
must be wide enough to carry all the applied loads. The normal width ofthesoIid part
ranges between 0.8-2.0 for floors with hidden beams and ranges between 0.2-0.5 for
floors with projected beams.
Having determined the dimension of the solid parts, the clear length of the blocks can
be attained as shown in Fig. 2.3. For example, in the case of using 400x200x200
blocks in a one-way slab, the clear distance in the rib direction equals to
Lei = 200xn
l
+100xn
er
where nl is the number of blocks in rib direction and ncr is the number of cross ribs.
The clear distance in the perpendicular direction equals
Le2 = 400x n
2
+ 100 (n2 -1)
La = 500xn
2
-100
Where n2 is the number of blocks perpendicular to the ribs. The number ofribs=nr
1
Photo 2.2 One-way hollow blocks during construction
32
o
o
......
solid part
(min.200 nun)
o
o
)
+
o
o
('.l
><:
a
II
3
L2
AAAAAAAAAA
Lc2= 500 x n2 - 100
,
I xnxllxlI. XIIXIIX
~ J
.J1 ...:JL
L2
n1 = number of blocks in rib direction
n2 = number of blocks in the
perpendicular direction

Lc2= 500 x n2 - 100
L2
BBBBBBBBBB
B B B B B E l B B ~
B B B B B B B B B ~
BBBBBBBBBB
I-
Lc2= 500 x n2 - 100
-I
cross rib=100mm
L1
...--
crossnb s=3 xl00mm
jI
L1
I--
Fig. 2.3 Arrangement of blocks and cross ribs in one-way slabs
33
Hollow block slabs can be used to form a cantilever slab as shown in F 24Th b
b . h d .. Ig. .. ens
can e elt er rna as In FIg. 2A.A, or simply supported on two hidden
beams as shown In 2.4.B. For slabs with irregular shapes, the blocks can be
arranged along the penmeter as shown in Fig 2.4.C.
A. Continuous ribs spanning in
the long direction
Hidden beams
111111111111111111
111111111111111111111
11111111111111111111111
llill 11111 III 11111 III I J
111111111111111111111
11111111111111111'
111111111111111111
11111111/1///1////
1111111111111111 II
111111111111111111
11111111111/111111
111111111111111111
111111111111111111
1111111111111/ I // I
111/1111111111// II
111111111111111111
B. Ribs spanning as simply
supported on hidden beams.
C. Ribs arrangement in irregular plans
Fig. 2.4 Hollow blocks arrangement in cantilever and irregular slabs.
34
2.2.3 Code Provisions
The thickness of the slab (tJ should not be less than SO mm or the lIlO of the
clear spacing between blocks (e/lO) as shown in Fig. 2.S.
The maximum clear distance (e) is 700 mm
The minimum rib width (b) is 100mm or 1/3 the total slab thickness (t/3)
T
Is;::: 50 mm
ts > eliO
5<jl6/m'(min.)
h-I"
b;:::loomm) e5700mm
b;::: t/3
Fig. 2.5 Minimum dimensions required by the code
To avoid cracking due to shrinkage in the top concrete flange, the cement
blocks should be watered prior to concrete placing. A light reinforcing steel
mesh should be placed in the top slab for added durability and strength. This
mesh also helps incase the slab is subjected to concentrated or moving loads
and reduces cracking and shrinkage in the concrete. The code requires that
reinforcement in the direction of the ribs should be at least
perpendicular to the ribs and parallel to the ribs.
Transversal ribs or cross ribs are added to one-way hollow block floors for
better distribution of the applied loads. They also help in distributing the
concentrated loads due to walls in the transverse direction. The bottom
reinforcement is taken as the reinforcement in the main ribs, and the top
reinforcement should be at least 12 of the bottom reinforcement. The code
requires that in case of large spans or heavy live loads that the floor should
be equipped with cross ribs with the conditions shown in Table 2.2. Fig. 2.3
illustrate the use of cross ribs in one way slabs and block arrangement
Table 2.2 Cross-rib requirements by the ECP 203
Live loads Span Condition
53 kN/mr 5Sm No cross rib required
53 kN/m
2
- >Sm One cross rib
>3 kN/ni
r
4mto7m One cross rib
>3 kN/ni
r
>7m Three cross rib
35
2.2.4 Design of One-way Hollow Block Slabs
2.2.4.1 Design of Ribs
The ribs can be considered as a beam having a flange width B which is equal to the
distance between ribs. The ribs carries a uniformly distributed load Wur equals to
Wur==wu
xB
(kNlm') ............................................ (2.2)
where Wu is the slab load in kN/m
2
and B=e+b
Depending on the sign of the bending moment, the sections may be designed either as
T -sections or rectangular sections. Since Section (A) is subjected to positive bending it
is designed as T-section, whereas section (B) is subjected to bending and it is
designed as rectangular section as shown in Fig. 2.6.
SecB
/.
B=e+b
, I
M"
.....
)
t.
j,b, I
e
'J
Sec. A
Sec.B
b
I J '
Fig. 2.6 of ribs
An example of the reinforcement of a one way hollow block floor is shown in Fig. 2.7
36
I
,I
'1
I
i
'!
I
;j
'd
I
!
I
"
:/

cr -
i i
l 6.00 L
2.00 l
1 1 1
6.00 L
1
I
I I
I
- - - - - - - - - -
Fig. 2.7 Reinforcement of a one way hollow blocks slab with hidden beams
37
2.2.4.2 Design of Hidden Beams
beams are usually used in hollow block floors to give flexibility and a sense of
Due to their limited depth, hidden beams are heavily reinforced and their
exceeds their depth as shown in Fig. 2.8.A. To reduce the amount of
remforcement, the depth of the hidden beam is increased by 50 mm as shown in Fig.
2.8.B.
sand flooring
Stirrups
ain reinforcement Hollow blocks
8
A: Hidden beam
flooring
sand
50mm
Stirrups
I
I--l
ain reinforcement 250 mm (max) Hollow blocks
8
B: Hidden beam with increased thiclmess
Fig. 2.8 Cross section in a hidden beam
38

<,},
.'
.,
,-:<'
Since the width of the hidden beam is greater than its depth, the ECP 203 requires that
the applied shear stress, qu=Q.I(B . d), be less than the concrete shear strength qCII
without any shear reinforcement contribution. Thus, it is customary not to use bent
bars in hidden beams because the shear reinforcement contribution is not allowed by
the code. For hidden bearns, the concrete shear strength qcu is given by
qcu =0.16 fl:2=qu (N Imm
2
) : (2.3)
Vr:
The minimum shear reinforcement for hidden beams can be reduced to
Pmin = x (::u ) ................................................ (2.4.a)
A
s
min
= 104 xb xs (!1L) ...................................... (2A.b)
y qcu
where qu is the ultimate shear strength at the critical section and qcu is the concrete
shear strength. The stirrups should be arranged so that the distance between stirrups
should not exceed 250 mm as shown in Fig, 2.8. It has to be mentioned that the role of
the stirrups in such case is to keep the longitudinal bars in place and to confine
concrete in the cross section.
Photo 2.3 Reinforcement placement in a hidden beam
39
Example 2.1
A hollow block floor with hidden beams is constructed with concrete blocks 0
several spans as shown in figure. The characteristic material strength is ver
fcu= 40 N/mm2 and
h=400N/mm
2
The applied loads are
Live 10ads=4 kN/m
2
Flooring =2 kN/m
2
Design the floor using one-way hollow block slabs with hidden beams.
@

I
i
@T! ...... .
l!I
I
i

I
i

I
j I
8 ! i I I
! i i .
Ii' !
i . ! I
. ! I i
! Ii'
Ii' !
i . ! I
. I I i
0' .- . -.-
j ! i I
I
J
I
I i
i i
i j
.h
0 :::::::: .. :=::::::.=. = .. =::;:::.=. = .. =::;:::.= .. :d-
I I
... i 5400 Inm j 5400 rnm -_'----5400 rnm--i
@
ck; @ .
y
Floor layout
+--x
40
solution
step 1: Dimensioning
Choose 400x200x200 concrete blocks
Thus, e= block width=400 mm
{
50mm
ts = bigger of
e110=40 mm
ts=50mm
t = tblock +ts = 200+50 =250 mm
{
100 mm
b = biggeroif
250/3 = 83.3 mm
__ b= 100mm
e=400mm
concrete block
Step 2: Calculation of ultimate loads.
For concrete blocks of dimensions 400x200x200, the self weight of the blocks and the
concrete ribs is 3.3 kN/m
2
(refer to Table 2.1)
gs= self weight + flooring=3.3+2 =5.3 kN/m
2
Ps=4 kN/m
2
Wu =IAg
s
+1.6ps =1.4x5.3+1.6x4=13.82 kl!lm2
Since this is a one way hollow blocks, all the load is carried in the direction of the ribs.
WU/rib = Wu (e+b) = 13.82 (400+100) /1000=6.91 kN/m'
Step 3: Arrangement of blocks
The code requires the use of one cross rib for live loads> 3 kN/m
2
and spans from 4-7
m (n
cr
=l). Since the roofcontains hidden beams the distance c measured from the
centerline is taken from 300-700 mm.
Let us assume that clear span for the blocks are 0.6-1.0 m less than centerline distance.
41
C? @
=' ='-='=' =' ===' ='=:'=' ='
LC,=4500 'F!C2=4100 T
, '
, ' , '
g i !
g '<t ,- '
S:! Ii' 10) -j
_, u' 0),
LC,=4500
,
C,=300 !
'C,=300 .....l C,=650 :. C2=600
! '
, , j , '
i g j ! j
j If' ! i
0,-1'-1
! 1IIIIIIIIIIILLLillLIITT i 1111111111111111111111 j 1111111111 III II 111111 II I !
! 1111111111111111111111/ I ! 111111111111111111/111 i 11111111111 II III/ II/ 1111 !
,111111111111111111/11111 ! 1111111111111111111111 j 1IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIl
llllllllllllllllllllllill ! 1111111111111111111111 ' 11111111111111111111111/ i
j 111111111 III!. ! 11111111/ I II 1111111111 111111111111111111111111 j
-0 i III/ 11111111 ! 1111111111111/11111111 111111111111111111111111 j
j
i 1111111 II IIHIIII ! 11111111111111110111\ 111111111111111111111111 i
i 111111111111111111/11111 ! 1111111111111111111111 1111111111111111111111/1 i
i 11111111111 II 11111111111 l 111111111111111111111\ 11111111111 II 11111111111 !
i 111111111111111111111111 j 1111111111111111111111 ! 111111111111111111111111'
Q} ,_ i m 1111111111111111111111
i
!
i
j
5400
,
i
j
i
5400
,

Step 3.1: Arrangement of the blocks in x-direction
Step 3.1.1: Exterior bay
(Let C,+C
2
=900)
LCI = 5400 - (C
I
+C
2
)= 5400 - 900 = 4500 mrn
200xn, +100xn
cr
=4500 mm
where, nl=No of blocks and n
cr
= No. of cross ribs
200xn, +100x1 = 4500 nl=22
5400
C
I
=300 mrn (near projected beam)
Step 3.1.2: Interior bay
C
2
=600 mrn (near hidden beam)
Assume C
3
=650 mrn (value close to C
2
)
LC2 = 5400 - 2C
3
= 5400 - 1300 = 4100 mrn
200xn
2
+100x ncr = 4100 mm
200xn
2
+ 100x1 = 410Q
where, n2=no of blocks
--+--+ n2=20 --+--+ C
3
=650 mrn
42
,
j
@
).:!
Step 3.2: Arrangement of the blocks in y-direction
Assume C4 = 300 mrn
Lc3 = 6200 - 2 C
4
=6200 - 2 x 300 =5600 mrn
Ifwe assume that n3= No. of blocks, then the number of ribs =(n3-
1
)
400xn, + 100 (nl -1) = 5600
5600= 500xn, -100
n3 =11.4 block
Round down to the nearest number (n3=11), and recalculate C
4
6200- 2 C
4
= 500 x 11-100
Thus use C4=400 mrn
Step 4: Design of Ribs
Step 4.1: Calculation of the Bending Moments in Ribs
Since the ribs are continuous over the supports with equal loads and equal spans, the
code coefficients for slabs are applied
w
U
lrib=6.91 kNlm'
'I'
, ,
!
I
5.4
-24
-10
A
+10
A
+12
8.40
20.15
A
20.15
A
16.80
A

cb
43
I :t;!
I
-10
kT
20.15
A
A
5.4
+10
20.15
'1
I
-24
JAr
8.40
JAr
Step 4.2: Design of rib critical sections (Continuous rib)
Design of Section 1
This section is subjected to a positive bending (20.15 leN.m), the compression flange
form a T-section as shown in the Figure.
From the figure B=500 mm .
Assuming concrete cover of 30 mm
d= 250 -30 =220 mm
I
B=500mm
1
o
V)
ts=50mm
,--...::.T--=-_se.:..:c_
M
_"-20)
Using the CI-J cUrve

!cuB
220 = Cl 20.15 x 10
6
40x500
b=100
7"'
e=400mm
Cl=6.93
The point is outside the curve use (c/d)mill=0.125
c=0.125 x 220=27.5 mm
a=0.8 xc = 22 mm <ts ..... o.k.
usej=0.825
A = Mu
jxdxJ;,
20.15x10
6
= 277 mm2
0.825 x 220 x 400
{
0.225 JJ: 0.225.J40 2
A (I) _ all if I b d = x 100 x 220 = 78.2 mm
min -sm er 0 y 400
I.3A. = 1.3x277 = 360 mm 2
use 2 <l> 14 (307 mm2)/rib(l)
I The minimum area of steel for beams was used
44
.J <A o.k
Design of Section 2
This section is subjected to a negative bending moment (20.15 leN.m), thus the rib will
be designed as rectangular section
b=100mm
1. = 50 mm )
I-
Mu=20.15
e=400mm b=lOOmm
Using R-ro curve
20.15xl0
6
0.1041
- leubd2 40xl00x220
2
From the curve it can be determined that ro=0.14
A =W leu mm
2
>As,mill
fy 400
use (2 <l> 14, 307.9 mm2)/rib
Design of Section 3
This section is subjected to a positive bending (16.8 leN.m), the compression flange
form a T-section. Using the CI-J curve
d = Mu
fcu
B
220=Cl 16.8x10
6
,Cl=7.6
40x500
The point is outside the curve,
use c/d)mill=0.125 ->->-> use j=0.826
c=0.125 x 220=27.5 mm
a=0.8 x c = 22 mm <ts ..... o.k.
45
A = Mil 16.8x106 =231.3 min 2
$ j xd xfy 0.826 x 220 x 400
use (1<1>12+1<1>14, 267 rnm2)/rib
t. = 50 rnm
5 $ 61m'
4$ 61m'
o
\I)
JL
5 $ 61m'
2$ 14 I"
400
Step 5: Design of hidden Beam (Bl)
The slab over the hidden beam will be increased by 50 rnm.
t=300 rnm
B=600+650=1250 rnm
The self weight ofthe beam =Yc B t = 25 x 1.25x 0.3 = 9.375 kN/m'
But this weight should subtracted from the self weight ofthe blocks
Self weight of the blocks = o.w x B=3.3 x 1.25 = 4.125 kN/m'
2$ 14
Net weight =9.375-4.125=5.25 kN/m', factored net weight =1.4 x 5.25 =7.35 kN/m'
wub= Wu x spacing + net weight=13.82 x 504 + 7.35= 81.98 kN/m'
Note: Wub calculations can be simplified by assuming that the increase in the hidden
beam weight is about 10-> 12% of the slab weight as follows:
wub =l.lxw
II
xspacing =l.lx13.82x5A=82.1 kN 1m'
46
Step 5.1: Design for flexure
w
ll
h=81.98 kNlm'
I l
ultimate
,1
J
1

1 I I I I
Loads
1imr
I
6.2
I
6.2
---l
Moment
factors
Bending
moments
(kN.m)
Critical
sections
Shear
factors
-24
A
+11 1
131.3
A
286.5

0.40
A
-9
-24
/AT
+11

350.14
131.3
/AT
286.5
k,

0040

0.60 0.60
/AT
Shear ____ ..:3..:0-4.-97\30-4-.9----
2
-
O
-
3
-::z:.
3
'"
force, kN A /AT J1f!fflT
Design of section 1 . f 30
All sections in the hidden beam are rectangular sections. Assummg cover 0 rnm,
d=270 rnm. Using R-w curve
Mil _ 350.14xl0
6
=0.096
R = f. bd
2
- 40x1250x270
2
ell
From the curve it can be determined that w=0.126
47
A =0) leu
S Iy 400
_ {0.225.J40 x1250x270=1201 mm
2
.J<As o.k
A s min - smaller of 400
l.3As = 1.3 x 4248 = 5523 mm 2
use (l4<D 20, 4398 mm
2
)
The design of other critical sections is summarized in the following table
Sec
Mu R 0)
As Chosen
2 286.5 0.079 0.100 3379.7
3456 111 <D 20
3
131.3 0.036 0.043 1459.5
1885 1 6 <D 20
Step 5.2: Design for Shear
The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the middle support.
Assume that the width of the column is 600 mm. The critical section is at section 1 as
shown in figure with code coefficient of 0.6
Qu =0.6 wub L-W"b -+- =0.6x81.98x6.2---x -+- =269.3 kN
(
c d) 81.98 (600 270)
2 2 1000 2 2
= = 269.3 x 1000 = 0.80 N I mm2
q" Bxd. 1250x270
The code requires that the beam shear stress be less than concrete shear strength given by
qcu =0.16 u:: =0.16 (40 =0.826 Nlmm2
vT.5 V13
Since qu<qcu the shear strength of the beam is sufficient, Provide minimum area of
stirrups. ASSUming spacing of 200 mm and using mild steel J;,=240 N/mm2
A . = 0.4
Sl,mm 1" 240
The previous amount can be reduced according to the code item 4-2-2-1-6-c
A . = 416X(!l..!L) = 416X( 0.80) = 405 mm2
Sf,mm qe" 0.826
Assuming 6 branches, the area of one branch equals
416
ASh =-= 69.44 mm
2
6
Use 101200 mm (5cp 101m').
Choose 1 0 (78.5 mm
2
)
Since we have six use 6<1> 16 as a secondary reinforcement
48
0.30 L,.
n
I
fllllll'
i
H
I
6 <1> 20
0.30 L,.
PI
0.30 L,.

I
II IIII
.
II 1111
'Jt[ .
L,.
0.\0 L,.1 r: 0.10 L,.
L,.
14<1>20
6 <1> 16 6 <1> 16
..
,.
5 <1> 20
,
5 <1> 20
6 <1> 20
, 6 <1> 20
b. Longitudinalsection in the hidden beam
6 <D 16
Stirrups
5 tjllO/m'
I
i
til I IjfL
I
n
I
6 <1> 20
,
,
11 20
Hollo blocks
1250
//
//
//
a. Section A-A
Reinforcement details for the hidden beam
49
~ ({) ~
0-- --: _ _ _ _ --- _ -! --- _ _ --- _ --- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ :
g i!lI!iii!i!i!!i!ii!!II!i! r IIIII!!!IIII!III!!!I!! r l!i!i1!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !--
~ !illlHilllllllllllllllli I 1111111111111111111111 1111111111111111111111111
1111 1<1> 14/rib run - fllllll ffD 111./ U TIll ! 1111 1<1>l41rib lim OJ. !
I 1<1>141 ib TTTT{ I :TilT 1 14/nb T n=n
I I !IIJTIT 1<1>12/rib ntill I ~ 1 14/rib i
j 111111111111111111111111 - 111111111 !' I
!,UUlllllllllllllllliill 11111111111111 ! 111111111111111111111111 j
~ __ [--" l.. ___________ -- rlt 1111111 111111111111111 ! 111111111111111111111111 j
o I ~ ..rn -
j 111111111111111111111111 i -=-==-----------w---------------------li1
! 111111111111111111111111 j }tItH-{#ij'"IIIIIIII ! 111111111111111111111111 j
1111111111111111111111111 ! 1111I11111ItfH#Hii1 ! 111111111111111111111111 j
i 111111111111111111111111 ! 1111111111111111111111 HffHfH8"IIIIIII1I!
~ ! 111111111111111111111111 : 1111111111111111111111 1IIIIIIIIm"llllllllll:
! 111111111111111111111111 - 1111111111111111111111 IIIIIIIIIIIMIIIIIIIIII i
! 111111111111111111111111 111111111111/111111111 - IIIIIIIIII!
:liHT11<1>14/rib TrT ---. -- ----- -- ! !J.W.WI 1111 II I u:w:rn I
1<1>14/nb = -
_ 1111 r 1<1> I 4/rib 1 14/rib - tti
_ fIT II 111111 /I I - l! LlJ...L 1<1>12lrib 1J ! n IIII tl 1<1>14/& \I III I --::
0- _ : I 1 ~ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J I ~ . 1 I 1 1 1 1 ~ 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . ~ : Ii: Ii:::: 11m:::: II m:
Ii-- - - - - - - = ----
! i I! i
! . 5400 I- 5400 i . i . 5400 ---;
o @ @
Reinforcement layout for the hollow blocks floor
50
2.3 Two-Way Hollow Block Slabs
In these types of floors the ribs run in two directions and the load is distributed in both
directions as shown in Fig_ 2_9_ It is more economical to use two-way slabs if the
shorter span exceeds 6 meters. However, the placing of the blocks in two directions
during the construction is more difficult.
OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ
OJ 8 CO 8 OJ 8 OJ 8 OJ ~ projected beam
OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ ,"'-
OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ
OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ
OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ
OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ
OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ
OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ8OJ
OJ8OJEl0J80J80J
OJ 8OJ8 OJS OJ ElOJ
ribs
Plan
Section
Fig. 2.9 Arrangement of the blocks in two-way hollow block slabs
In typical hollow block floors, the designer has to choose between the simplicity of
construction one-way hollow block and the economy that might be offered by utilizing
two way hollow blocks.
Figure 2.10 shows two options for arranging hollow-blocks in the same roof. Note that
cantilever hollow block slabs are designed as one-way hollow block slabs.
51
2
1
2
1
cr14.00CP
cr
L 1.50 " 6.00 6.00
1 1
--0
I I I
- - - - - - - - - -
! !
-
I
i! F
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I
il=
I
I I
I
1= I
I
il= l- I:::: i
I
- - - - - - - - -
I I
I I
<:>
.Ii i
"l
I I
.",..
a) One way slab hollow block slabs
b) One way and two way slab hollow block slabs
2.10 Alterllative solutions for arranging blocks in hollow block slabs
52
fe
2.3.1 Method of Analysis
The analysis of two-way hollow blocks is carried out according to the type of
supporting beams. The code distinguishes between the two cases:
Case A: two-way hollow block floors with hidden beams are designed in a similar
fashion to the flat slabs.
Case B: two-way hollow block floors with projected beams are divided in two sub-
cases depending on the live loads and the compression flange as shown Table
2.3.
Table 2.3 load distribution values that should be used in designing two-way
hollow block floors with projected beams
Compression flange case
Live load value
LL:55 kN/m
2
LL> 5 kN/m
2
Complete compression
Use Table (2.4)
Use Table (2.5)
flange
(Marcus)
(Grashoff)
Incomplete compression
Use Table (2.5)
Use Table (2.5)
flange
(Grashoff)
(Grashoff)
2.3.2 Design of two-way hollow slabs with projected beams
2.3.2.1 Design of ribs
Two-way hollow blocks have some capability to develop torsion but not as much as
the solid slab. About 15-20% of the total load is consumed in torsional action. Marcus
developed the distribution for such types of slabs in which the distribution load factors
are reduced to account for some torsion action. The values are listed in Table 2.4.
Table 2.4 a and 13 values for two-way hollow block slabs (Marcus values)
r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
a 0.396 0.473 0.543 0.606 0.660 0.706 0.746 0.778 0.806 0.830 0.849

0.396 0.333 0.262 0.212 0.172 0.140 0.1t3 0.093 0.077 0.063 0:053
In some cases where the live loads are considerably high, it is advisable ,
-neglect the torsion action and distribute the load according to Grashoff's factors listed
in Table 2.5:
53
f.C
Table 2.5 a and f3 values for two-way hollow block slabs with high live loads
(Grashoffs values)
r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 104 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
a 0.500 0.595 0.672 0.742 0.797 0.834 0.867 0.893 0.914 0.928 0.941
/3 0.500 00405 0.328 0.258 0.203 0.166 0.133 0.107 0.086 0.072 0.059
The total factored load in the slab is given by:
W u = 1.4 x [weight of blocks/m
2
(Table 2. 1)+flooring] + 1.6 W LL (2.4a)
For ribs running in the short direction, the design loads are given by:
walrib=awu (b+e) .......................................... (2.4b)
For ribs running in the long direction, the design loads are given by:
walrib =fJwu (b+e) ........................................... (2.4c)
The analysis and the design ofthe ribs in the two directions are carried out in similar
manners to those followed in one way hollow block slabs. Fig. 2.11 shows an example
of the reinforcement for a floor comprising one-way and two-way hollow block slabs.
2.3.2.2 Design of Projected beams
Projected beams are designed to carry the following loads
1- Own-weight
2- Wall load (if any)
3- Load transmitted from the slabs
The distribution ofthe slab load to the projected beams is carried out as shown in Fig.
2.12. The triangular or trapezoidal loads can be replaced by equivalent uniform loads
for calculating bending moment and shear forces using Table 2.6.
Fig. 2.6 Coefficients of eqUivalent uniform loads on beams
L/2x 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 104 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
a 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.853 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917
f3 0.500 0.554 0.582 0.615 0.642 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750
54
3
2
1
g
vi

I
.
l
1
@
2#lO/no
ElEIBEI'DllIIIlEIEIEIEI
DJDJDJDJDJIDllIIIlIDJDJDJDJ
ElEIEIEIDllIIIlEIEIEIEI
-----
0
VJ
I
-

l 2.00 l 6.00
Js1400Js
6.00
6.00
cp
l
1
.
.
'1l 1.50 ~

Fig. 2.11 Reinforcement of a typical hollow block floor
55
.-.

i
""
V i '\ / i '\ V i
i i i I
I i I I
i /
'"
i
/
'"
i
/ "\
I

!b?{
IlK
!b11 IlK!
'-' ......
._._. . .
1J2=:
J2=: I
/
i ""V
i '\ i '\ V
I
i I I I
i I i I
i 7 1'\ I 7 l"- i V
1,\
I
lb?(

IlK
ib11
,"fKl
.-.
I
Fig. 2.12 Load distribution on the projected beams.
The bending moments and shear forces in the projected beams are obtained using
methods of structural analysis (or code coefficients if applicable). Sections of positive
moments are designed as T -sections while those of negative moments are designed as
rectangular sections as shown in Fig. 2.13.
zone
T-section
)
Rectangular section
J--;l zone
. Fig. 2.13Type ofsectionin projected beams according to the applied moment.
Fig 2.14 shows a summary ofthe load calculations for beams in hollow block roofs.
56
E .,..
gm
cO
Design of Beams in
Hollow block slabs
lOne way \
B2
B2
5.00
Hidden beam
or projected beam
B2
B2
5.00m
W
61
= O.W. + Wu X 2.50
W62=O.W.
W63=O.W.+Wu X 5.00
I Two way!
B2 B2
82 82
___ ___
r = 6/5 =1.20
From Table 2.6 - a. = 0.769
W
=OW +W X 0.769 X 2.50
61 ., u
W
=OW +W X 0.67 X 2.50
62 ., u
W
=OW +W xO.769 x5.00
63 ., u
Note:Wallloads may be added (if any)
Fig.2.14 Calculation ofloads of beams in hollow block roofs
57
Example 2.2
Redesign example 2.1 using two-way hollow blocks with projected beams
Solution
Step 1: Dimensioning
Choose 400x200x200 blocks
Take e=400 mm
. {50 mm
t s = bigger of
ell0=40nim
ts=50 mm
t = tblock+ts = 200+50 =250 mm
b b' if{100 mm
= 19gero 250/3 = 8.33 mm
b= 100mm
"I concrete block
100 e=400mm
Step 2: Calculating Ultimate Loads.
For concrete blocks 400x200x200 and from Table (2.1) the self weight of the blocks
and the concrete ribs is 3.8 kN/m
2
g.= self weight + flooring=3.8+2 =5.8 kN/m
2
ps=4kN/m
2
Wu = 1.4 gs + 1.6 P
s
== 1.4 x 5.8 + 1.6 x 4 = 14.52 kN 1 m
2
r=.!::J...= 6.2 =1.148
L2 5.4
Since this, istwo way hollow blocks with projected beams and L.L.< 5kN/m2, use
Table 2.3 (Marcus). The load distribution factors are
0.=0.507 and [3=0.299
wa/rib = a. Wu (e+b) =0.507 x 14.52 (400+100) 11000=3.68 kN/m'
wWnb = [3 Wu (e+b) = 0.299 x 14.52 (400+ 1 00) 11 000=2.17 kN/m'
58
Step 3: Arrangement of Blocks
Since the roof contains projected beams the distance c measured from the centerline is
taken from 300-500 mm Let us assume that the clear span for the blocks is 0.6-1.0 m
less than centerline distance
Transversal direction
Assume CI =500 mm
Lei = 5400 - 2C,= 5400 - 1000 = 4400 mm
500 x n
l
+ 400 = 4400 mm
Longitudinal direction
Assume C
2
= 400 mm
Lc2 = 6200 - 2 C
2
=6200-2x 400=5400
500 x n
2
+400= 5400 n2 =10
Step 4: Design of ribs
Step 4.1: Transversal direction
where, n2=no of ribs
Step 4.1.1: Calculation of the bending moments
Since the ribs are continuous over the supports with equal loads and equal spans, the
code coefficients (k) for slabs are applied. The transversal direction is the shorter
direction thus Wa is transferring in this direction
M = Wa XL2 = 3.68x5.4
2
u k k
wa=3.68 kN/m'
,1
I
1
.li
l I I I I
Iii '1 loads
I
5.4
I
5.4
I
5.4
-24 -10 -10 -24
A
+10'
A7
+12
Ar
+10
. /k,. k factor
lQ73
4.47 4.47

10.73 8.94 10.73
59
critical
/k,. sections
Step 4.2: Design of the Longitudinal Direction
Step 4.2.1 Calculation of the bending moments
Since the ribs are continuous over the supports with equal loads equal span, the code
coefficients (k) for slabs are applied. The longitudinal direction is the shorter direction
thus wfl is transferring in this direction
wp XL2 2.17x6.22
M =--.-=----
U k k
Wp= 2./7 kNlm'
Ultimate
l'
Loads
'I'
, , I ,
I I I
Moment
factors
Bending
moment
Critical
sections
1--- 6.2 --+1--
I
-24 -8
,IS,
+10
3.47 10.42
,IS,
8.34 Ik\7
Step 4.2.2: Design of Rib Critical Sections
Design of Section 1
6.2
-24
+10
3.47
8.34 A
This section has positive bending (8.34 kN.m), the compression flange form a T-
section as shown in Fig.
Since this is the secondary direction, d= 250 -30-15 =205 mm
B=500mm
ts= 50 mm
b=100mm e=400mm
62
Using the C 1-1 curve

d==Cl --
Icu
B
8.34xl0
6
205 == Cl 40 x 500
Cl=10.04
The point is outside the curve use c/d)mill=0.125
c=O.125 x 205=25.5 mm
a=O.8 x c = 20.6 mm <ts ..... o.k.
usej=0.825
A
, jxdxl
y
8.34 X 10
6
=123.3 mm
2
>As.min
0.825 x 205 x 400
use 2 10 (157 mm
2
)/rib
Design of Section 2 h he rib will
This section is subjected to negative bending moment (10.42 kN.m), t us t
be designed as rectangular section .
b=1000mm
E
E
c

Is = 50 mm
Using R-O) curve
I'
Mu _ 10.42xl0
6
=0.061
R = lcubd2 - 40xlOOx2052
R-section
e=400mm
From the curve it can be determined that 0)=0.075
b=lOO mm
A
- I<JI bxd =0.075 mm
2
>As,min
,-OJ
I
400
)'
use (2 10, 157 mm
2
)/rib
63
M
u
=10.42
kN.m
0-'_-
o
o
N
'"
0-.- -
I
i
i
i
I
i
i
i
1
i
i
i
i
1
i
i
i
i
i
I
i
i
!
!
I
j
i
0
1.=50 mm 5 6/m'
6/m'
T
5 6/m'
10
Rib reinforcement details in transverse direction
CD.
._0_0
!
I
l I i
I i
i 1
-
I
-
1
-.
J
1
0
i
a ill a a ill a
0
i
....
ailla
'"
1
1 i
i 1
Lei
i i
1
4400
i
C,
cJ
C,
I
1 i
.-.
I
1
1
i
i i
i i
i
-
......
-
......
!
-
III
i
III
a ill a
i
a ill a El
1
a ill a
CI:I
i
.,
Q)
1
Q)
i
c
III III
Cl
1 i
i i
I IO/rib
1 1
h
14>lO/rib
I <l>1O/rib
I IO/rib
i
1IO/nb (
1
1IO/rib
I
.-. . -
1
5400 5400
1
. i
5400
@ @)

.,
i

1
i
1
i
1
1
i
i
i
.1
1
1
.,
i
c
Cl 1
i
1
1
!
1
i
@
Reinforcement details a.nd blocks arrangement for the two-way hollow blocks
64
step 5: Design Of Projected beam (81)
Assume that the projected beam has the cross section shown in figure.
The self weight of the web ofthebeam equals =Yc b t = 25 x 0.25x 0.75 = 4.68 kNlm'
The weight of the flanged part of the beam is approximately taken into consideration
when calculating the slab load transmitted to the beam
The load distribution over the beams will be the same as regular solid slab and the load
distribution factors of the beams will be used
r =!=J.. = 6.2 = 1.148
L2 5.4
0.=0.75 and
Load for bending
Wub= Wu x a x spacing + 1.4 x o.w
Wub =14.52 x 0.75 x 5.4 + 1.4 x 4.68= 65.37 kNlm'
Load for shear
Wush = Wu X x spacing + 1.4 x o.w
Wush =14.52 x 0.56 x 5.4 + 1.4 x 4.68= 50.4TkN/m'
j
tw
1--1
b=250mm
Load distribution on the projected beams.
65
Step 5.1: Design for Flexure
bending
Loads
Moment
factors
Bending
moment
Critical
sections
Shear
Loads
Shear
. factors
Shear
force
,1
I
6.2
-24
A
+11
104.7
A
228.4
,1
I
6.2
0.40
A
125.17
A
wub=65.4 lcN.lm'
Iii
I I I I I I
1im,
I
6.2
I
-9 -24
1);
+11
A
279.2 104.7
1);
228.4
A
wush=50.47 kNlm'
Iii
I I I I
11
I
6.2
---I
0.60 0.60 0.40
1);
A
187.75 187.75 125.17
66
Design of Section 1
This section is subjected to -ve moment, thus it is a rectangular section
Assume concrete cover of 50 mm, d=700 mm
B=1000mm
)
Mu=279.2 kN.m
Using R-O) curve
279.2 x 10
6
=0.057
fcubd2 40x250x700
2
b=250mm
f. 40
As =liJ -E!!-bxd =0.07 -x250x700= 1230mm
2
>As,min
fy 400
{
0.2
25
.JJ:: b d
Asmin =smaller of fy
0.225.J40 x250x 700= 622.6 mm
2
.J<As o.k
400
1.3As =1.3xI230=1599mm
2
use (5 <l> 18, 1272 mm
2
)
Design of Section 2
This section is subjected to a positive bending moment (228.43 kN.m), the
compression flange form a as shown in Fig., B=500+500=1000 mm
B=1000mm
I
I
C,=500 mm i C,=500 mm
Mu=228.4 kN.m
)
I--l
b=250mm
67
Using the CI-J curve
d=CIJM
u
!cuB
700 = Cl 228.43 x 10
6
40xlOOO
CI=9.26
The point is outside the curve use c/d)min=0.125
c=0.125 x 700=87.5 mm
a=O.8 xc = 70 mm <ts ..... o.k.
usej=0.825
A = Mu
S jxdxJ;,
228.43 x 10
6
=988mm2
0.825 x 700 x 400
Step (1.2: Design for Shear
The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support.
Assume the width of the column is 600 mm. The critical section is at section 1 as
shown in figure with code coefficient of 0.6
Qu =0.6 wus L-wub -+- =0.6 x 50.47x6.2 ___
x
_+_ =154.946kN (
c d) 50.47 (600 700)
22 100022
154.94 x 1000 =0.88 Nlmm
2
qu bxd 250x700
Concrete shear strength is given by
qcu = 0.24 f7: = 0.24 [40 = 1.24 N 1 mm2
1/TS 1/15
Since qu<qcu , no need for web reinforcement, provide minimum area of stirrups
Assuming spacing of200 mm and using mild steel/y=240 N/mm
2
. As/min
. fy 240
A - 83.33 -4167 2
sb --2-- . mm
Use 4 8/200 mm
68
CiJ
2<1>16 . I 2<1>16
5cjl8/m'
4<1>18
r---I
250mm
Cross section A-A in the projected beam
Reinforcement details of the projected beam
69
3
PANELED BEAMS
- ---------------------- -t-'-- ----._." .---- ----.. -._-.. ---. '-'-"-... -----.--.-------... --- ... -------.-.
Photo 3.1 Reinforced concrete airplane hanger, Italy.
3.1 Introduction
A Paneled beams system is normally utilized when the dimensions of the floor are
relatively large so that it becomes uneconomical to either use solid slabs, or 'hollow
block slabs. In a paneled beams system, the floor is strengthened with a series of
beams with equal depth spanning usually in two perpendicular directions. These
beams divide the large floor into a number of small panels that can be easily designed
as solid slabs as shown in Fig. 3.1. The spacing between the beams ranges normally
from 2 to 4 meters. In this system, all beams are of the same depth and are supported
directly either on columns or on edge beams.
70
Because the deflection is equal at the point of intersection for any two beams, the load
transferred in the short direction is much larger than the long direction. This is because
it takes more loads to deflect a short beam than it does for a long one. If the ratio of
long span to the short span (LdLs) exceeds 1.5, there is no structural advantage for
usmg paneled beams system. Almost the entire load in this case is transferred in the
short span, similar to the case of one-way slabs.
solid I b sa s
ith small w
d imensions
-...::
:;; 1.5
paneled
beams
Ls
b
1\
\
D
0
/
---

Plan
Section
/
Fig. 3.1 Layout of paneled beams floor
71
r--
edge beams
3.2 Load Distribution
To illustrate the behavior of the paneled beams system, let. us a simple
system which consists of two beams the same depth mtersectmg at pomt A as
shown in Fig. 3.2. The dead and thehve loads are transferred through these two
beams. Denoting the load transferred in the short direction as Wa and the load
transferred in the long direction as W p.

Wp
3.2 Load distribution in paneled beams
'"
''''
The deflection of the shortsp,anbeam b.l equals
''',
4
b. =-5xwb xL
z
..................................................... (3.1)
, 384El
The deflection of the long span b.2 equals
5xw p.xL: ..................................................... (3.2)
384El
But since the deflection at point A is the same, b., == b. 2
5xw p xL:
384El
....................................... (3.3)
Wa == (3.4)
Wp z
72
but the total load W = wa+wp
Wa
L4
-L-
Wp+Wa
Defining Wa= W a and wp= W f3
L4 +L4 .................. (3.5)
2 I
Wxa L4 L4/L4
--=----1-_ I 2
W ................... (3.6)
Denoting r as rectangularity ratio
r= Long span
Short span
L
, Thus the load distribution factors a and f3 equals
and similarly
The load distribution factor in the short direction .
distribution factor f3 in the long direction by th a larger than the load
values of a and f3 for different rectan . e r . Table 3.1 lists the
load transferred in each direction. gularlty ratIo. ThiS table IS used to calculate the
Table 3.1 a and f3 values for paneled beam slabs (Grashoffs values)
r
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 104 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
a
0.500 0.595 0.672 0.742 0.797 0.834 0.867 0.893 0.914 0.928 0.941
f3 0.500 00405 0.328 0.258 0.203 0.166 0.133 0.107 0.086 0.072 0.059
73
The difference in magnitude between the part of the load transferred in the short beam
and that in the long beam can be explained by considering the structure in Fig 3.3. For
the same amount of deflection, it takes more force to displace a shorter beam than a
longer one. If the two beams are of the same length, the load transferred in both
directions will be the same (P
1
=P
2
=P!2). The developed bending moment in each
-beam will be PLl8 instead ofPLl4 in case ofa simple beam(50% reduction), because
each beam supports the other. However, if the long span i' twice that of the short span,
the long beam will provide little support to the short beam because the flexural,
stiffuess is considerably low. A computer analysis reveals that the developed bending
moment in the short beam is about (90%) of the simple beam moment with length
L(P
1
=0.9 P) and the developed bending moment in the long direction is about 10% of
the simple beam moment with length 2L. This explains the limitation imposed by the
code concerning the ratio of the long span to the short span (L
1
1L
2
<1.5). At this ratio,
about 75% percent of the load is transferred in the short direction (P
1
=0.75P).
P
Ml=0.9 P (U4)=0.225 PL
I--LI=L-/
Lz=2L
case LI1L2=2
P
Ml=0.5 P (U4)=O.l25 PL
I--LI=L-I
P,=0.5 P
M2=0.5 P (U4)=O.125 PL
=1
Fig. 3.3 Bending moment and load distribution for different paneled beams
74
3.3 Code Provisions
The paneled beams could either be arran ed i 0
or in skew, triangular or quadruple grOd g h
n
two p
e
l1:>endlCular dIrectIons,
All b
' 1 sass own III FIg 3 4
earns should have the same depth with a o. . .
of 1.5 maxImum rectangularIty ratio

.. The internal force in the paneled beams should be d t d b
structural analysis equilibrium do, e ermIne ased On
to the forces simpli?ed
WIth the actual behavior. so u IOn IS compatIble

"'-
=-
Rectangular grid
Skew grid
Triangular grids
Quadruple grid
Fig. 3.4 Types of paneled beams systems
75
3.4 Simplified Design Method
In the simplified method, the paneled beams floor of dimension LL x Ls behaves as
two-way slab that has rectangularity ratio r=LJLs. This two-way slab consists of a
system of intersecting beams surrounding a number of two-way slabs of smaller
dimensions. The design process consists oftwo steps namely
1. Design of the small solid slabs to resist the loads directly transferred to them
2. Design of the floor beams having dimensions LL x Lsas follows
Assume the dimensions of the beams
Calculate the design loads
Distribute the design loads
Design of paneled beams in both the short and long directions
Design of edge beams
a - Beam dimensions
The thickness of the paneled beams is usually assumed as a ratio form the short span
as follows -
short span (L$)
t= 12-16 ....................................................... (3.7)
Since the thickness (t) of the beams in both directions is the same, the reinforcement in
the short direction is the main direction and the effective depth equals the beam
thickness minus the cover as shown in Fig. 3.5. Reinforcement running in the long
direction (secondary direction) is placed on the top of the main reinforcement and the
effective depth equals the thickness minus the cover and the bar diameter of the main
direction as shown in Fig. 3.5.
(
d T
-c::""
- - = :ri
db,A"
depth in the main dire?tion
=t- covet.
b
- -
-=
-
-\
depth in the secondary
direction
=t - cover - db
Fig. 3.5 Cross-section in paneled beams floor
76
b-Design loads
The self-weight of the beams is assumed to be unifonnly distributed over the floor.
The average weight of the beams equals
(3.8.A)
To obtain the total loads of the system, beams self-weight is added to the slab self-
weight, flooring, partitions, and live loads.
W u = 1.4 x (ow b +t, xYc +jloonng + partitons)+1.6w LL (kN/m
2
) (3.8.B)
where Y
c
=25 kN 1m
3
c-Distribution of design loads
ill the simplified method, a portion of the load transferred to the beams is determined
according to the overall rectangularity ratio of the slab. The transferred load in the
short direction is much higher than that transferred in the long direction and is
determined using Table 3.1.
L
r=--L
L,
Wup = Wu xfJ
d-Design of paneled beams
The design of paneled beams is carried out similar to that of regular beams. However,
the distribution of the moments is obtained by assuming that the deflection of the slab
is in the fonn of a sin curve. The bending moments developed in each beam is the
ratio between the deflection at this location to the deflection at mid span.
For example if we have the paneled beams slab shown in Fig. 3.6 with four e ~ m s
running in the short direction and three beams running in the long direction, the
developed bending moment equals .
2
M03 = Wu xfJ ~ sin(B
3
)
8
e-Design of edge beams
2
M02 = Wu xa sin(B
2
)
8
L 2
M 04 = Wu x fJ _L_ X 1.0
8
The thiclmess of the edge beams is usually equal to or greater than that of the paneled
beams. The load distribution on edge beams is affected greatly by the support
conditions. If the floor is supported on the comers only, the overall slab is considered
supported directly on the edge beam as shown in Fig. 3.7.A . On the other hand, if the
paneled beams rest directly on supports, the reaction of the beams is carried directly
by the columns. ill this case, the load on the edge beam can be estimated as one half
the load ofthe parallel beams as shown in Fig. 3.7.
77
L,I2
~
3
.
BI
sj
DO
s
.
-
Ih \-----1
0_.-
-'-
--E]E]
1-,-,-,- _0_.-
O[]
nl
Fig. 3.6 Load distribution and deflection of paneled beams system
78
~ Ifl
~
)Z
"-
v
"-
V
'"
~
'"
E;:;
/ 1'\ ~
/ 11'\
F'
1/ ~
b(
IK
b(
f I!iI
If;
A-no intermediate columns B-pane\ed beams that are not rested
directly on columns
I I IA I rl I J
" it. ]I Jt,;,
C-paneled beams are rested directly
on intermediate columns
Fig. 3.7 Effect of column location on load distribution of edge beams
79
Photo 3.2 Main hall at the Faculty of Architecture Sao Paolo University 1969
Photo 3.3 Ethical Society -entry hall- Missouri':USA
80
3.5 Design of Skew Paneled Beams
The Egyptian code allows the use of paneled beams that are not perpendicular to each
other or that are not parallel to the hall (skew grid). The simplified method discussed
in the previous section can not be used in designing skew girds. Structural analysis
programs can be used to compute the bending moment and shear developed in the
skew system in this case. Alternatively, for a relatively small number of beams, hand
calculations can be carried out using equilibrium of forces and compatibility of
deflections. For example, for the square hall shown in Fig. 3.8, the beams are
perpendicular to each other but are not parallel to the hall directions. Due to
symmetry, the problem has only 4 unknowns, which is the of loading
distributed in each direction (PI I, PI2, P3I, P32). At points 2 and 4 due to symmetry,
the load transferred in the two directions is the same (i.e. 50%, PI2). The load acting at
each intersection (joint) can be approximated by
P=wuxaxb
This load is divided between each two perpendicular beams. For example, at point 1
and 3, the equilibrium equation is

P =P
31
+P
32
(point! )
(point3 )
The deflection at any point can be easily obtained using the principle of superposition.
The compatibility of deflection at point 1 and 3 gives
(beam (beam B I) (point! )
(beam (beam B2) (point3 )
Solving this set of equations gives the loads and bending moment at each beam.
P/2 P
32
P/2

BeamB2

A; ;A.

Fig. 3.8 Structural analysis of skew paneled beams
81
BeamBl
Example 3.1 ..
For the hall shown in figure, it is reqUired to deSIgn rectangular paneled beams system
to cover the roof, knowing that
2
/cu=30N/mm
h=400N/mm
2
Loads due to flooring=2.0 kN/m
2
Live loads=3.0 kN/m
2
I-
-
F
E
r-
'C?
V)
-I- !i1il'I
E
r-
'C?
V)
-I-

E
r-
'0
or;
_L...
,- 6.S0m
Solution
l3.0m
-I
Il

-r-
Ill1
E

r-
-

....
--""

-,"
6.S0m
.,
Step 1: Roof layout. ..
The Hall is divided into small slabs spanning between (3-4 m In each dIrectIOn).
Assuming three beams spanning in the longitudinal direction (four spacing) and four
beams spanning in the shorter direction (five spacing) gives
13
C
1
=-=3.25m
4
17
and C =-=3.40m
2 5
82
I J3.0m
3.25 3.25
I I .
Step 2: Design of solid slabs
Since the slab is relatively small (3.4 x 3.25), assume ts=100 mm
wus=1.4 gs+ 1.6 Ps=1.4 (Ys x 1. + flooring)+ 1.6 x live loads
Wus = 1.4x(25xO.l0+ 2) + 1.6x3 = 11.lkN / m
2
The slab load distribution factors are determined using table (6-1) in the code.
w(l=wus x a. = (11.1) a.
wl}=wus x 13 = (11.1) 13
The rectangularity ratio r is given by
my xLy
r=--_
mx xLx
where m equals 1,0.87, and 0.76 for simple, continuous from one end and continuous
from both ends respectively
The following table summarizes the results
Slab
Lx mx Ly my r
a.
13
W(l
wI}
81 3.25 0.87 3.4 0.87 1.046 0.37 0.32 4.141 3.550
82 3.25 0.76 3.4 0.87 1.198 0.45 0.24 4.982 2.709
83 3.25 0.87 3.4 0.76 1.094 0.40 0.29 4.408 3.245
84 3.25 0.76 3.4 0.76 1.046 0.37 0.32 4.141 3.550
83
The bending moment for each slab is taken according to code coefficients given in
figure below
-24
+10
d (main direction)
d (secondary direction)
-10
+12
= ts-15 mm=85 mm
= ts-25mm=75 mm
-12
For high grade steel the minimum area of steel equals
A . mm
2
s,mon fy 400
+12
The following table summarizes the results of the bending moment in x direction and
y-directions
X-Direction
Slab Lx Wx Mx d R 0)
(m) kN/m' kN.m (mm)
81 3.25 4.141 4.374 85 0.0202 0.024
82 3.25 4.982 4.385 85 0.0202 0.024
83 3.25 3.245 3.427 75 0.0203 0.024
84 3.25 4.141 3.645 85 0.0168 0.020
V-Direction
Slab Ly Wy My d R 0)
(m) kN/m' kN.m (mm)
81 3.4 3.550 4.104 75 0.0243 0.029
82 3.4 2.709 3.131 75 0.0186 0.022
83 3.4 4.408 4.246 85 0.0196 0.023
84 3.4 3.550 3.420 75 0.0203 0.024
..
* the mmunum remforcement (Asmin) controls the desIgn
Step 3: Design of the paneled beams roof
Step 3_1: Assume concrete dimensions
Assume that the depth of the beams is shorter span/I4
As
rrun
2
/m'
151.4
151.8
134.5
127.5
As
rrun
2
/m'
161.8
127.5'
146.9
134.2
t = 13.0/14 = 0.93m -+-4Take t=950 mm and b=300 mm
84
As As
chosen chosen
5<t>8/m' 251.3
5<t>8/m' 251.3
5 <t>8/m' 251.3
5 <t>8/m' 251.3
As As
chosen chosen
5 <t>8/m' 251.3
5<t>8/m' 251.3
5<t>8/m' 251.3
5<t>8/m' 251.3
Step 3.2: Calculate design loads
The self-weight of the beams is averaged over the slab using
n xL +n xL
ow =1. xbx(t-t)x I I 2 2
b c S L L
IX 2
25
300 (950-100) 3x 17 +4x 13 2 .
OWl> = x--x x =2.97 kN 1m
1000 1000 17 x 13
Wu = 1.4 x 2.97 + 11.1 = 15.26 kN I m
2
Step 3.3: Distribution of the design loads
To determine the distribution of the load in both directions, use the total size of the
hall not the individual slab dimension
Long span 17
r = Sh = - = 1.307 <1.5 .... o.k
ortspan 13
From Table 3.1, it can be determined that
a=0.746 and 13=0.253, thus
wa=0.746 x 15.26 =11.39 kN/m
2
, this load is for beams in the short direction (13m)
wp=0.253 x 15.26 =3.87 kN/m
2
, this load is for beams in the long direction (17m)
9=72
9=90
9=72
6.5
S
m
I"
85 i

9=45 9=90 9=45
85
Step 3.4: Design of paneled beams
Step 3.4.1: Design of beam B1 (short direction)
Design beam B1 for flexure
Since beam B 1 is spanning in the short direction, the load considered for design is Wa
The compatibility angle e equals the ratio of its distance relative to the centerline of
the hall, thus
f) = 6.8 x 90 = 72
8.5
Wub= Wa X spacing x sin e
Wub = 11.39x 3.4x sin(72) = 36.83kN I m'
M = W ub xL2 = 36.83x13
2
= 778 kN.m
u 8 8
Wuh=36.82 kNlm'
bending
11
Loads
IIIII!\!
I'
]3.0
-24
Moment
factors A +8
259.34
-24
259.34
Bending
moment

Critical
sections
778
Beam B1
86
Section 1
This section has positive bending (778 kN.m), the compression flange form a T-
section. The effective width equals
j
16t
S
+b
B = smaller of
CLtoCL
B=1900mm

!cuB
900=Cl 778 x 10
6
30x1900
= 16xlOO+300 = 1900 mm
13xlOOO
5 + 300 = 2900 mm
=3400mm
Cl=7.7
c=0.125 x 900=112.5 mm
a=O.8 x 112.5 = 90 mm <ts ..... o.k.
usej=0.825
A = Mu
S j xd xl
y
778 x 10
6
_ 2
0.825x900x400 -2616 mm
.J
0.225$:: 0.225.J3Q
I
b d = x300x900=832 mm
2
kA
s
o.k
y 400
L3As = 1.3 x 2616 = 340lmm 2
use (4<D22+4<D20, As=2777 mm
2
)
As'=(0.1-0.2) As choose (3<D16, 603 mm
2
)
Section 2
M wub XL2
u 24
36.83x13
2
24 = 259.34 kN .m
R 259.34x10
6
lcubd2 30x300x900
2
=0.0355
87
f. 30
As = OJ -E!!..bxd =0.043 -x300x900 = 870mm
2
>As,min
fy 400
use (4 <D 20, 1256 mm
2
)
Design Beam B1 for Shear
The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support. Assuming that
column width (c) is 500 mm
213.6xlOOO =0.791 Nlmm
2
300 x 900
The concrete shear strength is given by
qcu = 0.24 rr::: = 0.24 {30 = 1.07 N I mm
2
Vl.5 VTS
Since qu <qcu the beam is considered safe, provide minimum area of stirrups
Assuming spacing of 200 mm and using mild steelJ;,=240 N/mm
2
As/min = 0.4 bxs mm
2
. fy 240
100 2
AI =-=50mm
S> 2
Use 5cp8/m'
choose cp8 (50 mm
2
)
Step 3.4.2: Design of Beam B3 (longitudinal)
Design Beam B3 for flexure
Since this beam spanning in the long direction, the load considered is wll(3.87 kN/m
2
).
The compatibility angle e equals the ratio of the its distance relative to the distance of
centerline of the hall, thus
{} = 6.5 x 90 =
6.5
W uil = W p xspacing xsin{}=3.87 x3.25xsin(90) = 12.58kN / m'
88
Wub= 12.58 kNlm'
bending
Loads
Moment
factors
Bending
moment
,1
I'
-24
At
151.5
Cri",.!
sections 2
I I
1
1
1
1
17.0
+8
454.45
Beam B3
Section 1
M =Wub XL2
u 8
12.58 X 172 = 454.45 kN .m
8
I
Il
I
-24
,
151.5
This section has positive bending (454.45 kN.m), the compression flange form a T-
section.
1
161, + b
B == smallerof
CLtoCL
B=1900mm
== 16 x 100 + 300 == 1900 mm
17xlOOO
f +300 == 3700 mm
5
=3250 mm
..l
Because the steel in .the longitudinal direction is placed on top of the steel in the short
direction, the depth is less than the transverse direction by approximately 50 mm.
d=850mm
,
Using the C1-J curve
89
850 = C 1 454.45 X 10
6
30x1900
-->C 1 =9.52
The point is outside the curve use c/d)mill=0.125
c==O.l25 x 850=106.25 mm
a=0.8 x 106.25 = 85 mm <t ..... o.k.
A == Mu 454.45 X 10
6
=1620 mm
2
, j xd xfy 0.825 x850x400
usej=0.825
{
0.225.JJ: b d = 0.225 50 x 300 x 850 = 786 mm 2
Asmin = smaller of fy . 400 .
l.3As =1.3xI620=2106mm
2
use (5<1>22, 1900 mm
2
)
As
Section 2
2
choose (2<1>16, 400 mm )
M == Wub xL2 == 12.58x17
2
==151.5 kN.m
u 24 24
R == == 151.5 X 10
6
== 0.0233
fcu bd2 30x300x850
2
From the curve it can be determined that (J)::=0.028
J: 30 5 2
A == [tJ -E!!..bxd == 0.028 -x300x850 == 53 mm
400
..l<As o.k
0.225 .JJ: b d = 0.225 50 x 300 x 850 = 786 mm 2
fy 400
l.3A, =1.3x535=696mm
2
..l>As (checkO.15/100b d)
0.15 8 . 2
But not less than --x 300 x 850 = 3 2.5 mm
100
Design of Beam B3 for Shear
. . . frrups for
Since beam B1 (which have more load than beam B3) reqUlres mllllmurn s 1
shear, provide minimum stirrups as well for beam B3(5cjJ8/m' )
90
Step 3.4.3:. DesiQn of Beam B2 and B4
BeamB2 BeamB4
Item short direction long direction
Wu 11.39 3.87
spacing(m) 3.40 3.25
9
36 45
Wub Wu x spacing x sin (9) kN/m' 22.76 8.89
span (m) 13 17
Mu=Wub L2/8 (kN.m) 480.86 321.48
B(mm) 1900 1900
Cl 9.8 11.3
cld ( c/d,min) 0.125 0.125
a(mm) 90 <ts 85 <t,
J 0.825 0.825
d(mm) 900 850
As (mmL) 1616 1144
No of bars 5<1>22 6<1>16
Shear design
Step 4: Design of edge beams
Step 4.1: Design of edge beam B5
The load distribution on the supporting beams is shown in figure below.
I
13.0 m
"
85
....,..

I)z
-r-
E
I-
\0
vi
"',,-
7
-

V il
E
CD
E
I-
m
CD 0
\0 m r-:
vi -
-..:
a
/
"-
lSi:
E
7 ,"'-
,
I-
b(
'k
\0
;\.,
vi
;
--..J
I
-'
!
85
I'
. 6.50 m ' I' 6.50 m
'\
91
-
The load on each beam will be calculated using the area method because the load is
not symmetrical between each two successive supports.
The thickness of this beam should be at least the thickness of the paneled beams, thus
try a beam crosS section (250 x 950 mm)
Ultimate beam self weight =1.4 'Yc b t
Wow = 1.4 x 25 xO.25xO.95 = 8.31 kN I m'
wslnh = Wu x area oj the triangular 15.26x O.5x6.5x6.5 = 49.6 kN 1m'
span 6.5
wu= w
ow
+ Wslab =8.31+49.6=57.9 kN/m'
Since the beam has an equal loads and spans, the code coefficients for continuous
beam with two spans can be used
Design of beam B5 for flexure
Section 1
M = Wuh XL2 = 57.9x6.5
2
u 9 9
271.84 kN.m
6.5
Slab
load

6.5
6.5
Ultimate
w
u
h=57.9 kNlm I
load II
1
!
1

1 1 1
11.
I
6.5
I
6.5
I
-24
-9
-24
Moment
factors
A
+11.
];;;
+11

271.84
Bonding

222.4 222.4
Critical
sections
92
Since this section is subjected to negative bending, it will be designed as rectangular
section
271.84x10
6
=0.0447
feu b d 2 30 x 250 X 900
2
A =liJ feu bxd =0.054 250x900=916 mm
2
>A.min
s 400 '
use (5 16, 1005 mm
2
)
Section 2
M = Wuh X L2 = 57.9 X 6.5
2
= 22204 kN.m
1111
This section has positive bending (222.4 kN.m), the compression flange form a L-
section.
j
6t
s
+b
B = smaller of L2 + b
10
CLloCL
B=770mm
Mu
feu
B
900 = Cl 22204 x 10
6
30x770
= 6xlOO+ 250 = 850 mm
= 0.8x6.5xlOOO +250 = 770 mm
10
=1700 mm
Cl=9.17
c=0.125 x 900=112.5 mm
a=0.8 x 112.5 = 90 mm ..... o.k.
usej=O.825
22204 x 10
6
A = Mu
s jxdXf
y
0.825 x900x400
.J
of {
use (4<1> 16, 804 mm
2
)
0.225.J30 x 250 x 900 = 693 mm 2 .J < As
400
1.3As = 1.3 x 748 = 972.4mm 2
93
o.k
Design of Beam B5 for shear .
The critical section for shear is at dl2 from the face of the support. Assummg that
wub=57.9 kNlm'
ultimate
,,
Iii
I I
11
Loads
I
6.5
I
6.5
I
Shear
0040 0.60 0.60 0.40
factors
is A A
critical
. ! 225.8
Shear
force
if--. ",",0 ! G

i-I 150.5
d12+cl2
d c (0.90 0.25)
Q
-+- =192.5kN
u u" u, 2 2 2 2
192.5xl000 =0.856 Nlmm
2
qll bxd 250x900 .
The concrete shear strength is 'given by_
q =0.24 u::: =0.24 (30 =1.07Nlmm
2
eu Vl.5 V1.5
Since qu<qcu the beam is safe, provide minimum area of stirrups
Assuming spacing of 200 mm and using mild steelj}=240 N/mm
2
A _ = 004 bxs 250x 200 = 83.33 mm
2
",mln 1;. 240
Assuming 2 -branches, the area of one branch equals
'A - 83.33 -4167 2
sh --2-- . mm
choose +8 (50 mm
2
), Choose 5 + 81m'
94
Step 4.2 Design of Beam B6
Wow = 1.4 x 25x 0.25xO.95 = 8.31 kN 1m'
The weight of the slab will be divided in two parts
w
l
=w xareaofthetriangular(A,) =15.26x 0.5x5.67x5.67 =43.26 kNlm'
u span 5.67
Wul=W/+Wow =43.26 + 8.31=51.5 kN/m'
area of A2
W
2
= Wu x
span
15.26x 4.01x6.5 + 2
x
O.5(5.67 + 6.5) x 0.83 = 97.33 kN I m'
5.67
Since the beam is equal in spans but the load magnitude differs by more than 20%,
code coefficient can not be used. For simplicity, pattern loading was not considered.
Using three moment equations to solvethe indeterminate beanl, applying the equation
at b
MaLI +2 Mb (LI+L2) + Me L2=-6(Rba+Rbe)
The elastic reaction Rab and Rbe equals
R = W
ut
xL
3
= 51.5x5.67
3
= 39 1.15 kN.m2
ab 24 24
105.6x5.67
3
=802kN.m2
24
From symmetry and Ma=O, substituting in the moment equation gives
0+ 2 Mt, (5.67+5.67) + Mb (5.67)= -6 (391.15+802)
M( ) ( b)
51.5x5.672
+ve span a
8
252.4 = 80.7 kN.m
2
M(+ve)span(bc) 105.6 x 5.67
2
_ 252.4 = 171.9 kN.m
8
95

';'" --------------1
Slab
loads
5.67 A 5.67
5.67 ---I
Wu2= 105.6 kNlm'
WUJ=5/.5kNlm';1:1 I 1 1 .1 I l:t
ultimate a L I I I I I I I _. . . . . . __ I
loads b c
wuJ=5/.5 kNlm'
I I 1111
1---- 5.67 I' 5.67 1 5.67 1
252.4 252.4
68.96 4 68.9
Bending
80.7 .
171.9
Critical
sections At
Design of beam B6 for flexure
Section 1
Mu=252.4 kN.m (rectangular section)
Mu 252.4 x 10
6
=0.0415
R= hubd2 30x250x900
2
,
From the curve it can be determined that (0=0.050
A =aJ feu bxd =0.05 mm
2
s fy 400 .
A . = smaller of 400
{
0.22550 x250x900=693 mm
2
.J<As
smm 1.
3A
s =1.3x843=1095mm
2
use (2 <1> 16+2<1> 18,911 mrn
2
)
96
o.k
Section 2
This section has positive bending (171.9 kN.m), the compression flange forms L-
section.
{
61 +b
B = smaller of L; + b
10
CLloCL
B=646.9mm
d = C11 Mu
!cuB
900= Cl 17L9x 10
6
30x 646.9
= 6xI00+250= 850 mm
0.7x5.67xI000 .
10 +250=646.9 mm
=1700 mm
Cl=9.56
c=0.125 x 900=112.5 mm
a=0.8 x 112.5 = 90 mm <ts ..... o.k.
usej=0.825

17L9xl0
6
------= 578 mm
2
0.825 x 900 x 400
0.225.J3Q
400 x 250x 900 = 693 mm
2
.J
1.3As = 1.3 x 578 = 752 mm 2
A. < As.min use A..min (693 mm
2
)
97
.J

ill Design of Beam B6 for shear
.t
, f Since the loading on the beam is not equal on all spans, code shear coefficients can not
be used. The maximum shear is at section middle span (bc) thus, the maximum shear
can be obtained from the structural analysis of the beam.
Shear
diagram
Loads
252.4
Wu]= I 05. 6 kNlm' __
bl'
, ,
J J
,
il
(
t--- 5.67
-t
299.3
299.3 l critical section
I
299.3
299.3
252.4
)
The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support(b). Assuming that
Q = R -w 105.6x5.67 105.6 (2.
9
+ 0'225) = 238.6 kN
u h uf> 2 2 2
238.6xl000 =1.06 Nlmm2
qu bxd 250x900
concrete shear strength is given by
m
cu "2
qcu = 0.24 - = 0.24 - = 1.07 N I mm
1.5 1.5
Since qu<qcu the beam is considered safe, provide minimum area of stirrups
Assuming spacing of200 mm and using mild steelJ;,=240 N/mm2
As,min =
. fy 240
Choose 5 81m'
98
co
III
j
!

11< 11<

'" '"
CiS
11< 11<
'" '"

11<
'"
!!
11<11<
'" '" ...... 54>8Im
5",RIm
/
3.25 l
85

82
@
'.
81
(Y)
III
81
82
54> 81m

1m
85
3.25 l
13.00m
'<t
III
54> 81m
3.25
Reinforcement details
99
54> 81m
54>81m
l
3.25
Ili
-
Ili
r!
-

co
III

'-"v
[,
o 0
'I'> 'I'>
0\ 00
,
508/m'
1
I
3<1> 16
'I

-I
t}
I
4<1>22+4<1>20 i -I
Lcf7
-I
CD
3<1> 16
______________ ____________ _
\

2<1>12

2<1>12
4<1>22
BeamBl
508/m'
I
I
2<1>16
2<1>22
3<1>22
BeamB3
o 0
'I'> ""
0\ 00
2
2<1>16
'I
I
i
5<1>22
i I
CD
2<1>12
2<1>12

Sec 2 in Beam B3 (longitudinal direction)
Sec 1 in Beam B1 (short direction)
Reinforcement details for beams Bl and B3
100
2<1112
1<1116
__ ____
r 2<1116
BeamB5
2<1112
2<1112
5$8/m'
2<1112
2<1112
_ __'n
2<1116
o
on
0\
5<1116 (2<1116+2<1118)
FnT
I
2<1112
5$8/m'
2<1112
Sec 1
S t
. b Sec 2
ec Ions In eams B5 and (B6)
__ __ ---,' /'
r (2<1116)
Beam B6
\'-___ i
(2<1116) ,
Reinforcement details for beams B5 and B6
101
FLAT SLABS
-" --------- -- ----- .._. __ .
Photo 4.1 Flat slab system
4.1 Introduction
Flat plates are one of the most commonly used structural systems in residential
buildings, hotels, commercial buildings, hospitals and office buildings. Flat are
solid concrete slabs of uniform thickness that transfer the load directly to the columns
without the presence of projected beams, drop panels or column capitals as shoWn in
Fig. 4.1.A. The ease of construction is one of the important aspects that make flat slab
systems a very attractive solution. Architects prefer this system because the flexibility
in the arrangement of columns and partitions with no obstruction oflight. In addition,
the absence of sharp corners gives greater fire resistance, as there is less danger of the
concrete spalling and exposure of the reinforcement.
102
The major concern when using flat plates is shear transfer from the slab to the
columns. In other words, there is a danger that columns may punch through the slab.
Therefore, if live loads exceed 3 kN/m
2
, it is advisable to use drop panels at the
column locations as shown in Fig. 4.1.B. The use of the drop panels increases the
negative flexural capacity at locations of high negative bending and reduces the risk of
shear failure. Moreover, if the live loads exceed 6 kN/m
2
, it is recommend to Use
column heads as shown in Fig 4.1.C. In case of excessively heavy live loads (>10
kN/m2) such as in the case of industrial buildings and warehouses, the use of drop
panels together with column heads is necessary as shown in Fig. 4.1.D.
-v
A-Flat plate
C-Flat slab with column head
f I f
I
V
B-Flat slab with drop panel
D-Flat slab with drop panel and column head
Fig. 4.1 Types of flat slabs
The use of drop panels and column heads is more acceptable in parking garages,
storage buildings, and similar structures.
103
1
-..J
-,
-.. /
1
,
!
4.2 Statical Equilibrium of Flat Slabs
The floor shown in Fig. 4.2 consists of individual concrete strips that form a slab. The
two beams support the concrete strips at their edges. Assume that the t o t a l l o a ~ of the
strips including self-weight equals Wu (kN/m
2
). The moment per meter at nud-span
(section A-A) equals
M = w u xL; .............. : ....................................... (4.1)
8
The total moment in X-direction for the entire slab equals
M
- (wu xLI)xL; ............................................ (4.2)
A-A - 8
The reaction of the slab per meter is
R = w u XL2 ........................................................ (4.3)
2
The moment at mid span of the beam in Y -direction is
M
bellJn
=R L =(Wu ;L2 }xLI .................................. (4.4)
The total moment for both beams equals
M (wu
XL2
)xL; ................................................... (4.5)
loud 8
A/ concrete strips
.L-__ L;...:2=-1_2__ -:,,/
/
./
/
./
./
/
Fig. 4.2 Analysis of individual concrete strips supported on beams
104
It is clear that the full load transferred by the concrete strips causes a moment in the
X-direction of the slab and the full load is transferred again by the beams causing
bending moment in V-direction. This system of transferring the load is similar to a flat
slab system supported on four columns. The total moment in X-direction equals
(wu
-'--"---'''---''- ................................................... '" (4.6)
8
and the total moment in Y -direction equals
(wu ........... (4.7)
8
It can be concluded that whether the structural system is slab-beam system or flat
slabs as shown in FigA.3, the load is transferred in both directions. By comparing
Equations 4.6 and 4.7, it can be noticed that the largest moment develops in the longer
span direction.
",.
",.
",.
",.
",.
",.
,/
,/
",.
A
./

",.
",.
",.
",.
",.
",.
",. .
Fig. 4.3 Analysis of a flat plate system
4.3 Minimum Dimensions According to ECP 203
column
The Egyptian code requires certain minimum dimensions for different elements of the
flat slab system. These minimum requirements are summarized in Fig. 4.4.
105
Sbb wUho"",op
lLl36 with drop
where L is the longer span
Drop thickness (t.J)

> t,
t,I-4"
Drop width (S)
> LundercansideroJion
- 3
s

-lbt-
I--S-\
< =LJ,.2.:,::(s_m_al_l_er_s.;p_an--:..)
- 2
Column width (b)
L under consideration
20
b the bigger of (H= floor height)
15
300 mm*
* The width of the column may be taken equal to 250 mm provided that detailed
column moment transfer calculations were performed
Column head width (D)

4
Column Strip width (Cs)
cJ. L; , without drop
l Drop width (S) with drop
Field Strip width (F s)
Fs = L untlerconsitleration - C s
Marginal beam thickness (t)

I
Fig. 4.4 Minirnumflat slab dimensions ,according to ECP 203
106
, '-'-,-'-'-'-'---'-'--
t '. I
. : I I
______ __ _
'1
': : Column strip: I /.e: i
: I iN tl: .
i ,0., :. I "'0 I I
'"
c
'"
I
ti: Field strip:!' :....:1 ]l: i
, I I I L.t..t..
- --.----
1 -a: : i : 1::t f'Ii: ' u' , ....:I "', I,
o '_0_'_. ._._. c.
I 8 I I f _. a -','-'- .
. 'J:: I I ... ! :3'
_;3 --L----L_
i .' : . .: I . I
.....:!
j
i ' ': LJ-L2/2 ': ! : LJ-L2/2 :' i
.! I!: I I
I, 'I t '.
S
. It., : I
i ------r ---- ----. --. -- - --. -.---- ----
.: :! I : I
j , r:h:. ' ,.

'. ! I! : I
Exterior span
Interior span
Flat slab without drop panel
t-r-----I.- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -'-_-+_--'-
!
Field strip ,J. colunm strip; ..s']l

t--:-"'---f, ---------------- I __________ J.l
, ,
sl
I
'-'1
'" .....:!

S
J
J-!---, ----------------1---+!--i-
I -------------r--,""". -I
_._._._._._._.-:
.','
Exterior span
Interior' span
Flat slab with drop panel
Fig. 4.4 Miniinum flat slab diinensions (cont.)
107
0-
'"
...
0
c

u:!

g.
...
0
c

0-
'"
s
'5
x
u:!
c
'" 0..
'"
...
0
c

4.4 Analysis of Flat Slabs
Flat Slabs may be analyzed and designed by any method that ensures that all the
strength and serviceability requirements of the ECP 203 are satisfied. When slabs are
supported on a rectangular grid of columns, the code offers two simplified methods
for analyzing the flat slab system. The first method is the direct design method and the
, second one is the equivalent frame method. These two methods, which are mentioned
in section 6-2-5-3 of the ECP 203, will be discussed in detail in the following sections.
In addition, if the slabs have unusual geometric ,configurations or the columns are
spaced irregularly, neither of the code methods becomes applicable. For these special
cases, the designer may analyze the floor by using finite element analysis (computer
model), in which the slab is divided into small finite elements connected by nodes.
The stiffness matrix of each element is computed and the global stiffness matrix is
constructed. Having determined the deformation at each node, the element internal
forces can be evaluated (refer to Section 4.10 of this text).
4.5 Direct Design Method
4.5.1 Limitation of the direct method
To ensure that the moments at the critical sections are adequate, the ECP 203 requires
that the following design conditions be satisfied:
1. A minimum of three continuous spans in each direction.
2. The ratio of the longer to the shorter span within a panel should not exceed 1.3
3. Successive span lengths in each direction should not differ by more than 10%
4. Non-Successive span lengths in each direction should not differ by more than 20%
4.5.2 Definition of column strip and field strip
The distribution of moment varies continuously across the width of the slab paneL To
simplify the steel arrangement, the design moments are averaged over the width ofthe
column strip.
The column strip width should be taken as Y, the short direction for flat slabs without
drop panels. In the case of flat slab with drop panel, the column strip width equals the
drop width. The width of the field strip equals the difference between span length and
column strip width as shown in F\g. 4.5.
4.5.3 Calculation of slab load
The calculation of the slab load is carried out in a similar manner like solid slabs.
However, since the brick walls are often distributed over the plan, an average wall
load Ww is added to the desigriloads as follows:
Y
w
x hw xL b
w
xwalliength
w = ....................................... (4.S.a)
w areaof the floor
lOS
The ultimate loads for flat slabs without drop is
w. =1.4x(/sxy, +w - +w )+16x c jloonng w W LL (48 b)
In case of flat slabs with drop, the drop weight is considered b avera - . .
the drop over the total area of the slab then multiplving b y !pn
h
g
the area of
J& y concrete welg t as follows
W
_ SI XS2
drop - Y
c
Xld X--- LI xL2 ................................................... (4.9)
The ultimate loads for flat slabs with drop is
w. = 1.4 X (Is xYc +w
drop
+wjlooring +w
w
)+1.6xw LL (4.10)
(Yc = 25 kN Im
3
and Is in meters)
: I' I I I

: I: : i :

: !: : I :

: I: : i I
: i: : i :
, I I.'
: !: :!:
- - -1- - - -r ----:- ---- ---___ ._.t ---J. --- --
: .' : I I
I * ' I' I
--T--.---:------------+--"---:--
: i: : i :

A. Flat slab without drop: i L (long directiod> ! :
I I I' I
I: ::
Li2 field strip=L1- L:!/2 L2/2
SI=column strip width in the short direction_
S2=column strip width in the long direction_
td= drop th iclrness
Fig. 4.5 Definition of column and field strips
109
4.5.4 Statical Moment MD
The direct design method is an empirical procedure for establishing the design
moments at the critical sections. It is well known that the sum of the negative moment
at the supports and positive moment at midspan ora uniformly loaded beam is w,J} /8.
Accordingly, for a uniformly loaded slab with width L2, and span Lt. the total statical
moment Moequals
Mo =wu ...... ................................... (4.11)
To account for the effect of supports on the value of the bending moment, the code
gives the following equation for Mo calculations
M
= WU XL2 X(L _ 2XD}2 o 8 _ I_ 3 (long direction) ............. (4.12)
M 0 = W u :L1 X(L2 - 2X: J (short direction) ............ (4.13)
where D is the smallest distance at the intersection between the column and the slab. If
a supporting element does not have a rectangular cross section or if the sides of the
rectangle are not parallel to the span, it is to be treated as a square support having the
same area, as illustrated in Fig. 4.6.
The total static moment Mo is divided into a negative moment at the support Me and a
positive moment at midspan Ms as follows
Mc +Ms =M
o
.................. (4.14)
Both Me and Ms shall be distributed again between column and filed strips as
described in section 4.5.5.
I
0
_- ,
,- ,
- -'
--1_
89
\-
o
\. -\
X
Fig. 4.6 Definition of D for different flat slab systems
110
4.5.5 Distribution of the Statical Moment
To simplifY the analysis of flat slab floors, many design codes, including the ECP-
203, approximate the actual distribution of the transverse moments by two regions of
constant moment. The center strip, where the moment is the smallest, is called the
field strip or middle strip, and the strip in the column zones, where the moment is the
largest, is called the column strip.
The distribution of the moments between column strip and field strip can be
explained by examining Fig. 4.7. Beam A represents the column strip while beams B
and C represent the field strip. Since beam Ais rested directly on columns, beams B is
supported on beam A. If all of the beams are subjected to uniform load w, the
developed bending moment in beam A is larger than that in beam B. This is because
beam A carries the same uniform load w in addition to the reaction wLI2 from Beam
B. For an actual flat slab, the ratio of column strip moment to field strip moment is
variable and depends on the rectangularity ratio and the flexural stiffuess of the
exterior beams (if any) along the building perimeter.
Fig. 4.7 Representation of column and field strips
The total statical moment Mo is divided into positive and negative moments according
to the rules given in ECP-203 sec; 6-2-5-5. In the interior spans, 60% of Mo is
distributed to the negative moment region and 40% to the positive moment region as
shown in 4.8. This is approximately the case for a beam fixed from bothends and
uniformly loaded where the negative moment is (wL
2
II2) 67% and the positive
moment is (wL
2
124) 33% of the total moment ofwL
2
18.
111
b I strip and field strip varies
The distribution the negative depth is less than three
to column strip as shown in Fig.
4.8. t ent
., 01 d'f'" ) the nega Ive mom
-I th f floors that differ in spans (Wlthm 20/0 1 lerence , t
n e case 0 f the two-moments unless a momen
section of the slab. is designed I f0
4
r
l
the o1ve the distribution of Mo between
distribution is carned out. Tab e . an Ig.. 0"
column and field strip according to the Egyptlan Code.
t
I
I
10.15M.
07;
10.45 M.
I
25%
30%
5%
20%
20%
AT
30%
10%
20%
Colwnn strip
50%
IA
25%
20%
IA
15%
. Field strip
I
I
45%
IA
15%
IA
Interior panel
Colurrm strip
No marginal beam
Field strip
No marginal beam
Colurrm strip
With marginal beam
Field strip
With marginal beam
Fig. 4.8 Distribution of Mo between column and field strip
112
Table 4.1 Distribution of Mo between column and field strip
Strip type Marginal Exterior bay illterior bay
beam -ve moment +vemoment -vemoment -vemoment +ve moment
(extemal) (intemal)
Column no beam 25 30 50 45 25
strip with 20
beam
.
Field no beam 5 20 20 15 15
strip with 10
beam
.
*
the depth of the margmal beam should be at least =3 ts
Negative moment
/ (60%)

100%\
L Positive moment
(40%)
< ,,"p -,. ="""' = 45%
Field strip -ve moment = 15%
< "';p =25%
Field strip +ve moment = 15%
A: Moment distribution in interior panels (with or without marginal beam)
Negative moment
F (50%)
100%
Positive moment
(50%)
< "rip = (20%+50%)12=35%
Field strip -ve moment = (10%+20%)/2=15%
< m,_' =30%
Field strip +ve moment = 20%
B: Moment distribution in exterior panels with marginal beam
Fig. 4.9 Distribution Moment in flat slabs using the direct design method
113
4.5.6 Moment Correction
The distribution of Mo between the field strip and the column strip, as proposed by
ECP 203, is based on the assumption that the widths of the column strip and the field
strip are as shown in Fig.4.1Oa. If the field strip width is different from the ideal
length as shown in Fig. 4'.1 Ob, a correction needs to be made. The moment in the field
strip needs to be increased by multiplying their value by the correction factor
given in Table 4.2. ill addition, the moment in the column strip is reduced so that the
total bending is the same in either case as shown by the following equations .
A ctual width of F S.
M F.s.(com:cted) =M n(id.aI) x Ideal width of F S. .............. (4.15)
Me .s.(corrected) == {M F.s :(ideal) + Mc.s .(idea/)} - M F.s .(corrected) .. (4.16)
where the actual width and ideal length are given in table 4.2
Table 4.2 Actual width and ideal length in field strip.
Direction
Ideal width Actual width
Correction factor
Long direction Lz/2 Lz-
S
2
L/2
(Li-S2)
Short direction L
1
-Lzl2 L1-Sl L
1
- L2/2
(Ll-S
l
)

: . : drop panel: . :
, It' I I
s: i: :!, :
: : :
:. : I :
S
1
! !
.... .....,._-4------------- -- rJl
LJ:. i :
. "
:. r '. ..!
:!: ill'I,:
rfj-
- -- - -------------- --
I I
I , t I
I I
1 ' '
. , '
:
1 ' . ,
I :

----: i ,--------Lj.---- : --
: ..

Long direction

a. Ideal
b. Actual
Fig. 4.10 Moment correction for field strip in flat slabs with drop panels
114
4.5.7 Provision for Pattern Loading
If the slab is subjected to heavy live loads, negative moments shall fonn at midspan in
addition to the positive bending moments. If the live load (P) is greater than 1.5 the
dead loads (g), the negative bending in column strip in Ll direction can be estimated
as follows
( )()( )
2
2xp L2 2xD
M = g --- x - x L ---
-ve 3 40 I 3
and negative moment in the field strip in Ll direction is
M =( _ 2XP)x(i2)X(L _ 2XD)2
-ve g 3 100 I 3
where
Ll = span in direction 1 (refer to Fig. 4.5)
Lz = span in direction 2
D = width of the column at slab intersection (refer to fig. 4.6)
P = unifonn live loads
g = unifonn dead loads
................... {4.17)
................. {4.18)
4.5.8 Design Steps According to the Direct Design Method
The steps necessary to perfonn the designs are briefly summarized as follows:
1- Choose the appropriate flat slab system according to the intensity of the live
load and the architectural requirements.
2- Estimate the slab thickness according to code requirements
3- Calculate the total static moment to be resisted in the two directions.
4- Distribute the static moment between column strip and field strip.
5- Divide the resulting moments by strip width to obtain the moment per meter.
6- Design the sections to select the reinforcement.
7- Design the slab for punching shear.
Examples 1 and 2 illustrate the use of this method as applied to flat slabs with and
without drop panels. If the slab thickness is greater than 160 mm, an upper
reinforcement mesh should be provided to satisfy temperature and cracking .
requirements by the code.
115
4.6 Reinforcement of Flat Slabs
4.6.1 General . ,
, . n in Fi 411 and Fig. 4.12. In addItion,
Minimum bar extension reqUIrements areflglve 't' g. c'ommended that at least two
h
't' 'ty of the flat slab oors, 1 IS re Th
to ensure t e m egn . h ld through the core of the column. e
bottom bars in the column stnp s ou run
'minimum area of steel is given by
A ,= 0.6 xb xd (for all types of steel) ........................... (4.20)
S,mm i
y
" ," " ", '" 310 meters 55 stories, 2001
Photo 4.2 Menara Telekom, Kuala Lumpur, '
, 25th tallest building in the world
116
I
I,
I
:1
1

I

13

Min distances limits
b Ic Id1e
LnlS /Lnl4.S/Lnl3.3T Lnl3
B : Bottom reinforcement
T: Top reinforcement
L ; Center line distance
Ln ;Clear distance
,
I '
-----:;- d - - - - - - - -1
j E'
---------+--------- 'j
j 100%. i 100%. 1 ;3
I ----------1---------- I
'--.!.9Q2::'o] ,t C >1', 100% T
MaxO.l25L """, -------t
SOO/oB >I' .;<
n , __ ________ __l
SO%B
Ln
L
SO%B
r----+-__ _____ _
-"'"
----------
t 2 bars ofbars B should
d to the supports
Min50% B
100
0
0 B
FigA-Ila Reinforcement layout offlat slabs using bars
II7
j
o
,u
Bar length from the face of the support
Min length Max length
Symbol r b leT die f T g
Length O.20Lnl 0.24Ln
B : Bottom reinforcement
, T : Top reinforcement
L ; Center line distance
Ln :Clear distance
-c--------:-r----------l
o :-r .. ,
___ I
c b 50%B
/f
50%B

,
- - - - - - - :- -1
J
' , __ g " 50% B
-- b ',8'
__________ , g
-- SO%B d--
71
----------1
, -, I
50%B I
_______ _

50%B
f
50%B
50%B'
Min 75 It 75 nim
- - - ,r--
e
"::':':::':..:..:::j1+=";::::O--,-- - - - - - - -
SO%T ", ,
:.::;-;---- ,...... I g e " 50% B I .
5Q%T ,
a
at least 2 bac ofbars B should g at I 2 bars ofbars B should I '0
u
, extend to th supports 240 I ext.: d to the supports I'
B or3 /'H--Min50"1o B 0'
/ '- 50%B /' I 50'l'oB .....J

Ln
J

,."
L

FigA-II b Reinforcement layout of flat slabs using bent bars
118
A Top reinforcement mesh
B Bottom reinforcement mesh
C Additional top reinforcement for column strip
D Additional bottom reinforcement for column strip
(D)
0.7L
____ I
I ---l
I I
______ I I
rr-____
(B) i.i:;
I
(0.33 - 0.5) L
- - - - - - -
_!fL__ I
I 'B
(D) j
8
0.6L
I ---------l
I I
__ 1' __________ J
L
Fig. 4-12 Reinforcement layout of flat slabs using mesh
119
4.6.2 Column Head Reinforcement
Column heads should be reinforced with bars in the directions 1 and 2 as shown in
Fig. 4.13. Closed stirrups should be provided to secure the reinforcement of the
column head in place. Column head reinforcement should be designed to resist
flexural moments resulting from either equivalent frame analysis or bending
, transferred to columns. This reinforcement should not be less than 4% of the column
strip negative reinforcement per meter multiplied by the perpendicular span. ill the
case of circular columns, the required reinforcement is the sum of the two directions
and should be uniformly distributed along the perimeter.

__________________________________ J
\ \ \ \ \
span length =LI
reinforcement 1
Fig. 4.13 Reinforcement in column head
Area of reinforcement 1 11 Im'xL
z
............................................. (4.20)
. 100 s,co
Area of reinforcement 2 ........ ............................. ... (4.21)
100 .
120
4.6.3 Reinforcem t
. en at Openings in Flat Slabs
An opemng of a size not more than 0
of two middle strips as shown in F.4 span length may be formed in the intersec .
of required for the slab Ig .. ! 14 (zone A),. provided that the total am bon
the mtersection of the two col .WIt out the opemng is maintained H aunt
I' umn StripS h . owever
co umn stnp in either span shall be . ; no more t an one-tenth of the width of
amounts of reinforcement shall be .by openings (zone C). Equival e
more than one-quarter of th' on t e Sides of the opening In ent
openings. It should be noted in either strip shall be'
presence of the opening u Imate shear capacity is reduced d Y
.
: J I
-- .---------------. -----L___: i
. S: ! m-' i d i --j-------t------
en _._ t I V N I I I
j '-1-'-'- :
o : i f\:?I: .' '-,_. . '- - -f-.-.-
(,) I:
<0.25 Csx i j :
i ------------------------:-------i _______ __
: j <0.10 c' zone A :!:
, i sx [2SJf! ! I :
I .' ; i
N
, .
, .
, .
! t-- -1 i
____ :.. ______ '_ i <0.4 Ll : I
: zone C 1 -------:--------- : i :
.g : m': Zone B -------r------
'n I. I I I
- -.-:-._.- _._._.!-._._._.- : m :
::s : : '-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-':-'-'-'m-:
8 ------- ----i
l
----+----
L
-____ _ f- ______ L
./ LI : I :
t ..,1 :
u'i:.' --
__
,. .
. column strip, C
sx
! i -!
field strip ,
column strip C .
, sx
Fig. 4.14 Allowed 0P " d"
enmg Imensions and locations in flat slab t
sys ems
121
4.7 Punching Shear Strength of Flat Slabs
4.7.1 General
Punching sbear strength is one of tbe most critical design aspects in determining .the
flat slab thickness. There are two shear failure mechanisms that may be encountered in
.a flat slab system. The first is the one-way shear similar to that in beams. This type
rarely controls .the design of flat slab floors. The second is the two-way shear, in
which the failure surrounds the column forming a pyramid shape. Normally, the
stresses resulting from the two-way shear are much higher than that resulting from the
one-way shear.
Two-way shear failure mechanism is usually encountered in flat slab and footings.
Interior columns are generaliy subjected to shear with negligible moment transfer
from the slab to the columns. However, to ensure adequate shear strength, the
Egyptian code requires that part of the connecting moment be transferred between the
slab and the columns, resulting in additional punching shear .
The combination of shear and unbalanced moment is unavoidable at edge and comer
column locations and occurs at interior columns because of unequal spans and lateral
loads. Prevention of punching failure of column-slab connections transferring
moment depends on an accurate calculation of shear stresses produced by moment
transfer.
One of the most widely used analysis methods is based on summing the stresses
developed by vertical shear and the stresses developed by the unbalanced moments.
This detailed analysis is adopted by the ACI and the Egyptian code of practice.
However, the computational time required for such analysis is still costly and is not
suitable for routine design computations. The Egyptian code also offers a simplified
analysis method for calculating punching shear stress due to both gravity and moment
transferred to columns due to torsion. In this method, a magnification factor is used to
account for the portion transferred by the unbalanced moment
122
4.7.2 Critical Sections
For both design methods, the critical section for punching shear is at d/2 from the face
of the column. Fig. 4.15 shows several examples of internal, external and comer
columns. If the openings are located less than 10 times the slab thickness, the code
requires that the critical perimeter be reduced as illustrated in Fig 4.16. Tn floors with
drop panels, two critical sections should be investigated as shown in Fig. 4.17.
a,=c,+dl2
I" -I
'--
! d/2
,
,
,
------T;/;-'
c
critical shear perimeter
U=a,+ a2 +2 a3 +2b 1
Fig. 4.15 Critical shear perimeter for internal, exterior and corner columns
considered as
free edge
I ~ I
. ,
, ,
~ ~ 1
, ,
~ - - - - - - - l - - - - ~ - J
dl2
1
a
Fig.4.16. Critical sections for flat slabs with openings
123
l
~
i-
~ 90 L
~
Critical sheaJ
'\ Critical shear
perimeter
Critical shear
penm er
perimeter
.\ 0 \.
\. 0 .\
a)Flat slab without drop
panel or column head
b}Flat slab with column
head&without drop panel
0+<1
c1+d1
I
J
\ ~
J
''''
/ ~ I
I"
-
I
:g
d1=d+td
'\ Critical shear
Critical shear)
Critical shear perimeter 2
perimeter 2 Critical shear c1
perimeter 1
perimeter 1
o
c}Flat slab with drop panel
&without column head
Oro!! width+ d
0+d1
I
I ~
~ /
I"
-
"p/
:g
d1=i:1+tc
Critical shear!
J
J
I
'Critical shear
perimeter 2
perimeter 2
1\ Critical shear
Critical shea
~
perimeter 1
perimeter 1
d}Flat slab with drop panel
& column head
Fig. 4.17 Critical shear perimeter in flat slab
124
4.7.3 Concrete Punching Shear Strength
The Egyptian c?de states that the smallest of the following three values represents the
concrete punchmg shear strength q
cup
qcuP = 0.316' JZ:
b '11:
................................................. (4.22.A)
qcuP = 0.8 + 0.2) x JZ:
o '11:
............................................... (4.22.B)
qcuP =O.316!i Imm
2
.......................................... (4.22.C)
where
a the column dimension in the analysis direction.
b IS the column dimension in the perpendicular direction.
a for interior, exterior, comer column respectively.
bo IS the cntlcal shear perimeter.
The. applied shear calculated using either the detailed analysis described in
sectIOn 4.7.4 the SImplIfied method described in section 4.7.5 should be Ie th
concrete punchmg-shear strength q ,ss an
cup-
Photo 4.3 Flat slab and solid slabs during construction in Dubi
125
4.7.4 Detailed Analysis
4.7.4.1 Introduction
Concentric loading on flat slab systems as shown in Fig. 4.18, produces uniform
punching shear stress that can be calculated from Eq. 4.23
quP = ......... : ................................ (4.23)
o
where
Qup is the ultimate design shear force.
b
o
is the critical shear perimeter bo=2 [(a+d)+(b+d)]
d is the effective flat slab depth.
Fig. 4.18 Concentric shear stress calculations for interior column
The case of concentric loading is rarely encountered in real structures. Therefore, the
Egyptian code imposes a minimum amount of unbalanced moment that should be
transferred to columns. This amount varies according to the location of the column.
The moment transferred between slab and column, produce a complex behavior
involving flexure, shear and torsion.
4.7.4.2 Calculations of the Punching Stresses
Figure 4.19 illustrate the moment and shear transfer at interior and exterior columns,
where a shear and an unbalanced moment are transferred from the slab ,to column. A
fraction of the unbalanced moment transferred by flexure (11 Mi, where 11 is
calculated from
1
Yj " ................. (4.24)
in which
126
'\
Jf
I
i
r;= fraction of the unbalanced moment transferred by flexure
c[= is the column dimension in the analysis direction
C2= is the column dimension in the perpendicular direction
d= depth of the flat slab
The moment transferred to the column by eccentric shear stress is (/'q Mf) where
r
q
= 1- rf .............................................. (4.25a)
r
q
" = l-
r
f' ............................................ (4.25b)
r
qy
= 1- rfy ............................................. (4.25c)
This moment causes additional shear stresses that have to be combined with those
reSUlting from the vertical shear. The code requires that the moment transferred be
taken as 50% and 90% of the negative bending of the column strip for the interior and
exterior columns, respectively. For an edge bay, the amount of.the negative bending
transferred is reduced by half
y
a-Internal column
q
~
D-b xd
o
c
b-Edge column
./
y
/
/
B
Fig. 4.19 Punching stress distribution due to an unbalanced moment
127
\=Cl "--I
D A
~ r . . ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ . r x
c

_ .....

Comer column layout
-at
I
Critical section
CCD i CAB
y 1----4----1
Transfer of moment at comer column
Shear Stresses due to vertical loads
Shear Stresses due to Mx
Shear Stresses due to My
Total Shear Stresses
Fig. 4.20: Punching shear stresses for a corner column
128
The case of comer column subjected to eccentric punching stress is illustrated in Fig.
4.20. The centroid of the critical perimeter lies closer to the inside face of the column.
Hence, shear stresses due to moment transfer are larger at the outside perimeter. Ifthe
shear stress due to transferred moment is larger than shear stress due to gravity load qp
as defined by Eq. 4.26, a negative shear stress may occur at these points (comers A,
C). The punching shear stresses calculated using the code-detailed method is given in
Eqs. (4.27-4.30). These stresses should be added to the punching stresses caused by
the vertical loads. The final shear stress at each point for the comer column is
computed using Eqs. (4.31-4.33).
The shear stress due to gravity loads is given by:
qp = bQuPd ................................ : ....... , ................ (4.26)
o
.
The shear stresses due to unbalanced moment My are given by:
............................................ (4.27)
My Yqy CCD
----"--"----'...... . ........................................... (4.28)
J
CY
The shear stresses due to unbalanced moment Mx are given by:
q.tl = Mx ~ q X CCB ............................................. (4.29)
c.t
_ Mx Yqx CAD
q.t2 - J ........................................... (4.30)
c.t
The total stresses at column comer points equal to:
qA = qp +.qyl-qx2 ............................................... (4.31)
qB =qp + qxl + qyl .............................................. (4.32)
qc = qp + qxl - qy2 ............................................... (4.33)
These stresses should be checked against concrete shear strength given in Eq. 4.22.
where the properties CAB, Ceo, CCB,C
AD
, Jcy,and J
cx
for different column locations are
given by:
129
Case of interior column (Fig. 4.19)
....... : ...................... (4.34)
Case of exterior column (Fig. 4.19)
J d b C
2 + 2xd C ~ D + 2xd XC;B + al xd
3
............. ,(4.36)
cy = .x I X AB 3 3 6
J = d Xbl
3
+ b
,
xd
3
+ d Xbl
2
xa
l
............................. (4.37)
c.t 6 6 2
Case of corner column (Fig. 4.20)
2
C _ al
AB - (2xb
,
+2 xaJ
J
-d b C 2 +d C ~ D + d X C ~ + al xd
3
....................... (4.38)
cy - x I X AB 3 3 12
J
-d xC2 + d X C ~ D + d X C ~ + b
l
xd
3
.................... (4.39)
c.t - xal CB 3 3 12
130
/
4.7.5 Simplified Method
The Egyptian code offers a simplified design method for calculating the total
punching shear stress including shear stresses due to moment transferred to columns.
In this simplified method, the shear stress due to vertical gravity loads is magnified by
the factor p to account for unbalanced moment transferred to columns. The method
implies that the estimated additional increase in shear stresses due to moment
transferred from slab to column is 15%, 30%, 50% for the interior, exterior and comer
column, respectively.
The shear stress is given by
quP = Qup j3 ................................................. (4.40)
b
o
d
where
Qup is the ultimate design shear force
p = 1.15 for interior column
p = 1.30 for exterior column
p = 1.50 for comer column
b
o
is the critical shear perimeter
d is the effective slab depth
Fig. 4.21 shows the critical shear perimeter and the loaded area for an interior column
in flat slab floor. According to this figure, the calculation procedure is as follows:
Q
up
=Wux{LlxL2-alxbl} ........................................... (4.41)
Qup x1.15
qui = ..................................................... (4.42)
b
o
d .
Table 4.3 summarizes the calculations of the critical shear perimeter and design shear
force for interior, exterior and comer columns.
131
. Loaded area
Fig. 4.21 loaded area and critical shear perimeter for an interior column
Table 4.3 Calculation of critical shear perimeter and design shear force
Type of column
Interior Column
Exterior Column
Corner column

al --, L22
al
al
L2
Shape
' rnI b ,bl
Ll LII2

LI
a+d
a+d
a+d/2
al
b+d
b +d/2
b+d/2
bl
perimeter (bo)
2(al+bl)
al+2bl
al+bl
1.15
1.3
1.5
P
Qup
Wu(Ll XL2 -al xbl ) LI XL2 b)
LIXL2 b)
W (----a
l
x
I
W (----a
l
x
I
u 2
u 4
132

I
I

II
I
j
I

i
,
I
I
4.8 One-Way Shear Strength
Stresses resulting from one-way shear are normally low, and usually do not control the
design. One-way shear stresses must be resisted by concrete strength only and without
any reinforcement contribution. The Egyptian code gives the following equation for
one-way concrete shear strength:
qcu=0.16.Jli ................................................... (4.43)
The critical section for one-way shear is taken at dl2 from the face of the column as
shown in Fig. 4.22. The calculated shear stress should be less than concrete shear
strength. For example, shear stresses for the interior column shown in Fig. 4.22 are
given by
,-
. =Wu
XL
2XLx <
qui L2 xd - qcu ............................................. (4.44)
w xLlxL
qu2 = u LI xd Y <qcu ............................................. (4.45)
... 1
,
.. _ .. _ .. _ .. _"."i-...
.... critical shear sections
,

i dl2

,
, 1 j i
: I: : column
! j I j i
. / /1 : :
_.L.._.. .._ .. L/-:._ .. _.L._ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. L...
! dl2--1 !
Fig. 4.22 Critical sections for one-way shear in interior columns
133
Example 4.1
It is required to design the Flat Slab Roof shown in Fig. 1. (500x 500
mm) are only allowed as shown. For architectural purposes, It IS reqmred that no drop
panels or columns' heads to be used.
Data:-
Concrete Characteristic Strength
Steel Yield Stress
Live Load
Flooring
Equivalent wallloa:ds
Floor Height
25
360
4.0
2.0
1.5
N/mm2
N/mm2
kN/m
2
kN/m
2
kN/m
2
3.50 m
Solution: . d'
The floor consists of three equal spans in each direction, the span ill the long lrectlOn
equals L\ = 6.0 m and the span in the short L2=5.0 m . .
The system satisfies the requirements of the empmcal method speCified ill the Code-
article (6-2-5-5)
The average length Lavg=5.5 m
Slab thickness (i,):-
150mm
t s = bigger of
Liang = 6000 = 187.5 mm
32 32
Take ts = 200 mm
Column Dimensions (bxb)
300mm
b = bigger of
helear = (3500-200) = 220 mm
15 15
6000 =300 mm
20 20
Thus b=500 mm is satisfactory
134

, , ,
- - - - - - --
I I" I I "1<2 I I
---1Q]
,... >--
I'- I I I' --
I ci I I I I I I I I I
,x I I I I I I
g g lit) 11 I' I I I I' I I'
. . Nil I I I I
CD (') ,0 I 1 I I I 1
I I' I I' I I'

I I I I I I I I I

c
I I I I I I I I I
N
B
Eo
00

I I I I
o I I I I I I
'I x I I 1 I I' 1 I'
g. It) '@'I"I"I
(') I' I I I' I I I' I I I'
I I I I I I
,I I I I I I

I I I l' I I'
N , i----i
I I I I I' I I'

'0 I I' I I, I I,
o 0 I X I I I I I I I I I
o It) I, II t6:2Cl' II ,I I,
<D (') Ie. I I I I I I I I I
,I I, I I I I,

N 'I I: I I: I J.'
..-: I (0.25 x 0,70) m ,(0.25 x 0170) I (0.25 x
- - - - - -
- -
I. l
j
"0
Cl
c
.3
1.251. 2.50
5.00
1
Short direction
l 2.50 l
2.50 1.1.25
t 5.00 I 5.00
i 15.00 i
clJ
4
Fig. EXA.l Flat Slab Roof
All DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS
135
Marginal Beams (bbxtb)
Punching stresses are usually high in exterior and comer columns. Hence, a
marginal beam is considered with thickness tb 3ts 600 mm
Taket
b
= 700 mm & mm
Column and Field Strips:-
Assume that width of Column Strip = Y2 Smaller side = 1/2x5.0 = 2.50 m .
Width ofField Strip:-
For short direction = 6.00-2.50 = 3.50 m
For long direction = 5.00-2.50 = 2.50 m
Step 2: Minimum steel requirements:-
For fy = 360 N/mm2
A m',n(long) = 0.6 xlOOOx (200- 20) = 300 mm 21m'
s, 360
A m"n(short) = 0.6 mm
2
/m'
s, 360
Step 3: Load calculations
Dead Load, gs
Own weight + Flooring + Equivalent Wall Loads
= 25xO.20+ 2.0+ 1.5 = 8.5 kN 1m
2
Live Load, Ps= 4.0 kN/rr?
Since the live loads is less than 0.75 the dead loads
Wsu 1.50 (gs + Ps)
1.5 x (8.50 + 4.0)
18.75 kN/uf
Step 4: Design of Strips
Step 4-a: Long Direction
Step 4-a-i: Statical system and bending moment
M = Wsu xL2 (L _ 2x D)2
o 8 I 3
As no coluum head is used D=b=0.50 m
136
_ 18.75X5( 2X0.5)2
M. - 8 6.0--
3
- =376.3 kN.m
Percentage of moments is taken from Table 4.1
<
Columnstrip-vemoment=169.33 kN.m(45%)
Negative moment
225.78 kN.m(60%)
Field strip -ve moment = 56.45kN.m (15%)
. . < Column strip +ve moment =94.08 kN.m(25%)
PosItIve moment
150.52 kN.m (40%
Field strip +ve moment = 56.45kN.m (15%)
Distribution of Mo for an interior bay
Step 4-a-ii: Design of sections
Since the width of the column strip is 2 5 m the maximu t'
interior panel per meter equals ., m nega lve moment at the
169.33
Mu =---z:s- = 67.73 kN.mlm'
R = Mu _ 67.73xl0
6
feu xbxd
2
- 25x1OOOx180
2
=0.084
For a =0.0 0)=0.107
A - liJ feu b d 25
,- x-f X X =0.107x-x1OOOxI80=1337mm2Im'
y 360
use ( 9 14 /m') as negative column strip reinforcement in the long direction
The design for the rest ofthe long direction critical section is given in the figure
Step 4-b: Short Direction:-
Step 4-b-i: Statical system and bending moment:-
M. = w,u xLI (L _ 2XD)2
8 2 3
As no column head is used D=b=0.50 m
18.75X6( 2xO 5)2
8 5.0--
3
-'- = 306.25 kN.m
137
Step 4-b-ii: Design of sections
Since the width of the column strip is 2.5 Ill, the maximum negative moment at the
interior panel per meter equals
Mu = 137.81 =55.12 kN.mlm'
2.5
since this is the secondary direction d=200-30=170 mm -
R
55.12 X 10
6
= 0.076
25 x 1000x 170
2
For a =0.0 0)=0.097
A = {J)X feu xbxd = 0.097 ~ x l x 1 7 = 1144 mm
2
1m'
'i
y
360 .
use (612/m'+314 /m') as negative column strip reinforcement of the short direction
The design for the rest of the short direction critical sections is given in the figure
Step 5: Design of edge column strip
Due to the presence of the marginal beam, the moment in the exterior striplm' equal
half the moment in the interior strip/m'.
So, the reinforcement in the exterior strip/m equals halfthe reinforcement in the
interior strip/m'. (While considering the minimum steel requirements).
Step 6: Check for negative reinforcement in the field span
As gs >2/3 p., no top reinforcement is required. However, since the slab thickness is
greater than 160 mm, shrinkage top mat is needed (use 6 101m' in the long direction
and 5 101m' in the short direction)
Step 7: Design for Punching Shear for Interior Column
Assume concrete cover of 20 mm
d = 200-20 = 180 mm
at =b
t
=500 +180 = 680 mm
Qtip = 18.75 x 5.0 x 6 - 18.75 x 0.68 x 0.68 = 554 kN
~ =1.15 (case of interior column)
138
bo = 2 x (680+680) =2720 nun
Qup P
qU=bT
o
554 x 1000 x 1.15 = 1.3 N I mm
2
2720 X 180
qcuP is the smallest of
Ii
J{f
5 2
1. qcUP =0.316 -.!L=0.316 -=1.29N Imm <1.6 .... .o.k
Yc 1.5
2. qCUf> u:: {25 =1.93 Nlmm
2
b Vr: 500 Vu
3. qcup=0.8(-+0.2)x -I!.. =0.8(-+0.2)x -=1.51Nlmm
2
ad fi 4 x180 JfI5
b
o
Yc 2720 1.5
Note: a =4.0 for interior columns
Since qu ;:: qcuP' the slab is considered safe regarding to punching
The punching strength of the exterior and comer columns can be checked in similar
manner.
139
Design of Long Direction
Column Strip (Width=2.50 m) Field Strip (Width=2.50 m)
1 ............. ! ..................... tI
6.00 6.00 -6.00 6.00
Mo=376.3 kN.m
____ ____ __ aloMa 20% 1/

" 30% 25,}o
10% 20%
20% 15%
37.63 75.26
Mu
75.26 188.15
75.26 56.45
kN.m
112.90 94.00
15.10 30.10
Mu
30.10 75.26
30.10 22.58
kN.m1m
45.16 37.60
d=180 d=180 d=180 d=180 d=180 d=180 d=180 d=180
R
0.037 0.093 0.019 0.037
0.056 0.046 0.037 0.028
OJ 0.045 0.121 0.022 0.045
0.069 0.057 0.045 0.033
As 563 1513 275 563
mnitm
863 713 563 414
Aslm 612
614
+316 610
310
+312
6q;10 3q;12 310 614
+3q;14 +312
140
11
I:
Design of Short Direction
Column Strip (Width=2.5m)
Field Strip (Width=3.50 m)
5.00
5.00
Mo=306.3 kN.m
5.00
5.00
______ ____ ____
30% 25%
10%
20%
20%
15%
Mu 61.25 153.13

30.63
61.25
61.25
45.94
________ .....:,.61;,:;.2::::5:...-__
36.75 30.62
8.75
17.50
17.50
13.13
d=170
d=170
d=170 d=170
d=170
d=170
d=170 d=170
R 0.034
0.085
0.051
0.042
0.012
0.024
0.024
0.018
Cil 0.041
0.109
0.062
0.051
0.014
0.028
0.028
0.021
165
335
335
250
As 481 1291
mrrYm ____ ____
737 600
,As/m 69112
39112
+39114
99114 69110 69110
69112'
141
\: 1.25
1
B -r Field Strip
" 2.50
1
i----y
I
1 EI
I 01
I .....
I
I I
___ LL ___ _
I I
.EI
NI
-W-
61
'1@.1
1
-t---n--
1 I
: I
A -r Column Strip
" 2.50
I
1 .....1
1 'So 1
1 <01 .
1 II 1
: I
--1-t-t--- --
, II' 1
lEI EI
-
I
I I I
I I I
I
---..J--I--I---t---
I I
I
1
1
1
1
1 1

1
1
-J
1 I
i I
--r-----i
I
I
1
1
1
1
I
I
! I
___ ---I
B ..J, A ..J,
Reinforcement Details
Long Direction
LEGEND
------ TOP
I
----- BOTTOM
142
- ./:>.
w
t
OJ
o

s:
Ir-
1
m
IXi
IZ
I 0
I
d
"0

::r::s
05'
::+..,
0
0
_. CD
CD 3
o CD
::r.::s
o .....
::s 0
CD
6l
u;.
10
I
II I
---I-f---
I
,
--------l
10) ,

..... 0'
13"
3 I '
.....

---I-.L
I I ,------
I ' , -
I""w
l

10
'3'
I
I - __ L __
--II ,
, I
I ,
,
h,
--a-i
.1
--I--:-1-r-------- I
""',0), ---1 t'. '6.,
... -;s-- -

, ,
_____ ;-----d-__ ! __ I---'-L+--______
,I , 3' 10)' 3 l I 1 , ,
&> , L\?'
"'" ..... , "'"
..... , 0 , ..... ,
13', ,
---.@.L__ 1 '__ @-L-_
J..()2.50
1.25
Field Strip
3.50
Column Strip
/

i
3c1>12/m

i
, / 3c1>12/n. ,
-i---- -- 0.30 L 6c1> 1 O/m 0.30 Ln ---r----]--- Additional 6c1>14/m
I L 0.20 Ln
Z
'!' L I / I 0.20 Ln I j3c1>16/m / I
!
! \ ! \ !
I 6c1>14/m I (3c1>12+3c1>14)/m i
iiI
! Ln ! Ln 1
9.03 ---LJ=J--- 6.00
-- - --- -_. -- - -

Section A-A (Column Strip-Long Direction)

! I
I I
-r--- --- 6c1>1U/m

,
0.22 Ln --- --r-1--
\<l\J'lU"'<l\J'l;l}lm
!
0.22 Ln /
I 1 L
I
I I I
; ..
I
$3c1>10+3c1>12)/m
!
\6c1>10/m
!
i I
I
-+- Ln
i
Ln
!
I
_ 1. _______ ___ ,-__1 ____
c------ 9.03 -----:T:--- 6.00
Section B-B (Field Strip-Long Direction)
Cross sections in the long direction
..,..
I . ..l:>-
V>
qJ\
I '
I '
..
I
!
0.30L
0.20 L
I
,
I J.. Ln "'L I
L__ --- __ LJ.__ I
I. 7.52 I.. 5.00 !
Section C-C (Column Strip-Short Direction) I
qJ
I
I ,
r---T-
610/m
I .. 0.22 Ln
r--- ,., I
j6
f
10/m.

I
I
0.22 Ln --r--r-
,- .. I
I
I
I J .. I Ln - L I I.. L,
=t I
' 7.52 .. 5.00 ,
I
fection D-D (Field Strip-Short Direction)
; Cross sections in the short direction
ii"';'ii ',.t Co" '!r ,'" .\ p 1'" t' ,', '''''''1''$'1

CD
3

Cil
I
I
I
I
I
----+-----
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

0"0
O'l 5a.-c
-e. :T S/O
..... 9:ro
o@o
3'Q,g

I.; I !Ol \
_______ -1
-;- -
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
, ...

I$Q.
ie." CJ)
'0 ct
-6.
_ s
0-
3

en
;a.
Ire
I m C/)
\ I
I
Z
3
Cl en
I en
s. ::r
0-
n OJ-t
CD 0 0
3 g-c
1l 3
3
CD

___________ w- ___ L
I -e. I
I..... I I
I e I I
I I 3 I
I II
_L---"--
1.25 3.50 I 2.50
Field Strip Column Strip
g
1\)2"
e.,,3
10 :J
sa
::I.
-c
Example 4.2
It is required to design the flat slab Roof shown in Fig. EX4.2. Columns (500x 500
mm) are only allowed as shown.
Data:-
Concrete Characteristic Strength
Steel Yield Stress
Live Load
Flooring
Equivalent wall loads
Floor Height
Solution:-
25
360
10.0
2.0
1.5
N/mm
2
N/mm2
kN/m
2
kN/m
2
kN/m
2
3.50 m
Since live load is relatively high and there is no architecture restriction, use flat slab
with drop panels.
The floor consists of three equal spans in each direction, the span in the long direction
equals L
J
= 6.0 m and the span in the short direction L2=5.0 m.
The system satisfies the requirements of the empirical method specified in the Code-
article (6-2-5-5).
Slab thickness (fs):-
150mm
t s = bigger of
Liang = 6000 = 166.67 mm
36 36
Take ts = 200 mm
Column Dimensions (bxb)
300mm
b = bigger of he/ear = (3500 - 200) = 220 mm
15 15
LI 600
-=-=300mm
20 20
Take b=500 mm
147
I 'I II' J
I I I I I
I I I
I I' I I I' I
I I I I I
I I, I II' I
I I I I I
_______ +I__ ______ _
-'I.--I!---t-
Column Strip ______ _
I -------+1-0.-1 _I I I I I I
E I lEI' I II' I I i
00 0 I @ I I, I I,'
C! c: 0 I IE' I I, I I
CX)\O -<i I 1..21 I I I I
:1-l--'l.--'"-'i--lZ<<0-4-: f m--'
I I I I, I I
'I I', I I I I I
I I I I @ 1,1 I
'I I 'I I I I I I
I
I I I I I I
,I I, I I 'I I I
I I I I I I I
o 0
o 0
-a -<i

Fig. EX 4.2 Flat Slab Roof with drop panel
AU DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS
Short direction
148
Drop Panel
-Dimensions of Drop panels S
" LI/3
" L212
Taking the Drop Panel Dimensions 2.00 x 2.00 (refer to roof layout)
Thickness of Drop Panel
Thickriess of drop panel under the slab" t/4 = 20014 = SO mm
Taking the total depth at drop panel = 200+S0 = 2S0 mm
Marginal Beams (bbxtb)
No marginal beam is provided
Column and Field Strips:-
of Column Strip = width of drop panel';" 2.0 m (in each direction)
WIdth ofField Strip:-
For Long Direction = S.00-2.00 = 3.0 m
For Short Direction = 6.00-2.00 = 4.0 m
Step 2" M" "
" ,"'mum Steel Requirement
For fy = 360 N/mm
2
A (l ) 0.6
s,min ong = 360 x 1000x(200- 20) == 300 mm
2
1m'
As,min(short) == x 1000x(200 -30) == 283 mm2 I m'
Minimum Steel Reinforcement at the location of drop panel
A (l ) 0.60
s,min ong = 360 xI000X(2S0-20)==383mm2Im'
A (h ) 0.60
s,min\S ort == 360 x 1000 x (2S0-30) == 367 mm
2
lm'
Step 3: Calculation of loads
There is additional weight due to the presence of SO mm dr . h
. op In t e column strip
W =: 25 S x S 2 x 2 .
,/rap xt,l XLT=25xO.05x--=0.1667 kN/ 2
I x 2 5x6 m
149
Dead load, gs = Own weight + Flooring + Drop + Equivalent Wall Loads
= 25 xO.20+ 2.0 +0.167 + 1.5 = 8.667 kN 1m
2
Live load, Ps = 10.0 kN/m
2
Since the live loads is greater than 0.75 the dead loads
l.4gs + 1.6ps
1.4 x 8,667 + 1.6 x 10
28.13 kN/m
2
Step 4: Design of Strips
Step 4-a: long Direction
Step 4-a-i: Statical system and Bending Moment
M = Wsu xL2 (L _ 2XD)2
o 8 I 3
As no column head is used D=b=0.50 m
Mo = 6.0- 2X
3
0.5f= 564.6 kN.m
Step 4-a-ii: Moment Correction
Since the width of the column strip is less than Y2 the short span and the flat slab is
with drop panel, moment correction needs to be carried out. The correction is applied
to the field strip and then the column strip moment is adjusted accordingly. The
correction factor equals to the ratio of the actual width of the filed strip to the width of
the filed strip in case of no drop panel is used (ideal width). The ideal column strip
width equals 2.S m and the ideal field strip width is given in following table:
Long direction
Actual width of filed strip I Ideal width of filed strip I correcti on factor
3 I 5-2.5=2.5 I
1.2
150
I
II
I
r---------------------------------___ ~ ~
The calculatio.n o.fbending mo.ments in the lo.ngitudinal directio.n o.f . t . b . -- .------------------------------------,
. . an In eno.r ay IS
given In the following table:
Negative mo.ment (kN.m) Po.sitive mo.ment (kN.m)
field &trip
column strip
(15%)
(25%)
84.7
141.16
field strip
column strip
(20%)
(%50)
befo.re
112.92
282.31
co.rrectio.n
1.2x84.7
225.86-101.6
-101.6
124.2
After
1.2x112.92
(112.92+282.31 )-
correctio.n =135.5
135.5 =259.73
Step 4-a-iii: Design of Sections
Since the width of the column stri is 20m h' .
interio.r panel per meter equals: p . , t e maximum negative mo.ment at the
M = ~ ,
u 2.0 -129.86 kN.m /m
129.86x10
6
25 x 1000 X 2302 = 0.098
Fo.r a =0.0 0)=0.129
A - (1) x
fcu
b d 0 25
S - f-x x = .129x-xlOOOx230-2063m 2/ '
y 360 - m m
Step 4-b: Short Direction
Step 4-b-i: Statical system and Bending Moment
M = w,u xL) (L 2 x D)2
o 8 2 --3-
As no. co.lumn head is used D=b=0.50 m
M - 28.13X6( 2XO.5)2
o - 8 5.0 - 3"- = 459.5 kN.m
Percentage o.f mo.ments is taken fro.m Table 4.1
151
,
Step 4-b-ii: Moment Correction
Since the width o.f the co.lumn strip is less than Y, the sho.rt span and the flat slab is
with drop panel, mo.ment co.rrectio.n needs to. be carried o.ut. The co.rrectio.n is applied
to. the field strip and then the co.lumn strip mo.ment is adjusted acco.rdingly. The
co.rrectio.n facto.r equals to. the ratio. o.fthe actual width o.fthe filed strip to. the width o.f
the filed strip in case of no. drop panel is used (ideal.width). The ideal co.lumn strip
width equals 2.5 m and the ideal field strip width is given in the fo.llo.wing table:
Sho.rt directio.n
Actual width of filed strip I Ideal width of filed strip I correction factor
4
1
6-2.5=3.5
I
1.143
Step 4-b-iii: Design of Sections
Since the width of the co.lumn strip is 2.0 m, the maximum negative mo.ment at the
interio.r panel per meter equals
M = 216.6 =108.3 kN.m /m'
u 2.0
The depth in the sho.rt direction=250-30=220 mm
R = Mu 108.3xl06 =0.09
feu xb xd
2
25 x 1000 x 220
2
Fo.r a =0.0 0)=0.116
A =(1)X
fcu
xbxd =0.1l6x 25 x 1000 x 220 = 1773 mm
2
/m'
S fy 360
Step 5: Design of edge column strip
Due to. the presence o.f the marginal beam, the value o.f the bending mo.ments in the
exterio.r strip/m' equal to. half the value o.f the bending mo.ments in the interio.r
strip/m'.
Acco.rdingly, the reinfo.rcement in the exterior strip/m equals halfthe reinforcement in
the interio.r strip/m'. (While considering the minimum steel requirements).
Step 6: Negative reinforcement in the midspan
Since g. >2/3 Ps (8.6>2/3 x 10=6.67), no. negative mo.ments will be developed at
midspan and no. to.p reinforcement is required fo.r such a reaso.n. However, since the
slab thickness is greater than 160 mm, to.p reinforcement is needed to. resist shrinkage
and temperature stresses.
Provide 6 <l> 10 /m' in bo.th directio.ns.
152
,W

Step 7: Design for Punching Shear for Interior Column
rop pane s, two critical sections should be Since the floor is flat slab with d I
investigated as shown in figure.
Step 7.1: Section 1
d = 200-20 = 180 mm
at =b
t
=2000 +180 = 2180 mm
Qup = 28.13 x 5.0 x 6 - 28.13 x 2.18 x 2.18 = 710 kN
=1.15 (case of interior column)
I"
al=2180
"I
I
-.-
:--------------------'
1 1
I I
.
500
1 1
1
1
1
.
1 1
'"t""' .
218Q
1-1 0
1
1
1
00 1
1 I
I fl
1

-
.
1
.------1
1
:
-N .
,
1
1
1
.E
1
1
180
1
1
1
:
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
I 1
1 1 -y
1 1
...L... t
--
--jCII-
critical shear section I
I
2000
b
o
= 2 x (2180+2180) =8720 rnrn
qu=QupfJ 71OxlOOOx1.15_ 2
b
o
d 8720 x 180 -0.52Nlmm
qcuP is the smallest of
1. qcup=0.316 IZ:=0.316 (25 =1.29Nlmm
2
<16 .ok
VY: ..... .
2. qCU[!=0.316(0.5+!:)x rz: =0.316(0.5+500)x f25 =193NI 2
b Vr: 500 VIS' mm
I
critical section I
3. q
=08(ad+02) Of8(4x180 HJ5
cup. b . x - = . --+ 0.2) x -- = 0 92 N I 2
o Yc 8720 1.5' mm
Note: a. =4.0 for interior columns
since qu<qcup, section 1 is considered safe
153
Step 7.2.: Section 2
Assume concrete cover of 20 mm
d = 250-20 = 230 rom
at =b
t
=500 +230 = 730 tnIt.i.
Qup = 28.13 x 5.0 x 6 - 28.13 x 0.73 x 0.73 = 829 kN
=1.15 (case of interior column)
b
o
= 2 x (730+730) =2920 inm
= QuI' fJ = 829 x 1000 x 1.15 = 1.42 N I mm
2
: q" b
o
d 2920 x 230
.. ,
;
.,'
qcup is the smallest of
1. q =0.316 r7:=0.316 f2s =1.29 Nlmm
2
cuI' fYc V 1.5
2 q =0316(05+!:)x 0: =0.316(0.5+500)X f25 =1.93Nlmm
2
cup' bfrc 500 V1.5
3. q = 0.8 (a d + 0.2) x r:r: = 0.8 (4 x 230 + 0.2) x f2s = 1.68 N I mm
2
cup b
o
Vr: 2920 VIS
Note: a. =4.0 for interior columns
2
Qcup==1.29 N/mm
Since qu>qcup' the slab is considered unsafe
:---r:
500
=-1---: 1
dl2=115mm :1.' \ 0 10 I X
.
1 I-
1 ,.n
! I :
1 1
1 I 1
-"
I
r
154

1
-, \-,-- ----).
'1.-._4-
'
*,,'4- ' ----'
1
1 1
1
d",,230
l
critical section 2
One of following solutions can be followed
1. Increasing concrete compressive strength to 30 Nlmm2 will increase qcuP to
1.42N/mm
2
2. Increasing column dimensions to 600x600 will decrease qu to 1.24 N/mm
2
3. Increasing drop panel thickness to 70 mm will decrease qu to 1.27 N/mm
2
155
Design of Long Direction
Column Strip (Width=2.00 m) Field Strip (Width=3.00 m)
6.00 6.00 6.00
5% 20%
%Mo 25%
50%
20% 30% 25%
Mo=564.6 kN.m
28.23 112.92
Mu
141.2 282.3
112.92
kN.m
169.4 141.2
33.88 135.51
Mu
135.5 259.7
135.51
.kN.m
146.8 124.2
corrected
45.2 11.3
Mu
67.8 129.9
45.2
kN.m/m
73.4 62.1
d=230 d=180 d=230 d=180 d=180 d=180 d=180
R 0.051 0.098 0.014 0.056
0.091 0.077 0.056
(()
0.063 0.129 0.016 0.069
0.118 0.097 0.069
As 1002 2063 204 859
mnftm
1471 1218 859
618
610 614 616
+3 18
As/m
618 316 614
+318
156
6.00
15;'
84.69
101.63
33.9
d=180
0.042
0.051
632
612
Design of Short Direction
Column Strip (Width=2.0m)
Field Strip (Width=4.00 m)
0.', , .........
A
1 ,
25%
114.88
111 :6
Mu

ted correc
55.8
Mu

d=220
R
0.046
0.056
856
As
mnUm A:
'114 6
As/m
.
5.00
t 5.00 ,
5%
50%
30% A
25%
MO=459.5 kN.m
22.98
229.76
137.85 A
114.88
26.26
216.63
124.72 A
105.03
6.56
108.31 .
62.36 A
52.52
d=170
d=220
d=170
d=170
0.009
0.090
0.086 Zi
0.073
0.010
0.117
0.111 .
A
0.092
118
1788
1310 A
1086
6'116
6'110
+3'116
3'116 A
6'1.16
+3'118
157
5.00
20%
91.9
91.9
68.93
105.03
105.03
78.77
26.26
26.26
19.69
d=170
d=170
d=170
0.036
0.036
0.027
0.043
0.043
0.032
508
508
378

69112
. 6'110
I

CDI
I I I
I I

I
I
I
I
i I
I
LL-;...--I-=--tt-t---- - --J
I
I
I
: ______ I
I 1
I I I I I
l,
EI
I 0 1"
I "I@.
I <0 I
I I
I
II
: I
I I
: I
LL-----+------
r
--
B-l.
I
I
A-l.
I
I
-----1
. Reinforcement Details
Long Direction
158
LEGEND
______ TOP
-----BonOM
- VI
\0
-0\
o
CD
0
g
s:::

r
m
Ci)
m
z
0
-I
0
'"tJ
JJ
C'D
en -.
:::ra
o 0

OC'D
_. 3
CD C'D
(') ::l
a:. 1"'+
o 0
::l C'D
i
en
---
-----
,To
I
I
----1----
f" ' ..
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
1
I
I" ---1

I
r-f - ____ _
I. .
-----I-
r
i f I I 'I -----__ _
I
I
/0,
---
- --J!-. - Ifif
I: ---------1
..... 'm' 1m I ,
'I I"S. I"S. , ,
I
3
..... '3 Li ' ,
' '
r __ 3 -L----1
' 1.00 , 4.00.J,...
0
,.J,... 02.00 _,
Field Strip Column Strip
" ',. , """ ... -- T y- , &, 'ilk i"?' - '.;'. f' 'y- f 'i:t m sf .,,"
3c116/m
1----1':.- 0.33 Ln / """u""
. 1',
0.33 L
0.20L
I llJ = L.
Ij L. .,. r
. .. I
1- -- --- --- --1' --- 6.00 I
6.00 ..
..
Section A-A (Column Strip-Long Direction)
6c110/m
O.22L
6c114/m 6c110/m
__ :.:
I-J llJ S
I .. L .. ! .. Ln
b -t- .. 6.00 .. .. 6.00
-f
Section B-B (Field Strip-Long Direction)
Cross sections in the long direction
---:"'------
J-----+---
:
J---i----
:
c-
o
"" <>
0
o

or)
0
...J 1::
0
.c
i
<:
E
:>
i5

g
<:
0
U
Ol
en
. i
E}---l----
161
o
o
...J .0
0
0
-1
or)
!
--------
C-
0
'5

0
t
0
.c
en
t
"t:l
a;

0
0
<:
0
'5
Ol
en
c::
o
U

1J
t::
o
.::.
en
Q)
:5
.s
en
c::
o
t5
Q)
en
en
en
e
o
Example 4.3
Using the code simplified method, check the safety against punching failure of a
comer column (0.4 x 0.4 m) in a flat slab system without marginal beams of a typical
panel (6.5m x 6m). The total ultimate loads is 17 kN/m
2
, ts=200 rom and !cu=25
N/IIUTf.
Solution
Assume concrete cover of 20 rom
d = ts-20 = 180 rom
al =b
1
=400 +180 12 = 490 rom
Qup = 17 x 6.5/2 x 6/2 -17 x 0.49 x 0.49 = 161.7 kN
=1.5 (case of comer column)
b
o
= 2 x 490 =980 rom
= QUI' fJ = 161.7 xlOOO x 1.5 = 1.374 N I mm
2
quI' b
o
d 980 x 180
qcup is the smallest of
1. qc
u
p=0.316 fl:=O.316 f2s =1.29Nlmm
2
<l.6 .... .o.k
frc Vl.5
2. qcup rz: =0.316(0.5+ 400)x f2s =1.93 Nlmm
2
b vr:- 400 V1.5 .
3. qcul' = 0.8 (a d +0.2) x u: = 0.8 (2 x 180 + 0.2) x (25 = 1.85 N I mm
2
b
o
Vr:- 980 V 1.5
qcup=1.29 N/rom
2
qu?qcup, punching strength of the comer column is unsafe. To increase the punching
strength of the slab one of the following solution may be adopted:
1. Increase the compressive strength of concrete
2. Increase the dimensions of the comer column
3. Increase the thickness of the slab
4. Use drop panel or column head if such a solution meets the acceptance of the
architect. al=490
I: 400 \ I
_--1 critical shear section I
0\ 0 I
1
...0 I
I I
1 ____________ 1
162
Example 4.4
Redesign the previous example using the code-detailed method
Solution
Stepl: Calculate the unbalanced moments
Max = 17 x 6 x (6.5 - 2/3 x 0.4)2 18 = 495 kN.m
May = 17 x 6.5 x (6.0 - 2/3 x O.4i 18 = 454 kN.m
% of column strip moment = 40% (no edge beams)
M-ve column strip in x-direction (My) = 0.4 x 495 = 198.2 kN.m
M-ve column strip in y-direction (Mx) = 0.4 x 454 = 181.6 kN.m
Moment transferred to column in x-direction (My)= 0.9 x 0.5 x 198.2 = 89.2 kN.m
Moment transferred to column in y-direction (Mx)= 0.9 x 0.5 x 181.6 = 81.7 kN.m
1 1
Y fx = Y fy = = --2 = 0.6
c
l
+d 1+-
3 c
2
+d 3
Yqx=Yqy= 1- 0.6 = 0.4
Moment transferred by torsion in x-direction My= 0.4 x 89.2 = 35.7 kN.m
Moment transferred by torsion in y-direction Mx= 0.4 x 81.7 = 32.7 kN.m
Step 2: Calculate section properties
al=cl+dl2 = 0.4 +0.1812 = 0.49 m
bl=C2+dl2 = 0.4 +0.1812 = 0.49 m
.C
0.49
2
--.:.:.:.:--- = 0.123 m
2x0.49+2x0.49 .
LJ=6.5 m
I
I
I
I
I
I
.....
I
I
I I
M ____ -i ____ ..!B
0.368 . 0.123
Comer column notations
163
CCD=CAD= 0.49 -0.123 =0.368 m
i + al xd
3
J
CY
=d x b,xCA8 +-3-+ 3 12
2 0.18 x 0.368
3
0.18 X 0.123
3
0.49 X 0.18
3
= 0.00465m4
J
cx
= Je)' =0.18 x0.49xO.123 + 3 + 3 + 12
Step 3: Calculate shear stresses
The ultimate shear force equals
Qup = 17 x 6.512 x 6/2 - 17 x 0.49 x 0.49 = 161.7 kN
The shear stress due to punching of the gravity loads equals to:
_ Qup _161.7 x 1000 =0.917 N Imm
2
q p - b d - 980 x 180 .
o
(M y Yqy)CAB 35.7x 0.123 0.944N Imm
2
J cy 0.00465 x 1000
(M y Yqy)CCD _ 35.7x 0.368 = 2.82 N Imm
2
J
y
.< - 0.00465xl000
(Mx Yqx )CCB _ 32.7x 0.123 =0.86N Imm
2
J
ex
- 0.00465 x 1000
(Mx Yqx)CAD _ 32.7x 0.368 2.58N Imm
2
qx2 = J - 0.00465xl000
'"'
q
_ q + q 1 - q 2= 0 917 + 0.944 -2.58 = -0.723 N/mm2
A- pYX 2 (f)
q
_ q + q + q 1 = 0 917 + 086 +0.944 = 2.717 N/mm .................. >qcup unsa
B - p xl y., . 2
qc = qp + qxl - qy2= 0.917 + 0.86 -2.82 = -1.043 N/mm
. Therefore, the maximum shear stress is at comer B with a value of 2.717 N/mm
2

value of the shear stress obtained using the simplified method (1.375 N/mm)
extremely low when compared to the value obtained using the detailed method. Thls
leads to a conclusion that the values of (3 given in the simplified method of the
Egyptian code should reviewed. / Y
/ 0.723
__
1.043
c
2.7.17
164
I
I
" I
, "
4.9 The Equivalent Frame Method
4.9.1 Introduction
The Equivalent frame method was first introduced in 1948. It is intended for use in
analyzing moments in any practical frame building. The method is more general than
the direct design method, which is subjected to limitations described in section 6-2-7-
5-A in the ECP. Thus, if the buildings do not satisfy the loading and geometrical
conditions required by the code or if lateral loads due to wind or earthquake exist, the
ECP 203 requires the building to be analyzed by the equivalent frame method.
The equivalent frame method for design of the flat slab system is a more rigorous
method of analysis when compared with the direct design method. The building is
represented by a series of two-dimensional frames, which are then analyzed for loads
acting in the planes of the frames. In the direct method, the statical moment, Mo is
calculated for each span and divided between positive and negative moment regions
according to the code coefficients given in Table 4-4.
The main features ofthis method can be summarized as follows:
1. Moments are distributed among the critical sections by employing an elastic
analysis. Cases of loading have to be considered for the most critical loading
conditions.
2. There are no limitations on loading or dimensions.
3. The variations in the moment of inertia such as drop panel have to be considered
in the analysis.
4. Lateral analysis can be performed during the computations of the equivalent
frame.
5. The total statical moment calculated using this method need not exceed the
moment Mo required by the direct design method.
4.9.2 Structural Analysis
The slab is divided into a series of equivalent frames running in two perpendicular
directions. These frames consist of the slab, drop panel, projected beams, and the
columns above and below the considered floor. These frames are in tum divided into
column and middle strips. The live loads should be placed at the locations that
produce maximum moment for the members.
In the case of analyzing vertical loads, the moment of inertia for the slab is calculated
using the total strip width. While in the case of performing lateral load analyses, the
moment of inertia for the slab is calculated using column width plus three times the
slab thickness from each side (not exceeding span/3).;:
When a lateral analysis is earned out, the full height of the building should be
modeled to account for the variation of wind or earthquake forces at each level. If the
analysis is limited to gravity loads, calculations'can be greatly simplified by analyzing
each floor and its attached column separately. The column ends are assumed to be
fixed at the intersection with the floor above and below as shown in Fig. 4.23.
165
torsional
torsional member,
F
. 4 23 Elements of the equivalent frame method
19. .
area uncracked concrete,
b based on the gross . 1 f the
The moment of inertia of columns may. e oluron cross section along the lengt 1 0
. .' due to changes 111 c
allowing for vanatIOns .
colunm. . I t frame for a flat slab
. I ents of the eqUlva en h lied
F 4 23 illustrates the dIfferent e e:n . nt MT equivalent to t e app
Ig. . The colunm provides a of the slab strip rotate more than
system.. . M Therefore, the extenor en . To account for the
torsional 1I1tenslty t f the torsional deformatIOn. I I nm and the
the central section 0 uivalent colunm replaces actua co u
e
sum of the
deformation and rotatIOn, fthe equivalent column IS equal to th
I b t
The flexI 1 1 0
transverse s a s np. d the slab strip.
flexibilities of the actual colunm an
1 1 1

Kec - I,Kc K,
.. (4.46)
. ................................. .
of the flexibility of that
. tiffness of a member is the inverse
RecallIng that s f can be rewritten as
member, the preVIOUS equa Ion
LKc ................................. (4.47)
K<=(1+1{) "
166
Where:
K = 4xEc xIg
c h
The form of the previous equation can be explained by making an analogy between
the equivalent column and the system of two springs. The total deformation of both
systems equals the sum of the two individual displacements. If the two springs are
replaced by a single spring with an equivalent stiffness Kec , the second system must
deflect similar to the original system when identical load P is applied at the end.
Equating the deflection of system 1 to that of the equivalent system 2 gives
t.. = t..1 + t..2 ............................................ (4.48)
Since the relation between force and displacement for a spring is P=Kt.., where K
equals spring stiffness, Eq. 4.48 can be expressed in term ofthe applied load P and the
stiffness as
p p p
-+-=- ............................................ (4.49)
Kc K, Kec
dividing both sides with P gives
1 1 1
-+-=- ........................................... (4.50)
Kc K, Kec
Code equation 6.16 is similar to Eq. 4.50 but includes a summation sign to account for
the possibility of contributions from columns above and below the slab.
An approximate expression for the stiffuess of the torsional member, based on the
results ofthree-dimensional analysis of various slab configurations is given by
K,=L
J
........................................... (4.51)
Ee is the modulus of elasticity of concrete.
C2 is the transverse dimension of the column, equivalent column, capital or bracket.
L2 is the center to center distance measured perpendicular to the analysis direction as
shown in Fig. 4.23
An expression for C, which is a cross sectional constant to define torsional properties,
is given by:
[(
b) b
3
XI]
C = L 1-0.63; x-
3
- ........................................ (4.52)
167
d ensions respectively for the member.
where band t are the shorter.and the longer b the section can be divided into a
It the torsional member conSIsts of beam an sa,
number of rectangles.
.. uivalent frame method
T ble 4 4 Distribution of column and field strip In eq
a .
Percentage of moment total
Moment type
Column strip Field strip
negative moment in
75
25
interior panel
negative moment in
80
20
exterior panel
45
positive moment
55
a-column and torsional member
Kec
p
b-Two springs system
c-Equivalent spring system
Fig. 4.24 column and analogous spring system
168
1
fixed
h
IJ.--...-.--.J
h
t
Fig. 4.25 Column and field strips in the equivalent frame method.
Photo 4.4 Flat slab system during construction
169
Example 4.5
Evaluate the effective stiffness for exterior column shown in figure below. The floor
consists of an 200 rum thick slab supported on a marginal beams that are 300 rum
wide and 600 rum deep.
................... / ... 3& of panel
."
m if
o
o
t
:ZL of panel :.1 ";""""
..<::
Solution
Step 1: Compute column stiffness
The equivalent column stiffness equals
LKc
The stiffness of each column equals
4xEcxIg
K =----"-
c h
The height center to center of the column varies from one floor to the other.
hJ==4500 mm and h
2
==4000 mm. The moment of inertia for the column is taken about
axis parallel to the edge of the slab
I = 500 X 300
3
= 1.13 X 10
9
mm
g 12
170
Step 2: Compute the torsional member properties
to the ECP 203 the attached torsio I ....
dImension of the slab portion equals (b =20;a
t
dIvIded In two parts. The
(b]=300, t]=600). The torsional constant C an that for the beam equals
C = L[(1-0.63 7jx b
3
3
x
t J
C = 0.63 x 200
3
x 400J + 0.63 300) x 300
3
x 600J _ 9
LI 400 3 LI 600 3 - 4.43 x 10 mm
4
Since torsion anus of the Proportions exists on b h .
terms are included in the determination of K
t
as of the column, two identical
K = L( 9E
e
C J
' L
2
'{I-{c
2
ILJ)3
K, 1')01725XIO' E,
Step 3 Compute the Equivalent column stiffhess K
ec
K - LKe 2.125xl06 E
ec -( LKc) =( 2.125xl06 ) =1.89xl0
6
Ee
1+-- 1+ e
K, 17.25x10
6
E
e
171
4.10 Computer Model of Flat Slabs
Flat slab can be modeled using shell or plate bending elements, while the beams are
modeled using frame elements.
When flat slabs are modeled using thin shell elements and beams are modeled using
frame elements, the eccentricity of the slab from the c.g. of the member should be
considered. However, the common practice is to neglect such an effect.
The effect of the torsional moment mxy must be considered when analyzing the results
of finite element programs as shown in Fig. 4.26. In case of using uniform
reinforcement arranged in two perpendicular directions, the bending moment in any
strip can be obtained using the following equations
iiix =lm,\+Im,y\..(4.53)
iiiy =lmy\+lm,y/ .......................................... (4.54)
where
mx andm
y
are the maximum bending moments per meter in x and y directions,
respectively. The design moment mx or my need not exceed 1.5 the average moment in
the strip.
Imxlandlmylare the absolute value of the bending moment in the strip
Imxyl is the absolute value of the torsional bending moment in the strip
In the case of modeling the columns as points restrained in the vertical direction, the
design moment is taken at the perimeter of the columns. It should be noted that the
finite element method usually overestimates the negative bending moment over the
supports and underestimates the positive bending moment at midspan.
It should be mentioned also that deflections obtained using analysis that based on
linear elastic finite elements should be modified to take into account the effect of
cracking.
According to the ECP 203, the main reinforcement can be arranged in the direction of
the principal tensile stresses with a maximum deviation of 15 degrees. Otherwise,
the reinforcement should placed in two perpendicular directions.
my
Fig. 4.26 Internal moments on "a slab element.
172
An example of the results obtained from modeling the flat slab using plate elements 'is
shown in Fig. 4.27. One can notice the intensity of the moment contours over the
column locations.
shell/plate element
column locations
Fig. 4.27 Computer model of flat slab system
When designing the top reinforcement of the flat slab one should use the value of the
bending moment at the face of the column (Sec. 1-1 and Sec. 2-2) as shown iri Fig.
4.28. In other words, the contour line located inside the columns should be ignored.
2
2
Fig. 4.28 at
173
5
REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRS.
Photo 5.1 Spiral at Area showroom, USA.
5.1 Introduction
Reinforced concrete stairs are essential elements in buildings transfer
one level to another. The staircase consists of landings .and flIghtS: flIgh! IS an
inclined slab that consists of risers and treads (going), whIle the IS a
slab. The flights and the landings are supported on broken, mclmed or onzonta
beams and columns as shown in Fig. 5.1.
174
hand rail
:
1
flight
1 i
II
!
Landing
i
!
I
I bll
c
i
I
:a I
supporting beam i
c
i
floor beam
'" ..-1
I i
I I
I
i
I
t hand rail
flight
Fig. 5.1 Details oflandings and flights for a staircase
The stair consists of risers and treads (going). The height of the riser (r) is about 150-
200 mm, while the width of the going (t,) is about 250-300 mm as shown in Fig. 5.2.
The higher the riser the shorter the going. It is common pmctice to form the height of
the riser at 150 mm and the width of the going at 300 mm. A good design of the stair
should comply with the following role ofthumb
2 r + t, =600-620 mm ..................................................... (5.1)
To achieve comfort, landing has to be formed every 10-14 steps. Landing may be also
needed when a change in the direction of the stairs is required.
going (t,)
H
Landing
e = tan-I ( )
gomg
Fig. 5.2 Geometric design of the stairs
The width of the stair in each direction usually mnges from 0.9-1.5 m the space
(stairwell) between each flight ranges from 0.3-0.6 m. Thus, for residential building
with a height of no more than 3 In, the total space for the staircase is approximately
3x6 m as shown in Fig 5.3. For proper geometric design, care should be given to the
details C and D in Fig. 5.3.
175
flight
.. _ .. _.9_ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. -
_ .. _ .. "t .. _.. .._.. .. ..
beam
..
i
i
A :

I
stairwell
bll
II i
..-1
i
"!
i
!
on
i
<'1 0
0
,.)
i
: A

"!
I
=.:;. :::;.:;.:::;.:;.:::;.:. :::;.:. :::;.:. :::;.:. :;:.:;::. .. - .. .. - .. - .. - .. -
i 0
1.20
I . -I,
I
120
!\-' .. I
3.0
..
! ..
5.65
Plan
Sec A-A
80 mm (sand + morta,)
40mm marble
Detail C
Fig. 5.3 Typical 2-flight staircase in residential buildings
176
5.2 Structural Systems of Stairs
From the structural point of view the types
categories as follows: ' of stairs can be classified into five
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cantilever type.
Slab type.
Slab-beam type.
Spiral type
Free-stranding type
the flights and the
Photo 5.2: Cantilever reinforced stair
177
Since the flight is inclined, the self-weight of the flight is normally calculated in the
horizontal projection. Thus, the vertical distance t' is used in the weight calculations of
the loads as shown in Fig. 5.4.
1. -----'(1/_
r 1--1' --:----1
w=ycx(bxtxl)
w (HP)= Yc x(b xt xl) = Yc x(b xt' xl)
cos B
l.Om
w= Yc x(bxtxl)
Fig. 5.4 Calculation of the flight self weight
5.2 Cantilever Type
In this type, the flights, the landings and the stairs act as a cantilever slab supported on
a beam or a wall as shown in Fig. 5.5. Care should be taken to the correct placing of
the main reinforcement in the stairs and inside the beam during construction time.
landinl!
hand rail

i

i A
-
I
i
......
RCwall
landing
I
"-
"
supporting
i
beam
-
I
I
h.and rail

.J._
-
i
I
Sec A-A
Sec A-A
Fig. 5.5 Examples of cantilever stairs
178
The staircase is designed by taking one-meter width of the flight or the landing with an
effective depth davg The effective depth is taken as the average depth of the section.;
The main reinforcement is placed in the top of the stairs and anchored to the
supporting beam as shown in Fig.5.6. The selected reinforcement is normally two bars
preferably placed at the middle of the stair and at the stair edge as shown in Fig. 5.7. In
this case, an additional bar is placed at the other edge. The bending moment developed
in the stairs is transformed into torsion on the beam. The amount of the developed
torsion is quite large and should be investigated. A light reinforcement mesh is placed
in the bottom face to resist cracking and shrinkage.
wall
..
beam
edge
1-1----- Lei .. , ----.... -1\
Fig. 5.6 Cross section in a cantilever stair
Live loads (3-4 kN/m
2
) are applied in form of uniform loads on the stairs in the
horizontal direction and a concentrated line load (P u= 1-1.5 kN) on the free edge as
shown in Fig. 5.6. The uniform loads Wu is the summation of the (slab+stair)
weight(using t
avg
) , covering material (0.8-> 1 kN/m
2
), and live loads. The effective
span LejJis taken as
............................................ (5.2)
t
t =- ...................................................... (5.3)
cosO
riser(r) .
trlVC =t +--2- ................................................ (5.4)
Stair total self weight =t
avg
x Yc ................................... (5.5)
Wu= 1.4 WDL + 1.6 WLL .............................................. (5.6)
wu=1.4 [t
avg
x Yc + covering material(0.8-> 1)]+ 1.6 wLd3->4) ............... (5.7)
179
in reinforcement should securely anchored in the with a
ma
m
distance equal to tension development length (Ld) as shown ill FIg. 5.6.
mlmmu
main
reinforcement
cosO
riser(r)
tavc =t
Fig. 5.7 Reinforcement placement in a cantilever stair
Photo 5.3 Cantilever stair during construction
180
r------------- 1
Example 5.1
Th
The asde in figure below is a cantilever type for a floor height of 30m
e lYe oa lS kN/m the char t . t' h . .
'=400 2 ' ac ens .1C strengt. of concrete is feu =35 N/mm
2
and
Jy N/mm . The welght of the covenng matenal is 0 8 kN/mt'D .
reinforcement details for the staircase and the supporting . eSlgn and draw
floor slab
,----
Solution
floor beam
250x600
waH
..
.. stair beam
Sec A-A
Step 1: Design of the flight
Step 1.1: Load calculations
I 3.0
j ..
I
j
1.6
I.. I
IA
'-I!l
IA
j
j
I
j
j
j
j
i
I
j
j
Li

!
I
Architecture Plan
the riser height is 150 mm and the going width is 300 mm th 1 f h
staIr equals . , e s ope 0 t e
8= tan-
I
( tan-
,
(150)= 26.56
gomg 300
181
Assume t.=140 mm
To calculate the loads on the horizontal projection, use the vertical thickness t*
t' = _ts_ = 140 = 156.5 mm
cos(8) cos(26.56)
)'0 include the weight of the stairs (goings and risers) in the dead load calculation (in
the horizontal direction), one has to calculate the average vertical thickness
riser 150
ta.-g =t +-2-=156.5+
2
=231.5 mm
Stair total self weight =t
avg
x 'Yc = 0.2315 x 25=5.7875 kN/m
2
Wu= 1.4 WDL + 1.6 WLL=1.4 (self weight +covering material)+ 1.6 WLL
wu=1.4 x (5.78 + 0.8) + 1.6 x 3 = 14.02 kN/m
2
Taking a one-meter strip then Wu= 14.02 kN/m'
An additional concentrated live load (P edge)of 1.5 kN/m' is assumed at the free edge.
P
u
= 1.6P
edge
=1.6x1.5 == 2.4 kN 1m'
Step 1.2 Bending moments
The effective span is given by
. {Lclear + t avg . {(1.6 + 0.231 = 1.831 m
L =flllll =flllll
off edge to CL 1.6+0.125=1.725 m
Ler 1.725 m
1
I
Lclea,=1.6 m --1
--: 1--0.125
Pu=2.4kN
wu=14.02 kN/m' l
111111 II ! IJ I i II
I"' L
e
rFl.
725
m 1
M?2' kN.mb=--:---
182

Ii
I
:
The maximum bending moment on a 1.0 m strip ofthe stairs is
M
- P L _14.02xl.725
2
2'4 1725-25kN
u---
2
-+uxeff - 2 +.x. - .m
Step 1. 3: Design of stairs
Assuming 20 mm concrete cover, the effective depth equals
d = tavg - cover = 231.5 - 20 = 211.5 mm
Recalling that we base the design on a strip of 1.0 m (b= 1 000 mm)
25 X 10
6
, = 0.016
35xl000x211.5
2
Using the R-O) curve -->-->--> 0)=0.019
J: 35 ?
As = 0} -E!..b d = 0.019x-x 1000 x 211.5 = 346 mm-
1,. 400
A,min = 0.6 bd = 317 mmi<As
, 1,. 400
A/step =As x step width(going)=346 x 0.3 =104 mm
2
Choose 2 <l> 10 (157 mm
2
)/step
Step 2: Design of landing
Step 2.1: load calculations
The thiclmess of the landing is taken equal to the thiclmess of the flight =140 mm
Landing self-weight = ts x Yc = 0.14 x 25=3.5 kN/m
2
WuF 1.4 WDL + 1.6 WLL=1.4 (selfweight+covering material)+ 1.6 WLL
wuF1.4 x (3.5+0.8) + 1.6 x 3 = 10.82 kN/m
2
Taking a strip of one meter
WuF 10.82 kN/m'
The landing is a slab that is supported on two sides. The exact analysis of such slabs
involves a lengthy calculation procedure. However, since this slab is supported on two
beams, the amount transferred in each direction can be approximated by dividing the
load between them. Thus the lc;>ad transferred to each direction equals
WuF 10.8212 =5.41 kN/m'
l
:

\
,
,
L
,
,
,
,
J
,
- L-L--
---
step 2.2 Design of sections
M _ Wul xL!jJ = 5.41 X 1.725
2
=8.05kN.m
u - 2 2
Assuming 20 mm concrete cover, the effective depth equals
d=t- cover = 140-20= 120mm
Mu 8.05 X 10
6
=0.0159
R = leu b d
2
35xl000x120
2
Using the R-ro curve-->--> 0)=0.019
A
-
,-0} 400
IJ'
Choose 5 <l> 101m' (393 mm
2
) >A,.,min
Additional 1<1>10
landing main rft. 5 4> 101m'
54>8/m'
additional 1<1>10
stair main rft
2<1> I Olstep
Stair reinforcement details
Step 3: Design the supporting beam
Step 3.1: Calculation of loads
secondary rft.5 4> 81m'
Assume the beam cross section is 250 x 800 nun ".
To obtain the weight in the horizontal projection, calculate the vertIcal thIclmess t
t 800 894.4 mm
t ---=
b - cos( 8) cos(26.56)
183 184
o
"l
Self weight = 1.4 x Yc x b x tb
floor beam 250x600
wall
Calculation of wall load
Selfweight=1.4 x 25 x 0.25 x 0.8944 = 7.83 kN/m' (Horizontal projection)
The height of the wall is variable along the beam, however for simplicity an average
height will be used throughout the beam. This average height is conservatively
calculated as follows:
hw= 3-floor beam-t\-1.512=3.0- 0.6 - 0.89 - 0.75 = 0.755 m
wall load = 1.4 x Yw x b x hw=1.4 x 1.2 x 0.25x 0.755=3.17 kN/m'
Wub'= self weight + Wu x flight width + wall load + edge live load
W
ubl
= 7.83 + 14.02 x 1.6 + 3.17 + 2.4 = 35.84 kN / m'
wall
beam
1.60m
--l 1--0.25 m
!--1.125m
Loads on landing
185
wall
beam
wu=14.02
1.60 m
--l 1--0.25 m
!--1.125m
Loads on flight
Pu=2.4 leN
The loads transmitted tothe beam at the level of the landing Wub2 equals to
W
u
b2= self weight + Wul x landing width + wall load
W =7 83+5.41x1.6+3.17 =19.6 kNlm'
,,1,2 . .
Note: The reader should observe that the average wall load previously calculated is
conservatively used for the whole span.
Loads
Bending
moment
wubJ=35.84 kN/m' Wuhl=19.6 kN/m'
1.6m
\.
The reaction R1 equals
35.84x3x(1.5+1.6)+19.6x1.6
x
O.8 =77.9 kN
Rl 4.6
35.84x 3 x 1.5 + 19.6x1.6x (3 + 0.8) = 60.96 kN
R2 4.6
The maximum moment occurs at point of zero shear (x')
x = ~ = 77.9 =2.17 m
W"bl 35.8
2.172
Mmax = 77.9 x 2.17-35.84x-
2
-=84.7 kN.m
Note: Since the beam is inclined with respect to the reaction, Rl will produce shear
and normal force on the beam.
186
This section has positive bending (84.6 kN.m), but we shall neglect the contribution of
the stairs and design the beam as rectangular section
84.7x106 =0.017
lcubd2 35x250x750
2
Using R-co curve ->-> co=0.02
A, =aJ leu mm
2
1,. 400.
{
0.225 J?:: b d 0.225 .J3j x 250 x 750 = 623 mm 2
A,min =smaller of Iy 400
l.3A, = 1.3 x 330 = 430mm 2 -'
As<As.min, use As= As,min=430 mm
2
use (3 16, 603 mm
2
)
Step 3.3: Design the beam for shear .and torsion
Step 3.3.1: Shear stresses
The critical section for shear and torsion is at d/2 from the face of the support.
Assuming that the column width is 600 mm, the vertical force at the critical section
equals
Q + 0.;5)=53.7 kN
This vertical force produces shear and normal force because the beam is inclined. The
normal force is normally small and neglected 0.04fcu b t )and the shear force equals
Q
u
= Qxcos(8) = 53.7x cos(26.6) = 48.1 kN
48.1 x 1000 =0.256Nlmm
2
qu bxd 250x750
Step 3.3.2: Shear reinforcement
The concrete shear strength qeD equals
qcu=0.i4 [35
ViS
Since the applied shear stress (0.256) is less than qeD (1.16), thus shear reinforcement is
not needed.
187
R1=77.9
69.7
shear force
W
u
hl=35.84 kN/m'
,
,
,
e:,
0'
"fl !
."
., ,
- .
..s,
0,
"a I
"5 :
,
,
.
,
,
wu/,F19.6 kN/m'
Loading for Shear and shear force diagranl
Step 3
3 3: Torsion stresses
. . . . 40mm
Assume the distance from the concrete cover to the stirrup center hne IS
. XI = 250 -2 X 40 = 170 mm
YI = 800 -2 X 40 = 720 mm
_ 2x(x +y ) = 2x(170+720) = 1780 mm
Ph - I I
. 2
A
-x y =170x720=122400m
m
oh - I" I
Ao = 0.85A
oh
= 0.85 x122400 = 104040 mm 2
_ AOh
Ie - Ph 1780
188
The torsional moment (M
tu
) applied to the beam equals the bending moment developed
in the stairs (=25 kN.m) and equals 8.05 kN.m at the landing level.
Pu=2.4kN
wu=14.02
)
beam
-I I-O.25m
M,.=25kN.m
The torsional moment is distributed along the length of the beam as shown in figure.
All these moments are horizontal projection and in the vertical plane.
M"a=8.05 kN.m
3.0 1.6m
1 1
R
n
=52.8
The torsional reaction Rn equals
25x3x(15 + 1.6)+8.05x 1.6x 0.8 = 52.8 kN
4.6
The critical section for torsion is at dl2 from the face of the support, thus the vertical
torsional moment at the critical section equals to:
T =52.8-25X(0;6 + 0;5)=35.9 kN.m
This vertical torsional moment produces torque and out-of-plane bending moment
(My) because the beam is inclined. The out-of-plane bending is usually small and can
be neglected and the torque equals to:
M IU =T xcos(8) = 35.9xcos(26.6) =32.1 kN
The shear'stress due to the torque M
tu
is given by:
189
M,. _ 32.1xl06 =2.24Nlmm
2
q,. = 2xA xt - 2xl04040x68.76
o e
RTl=52.8
0.675 m-j
47.2
Twisting moment diagram
<=:'
0'
.- ,
-,
u '--
~
]!
:E!
... ,
u,
,
,
,
,
,
3.0
M,u2=8.05 kN/m'
1.6m
Loading for torsion and twisting moment diagram
Step 3.3.4: Check adequacy of the conc,retedimensions
-070' fZ:=0.70x f3s =3.38<4.0 N Imm
2
q max -. Vr: "l.5
2
q,max= 3.38 N/mm
.J0.256
2
+ 2.245
2
= 2.26 < 3.38 ...... n.k
'..' .' ,' .. ptable for shear and torsion.
Thus the concrete dimensions of the sectIon are acce
, .
190
Step 3.3.5: Torsional reinforcement
Q,u,min = 0.06 fl: = 0.06 {35 = 0,29 N I mm
2
VY: Vu
qtu>qtumin, torsional required. According to the ECP-203 th
concrete strength IS neglected, 'and the torsional stresses must be carried be
remlorcement ' , ' , y
Assuming spacing of 100 mm, the area of one branch Astr equals
A = M,u xs
str 2 A
x 0 xl
yst
Irs
32,lxl0
6
x 100 ,
2 x 104040 x 240/1.15 = 73,9Tmm
2
A = As" XPh (1;,stJ- 73.97 x 1780(240) .
s/ s 1;, - 100 400 = 790 mm
2
Calculate the minimum area for longitudinal A ,

0.4 JliA
As/,oftn = iy:;c cp (1:') ,
.
There is a condition on this equation that ASIr :?: _b_ '
73.97 250
-->-- ok
100 - 6x240'" .
s 6xlys,
0.4J!{_35 x250xSOO ' ,.'
A
s
/.
min
=;= 1.5 _ 73.97Xl,7S0(24,O)_ 2
" 400/U5 . . ,100 ,AOO-320mm
Since Asl > Asl,min ... o.k
Choose Scp12 (904 mm
2
)
191
; .
Step 3.3.6 Reinforcement for combined shear and torsion
Since it was previously computed that no shear reinforcement is needed (Ast=O), the
area of one branch for combined shear and torsion equals
Astr + Ast/2= 73.97 + 0 = 73.97 mm
2
Choose 4> 10 mm (7S.5 mm
2
)
A
0,4 b 0,4 2
sr.min =- XS = - 250x 100 = 41.67 mm
Iy 240
Total area = 2A
str
+ AS/ :?: AS/.
min
.......... ..
= 2 X 73.97 + 0 = 147.94 mm
2
> 41.67 mm
2
...... o.k.
Final design use cp 10 @ 100,mm
54J8/tn'
.. ,
3<1> 12

J
I.. L l l
"
l
o
o
00

250
--1/
2<1>12
104J10/m'
54J8/m'
2<1>12 54J8/m'
3<1>20
1600
.
main rft. 2<1>10/step
,
,-
Stair reinforcement details
"'
' , ,
2<1>1 O/step
' I.
JI :
1
'\
I
I
'J
I
J
3<!J16

Flexural
reinforcement

0
0
..,
v
..... +.
I

Shear & torsion
reinforcement
8<!J12
<\lIO/IOOmm
I
F- --:::! 2<!J12
2<!J12

2<!J12
ilL ,3<!J16+2<!J12
,=3<!J20
Flexure, shear &
reinforcement .
Beam reinforcement details
.'
193
5.3 Slab Type
In this type, the main supporting element is the slab itself. The flight could be
supported on the landing, which is in tum supported on the supporting beams. From
the structural point of view, it is better that the main supporting element is spanning in
the short direction. However, this depends on the surrounding beams. If the beams
exist around the perimeter of the stair well or at least along the long sides, solution A
. in Fig. 5.8 is more economical. If the supporting beams are only at the short side,
solution B is the only valid structural system.
j

main slab
o
0.
0.
J5 II--!--II
L....- i 1---I---lI
II--I--"="-+--;
Solution A

-'-'
Il:
supporting beam

.!:l .!:l
oS
'"
'"

<::
s
.;
c: 5
k:I
--'-
'-'
t Supporting
Solution B
Fig. 5.8 Proposed structural systems for a slab-type staircase
The applied live loads are based on the plan area (horizontal projection), while the
dead load is based on the sloped length. To transform the dead load into horizontal
projection the average vertical thickness is used tavg (Eq. 5.11) as shown in Fig. 5.9.
However, the depth used in design (d) is perpendicular to the slope (Eq. 5.9) as shown
in Fig. 5.9. Slab thickness ts is taken as (1125 to 1130 from the slab span).
span
t, = 25 -30 ........ : .......................................... (5.8)
d =t, -cover ................................................... (5.9)
t' =_t_ .................................................... (5.10)
cosO
riser(r)
tavg =t +-2- .............................................. (5.11)
Stair total self weight =tavg x Yc ................................. (5.12)
194
main reinforcement
Fig. 5.9 Effective depth and reinforcement in a slab type staircase
The uniform loads Wu is the summation of the (stair +slab) weight (using tavg), covering
material (0.8-> 1 kN/m
2
), and live loads. The effective span LejJis taken as
Wu= 1.4 WDL + 1.6 WLL ............................................ (5.13)
wu=1.4 [t
avg
x Yc + covering material(O.8-> 1)}+ 1.6 wLd3->4) ............. (5.14)
If the slab thickness exceeds 160 mm, a top reinforcement mesh must be supplied to
control shrinkage and temperature. However, this reinforcement is only required at the
landing level as the stair reinforcement acts as shrinkage reinforcement as shown in
Fig. 5.10.
shrinkage reinforcement is not
needed as the stair reinforcement
work as shrinkage reinforcement
shrinkage reinforcement
Fig. 5.10 Shrinkage reinforcement for slab greater than 160 mm
195
. . ght internal forces are generated in these
Since the landing and the are not d'T generated at the kink, producing a
sloped elements. The two 1\ ';hi/force tends to cause splitting cracks
third outward force F as shown mig. . . 01 tr gth Thus tension reinforcement
if the produced stresses excehed. is
should be extended from eac SI e
- TJ )
Mu
Mu
tension reinforcement
Detail A
Case of positive bending. .
(splitting of reinforcement IS reqUired)
(
Mu
secondary reinforcement
tension reinforcement
Case of positive bending .
(splitting of reinforcement is .not required)
Detail B
" hid" and the sloped slab
Fig. 5.11 Internal forces developed 10 t e an 109
196
I
Photo 5.4 Slab type staircase
Photo 5.5 Cantilever staircase
197
Example 5.2
Design the staircase shown in figure below as slab-type. The live load is 4 kN/m
2
, the
characteristic strength of concrete is feu =30 N/mm2 and steel yield stress is ;;'=280
N/mm
2
The weight of the covering material is 0.75 kN/m
2
for the stairs and 1.8 kN/m
2
for landing. Floor height=3.3 m and 'Yw is 12 kN/m
3
~ . . . . ~ . ~ . . ~ . . ~ . ~ . . ~ . . ~ . . ~ . . ~ . '-'- _._.- . . ~
0'-'-'-'
1.70
1 ..
3.0
~ .
6.40
Solution
Stepl: Staircase layout and loads
Assume the riser height is 150 mm
N b f
3.3xlOOO .
urn er 0 gomgs =. = 22 gomg,
. 150
I ..
1.70 .
I
i
o
r-;
'-'-' ._._(2)
Using three flights with tread width of300 mm as shown in figure
1
o
0_0_._.
I
Q)
i
>
..2 i
N ...
l:Q 0 I
0
i t;:::
'oj
I
floor level I
0)-._._._.
I
i
i

Blat floor level
B3 atlanding level
'-'

..

81

.

I I I I

. _. ._._.,...._._.
.-.
1
0
I r-;
! B2 - landing level

,
: : : : : : : : :
r--
0-1= ___ I
0
.::
---
--- i d-I-
'<I'
'@
E
@:
I@i

0

.
~ ~ ~ .

r-;

: lSI :

!
. ~ . . . . . . 0 '-' ---_. .-.
I
i
1.70 ~ I .
3.0
.1. 1.70
6.40
198
The slope of the stair equals
e = tan -I( ) = tan -I( 150) = 26 56
gomg 300'
M
Assume the slab thickness t =,span _ 4700
s 30 -3() = 156.7 ",160 mm
t,=_t_, __ 160
cos( 8) - cos(26.56) = 178.9 mm
, riser 150
t"vg = t +-2- = 178.9+
2
= 253.9 mm
Stair self weight =tavgX Yc = 0.2539 x 25=6.347 kN/m
2
Step 2: Design of Slab S1
wu=1.4x (6.347+0.75) + 1.6 x 4 = 16.34 kN/m
2
Taking one meter then Wu= 16.34 kN/m'
Slab S I is supported at the centerline of slabs S2 and S3
R=24.5 kN
16.34kN/m'
I I I I I I I I I I I I I

__ 3_.0_m __ -lo.85 m
I -t 1-1
199
The reaction at each end (R) equals
R= w"x3 16.34x3 =24.5kN
2 2
'The maximum bending moment is at the middle and equals
1 52 1 52
Mu = Rx(0.85+1.5)-wu xT = 24.5
x
2.35-I6.3
4x
T = 39.2 kN.m
Assuming concrete cover of 30 rnrn for the secondary direction and 20rnrn for the
main direction
d == 160 - 30 = 130 rnrn (secondary direction slab S2)
d == 160 - 20 == 140 rnrn (main direction slab Sl)
39.2 X 10
6
== 0.0773 --->---> ro==0.098
30x1000xI30
2
A, = ill Ie" b d = = 1365 mm
2
Iy 280,
A . = 0.25 bxd 1000xI30=325 mm
2
<As
,.m," 100 100
Choose 6 $ 181m' (1527 rnrn
2
)
Step 2.3 Design for shear
According to the ECP 203, concrete shear strength of slabs equals to:
qeu=0.16 fT. =0.16 f30 =0.7l5Nlmm
2
V 1.5 V 1.5
Qu=R=24.5 kN
24.5 x 1000 =0.188 Nlmm
2
q" bxd 1000xI30
8=1.7 m
S3
8=1.7 m
200
Step 3: Design of Slab 52
Slab S2 is supported on the beams located on axis 1,2 at the floor level. The reaction
of the slab S 1 is applied at the centerline of the slab S2. Since the width of S2 is l. 7 In,
the reaction R will be distributed along this width. Thus the load per meter (R') equals
R .
R' SI(l'erm.",,) = 24.5 =14.4 kN 1m'
B 1.7
Or R'
Intersection area betweenS
I
andS
2
24.5 x 1.7 =14.4 kN 1m'
1.7x1.7
Landing self weight =t x Yc = 0.16 x 25=4.0 kN/m2
Wu= 1.4 WDL + 1.6 WLL =1.4 (self weight +covering material)+ 1.6 WLL
The weight of the covering material for the landing is given as 1.8 kN/m
2
w
u
=IAx (4.0+1.80) + 1.6 x 4 = 14.52 kN/m2
Taking one meter width of the slab (b=1000 rom), then
Wsu= Wu x 1= 14.52 x 1.0 =14.52 kN/m'
R'=14.4 kN/m' R'=14.4 kN/m'
{III II III 111111111
Wsu= 14.52 kN/m'
t 4.0m =
Step 3.2 DeSign for flexure
The maximum moment is at mid span
w X22 1.7'
Mu =R2x2.:.--EL--R'X1.7x(_+O.3)
2 2
14.52 x 22 1.7
Mu =53.55x2 -14.4x1.7x(-+O.3) =49.9 kN.m
2 2
d = 160 - 20 = 140 rom -(main direction)
201

0% _
M u 49.9 X 10
6
= 0.085
R = r b d
2
30x 1000x140
2
J eu
Using the R-O) curve --0)=0.11
f
30 1650 2
A =w....!!..b d =0.llx-x1000x140= mm
.s i
y
280
= 0.25 b xd = 0.25 1000x 140 = 350 mm 2 <As
A
s
min
100 100
Choose 64> 201m' (1885 mm
2
)
Step 3.3: Design for shear
d th ECP 203 clause 4-2-2-1-6-d, concrete shear strength equals Accor mg to e .
=0.16 [1: =0,16(30 =O.715Nlmm
2
qcu V15 Vu
Qu= R=53.55 kN
Qu 53.55 x 1000 - 0 38 N Imm2<qcu ... o.k
qu = b xd 1000x 140 .
Step 4: Design of slab 53 ..
Slab S3 is supported on the beams, the reaction ofthe slab S1 is applIed at the mIddle
of the slab 2
Landing self weight = 1. x Yc = 0.16 x 25=4.0 kN/m
wu=1.4 x (4.0+1.80) + 1.6 x 4= 14.52 kN/m
2
The weight of the stairs equals = 16.34 kN/rri' (same as slab Sl)
R'=14 4 kN/m' R'=14.4 kN/m'
111111111 111111111
. w
u
=16.34kN/m' . . wsu=14.52 kN/m'
kWmf'1 III I gp -I I II I If . . ..
L70m r
60
l L70m I
I: 4.0m
! '. ... . :.. , .. - . 'fi;siab ar.e
Companng the loads on ....... -- .. d'I b S3
, .. ...... "h" ............ &'orcement used m slab S2 IS use m sa
same thus t e same reml' .. ..
Cho;se 6 4> 201m' (1885 mrri
2
).,., ".: ii. ',\ "'.'.,;',' ,"":' .
202
II
i
I,
Ii
6q,20/m'
\ 3q,\S/m'
3q,IS/m'
ReinCorcement details Cor slab SI
flight width flight width
t,;=160 mm
IS/m'
6q,20/m'
IS/m'
,'-__________
/r-----
_
____ ____ __ I
ReinCorcement details Cor slab 82
203
Step 5: Design of supporting beam B1 on axis 1
The supporting beam B 1 exists at the floor level and beam B3 exists at the landing
level as shown in the figure below. Beam B1 supports the slab 82 while B3 supports
the slab 83. .
The beam at the landing level B 1 carries its own weight, stair load and wall load.
Assume beam size is 250x700 1UlU -
8elfweight of the beam = 1.4 x Yc x b x t=1.4 x 25 x 0.25 x 0.7 =6.125 kn/m'
= 53.55 kN/m'
slab load equals to the reaction of the slab 82 (wsu)
Wall load = 1.4 x Yw x b x hw = 1.4 x 12 x 0.25 x (3.3/2-0:1) =.4 kN/m'
w
u
b=6.125+ 4.0 = 10.125 kN/m'
column
column
B3
I-__ Landing level
Floor level
....
....
....
....
....
B3
......
Floor level
1.70 m
3.0m
1.70 m
. I 1
Elevation of beams on 'axis 1
Step 5.2: Reactions and bending moments
10.125x 6.42 +53.55x 1.7
2
2 2 =44.45 kN
6.4
RL = lO.125x6.4+53.55xi.7 -44.45 = 111.3 kN
204
level
, ; ..
wsu=53.55 kN/m'
tllllll!]
, . wub=IO.l25 kN/m'
};;' I I I I I I I I I I , J I I II I I J I ! I il .
fR
L
=lI 1.3 . "l;R=44.45
L70m I- 64m
47m
l
J- x';'=4:395 _.
Mumax=97.6
Point of zero shear from the right support = x '= = 4.395 m
,. 10.125
x!
M
u
max
=RR xx,. -Wub xT=.44,45X4.395-lO.l25X-2-,. :=.97.6 kN.m
d = 700- 50 = 650 mm
Since some part of the beam is not connected to slab, it shall be designed as
rectangular section
97.6x106 =0.031
30x 250x 650
2
From the R-ro curve -->--->
/, 30
As = (j) -E!!..b d = 0.037 x-x 250 x 650 = 644 mm2
fy 280
A 0.225$: b d 0.225J30". "".. .. ;" 2;
smin= X = . .t.50x650=715mm' <As-->useAsmin
. fy 280
Choose 4 $ 16 (804 mm
2
)
Step 5.3 Design for shear
qcu = 0.24 u::: = 0.24 (30 = 1.06 N / mm2
Vu Vu
205
,\'
The critical section for shear is at d/2 from the face of the support. The column width
equals 0.25 m, thus
) (
c d)-1113_(5356+10.125)x(0.25+0.65)=82.62kN
Q - R - (w + W x - + - -.. 2 2
u - R su ub 2 2
82.62xl000 =0.508 N Imm2<qcu ... o.k
qu - bxd 250x650
provide minimum shear reinforcement
. = 0.4 xb xs = 0.4 x 250x 200 = 71.43 mm 2 for two branches
AS( .mlll f y 280
Choose 5$ 81m'
-"v-
I
Ii
5$8/m'
2<1>12
4<1>16
2<1>12
L
(l ______
4<1>16
o
o
!"-
-'-----
Beam elevation
"'F" 2<1>12
5$8/m'
........ 4<1>16
j
Gsol
Sec 1-1
206
Example 5.3
the shown in figure knowing that
cu 25 , /y=360 N/nun
2
and/YsF280 N/nun
2
The weight of the coverin t' I' 1 2
taken as 4 kN/m2 g rna ena IS .0 kN/m . The live loads on the stair may be
e
o
i
e
o
"1
column O.3xO.3
supporting beam (B1) 1r-
r-------....
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ! !
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : I
.. -&. ....... I-:....t . ..I...'-, ' . ...:. . .:....'-&.-1 . i._
./. 'I I I', I I" I I 1'1 I
! : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : I
A
_____ ! _____ :: ::::::::::::: i
supporting beam ----- -____ j Floor beam
j ===== JI-
j
6.15 m
j
rl, ___ __ ___
Floor beam
landing
section A
u
'section a
207
Solution
Step 1: Design of the flight
Step 1.1: Load calculations
Assume the riser height is 150 mm and the tread width is 300 mm, the slope of the
.stair equals
8 == tan-l ( riser) = tan _1(150)';' 26.56'
tread 300
M
Assume slab thickness ts equals to 150 mm
t"=_t_s_ 150 =167.7mm
cos( 8) cos(26.56)
riser 150
t"v. =t +--=167.7+-=242.7 mm
2 . 2
Stair self weight =t
avg
x Yc;:= 0.2427 x 25=6.068 kN/m
2
w
u
=1.4x (6.068+1) + 1.6 x 4 = 16.29 kN/m
2
Taking one meter then Wu= 16.29 kN/m'
Step 1.2: Flexure design
Assuming that the supporting beam width 1s300 rom, then the effective span for the
stairs is given by
.....--_-1-------.
1
1350mm
-I t--300mm
l500mm
208
T
variable
L
. {Lclear + tavg . {(1.35 + 0.24 = 1.59 m
= IIlln = IIlln
ejf edge to CL 1.5 m
Len= 1.5 m
Assuming an edge live load of 1.5 kN/m'. Pu=1.6 x 1.5 = 2.4 kNlm'
The slab is assumed fixed in the beam and the bending moment in the slab equals
Pu=2.4 leN
wu=16.29 kN/m' ,
II!! /I II If I!
I
1 Len=1.50 m 1
i
!M
u
=21.9 kN.m
_t"'_-._===._=._=-._-.-_-._-.-_..!.I--.-_-._-.-_-._':.:::_==._==.-_- _ &
i
The structural system for the sla is cantilever slab form
Wu x L;jJ 16.29 x 1.50
2
Mu = 2 +P xL
eff
= 2 +2.4x1.50 = 21.9 kN.m
Thus, assuming 30 mm concrete cover, the effective' depth is vertical distance in the
slab thickness which is connected to the beam as shown in figure below
d"vg =tavg -cover=242.7-30=212.7 mm
21.9x10
6
= 0.019
25 x 1000x 212.72
From the R-(O curve ->-> (0=0.0228
209
f.
25 7 2
As =/11 ;:bd=0.0228X360X1000X212.7=33 mm
A . =0.6
bd
= 0.6 x1000x212.7=355 mm2>As->-> use As.min
s.mln fy 360
. A) step = 0.3x As = 0.3x355 = 101 mm
2
Choose 2 <l> 10istep (157 mm
2
)
Step 2: Design of the londing
The thickness of the landing is the same as the stairs =150 mm
Landing self weight = tx 'Yc = 0.15 x 25=3.75 kN/m
2
Wu/= 1.4 WDL + 1.6 WLL=1.4 (self weight +covering material)+ 1.6 WLL
2
WuF1.4x (3.75+1.0) + 1.6 x4 = 13.05 kNlm
Taking a strip of one meter
WuF 13.05 kNlm'
Assuming an edge live load of 1.5 kN/m'. P u=1.6 x 1.5 = 2.4 kNlm'
Pu=2.4 leN
\ wu =13.05 kN/m'
II f!! f!J" II!!
I"
L
e
n=1.50 m
1

M WuI x 13.05 X 1.5
2
+ 2.4 x 1.5 = lS.3kN.m
u 2 2
.Assuming 30mm concrete cover, the effective depth equals
d=t- cover = 150-30= 120mm
_ Mu _ 18.3x10
6
=0.051
R - feu b d
2
- 25x1000x120
2
From the R-co curve
(0=0.062
A =/11 feu b d mm
2
> As.min
s fy 360
Choose 5 <l> 121m' (565 mm
2
)
210
o
o
00
5<1> 121m'
5cjl8/m'
1 1 0 (straight)
5 81m'
5 81m'
3<1>16
2<1>16
lOI2/step
2<1>16
-+== 5<1>20
I300l
Section A-A
2<1>1 O/step
5<1>8/m'
Stair main reinforcement
211
Step 3: Design the supporting beam (Bl)
Step 3.1.1: Calculation of loads
Assume the beam cross section is 300x800 mm
The horizontal projection weight can be obtained from
, _ t' _ t - t s 800 - 150 _ 726 7
t _----- -. mm
cos(O) cos(O) cos(26.6) .
Self weight = 1.4 x Yc x b X t'
Selfweight=1.4 x 25 x 0.30 x 0.7267 = 7.63 kN/m' (H.P.)
The beam load (Wubl) equals (in the stairs part)
Wubl= ow. + Wu x flight width + 2 x hand rail live load
Wubl = 7.63+16.29x3+2x2.4 = 61.3 kN 1m'
Pu=2.4 leN
Pu=2.4 kN
Wu= / 6.29 kNlm '
--l 1--0.30 m
Pu=2.4 kN
w
u
=13.05 IeNlm'
--l 1--0.30 m
1 _____ 3.0 m ~ I
1 _____ 3.0 m ----
Stairs loads
Landing loads
212
The beam load (W
u
b2) equals (in the landing part)
Wub2= ow. + Wu x flight width + hand rail live load
o.w = 1.4 x Yo x b x (t-ts)=I.4 x 25 x 0.30 x (0.8-0.15) = 6.825 .kN/m'
W.b2 = 6.825 + 13.05 x 3 + 2.4 = 48.375 kN / rn'
Wub2=48.375 kN/m' wubl=61.3 kN/m'
I I I I I I I I I II 1111111111111111111111
Bending
moment
Step 3.1.2: Calculation of bending moments
RI W ubi x 4.65x(4.65/2+ 1.5)+w ub2 x3xzero
6.15
61.3x4.65x(4.65/2+1.5) = 177.3 kN
6.15
R2 = wub2 x3+w
Ubl
x4.65 -Rl = 48.375 x3+ 61.3x4.65 -177.3 = 2523-lcN
. ..
. R 1773---
Pomt of zero shear Xl =_1 = --' '" 2.@rn

_ 2.89
2
Mm .. , - RI XXI - wul XT=I77.3x2.89-61.3x-2- = 256 kN.rn
213
Step 3.1.3: Design of the critical sections
Section 1
This section has positive bending ( 256 kN.m), but we shall neglect the contribution of
the stairs and design the beam as rectangular section
Using R-w curve
d = t - 50 mm= 800- 50= 750 mm
256xl0
6
=0.061
feu bd2 25x300x750
2
From the curve it can be determined that ())=0.075
A = aJ feu bxd = 0.075 = 1179rnrn
2
>As,min
s fy 360
{
0.225K bd
Asmin = smaller of fy
0.225x300x750=703rnm
2
kA
s
o.k
360
l.3As =1.3x1l79 =1532 mm
2
use (5 18, 1272 mm
2
)
Section 2
_ 48.375 X 1.5
2
_ 54 4 kN
M _ -..rn
u 2
Using R-w curve
54.4xl0
6
=0.0129
25x300x750
2
From the curVe it can be determined that ())=0.015
A =aJ feu <A;.min
s fy 360
Use As=As,min=305 mm
2
Choose (2 20)
0.225 x 300 X 750 = 703 rnrn 2
360
l.3x235=305mm
2
.J>As
214
o.k
Step 3.2: Design the beam for Shear
It should be mentioned that the case of loading that causes the maximum bending
moments in the beams results in no torsional moment. However, it produce the
maximum shear
Step 3.2.1: Check the adequacy of the concrete dimensions
The critical section for shear and torsion is at d/2 from the support.
Q
u
= R2 - Wul x(f+f)
Qu + 0;5)= 227.5 kN
227.5 x 1000 =1.01Nlmm
2
qu bxd 300x750
)f
eu ojg5 2
qu,max =0.70 -=0.7 -=2.8Nlmm
Yc 1.5
since q u ( q u,max , the concrete dimensions are adequate.
Step 3.2.2: Design of the transverse reinforcement
q", = 0.24 {25 = 0.98 N I mm2
V 1:5
Since the applied shear is greater than qcu shear reinforcement is needed
Assume spacing of 100 mm
A = qsu xbxs = 0.52x300xlOO =64mm
2
Sf 1;." 11.15 280/1.15
use 10 ljIlO 1m
Step 3.3: Check the case of loading that produces shear and torsion
Step 3.3.1: Calculate shear and torsion stresses
The unsymmetrical loading of the flight produces combined shear and torsion as
shown in figure below. For simpliCity, the loading of the landing is taken the same as
the flight (conservative).
215
A. Torsion Stresses
52 1.5
2
M = 1.6LLX-1.-+ P
u
x 1.5 +(1.4 DL-0.9 DL)x-
2
-
, 2
2
LL = 4 kN/m
2
and DL=(6.068+l)=7.068 kN/m
2 1.5
2
-1478 tmlm'
M = 1.6 x 4x.!2.. + 2.4x1.5 + (1.4 x 7.07 -0.9x7.07)xT -. .
, 2
1.6LL
L..L-L-.L...L..L-................., Pu=2.4 kN
1.350 m
--I 1-0.30m
B=3.0m
M,
Load case that produce maximum torsion on beam
6.15 m
1
1.5 m I

:1.5 m I
/.. .. ------- 7.65 m
4.65m
216
M
7.652
,x-_
M,u, = ___ 2"'-....
6.15
14.78x 7.65
2
2
6.15
70.3 kN.m
The critical section is at d/2 from the face fth I
o e co umn (300x300 mm) .
M
,U
=M,u, -M, 70.3-14.78X(0.30 + 0.75)_
2 2 2 2 -62.5 kN.m
Assume the distance fr th .
om e concrete cover to the stirrup center line is 35 mm
XI = 300 -2 X 35= 230 mm
YI = 800 -2 X 35 = 730 mm
Ph = 2x(x, + y,) = 2x(230+730) = 1920mm
AOh =x,.y, =230x730=167900mm2
Ao =0.85Aoh = 0.85 x 167900 = 142715mm2
t = AOh _ 167900
e Ph -l92()=8704 mm
62.5 X 10
6
2.5 N Imm
2
M
q = 'u
'u 2xA xt
o e 2xI42715x87.4
B. Shear Stresses
The critical section for shear is at d/2
w =ow 14 D
u2 . ultima,.+ '. X LX(BI2)+1.6xLLx(BI2)+P 09
u + . xDLx(BI2)
w
u2
=7.63 + 1.4 x 7.07 x 1.5 + 1.6 x 4 x 1.5 + 2.4 + 0.9 x 7.07 x 1.5 = 44:01 kN I m'
R =w
u
i
x
(6.15+1.5)2/2 = 44.01x(6.15+1.5)2/2
6.15 6.15 =20904kN
wu2=44.01 kN/m'
Q
u
= R-wU2
Q
u
=209.4-4
4
.01X(0/ + 0;5)=186.3 kN
11111II111I1111111111111111111111
qu = A = 186.3x 1000 _ 2
hxd 300x750 -0.828Nlmm
R=209.4 kN t
,1.5 m I
217
6.15 m
Step 3.3.2: Check the adequacy of the concrete dimensions
qnr;x =0.70 IZ: =0.70x [25 =2.86<4.0 N Imm
2
Vr: Vl.5
q.max= 2.86 N/mm2
.J0.828
2
+ 2.5
2
= 2.63 < 2.86 ...... .o.k
Thus, section dimension is acceptable for shear and torsion
Note: Since the section is very close to the maximum values, it is advisable to increase
the beam cross-section. However, from the architectural point of view, smaller depth is
preferable.
Step 3.3.3: Reinforcement for shear
The concrete shear strength qcu equals
JR
5 2
qcu =0.24 -=0.98Nlmm
1.5
Since the applied shear is less than qcu shear reinforcement is not needed
Step 3.3.4: Reinforcement for torsion
q,u.min = 0.06 [1::. = 0.06 {25 = 0.24 N I mm
2
Vl.5
Since qtu (2.5qlumin (0.24) then reinforcement is required, and torsional concrete
strength is neglected. Assuming spacing of 100mm, the area of one branch Astr equals
A = Mru xs
str 2xAo xiySl Irs
62.5 X 10
6
x 100 = 90 mm2
2 x 142714x 280/1.15
AI = Astr XPh (i)OI)= 90X1920(280)=1343 mm2
, S Iy 100 360
Calculate the minimum area for longitudinal reinforcement AsI.min
0040 fl:Acp
A - VY:
,I.min - f I
y Ys
218
There is a condition on this equation that ASfr >
~ ~ ok
100 - 6x280 '" .
0.40 [25 x 300 x 800
A
s
/.
min
= V15
360/1.15
Since Asl > Asl,min ... o.k
Choose 8$16 (1600 mrn
2
)
s -6XJ;,Sf
90XI920(280) _
100 360 - -ve
'7o;i
Step 3.3.5: Reinforcement for combined shear and torsion
The area for two branches= 2A + A >
h
. SIr sl - Asl min , or the area of one branch for combined
s ear and torsIOn equals
ASIl+ Asti'2=90+O=90 mrn
2
Choose $ 12 mrn (1l3 mrn
2
) (one branch)
A _ 0.4 0.4
Sf.min -t;bx
s
= 280 300xlOO=42.85mm
2
(two branches)
A s ~ m i n (one branch) = 42.85/2=21.4 mrn
2
<1l3 2
mrn ..... o.k
219
Step 4: Design of column (Refer to Chapter 8)
The colurrm is subjected to compressive force in addition to bending resulted from the
torsion load case of the beam.
Pu=209.4 kN
Mtut =70.3 kN
Additional moment Original column
The column is considered as case 1 (tbeam>tcolumn) at the top and case 3 (foundation) at
the bottom in the in-plane and out of plane directions
Hcolumn =2.1= m, From Table 6-10 in the code for unbraced columns k= 1.6
H= k X Hcolumn =1.6 x 2.1 = 3.36 Q1
1 H 3.36xlOOO 10 dd' . I . did
.IL = _e = 11.2> -+ a lttona moment is eve ope
b 300
(J=A
2
Xb 11.22 xO.30 =0.0188
2000 2000
M add = p" x(J= 209.4xO.0188 =3.94kN.m
M,o,.(in-p/eme) =M u +MCK/d = 70.3+3.94= 74.24 kN.m
Mtot(outofplan)=Mu + Madd= 0 + 3.94 = 3.94 kN.m
R = Pu = 209.4xlOOO =0.093
b feu xb xt 25x300x300
The column is subjected to biaxial bending, from code Table 6.12.a with Rt,=0.I-+p=0.8
M' =M +fJ - M =74.24+0.8x - x3.94=77.39kN.m
(
a') (270)
., "b' Y 270
Me
x 77.39xl0 0.115
25x300x300
2
Using interaction diagram with uniform steel,J;,=360 N/mm
2
and S=0.8-+ -+p = 8.0
f1 = pxfcu X 10-4 =8.0x25xl0-4 =0.02>llmin
220
ASlotal = p,xb xt = 0.02x 300x300 =1800mm 2
Choose 8Cl>18 (2035 nun
2
)
I 300 nun I
81m'
8 18
Photo 5.6 Cantilever stairs from a middle beam
221
IOcp12/m'
2 <l> 20
I 2 <l> 12
Beam elevation
2<1>16
2<l>l 0
2<1>12
10 121m'
2<1>16
2<1>16
2<1>12
+
2<1>16
5<1>18
I
1300
1
Flexure rft.
shear and torsion rft.
Sec I-I
222
3<1> 16
2<1>16
10 121m'
2<1> 16
5<1>20
Flexure, shear,
and torsion rft.
6
SHORT COLUMNS SUBJECTED TO
CONCENTRIC COMPRESSION
Photo 6.1 Reinforced concrete columns in a shopping center
6.1 Introduction
Columns are the most important structural element in buildings. A great number of
structural failures are attributed to column failure .. A plain concrete column can carry
compression forces, however its ultimate capacity is greatly enhanced by adding
vertical bars. For normal ratios of reinforcement, the increase in strength due, to the
addition of vertical reinforcement can range from 15-40 percent of the total carrying
axial capacity. Lateral reinforcement or ties are added to provide support to the
longitudinal bars and decrease the tendency of the bars to buckle out. They also
prevent the concrete from expanding laterally due to Poisson's effect and accordingly
increase the concrete ultimate strain. Reinforced concrete columns are classified as
tied or spiral depending on the lateral confinement type.
223
ill actual practice there are no perfect axially loaded columns. Some percentage of
eccentricity will occur due to the reduction of the size of the column from one floor to
another or the misalignment of the column. Hence, a minimum longitudinal
reinforcement ratio has to be provided to account for any stresses resulting from the
eccentricity.
Reinforced concrete columns are usually classified as short or long depending on the
length to width ratio and end restraint conditions (refer to Chapter 7). The discussion
in this chapter is limited to short columns either subjected to axial loads.
6.2 Axially Loaded Tied Columns
6.2.1 Behavior and Strength
The failure of the tied column is usually initiated by the spalling (jalling) of the
concrete cover followed by the buckling of the longitudinal bars due to the lack of the
lateral support provided by the cover. The failure of axially loaded reinforced concrete
columns is brittle with little or no warning. Up to approximately 80% of the total load,
no sign of cracking appears. Suddenly vertical cracks start to appear with concrete
cover failure leading to the collapse of the column.
Since failure of columns is often sudden with a high potential for loss of life, columns
are designed with a much higher safety factor than beams. Because perfect straight
columns subjected to pure axial loading are subjected to the brittle failure mode, the
Egyptian code increases the strength reduction factors for concrete and steel to 1. 75
and 1.34, respectively.
0.67 X/cu lYe
&cu J----l

__. _____ . __ .._._._.....___. ___ ...
b
strain stress
6.1 Strain and stress distributions for columns under axial loads
When a column is subjected to axial loads, longitudinal strain develops in both
concrete. an4 steel. Because of the perfect bond between steel and concrete, the strains
in the concrete and steel are equal. The total carrying capacity of the column is the
summation of concrete and steel contributions .. At failure, all the steel reinforcement is
assumed 'to reach yielding. Applying the equilibrium equation for the section shown in
Fig. 6.1 gives
224
.............................................
(6.1)
_ 0.67/
cu
b t + Asc x/
y
_ 0.383/
cu
Ac +0.75Asc /y ............. (6.2)
Pu - 1.75 1.34
d A is the total area of the steel reinforcement.
Where, Ac is the area of the concrete an sc.. .
..' trai ht columns, which are practically
The previous behavlOr IS apphed for s g columns most codes impose a
almost do not exist. Even for II::e1eSign to ;ccount for dimensional
minimum eccentricity to ?e ere co action of axial loads. The ECP-203
inaccuracies and uncertamtles m the hne 0
minimum eccentricity is given by Eq. 6.3 as follows
e . =biggero/ {02'0
05
t ................................................ (6.3)
mm mm
duction in axial load capacity. Thus the code
The existence of leads to ate tr gth by reducing the capacity by about
imposes a further reductlOn on co umn s en
10% giving the following equatIon
p == 0.3'5/
eu
Ae + 0.67/ y Asc ........................................... (6.4)
u
Photo 6.2 Olympic stadium in Berlin
225
6.2.2 Code Provisions for Tied Columns

For short tied colunms, the minimum vertical reinforcement is 0.8% of the
required cross sectional area but not less than 0.6% of the chosen concrete
area.
The maximum reinforcement ratio in colunms is
4% for interior colunms
5% for exterior colunms
6% for comer colunms
The minimum vertical bar diameter is 12mm
The minimum colunm dimension is 200 mm for both circular and
rectangular colunms. However, in practice, colunm dimensions are usually
not less than 250 mm.
Intermediate bars should be added if the colunm width is greater than 300
mm as shown in Fig. 6.2.

The maximum distance between two bars supported by ties is 250 mm.
The maximum distance between unsupported bars and supported bars
is 150 mm as shown in Fig. 6.2.
The maximum vertical distance for ties is 15xthe smallest longitudinal
bar diameter but not more than 200mm as shown in Fig. 6.3.
The minimum stirrup diameter is one quarter of the longitudinal bars but not
less than 8 mm
The minimum stirrups volume is 0.25% of the concrete volume for one
meter of the colunm.
V == n xA xprimeter 0.25 xb xt x 1000 .......................... (6.5a)
s. 100
V. (mm
3
) (6.5b)
where Asp is the area of the stirrups and n is number of stirrups per meter.
226
300mm
:10

VI
< 250mm
me
< 250mm
T---l
< 250mm
-I---"t
:5 250 mm
I--l
/I"
..
'II!

l-
Ie
--
...
< 250mm
-1-1
:5 300mm
:5 150mm
H
:5 250mm
r I J J
r [J
F
6 2 Column Reinforcement Details
19 . .
227
,/

-L
;
r-
--
-
-
; - - I- ::;0
f5
1000
;
s = minof -- - -
",
n=--
s ;
.
--
r- -.,
T
200

::::-
r .:-
... ;
;
.:
--.,
0
",

0 --
- -
3
;; --
'-.
-.,
"'"
-- - -
",;
stirrups
d, = max of
;'"
--I- -.,
-
--.
,;
---l
;' -.,
Vertical bars (d
bar
)
;
1--;
--
---
/
; --- -.,
; ;
d'1llr
mm
{
d
t
8 mm
-- - -
?V

--
,.
::::---
---
Fig. 6.3 Stirrups spacing requirements
Photo 6.3 Bridge column failure due to lack of lateral-;einforc:ment
228
6.2.3 Splicing of Vertical Reinforcement
For columns that are not used as a part of a lateral load reslstmg system, the
reinforceinent is spliced above each floor. Figure 6.4 shows lap details of the most
widely used types in Egypt. The requirement for lap splice depends on the state of
stress at ultimate state. If the column is subjected to combined bending and axial loads,
tensile stress may occur and tension lap splice should be provided. For concentrically
load columns, the ECP requires compression lap splice of 40 <1> for high grade steel
and 35 for mild steel. .
Column cross sections might change from one floor to another due to change in the
axial applied force. Thus, the longitudinal bars may be discontinued or laterally
displaced. The maximum allowable slope for the bars is 1:6 as shown in Fig 6.4.A. If
the slope exceeds this limit the detail shown in Fig. 6.4.B-C should be followed. For
colunms subjected to high . lateral forces such as those used in seismic regions, the
splice is made at the mid-height of the column as shown in Fig. 6.4.D.
-- ---
fAt rtA
D-
IU
-'
I

r- ri
I 1

!

fA
v
Ql
D-
o
Ui
---
L __
---. ---
A: Slope less than 1:6
Spliced bars Ell
Column reinforcement
........ -----
B: Slope more than 1:6
-
At rtA
!
n
I
""-
fA
v

.2
(J)
- ---
L_ L_ L._
---
C: Slope more than 1:6

fJ Jlil
I ,

Fig. 6.4 Column lap splice requirements in structures- with limited ductility
229
/
'
"
2s
o
or 1
200m T
splice at mid-height of the
IIP=U=",*,=:Jll'";:c::ioli:":um=n::at different locations
D: columns subjected to high lateral forces
{
500mm
Lo = bigger of Clear height /6
Column bigger dimension (t)
/
bco/urnn /2
8<1> .
So = smaller of longlDtudnal
24r/Jslriuups
150mm
Fig. 6.4 Reinforcement of c I .
o umns In ductile structures subjected to
large lateral force
230
Design steps for short columns (dimensions are not known)
1) Assume Ase= 0.01 A
Calculate P
u
= 1.4 P DL + 1. 6 P
LL
Solve the column equation to find Ac
P
u
= Ac (0.35 feu + 0.0067 fy )
2) Calculate reinforcement area Ase
Asc= 0.01 Ac.required > 0.006 Asc.choscn
3) Design the stirrups diameter d
s
and spacing s
Check that d
s
8 mm d
bar
14 (biggest bar diameter)
Check that s ::::: 200 mm ::::: 15 d
bar
4) Check that stirrups volume 0.25%
(smallest bar diameter)
nx A,p x primeter 2: 2.5 x bx t (mm
3
)
Note: In some cases, and due to architectural requirements, the cross-section of
the column could be limited to certain dimensions. Accordingly, the designer
has to provide the amount of longitudinal reinforcement that satisfies the
strerigth requirement. If such amount might case a difficulty in casting the
column, the designer could specify a higher concrete strength.
Design steps for short columns (dimensions are known)
1) Solve the column equation to find Asc
P
u
= 0.35 feu Ae + 0.67 fy A,e
2) Check that
3) Design the stirrups diameter d
s
and spacing s
Check that d
s
8 mm d
bar
l4 (biggest bar diameter)
Check that s::::: 200 mm:::::t5 d
bar
(smallest bar diameter)
4) Check that stirrups volume 0.25%
nx Asp x primeter 2: 2.5 x b x t (mm
3
)
231
~ I
I
I
j
II
I
!
Example 6.1
Design a tied column that is subjected to the following axial compression loads
P
DL
= 1057 kN
P
u
=400kN
The material properties are as follows:
feu = 35 N/mm
2
/y =400 N/mm
2
Solution
Step 1: Calculate column dimension
Calculate the ultimate load
P
u
= 1.4 P
DL
+ 1.6 P
LL
= 1.4 x 1057 + 1.6 x 400 = 2119.8 kN
Assume Asc= 0.01 Ac
P
u
= Ae (0.35 leu + 0.0067 Iy )
2119.8 X 1000 = Ae(0.35 X 35 + 0.0067 X 400)
Ac = 141982 mm
2
Assume column width b of 250 mm, then column thickness t equals
t = Ae = 141982 = 568 mm
b 250
t=600mm
Step 2: Calculate reinforcement area
Asc = 0.01 Ac,required > 0.006 Ae , chosen
Asc =0.01xI41982=(1419 mm
2
) > 0.006 (250x600) o.k.
Choose 8 <l> 16 (1608 mm
2
)
232
Step 3: Calculate stirrups
Chose stirrup diameter of 8 mm (> 16/4) and spacing of 200 mm 16 x 15)
Choose 5 4> 81m'
. f25 mm from each side the dimensions of the stirrups equal:
Assume concrete cover 0 '
Stirrup A (200 x 550) Stirrup B (200 x 250)
The perimeter of the center line of the stirrups
p = 2x(200+550)+ 2x (200+ 250) = 2400 mm
The volume of the stirrups in 1 meter equals
J. 8 =50 mm
2
Noting that we have 5 stirrups per meter and Asp for,!, mm
0
3 3
V . =2.5x250x600=375
x
l mm
s.mm
V =nxA xp =5x50x2400=600x l0
3
mm
3
>Vsmino.k
s sp
14 150
TobarCL
--------- 1--
600mm
200 150
.1' 1 '
r 25 rom to CL of""
-I ~ 25 mmcover

~ - e j
5 1
233
Example 6.2
Calculate the maximum and th " e mIlllmum loads that . .
according the following data: an mtenor column can carry
Column cross section (250 mm x 800 mm)
.feu = 30 N/mm2
h =360N/mm
2
Solution
Since the column dimensions mater' I .
reinforcement area. ' Ia propertIes are given, the only variable is the
The maximum area steel for interior column is 40/ tl A /0 lUS sc equals
4
Ase.max = 100 x 250 x SOO = SOOO mm
2
~ (18 25)
P" = 0.35 feu Ae + 0.67 f A
y sc
1
P".max = 1000 {0.35 X 30 X 250x SOO + 0.67 X 360x SOOO} = 4029.6 kN
The minimum ar f I ea 0 stee for a column is 0 8
0
/ fth . /0 0 e reqUIred area
A O.S
sc.min = 100 x250xSOO=1600mm
2
~ (8 16)
P" = 0.35 feu Ac + 0.67 f A
y sc
1
p
u
min
= 1000 {0.35 X 30 X 250 X SOO + 0.67 X 360 X 1600} = 24S5.92 kN
I
800mm
1 14
800mm
'\
I I ~ [

[1 J]I :II(

[
LJI
18 25 -\8#16
(
(
0
l']
[
(
1
l
Column with . maXImum remforcement Colunm with minimum reinforcement
234
6.3 Axially Loaded Spiral Columns
6.3.1 Behavior and strength
Tied columns are commonly used in buildings and structures in non-seismic regions .
Occasionally, when ductility or higher strength is required, a continuous circular steel
reinforcement in the form of a spiral is used instead of individual stirrups. This type of
column is called a spiral column.
Photo 6.4 Spiral reinforced concrctc column
The main advantage of using the spiral reinforcement is the enhancement of the
concrete confinement developed by the closer spacing of spiral reinforcement as
shown in Fig. 6.5.
Second maximum load
Spiral column under
axial loading
Tied column under axial
loading
Fig. 6.5 Behavior of tied and spiral columns
235
Deformation
The spaced stirrups of the spiral and the vertical bars confine the concrete ve
effectively. As a result, the concrete cover will spall off but the core will continue ;:
carry loads larger than the initial load that caused spalling (falling). This is due to the
of compressive strength produced by the spiral. The spalling of the
gIves a wammg of failure, and shortly after that the column will reach another
maximum load but under very large defonnations.
difference between the failure modes of tied and spiral columns the
h
CP
specifies to Eq. 6.6) an additional increase of approximately l4'Yo in
t e ultimate load capacity than regular tied columns Eq. 6.4.
pitch,p
---,----1-/

Diameter
I
-/
Spiral
reinforcement
spiral
stirrup
I' D '1
1-1
Fig. 6.6 Spiral reinforcement details
The ECP 203 states that the ultimate load a spirally loaded column is the smaller of
two values. The first value given by Eq. 6.6 is based on the axial capacity of the
arlea Ac. The second value given by Eq. 6.7 considers the confining
ec 0 e spira on the core strength
=O.4fcu Ae +0.
76
f y Ase ........................................... (6.6)
=0.35fcu Ak +0.
67
f y Ase+1.3Sxfyp V
sp
............................ {6.7)
where
Ak i.s the of c?ncrete core enclosed by spiral stirrups
v.p IS the spiral remforcement ratio
p the pitch of the spiral stirrups
/yp the steel yield strength of the stirrups
Asc IS the area of the vertical steel
A
,. 2
k
=-D
4 k
Dk = (D-cover)
236
Vsp = 7r A; Dk ;;::Vsp,min ..................................................... (6.S)
Asp is the area of the spiral.
P is the pitch of the spiral (30->SOmm)
f.lsp.min -1] ....... f: ........................................ (6.9)
but
f.l ' = Vsp.min .............................................................. (6.10)
sp.mlD Ak
v ' =0.36(f
e
u)[A -A
k
] .............................................. (6.11)
sp.mm i
yp
C
The designer assumes a cross sectional area for the rebar used as spiral (8mm or
bigger diameter) and computes the required pitch. The pitch used must be within the
limitations of the ECP 203 of30 mm to SOmm. If the required pitch is less than 30
mm, a bigger diameter should be assumed. On the other hand, if the calculated pitch is
greater than SOmm, a decrease of the spiral diameter or the use of the same diameter
but with spacing of 80 mm should be considered.
The minimum area of the longitudinal steel for spiral columns is more than that for a
tied column, and is related to both the gross and core cross sectional areas of concrete,
and is given by
(
0.01 Ac
A m'n = the maximum of
s. I 0.012 Ak
(gross area)
............... (6.12)
(core area)
6.3.2 Minimum Spiral Reinforcement
The ability of the confined concrete to carry additional loads is attributed to the lateral
pressure developed on the concrete core by the heavy coils of the spiral. Experimental
tests proved that concrete axial compressive strength increases to the order of 4.1 times
the applied lateral pressure. The spiral column is designed so that the increased
capacity of the core due to spiral lateral pressure h equals the loss that may occur if the
concrete cover spalls off as shown in Fig. 6.7. Thus, the capacity of the column
without applying the strength reduction factor equals, '
41f2 XAk = 0.67 x feu (Ae - A
k
) .............................................. (6.13)
237
lateral
pressure
pressure
Fig. 6.7 Lateral pressure developed in spiral columns
concrete
cover
concrete
core
Spiral stirrup
Prom the free body diagra h . P' 6
th .m s own III Ig. .8, and by equating the force in the steel to
e pressure on concrete, It can be concluded that
12 xp xDk = 2xAsp xlysp ........................................ (6.14)
2A xl
12 == sp ysp
P xD
k
(6.15)
Fig. 6.8 Analysis of forces
Substituting in with expression 6.15 into Eq. 6.13 gives
2A xl
41 sp YSPA 0
. PXDk k = .67xleu(Ae-Ak) ............................ (6.16)
238
A xl
sp YSP(JrDk)=0.33xleu(Ae-Ak) ................................... (6.17)
px
Rounding some numbers, Eq. 6.17 can be put in the following form
Vsp.mio = 0.36 xI leu .fAe -.4k) ....................................... (6.18)
ysp ..
or
(
I F(A .....
J.l i =0.36x --E!L x ._C -1 ................................... (6.19)
sp,mo l
ySp
" Ak
The previous equation is the ECP 203 equation for minimum stirrups.
6.3.3 Code Provisions for Spiral Columns
The minimum area of steel is 1 % of the gross sectional area but not less than
1.2 from the core area.
The minimum spiral bar diameter is 8 mm
The maximum pitch for a spiral column is 80 mm and the minimum is 30 mm.
p=30-80 mm
--.,...----If-r
(200mm) min
I
. \
Minimum spiral
diameter is 8 mm
Fig. 6.9 Spiral column code requirements
239
Design Steps
I. Assume Asc= 0.01 Ac
2. Solve the first equation to find Ac
Calculate P = 1 4 P + 1 6 P
u DL LL
3.
4.
5.
p" = Ae (0.4 leu + 0.0076.0. )
Solve the second equation to get Vsp
p" = 0.35 f cu Ak +0.67 f A + l.38xf V
ysc ypsp
if V. =-ve use V.
sp sp.min
check Vsp,min
Vsp,min = 0.36 (;:: ) [Ae -Ak ]
calculate the pitch (P) using
1l Asp Dk
p=
VsP
ifp> 80 mm usep = 80 mm
if p< 30 mm increase spiral area (Asp) and recalculate p
D '1
1-1._--=D..!>....k --II
In some cases, due to requirements,the cross-section of
e Ctlumn be hrmted to certam dImensions. Accordingly the designer
as 0 the amount of longitudinal reinforcement that' satisfies the
st7ngth If such amount might case a difficulty in casting the
co umn, the deSIgner could specifY a higher concrete strength.
240
Example 6.3
Design a spiral column to support an unfactored dead load of 1500 kN and an
unfactored live load of 700 kN. The material properties are!cu=25 N/mm
2
, hy = 240
2 2 .
N/mm ,/yp=240 N/mm
Solution
Step 1: Determine cross section and Asc
P
u
= 1.4 P
DL
+ 1.6 P
LL
= 1.4 x 1500 + 1.6 x 700 = 3220 kN
The most economical percentage of steel fl is 1% to 1.5%. Assume that fl= 1 %,
substitute in equation to find the area of the cross section as first trial.
P
u
= 0.4 leu Ae + 0.76 IJ' Ase
3220x 1000 = 0.4 X 25 X Ae + 0.76 X 240x (0.01 Ae)
Ae = 272327 mm
2
A =!!..D2
c 4
D=588.84mm
The nearest round number is 600 mm. Assume that the concrete cover is 25 mm then
the core diameter Dk equals
Dk=600-50 =550 mm
.";o.!\..
The area of the concrete, Ae =!!.. D2 =!!.. 600
2
= 282743 fnm 2
4 4
Theareaofthecore,A
k
=!!..Di =!!..550
2
= 237583mm
2
4 4
A th
. f(o.OlA
e
=0.010x282743=28.27mm
2
. = e maXImum 0
s.mm 0.012A
k
=0.012x237583=2850.mff,2 .J
Asc= 0.01 Ac = 2827.43 mm
2
<Asmi,,--+ use Asc=Asmin
Asc=2850 lIlI1i
Choose 12 q, 18 (3053 mm
2
)
241
Step 2: Determine spiral reinforcement
Applying in the second equation to determine the volume of the spiral (Vsp)
p. = 0.35 feu Ak + 0.67 I
l
Asc + 1.38 x 1 V
J'P sp
Note that Asc chosen will be used
3220 x 1000 = 0.35 x 25 x 237583 + 0.67 x 240 x 3053 + 1 38 x 240 x V . sp
V sp = 1963 mm
2
Check that Vsp > Vsp,min
Vsp,min = 0.36 (Ilcu )rAc
)'P 240
Vsp.min = 1693 mm
2
< VsP ...... o.k
600mm
I
550mm
I
12$18
$ 8/40mm
Step 3: Design of spiral
that bar ?iameter.ofthe spiral is 8 mm, Asp= 50 mm
2
.Use the following
equatIOn to determme the stIrrup pitch p
7l"x50x550
P 1962 = 44.2 mm
Round to the smallest pitch p=40 mm
p<80 mm andp>30 mm .... o.k.
242
;.
Example 6.4
Determine the ultimate load that can be supported by a spiral column having a cross
section of 800 mm with minimum area of steel required by the code. The spiral
reinforcement is<jJI0 every 50 mm. The material properties are/cu=30 N/mm2 ,/y =
360 N/mm2 ,/yp=240 N/mm2
Solution
Step 1: calculate 'section properties
Calculate the cross sectional area of the column
D
k
=800-50 =750 mm
Ak =!!...D; =!!...750
2
= 441786 mm
2
4 4
The area of the reinforcement equals
{
om Ac 0.01 x 502655 = 5026 mm
2
Asc = bigger 01 0.012 Ak 0.012x441786=5301mm
2
.J
Asc=5301 mm
2
Step 2: calculate ultimate load
Substitute in the first equation
p. = 0.4 leu Ac + 0.76 Iy Asc
P
u
= (004 x 30x 502655 + 0.76 x 360x 5301)/1000
P
u
=7482 kN
. . 2
Calculate the volume of the spIral, for $10 mmAsp= 78.53 mm
V = 7l" x 78.53 x 750 = 3701 mm
2
sl' 50
Applying in the second equation to determine the second ultimate load
243
p" = 0.35 x30 x441786+ 0.67 x 360x 5301 + 1.38 x 240 x 3701
Puis the smaller ofthe two ultimate loads, thus
I Pu= 7143 kNI
Choose 12 I> 25 (5890 mm
2
)
800mm
750mm -I
12<1>25
Pu= 7143 kN
Photo 6.5 Circular reo f, d "
In orce concrete columns supporting a bridge
244
6.4 Design of Composite Columns
The use of composite columns has become increasingly popular in high-rise buildings
construction due to several advantages such are:
1- Significant saving in material and construction time.
2- Smaller cross section and higher strength to weight ratio than conventional
reinforced concrete columns.
3- Inherent ductility and toughness that can be useful in resisting lateral loads.
4- Higher load carrying capacity due to the composite action of steel and concrete.
Furthermore the copfinement of the outer shell in case of in-filled columns,
increase the compressive strength of concrete.
Composite columns can include concrete" filled into FRP shell (fiber reinforced
plastics) or into steel pipe. The ECP-203 defines composite columns as compression
members reinforced longitudinally with one of the following (refer to Fig. 6.10):
1- Internal structural steel shapes.
2- External steel pipe.
3- External steel tubing.
6.4.1 Design Guidelines
1. Forces required to be resisted by concrete in the composite member shall be
transmitted to concrete through direct bearing on concrete. Bearing strength
should be checked in accordance to clause (4-2-4-1) or clause (5-6) of ECP-
203. All forces not directly transmitted to the concrete should be transmitted to
the steel section through connections attached to the steel sections. .
2. Interaction diagrams for composite columns subjected to eccentric compression
force can be developed in a manner similar to that followed for regular
3. All axial load strength not assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be
developed by direct connection to the structural steel shape, pipe, or tube. This"
achieved through welding of shear connectors (small steel pieces) to the steel
shape or pipe before casting the conqrete.
4. The maximum yield strength of the structural steel core shall not exceed 350
N/mm
2

5. Spiral reinforcement pitch and diameter should confirm to that mentioned in
non-composite reinforced concrete columns.
p =30-80 mm
:?8mm
245
6. The ratio of the longitudinal reinforcement (Jl) shall not be less than 1 % and
not more than 6% of the net area ofthe cross section as follows:
<6%
Where Ag is the gross cross sectional area, Ase is the area of the reinforcement
and Ass is the structural steel area.
7. The moment of inertia of the longitudinal reinforcement may be added to the
structural steel moment of inertia as follows
I, =Ise +Iss
Ise =moment of inertia of the longitudinal steel.
Iss = moment of inertia for the structural steel about the centroid.
8. The slenderness ratio of the composite column maybe evaluated using the radius
of gyration given by the following equation:
(Ee Ig/S)+EJ,
r =0.80 (Ee Ag /S)+E,A, ............................................ (6.20)
Ag = gross area of the cross section
At = total area of steel (Ase+Ass)
Ee = Young's modulus of concrete -:+ Ee = 4400K.
Es = Young's modulus of the structural steel (=200000 N/mm
2
)
Ig = moment of inertia of the concrete section about the centroid neglecting the effect
of the reinforcement
It . = moment of inertia of the structural steel and reinforcement (Ise+Iss)
In reinforced concrete columns subject to sustained loads, creep transfers some of the
load from the concrete to the steel, increasing the steel stresses. In the case of lightly
reinforced columns, the load transfer between concrete and steel may cause the
compression steel to yield prematurely (too early), resulting in a loss of the effective
EI due to creep in both steel and concrete. However, For heavily reinforced columns or
for composite columns in which the pipe or structural shape makes up a large
percentage of the cross section, the load transfer due to creep is not significant.
Accordingly, in Eq. (6.20) only the term EI of the concrete is reduced for sustained
load effects.
246
\ ...
.. \
.- ....

Circular stirru s
or spiral reinforcement

'"
.4
P
<J

t
4

i
\ ...
o
.. \
t1
a)External tube + steel reinforcement
b )External pipe + steel reinforcement
Structural steel
I-beam
c)Internal I-beam + steel reinforcemen
t d)Internal angles + steel reinforcement
Fig. 6.10 Examples of composite columns.
247
6.4.2 Types of Composite Columns
6.4.2.1 Structural steel confining concrete core
Structu:al steel confining core should have a wall thickness large enough to
reach YIeld. stress before bucklmg outward. The ECP-203 requires that for a composite
member WIth concrete encased by structural steel tube or pipe, the thickness of the
steel wall shall be not .less than:
For rectangular column with width b, the minimum thickness for each face as shown
in Fig. 6.10 is given by
tmin ............................................... (6.21)
For circular columns with diameter D
t. .
mm - 8E, ............................................. (6.22)
Where Es is the modulus of elasticity of external steel casing.
Capacity of columns with ordinary stirrups
The capacity of the encased concrete columns SUbjected to axial load with
minimum eccentricity (e < emin) equals to:
p" = 0.35 leu Ae +0.67Iy" A" + 0.67Iy,e A ......................... (6.23)
Where:
/yss = Steel yield strength of the outer steel tube or pipe.
/ysc = Steel yield strength of internal steel vertical reinforcement.
Ass = CroS's sectional area of the outer steel tube or pipe.
Asc = Cross sectional area of the internal vertical reinforcement.
248
Capacity of circular columns with spiral reinforcement
The capacity of circular composite columns that are laterally confined is given
by: .
P
u
=OAOl
cu
Ae +0.67 I
y
" A" +0;76Iy,e A ................... (6.24)
Where:
/yss = Steel yield strength of the internal structural steel shape.
/Ysc = Steel yield strength ofinternal steel reinforcement.
Ass = Cross sectional area of the internal structural steel shape.
Asc = Cross sectional area of the internal reinforcement.
In such a case, the amount of the spiral reinforcement should satisfy the
minimum requirements given by the following equations:
7r Asp Dk ;::Vsp.min .................................. (6.2Sa)
p
V . =0.36(/cu )[A -A
k
] (6.2Sb)
sp.mm 1 e
yp
D'k =(D -cover)
where
Ac is the gross cross sectional area of the column.
Ak is the area of concrete core enclosed by spiral stirrups.
Asp is the cross sectional area of the spiral stirrups.
Vsp is the spirl;ll reinforcement volume.
P . is the pitch of the spiral stirrups.
/yp is the steel yield strength of the stirrups.
249
6.4.2.2 Concrete surrounding Structural Steel Core
To maintain the concrete around the structural steel core in composite columns, it is
,reasonable to require more lateral ties than needed for ordinary reinforced concrete
columns. The yield strength of the structural steel core should be limited to prevent
of the concrete. It has been assumed that axially compressed concrete will
not separate at strains less than 0.0018. According to the ECP-203 yield strength of
350 N/mm2 represents an upper limit ofthe useful maximum steel stress.
The axial capacity of the composite column with concrete surounding the structural
steel core may be calculated according to the type of ties as follows:
Ordinary stirrups surrounding structural steel core
In case of using ordinary stirrups, the following requirements should be
satisfied:
1. The diameter of stirrups shall not be less than 8 mm and shall completely
surround the structural steel core.
2. Stirrups shall have a diameter. not less than 0.02 times the greatest side
dimension of the composite member but not more than 16 mm.
3. Vertical spacing of stirrups shall not exceed (16<1 longitudinal bar diameters.
4. A longitudinal bar shall be located at every comer of a rectangular cross
section, with other longitudinal bars spaced not more than one-half the least
side dimension ofthe composite member or 150 mm.
The ultimate carrying capacity of the column is calculated by
P,,'=O.35I
c
// Ac+O.67IyssAss+O.67Iysc Asc .......................... (6.26)
Where:
hss = Steel yield strength of the internal structural steel.
hsc = Steel yield strength of the longitudinal steel reinforcement.
Ass = Cross sectional area ofthe internal structural steel.
Asc = Cross sectional area of the longitudinal reinforcement.
250
d
t tural steel core
Spiral reinforcement surroun '"9 s ruc
Concrete that is laterally confined by spiral reinforcement has increased l?ad-
carrying strength.
In case of using spiral reinforcement, the capacity is given by:
A 0 671
A +
1381 V .... (6.27)
p = 0.351 C// Ak +0.67 I yss ss +. ysc sc . )'P sp
u
Steel yield strength of the internal steel shape.
hss = Steel yield strength of remforcement.
ij.sc = Steel yield strength of the spIral stIrrUps.
Jyp = Cross sectional area of the internal sn:uctural steel shape.
Ass = Cross sectional area of the internal remforcement.
Asc I .
v:
= Spiral reinforcement vo ume.
sp
minimum
Co t should satisfy the
Th amount of the spiral
req:irement given by the following equatIOn:
.......................
. ............. (6.28)
Wi v:
. is determined from Eq. 6.25.
lere sp.mm
. I for the rebar used as spiral (Smm or
The designer assumes a cross sectithna d pl'tch The pitch used must be
. .j d omputes e reqmre. . h'
an . c _ 03 (30 mm-->80mm). If the required IS
withm the hmltatIOns ECP 2 h ld b med On the other hand, If the
b' diameter s ou e assu .
less than 30 Igger 80mm a decrease of the spiral diameter or the
calculated pItch IS greater than. : f 80 mm should be considered.
use of the same diameter but With spacmg 0
251
EXample 6.5
Design a rectangular composite column with . .
subjected to the following axial compression No. 300 If the column is
PDL = 1450kN
Pu =760kN
" The material properties are as follows
feu = 35 N/mm
2
hsc =360 N/mm2
hss =300 N/mm
2
Solution
Step 1: Calculate column dimension
Calculate the ultimate"load
p. =1.4PDL + 1.6 PLL = 1.4xI450+1.6x760 = 3246 kN
The cross sectional area oflPE 300=5380 mm2
The axial capacity of a composite column is given by
p. =0.35/cu Ac +0.67/. A +0.67/ A
re n
Assume Asc= 0.01 Ac. thus
P. =Ac1
0
.35/cu +0.0067/ )+0.67/ A
ysc yss ss
3246 x 1000 = Ac (0.35 x 35 + 0.0067 x 360) + 0.67 x 300 x 5380
Ac = 147635 mm
2
Assume column width b of250 mm, then column thiclmess t equals
"
b 250 - 590.5 mm
t=600mm
Step 2: Calculate longitudinal reinforcement area
Au; = O.OIAc
Asc = O.Olx 147635 = 1476 mm
2
Choose 16 12 (1810 mm
2
)
Th . ho
e maxImum nzontal spacing between the vertical bars equals
b 250
:::;2 ="2 = 125 mm:::; 150mm ok.
252
The ratio of the longitudinal reinforcement Jl should not be less than 1% and
not more than 6% from the net cross section
A
Jl= __
Ag -A,
<6%
A, = Asc"hosen + Ass =1810+5380=7190 mm
2
Jl 1810 = 1.27% 1% ..... .ok.
250x 600-7190
<6% .... .ok
Step 3: Calculate stirrups
In this type of composite columns, more" lateral ties is required than for ordinary
The minimum stirrup diameter t 150 = 600/50 = 12mm
1

" :::;16mm
The vertical spacing between the ties should be less than 16 times the vertical bars
Chose stirrup diameter of 12 mm and spacing of 167 mm <(16 x 12=192 mm)
Choose 6 tP 12 Im'
E
E
o
I!}
C\J
I 600mm I
12cfP12
253
Example 6.6
Design a spiral composite column (D=600 mm) with internal IPE 330 to support an
unfactored dead load of 1940 kN and an unfactored live load of 1620 kN.
The material properties are as follows
feu = 25 N/mm2
hsc =360 N/mm2
hp =240 N/mm2
hss =400 N/mm2
Spiral
reinforcement
Solution
600mm
p" = 1.4 P
DL
+ 1.6 P
LL
= 1.4 x 1940 + 1.6 x 1620 = 5308 kN
The area of the concrete, Ae =!!..D2 =!!..600
2
=282743 mm
2
4 4 .
Dk=600-50 =550 mm
The area of the core,A
k
=!!..D2 =!!..550
2
=237583 mm
2
4 k 4
Assume that 1 % --Asc= 0.01 Ac = 2827.43mm
2
The chosen Ase is less than 1.2% of Ak (2850 mm
2
), thus take Asc=2850 mm
2
Choose 12 $ 18 (3054 mm
2
)
254
The ratio of the 10ngitud!nal reinforcement J1 should not be less than 1 % and
not more than 6% from the net cross section

Ae -At
At =A,e,cho,en +Ass =3054+6260=9314 mm
2
J1 = 3054 = 1.12% 1 % ..... .ok.
282743-9314
<6% .... .ok
Applying in the column equation to determine the volume of the spiral (Vsp)
P
u
= 0.35 I cu Ak +0.67 Ass + 0.
67
I y,e A,e + 1.3
8
1)11 V,p
Note thathss =400 N/mm
2
, however, according to the ECP-203, the maximum usable
structural steel yield strength is 350 N/mm2 :. Iyss =350 N/mm2
5308 x 1000 = 0.35 x 25 x 237583 +0.67 x 350x 6260+0.67 x360x 3053 + 1.38 x 240 xV,p
Check that Vsp > Vsp,min
v . = 0.36 (leu )[A _A
k
]=0.36(E-)[282743-237583]
'p.mm I>'P e 240
V,p.min =1694mm
2
<V,p ..... o.k
600mnl
550mm
255
Step 3: Design of spiral
Assuming that bar diameter of the spiral is 10 mm A ..- 2
equation to determine the pitchp , :sp- 78.5 nun. Use the following
p= 7r Asp D.
Vsp
7r x 78.5 x 550
p = 3094 = 43.8 mm
p<80 mm and p> 30 mm .... o.k.
.J! 10 at 40 mm
600mm
550mm
I.P.E 330
256
Example 6.7
Design a spiral composite colunm with an external pipe to support an unfactored dead
load of 2400 kN and an unfactored live load of 1500 kN.
The material properties are as follows
feu = 25 N/mm2
hsc =280 N/mm2
I' =240N/mm
2
Jyp
hss =350 N/mm2
Solution
P
u
= 1.4 P
DL
+ 1.6 P
LL
= 1.4 x 2400 + 1.6 x 1500 = 5760 kN
According to the ECP-203, the minimum thiclmess of the pipe equals
tmin
Thus minimum area of the pipe equals
A . =7rDt. A
ss.mm mm 8E
s
. 8E
s
c
A = 4 I 350 A = 0.059 A
ss 8x 200000 c c
Assume that the reinforcement ratio J.1 for the vertical bars= 1 %
P
u
=0.40/,,, Ac +0.67/
y
" Ass +0.76/),sc Asc
5760x 1000 = 0.4 x 25 xAc +0.67x350xO.059
x
Ac +0.76 x 280x (0.01 Ac)
A =!!..D
z
c 4. .
D=531 mm

Assuming that concrete cover is 25 mm then the core diameter Dk equals
Dk=550-50 =500 mm
The area of the concrete, A =!!..D
z
=!!..550
z
= 237583 mm
z
c 4 4
7r
Z
7r Z Z
The area of the core,A. =-D
k
=-500 = 196350 mm
4 4
Asc= 0.01 Ac = 2376 mm
1
> 1.2% of Ak (2356 mm
2
) ok
257
Step 3: Determine the Pipe thickness
tmin =Dfy =550 350 _
8E
s
8x200000 - 8.l3mm
->-> Take t= 9 mm
Ass =J[Dt =J[x550x9=15551mm2
The ratio of the longitudinal reinforcement ( ) h
not more than 60/ fi h . f.l s ould not be less than 1 % and
/0 rom tenet cross sectIOn
A

A -A - /0
g I
A, =Ase +Ass =24l3+15551=17964mm2
f.l = 2413 _ 0 0
237583 -:-17964 -1.1 Va ;?: 1 Va .... .ok.
< 6% .... .ok
The used spiral should be great th h "
the code er an t e millimum spiral reinforcement specified by
V . = 0 36 [leu] [A A] ( 25)
Sp.rnm Iyp C - k =0.36 240 (237583-196350J
Vsp.rnin = 1546.3 mm 2
Assuming that bar diameter of the spiral is 8 _ 2
equation to detennine the stirrup pitch p mm, Asp- 50 mm . Use the following
P
J[ Asp Dk
p
J[ x 50x500
1546.3 = 50.8 mm
. p<80 mm andp>30 mm .... o.k.
8at50mm
258
550mm
Steel pipe of
thickness 9 mm
6.5 Calculation of Axial Loads on Columns
The axial load on a column is the sum of the total loads that comes from all structural
elements such as beams, slabs, and walls. There are two approaches for calculating the
axial loads on columns namely, the area method and the reaction method.
6.5.1 Area Method
The first method is the area method in which the column is assumed to carry loads
acting on an area bounded by the centerline of the previous bay to the centerline of the
next bay in both directions as shown in Fig. 6.11. This method is very effective in
calculating loads on columns with a symmetrical layout or on columns with flat slab
floors.
__________ __________ __________ _
i i
I i
i I
:
I :
i :
i :
[]:I:::
Fig. 6.11 Calculations of column load using area method
This method can be used for floors containing projected beams. The reaction is
calculated by ignoring the effect of continuity and treating every beam as a simple
span. This method should be limited to plans with nearly equal spans. The effect of
continuity at point B can be implemented by multiplying the reaction by 1.1 as shown
in Fig 6.12.
259
w
Al'
, , ,

'1
c
I--- L/
I
Lz
----j
t t
.t
wL/2 w (L1+LJJ wL/2
Fig. 6.12 Effect of continuity on the calculation of column load
method may.lead to serious errors in buildings where large d.ifferences
eXist the <ldJacent spans flat slabs or slab beams floors. This is attributed to
the 1 effect 0: especially for unequal spans. For example, the
rcac,tlon column B 11: Fig. 6.13) when calculated by the area method gives
80 kN wheleas the reactIOn obtamed from the structural analysis equals 126 KN (ab t
57% elTor) ou
20kN/m'
rTITi I
IIrn
AlA B
/---;--1-
t ., III t
6m
I
t
20 kN 80 kN 60kN
Area method
20 kNlm ,
ITI '2 I I
ABC
1-.---1_
I ]'" I
14kN 126 kN
(tellsion)
Exact anal ys i s
(jm ---'-1
t
43 kN
Fig. 6.13 Comparison between urea method and exact analvsis
(where the use of area method is not recommended) .
260
6.5.2 Reaction Method
This method depends on the exact structural analysis of the structure either using a
computer analysis program or classical structural analysis. The reactions are calculated
from the shear loads. When using the computer, the whole structure is modeled and the
reactions are obtained from the final solution. For hand calculations, the structure is
divided into individual beams and the reaction of each beam should be added to give
the final column load.
The self-weight of the column should be added to these reactions or can be estimated
as 5-10% of the column load.
Photo 6:6 Colunin reinforcement placement in a high-rise building
..' ..
261
7
DESIGN OF SECTIONS TO ECCENTRIC
FORCES
Photo 7.1 The bridge over Suez canal
7.1 Introduction
This chapter deals with the analysis and design of cross sections subjected to axial
loads and bending moments. Concrete sections may be subjected to eccentric
compression or eccentric tension. The eccentricity of the load could be in one
direction "uniaxial" or in two directions "biaxial".
262
The behavior of the sections under combined axial compression loads and bending
moments depends on the magnitude ofthe moment Mu and the axial force P
u
. If Mu is
relatively small compared to Pu, the eccentricity e will be small and the section will be
subjected to a small eccentricity. IIi this case, most of the section will be in
compression and column behavior will dominate. On the contrary, if Mu is large the
eccentricity e will be large enough so that the normal force will be outside the cross
section and the section will be subjected to a big eccentricity. In this case, the near side
of the section will be subjected to compression and the far side will be subjected to
tension, and bean1 behavior will dominate. The combination of an axial load P
u
and
bending moment Mu is equivalent to a load P
u
applied at eccentricity e =Mu IP
u
as
shown in Fig. 7.1.
M
e== __ U

e
I
I
I
i
j!
l

Y
!

X X i, e
1-. ----I",
(a) Axial load and moment
(b) Eccentric Load
(c) Eccentric Load
Fig. 7.1 Representation of axial load and bending moment
263
7.2 Interaction Diagrams
7.2.1 Definition
. "z Z" of a reinforced concrete cross-
The interaction diagram or 'the .(az enve ope that result in the failure of the
section contains the different combmatlons of Mu Pu. d' . l'S a graphical
. . F' 7 2 Thus an mteractlOn lagram
cross sectIOn as shown Ig. :'. 'axial loans and bending moments that
representation of all posslble cOm?matlOns of e interaction diagram, one
cause failure for a given In
f
reinforcement, leu
has to know the concrete ImenSl0ns 0 ,
and/y.
f
. fi rced concrete cross-section can be
Developing the 0 a rem 0
achieved through the apphcatlOn of:
1. Compatibility of strains.
2. Equilibrium of forces and moments.
Pure compression
:I
Iloc
"0
<'I
.s
Balanced point
-;

I-____ Moment, Mu
Pure tension
Fig. 7.2 Interaction diagram of a reinforced concrete cross section
264
7.2.2 Modes of Failure
Fig. 7.3 presents a series of strain d' t'b .
interaction diagram. The state of stress rIl and the resulting points on the
type of failure. These modes are concrete and steel controls the
7.2.2.1 Compression failure mode
Point A corresponds to the case of ur . II' . I
of axial loading with code minim p e .oad.mg and pomt A represents the case
'f urn eccentrICIty (1 e e/t=O 05) P . t B
case 0 compression failure mode h th . . .. om represents the
0.?03 and the tension steel does ultimate strain of
falls as soon as the c . . IS al ?re mode IS bnttle, as the column
defonnations or 0.003 without large
strength reduction factors for concrete y, the
h
Egyptian c?de increases the
.. s ee suc modes of faIlure.
ThIS mode offatlure belongs to columns with a relatively small bending moment.
0.002
G p,re _p=;oo
0.003
H
column equation
A'
F
0.003
H
,h 17 D
balanced point, ...._ ........................... .
I--l .
. P.OOi Es= E/1.15
I I
Es> Ey /l.15
Moment,Mu
Fig. 7.3 Modes offailure for a section subjected to eccentric forces
265
7.2.2.2 Balanced Failure Mode
At this point the concrete reaches its ultimate strain of 0.003 at the same time that the
tension steel reaches (f/1.15) (point C). The maximum bending moment capacity for
the section occurs at this point (Mub)' Loads larger than the balanced load Pub cause
compression failure and loads smaller than the balanced load Pub cause tension failure.
The position of the neutral axis Cb can be obtained from the following equation:
690
C
h
= 2 ......... : ................................... (7.1)
690+/),(N Imm )
7.2.2.3 Tension failure mode
This is represented by point D on the interaction diagram. The strain in the steel is
larger than the yield strain and the steel will reach the yielding stress. This is a ductile
mode of failure since the section will crack and develop large defonnations before
failure, thus giving sufficient signs of warning before the complete collapse. This
behavior is similar to that of beams rather than columns. If the axial force is equal to
zero, the section will reach the case of pure bending represented by point E. Both the
axial loads and moment capacities increase in this zone up to the balanced point.
Point F corresponds to the section axial tension capacity. The part E-F represents the
section capacity under the combined axial tension and bending. The modes of failure
and steel stress can be established from Eq. 7.2 and Table 7.1 as follows:
Compression Failure
Is c
h
e <e
b
Mu <Mub
Ys 1.15 and Y
c
1.50
Tension Failure
Is =1 y / Ys (steel yields)
.................... (7.2a)
C <c
b
e >e
b
...................... , ........ (7.2b)
Mu <Mub
Ys = 1.15 and Yc = 1.50
266
. .
Table 7.1 Steel stresses according to the type of failure
Type of failure Tension steel stress Compression steel stress
Tension failure
yields,j,=/yII.IS
= /yl J.lS,or
c-d'
Pu<Pub does not yield I: = 600--
c
Compression
d-c
= J;.ly"., or
failure does not yield, I, = 600--
d . ld ' 6 c-d'
Pu>Pub
c oes not Yle ,Is = 00--
c
7.2.3 Development of the Interaction Diagram
In this section the relationships needed to calcuiate different points on the interaction
diagram are derived using the principles of strain compatibility and equilibrium of
forces. The procedure followed to obtain a point on the interaction diagram is as
follows:
Concrete strain at the outermost stressed 'fiber of the section is assumed to
be equal to 0.603.
Because it is difficult to solve the equilibrium equations for a specific axial
load and bendillg moment, the neutral axis distance c is usually assumed and
the developed forces and moments in the concrete and steel are evaluated as
shown in Fig. 7.4a. Incrementing the neutral axis distance for enough points
gives the interaction diagram as shown in Fig. 7.3.
According to .the ECP-203, the strength reduction factors change depending
on the applied eccentricity (mode offailure) and are given by
Y
c
e ):2:1.S ........................................ : (7.3)
Y
s
=LlSX( e ):2: US .....................................
Note: if elt >0.50 then y.=I.15 and Yc =1.50
As
0.67 Xhu/Yc
t----I

tl2
...L---------:-i .........--"-""'---T =As.fs
b
Fig. 7.4a Strain and stress distribution eccentrically loaded sections
267
Steel strains in both compression and tension steel are calculated
similarity of triangles. The developed stress using the computed s;ram IS
checked to ensure the yielding of the steel. Noting that s
od 1 1 200 000
N/mm2 the stress in the tension steel IS obtamed
m u US t;qua s, '
using the following compatibility equation
f =E xO.003x
d
-
c
=600
d
-
c
(tensionifpositive) .......... (7.S)
s s c c Y
s
v =
600
7 I
Similarly, the stress in the compression steel equals
, =600
C
-d' (compression if positive) ....................... (7.6)
s c 'y, .
The values of strength reduction factors and steel ru:
e
!llustrated .in
Fig.7.4b. It is clear from this figure that.fs=f/1.lS if the IS m
failure mode (below the balanced' point) and Eq. 7.S should If the pomt m the
brittle failure zone (above the balanced point).
Brittle failure zone
Ys>1.1S, Yc>l.S
d -c Iy
1
s c y,
2
-I-_..-..--L--------- MJfcu bt
Fig. 7.4b Calculation of tension steel stressifs) in developing interaction diagram
268
The stress block distance (a) is assumed to be equal to 0.8c as
by the. cO.de, .and the corresponding concrete force is evaluated. The
total aXial capacity IS gIven by the following equilibrium equation
p. =C
c
+C, -T .................................................. (7.7a)
0.67 feu b (0.8e)
Y
e
+A; xf,' -As xfs ........................... (7.7b)
For sections, the bending moment capacity of the section is
obtamed by taking the moment of the ind.ividual forces about the c g as
follows .
M _ .0.67 feu b (O.8e) (t a) , , (t) ()
u - Y
e
X 2-2 +As xfs 2-
d
' +As xfs (7.8)
It should be clear to the. rea.der that the corresponding bending moment can
be any m .the cross-section similar to the case of pure
bendmg, With one dIfference in that the axial load is located at the
along With the bendmg moment. Thus, if the bending is calculated at any
rather than the c.g (or plastic centroid in case of unsymmetrical
sectIOns), the normal force should be included. For example the bendi g
moment at point "0" in Fig. 7.4 equals ,n
M =p .0.67 feu b (0.8e) a A' f' d'
u u 2 x-- x x +A xf xd (79)
Y
e
2 's 's ......
An example of an interaction diagram obtained using the aforementioned
procedure is shown in Fig. 7.8.
269
7.2.4
Plastic Centroid
Most of reinforced concrete columns are symmetrically reinforced. However, in the
cases where the eccentricity is large, it is more economical to place most of the
reinforcement on the tension side. In reinforced concrete sections with unsymmetrical
reinforcement the load must pass through a point known as the plastic centroid. The
plastic centroid is defined as the point of application of the resultant force(pup)when
the column is compressed uniformly to the failure strain. Eccentricity must be
measured with respect to the plastic centroid as shown in Fig. 7.5. The strength
reduction factors 'Yc and 'Ys are taken as 1.75 and 1.34 receptively
For symmetrically reinforced sections, the plastic centroid coincides with the center of
gravity. The procedure for calculating the plastic centroid is illustrated in example 7.2
Plastic centroid
d'.
0.67 x/cu 11.75
C
s
= A

T'" ................ _ .... ............_ ...........................
._._L._.
!PUll e
p
.L--I-_ .j .. ..-.-.......... ..
CT =Asf,.I1.34
r-"'---
Fig. 7.5 Plastic centroid for sections with unsymmetrical reinforcement
Photo 7.2 Unconventional support for a Multifamily Building :.Warsaw
270
Example 7.1
load and. balanced moment for the section shown in figure
owmg t at e matenal propertIes are
fcu=35 N/mm
2
.
fy=400 N/mm2
50mml ,300mm ,
T
A',=IBOOmm
2
o
to
00
1
A,=IBOO mm
2
50mm
Solution
Step 1: Calculate C
b
The position of the neutral axis position at balanced failure is given by
C
h
= 690 d = 690 _
690+ II' 690+400 800-S06.42 mm
a
b
=0.8xc =0.8xS06.42=40S.14 mm
Assume that yc=1.5,y.=1.15 (e/t>O.5) (will be verified later)
I: = 600 cb - d' = 600 S06.42 - 50 _ 2 400
c
h
s06A2 -S40.76 Nlmm l.1Ssteelyields
/'= 400
s us
Step 2: Calculate the forces
c = 0.
67
1cu xbxab 0.67x3Sx300x40S.14 1
I.S 1000 = 1900.1kN c 1.5
C - A' II' 400 1
s - s x
l15
=1800x-x--=6261 kN
. . US 1000 .
TA 1" 4001
= s x-=1800x-x--=6261 kN
US US 1000 .
271
0.67 x 35 11.5
0.003 t------l
o
o
00
.l!,
A,=IBOOmm
2
.... _ ....._ .. _._. _ ._ ...... _ _................ ..... _ .......... _.L-. __
I I 8,=8/1.15 T=A,fyll.15
b=300mm
Step 3: Calculate the bending moment
Computing moment at plastic centroid (e.g. in this case)
M =C (!...-!!.P..)+C (!"'-d') + T(!"'-d')
ub c2 2 '2 2
M = [1900.1 (8S0 _ 40S.14}+626.1 (8S0 -SO)+ 626.1 (8S0 -so)] _1_ = 892.21 kN.m
uf> 2 2 2 2 1000
!2 892.21 = 0.SS2 > O.SO ... (our assumption that Yc=1.S,y,=1.1S is correct)
1900.1xO.8S
Note: The bending moment can be taken at any other point as long as the ultimate load
Puis considered, thus
M b = 19oo.1x __ 1900.1x ___ 626.1xSO+626.1x800 --=892.21 kN.m
[
8S0 40S.14 . ] 1
u 2 2 1000
(same as betore)
272
Example 7. 2
Locate the plastic centroid for the section shown in figure, knowing that
leu =25 N/mm2
50mm
1300mm I
/y =400N/mm
2
T. 400mm
2

g
0\
.1.. 1500 mm
2
50rnm
Solution
To find the plastic centroid, the entire section is subjected to compression force, thus
Yc=1.75 and Ys=1.34. Assume 50 mm concrete cover
50mm
f, 400 1
C, = A; x..J... = 400x--x-- = 119.4 kN
y, 1.34 1000
0.67 x 25 11.75
t--I

1----11----
r--r ___ C",,-,--As /y11.34
o
C = 0.67 x fcu xbxt
e 1.75
0.67 x 25 x 300 x 900 x _1_ = 2584.286 kN
1.75 1000
f, 400 1
C
T
=A, x-L.= 1500x--x--=447.76 kN
y, 1.34 1000
The resultant of the three forces Pup equals
P.,p =C, +C
e
+C
T
= 119.4+2584.286+447.76 =3151.45 kN
Computing the moment of all forces at point 0 (bottom fibers)
P.,p xX p =C. x850+C
e
x450+C
T
x50
X = 1 19.4 x850+2584.286x450+ 447.76 x 50 =408.32mm
p 3151.45
The distance of the plastic centroid to the c.g (e
p
) equals
t 900
ep =2"-Xp =2-408.32 =41.68 mm
273
Example 7.3
Construct the interaction diagram for the section shown in figure knowing that the
material properties are
feu =30 N/mm2
,/y = 400 N/mm2
b=250mm
Solution
Point 1 (Pure axial compression)
The entire section is under axial compression and the neutral axis is considered at
infinity. The strain distribution is uniform at the ultimate strain and all the steel has
yielded in compression. Summing all the forces gives the total section capacity
0.67 x 30 lYe
Ecu t--I C
s
= A
-
d'=50mm _
C
c
._._._._.Q,g..._._._._._._._. '-'-1---1---
I I
b=250mm
P
0.67 feu b t A' 1;. A fy
= + x-+ x-
. u Y
c
s y, Ys
Since the section is in pure compression e=O thus Yc=1.75 and Ys=1.34
274
p = 0.67 x30x 250x700 + 1575x 400 +1575x 400 = 2950 kN
" 1. 75 1.34 1.34
Since the column has symmetrical reinforcement Mu=O
However, the ECP-203 does not permit the use of this capacity and assumes that any
column will be subjected to a minimum eccentricity of (e
min
=O.05 t). Thus, use the tied
column equation
p" = 0.35 le"Ae + 0.67 Ase Iy
p" = 0.35 x30x250x700 +0.67 (1575 +1575) 400 = 2681 kN
M" = Pu.e
min
= 2681x(0.05x700) = 93835 Kn.mm =93.84 kN.m
Point 2 (compression failure)
The compression failure occurs when the depth of the neutral axis is greater than its
depth at the balanced position. In this situation the tension steel stress is below the
yield stress and for the purpose of simplicity, the neutral axis position is chosen at the
tension steel location (c=d). Thus, the developed force in the tension steel is equal to
zero.
0.67 x 30 lYe
..... Cs= A

a
Mu
a
(
0 0
V')
'" \0 \0
.#,
H_H"' __
T------------ ...- E'
d'=50mm s
o
N

As=1575mm
2
-e. e- .-.-.-.-.-.-...--...--..---- --.--.-.--.-.-.
,1-..._---1
1
E.=O T=O
b=250mm
c=650 mm and a= 0.8 x c= 520 mm
To estimate the strength reduction factors Ys and Ye, assume that e/t=O.2 (will be
verified later), thus
(
7 0.20)
Ye = 1.5 x 6'--3- =1.65
(
7 0.20)
Y
s
=1.15x 6'--3- =1.265
Since c=d thus,!s=O and T=O
275
c-d' Iy
1"=600--:';-
Js c Ys
65
0"':50 400
, - 600 == 553.85 >--
Is - 650 1.265
. J:,=l
y
= 400 =316.2Nlmm2
s Y
s
1.265
1
C =A'x 1"=1575x316.2x--=498kN
s s is 1000
0.67 x leu xbxa 0.67x30x250x520 x_
1
_ = 1583.6 kN
Ce = Y
e
1.65 1000
P
=C +C -T= 1583.6+498-0=2081.6.kN
u C
Computing moment at plastic centroid (the c.g. in this case)
1
= C + C (!....-d') = [1583.6x(350- 260) +498x(350-50)]1000 == 291.92 kN.m
Mu e 2 2 s 2
Check strength reduction factors
e=Mu
P. 2081.6
(7 0.14) 65 k
Ye ... 0.
Y
=115X(2.- 0.14) =1.288 "" 1.265 ... 0.k
s 6 3
Point 3 (balanced point)
By definition at the balanced point the strain in the tension steel equals E/1.15. Thus,
the stress in the tension steel equalsl/l.15.
As=1575 mm
2
. . ... _ ..._---_. __ ....._---_ .._ ...._ ....-
Es=E/y.
, I
b=250mm
T=Ash.l1.15
276
690 d 690
c
b
= 690+.0. = 690+400
x650
=411.47mm
a= 0.8 c= 329.17 mm
Assume that e/t>0.50, thus 'Yc=1.5 and 'Y8=1.15 (will be verified later)
f 400
T = As x-Y = 1575x- = 547.83 leN
1.15 1.15
I: = 600 c - d' 5, .0.
c Y
s
I: = 600 411.47 -50 = 527 > Iy
411.47 Y
s
1"' Iy 400
Js =-=-=347.83 Nlmm
2
Y
s
1.15
C
s
= A; x I: = 1575 x 347.83 = 547.83 leN
0.67xhu xbxa
Yc
0.67 x30x 250x 329.17
1.50 = 11 02.72 kN
Pu"" C
c
+ C
8
- T = 1102.72+547.83-547.83=1102.72 kN
Computing moment at plastic centroid (i.e. c.g due to symmetry)
Mu = CJ! .. _E.)+C (!...-d')+T(!...-d')
2 2 s 2 2
329.17
Mu = 1102.72 x (350--
2
-) + 547.83x(350-50) + 547.83 x(350-50) =533.16 leN.m
Check strength re.duction factors
!:.=( Mu) 533.16 =069
I p" xl 1l02.7xO.7 .
Since elt > 0.5 our assumption that 'Yc=1.5 and 'Y8=1.15 is correct
277
Point 4 (tension failure)
For tension failure to occur, the neutral axis should be less than the balanced point. Let
us assume the neutral axis position at c=2/3 Cb (position for maximum reinforcement in
case of pure bending)
0.67 x 3071.5
--
;:;;
Mu
-6/'Y8 T=As/yII.15
I I
b=250mm
2 2
c = -c
h
= -x 411.47 = 274.31 mm
3 3
->a= 0.8 c= 219.45 mm
'Yc= 1.5 and 'Y8= 1.15 (no need to check this assumption, because it was valid at the
. balanced point)
The pointis below the balanced load thus Is = Iy = 400 = 347.83 N I mm
2
Ys 1.15
T = A, xl, = 1575 x 347.83 = 547.83 leN
I: = 600
274
.31-50 =490.6 >Iy
274.31 Y
s
:.1:=1)' = 400 =347.83Nlmm
2
Ys 1.15
C
s
= A; xl> 1575x347.83 = 547.83 leN
C = 0.67 x Icu xbxa
c
Yc
0.67x30x250x219.45 =735.16 leN
1.50
Pu= C
c
+ C
8
- T = 735.16+547.83-54:7.83=735.16 kN
Taking moment about plastic centroid (i.e. c.g due to symmetry)
219.45
Mu = 735.16x(350---) +547.83x(350-50) +547.83x(350-50) = 505.34 kN.m
2
278
Point 5 (Pure bending)
In the case of sections subjected t b' .
. performed by applving the eq 'l'b .0 pure locatmg the neutral axis must be
J' UI I num equation
Pu=O=C-T
andYs=1.I5 (no need to check this as .
thIs assumption was valid) A h sumptlOn, because at the balanced point
. '. ssume t at compression steel did not yield.
.. ..
I -l
b=250mm
/.
' - 600 c-d' c-50
s - --=600--
c
c
or
0.
67
1cu xbxa , , As xl,
15
+As xl, =--2:.
s 1.15
0.67
x
30x250x(0 8xc)
. 1.5 . 1575x400
c 1.15
T=Asi;.I1.15
The previous eq f .
'. ua Ion IS a second order equatiQn in c, its solution results in
c=77.96 mm ............ a=0.8 c = 62.37 mm
h' = 6005...:::.!. = 600 77.96 - 50 _ 400
c 77.96 - 215.18 < 1.15 ... o.k( did not yield as assumed)
T = As x h = 1575 x 347.83 = 547.83 kN' .
C
s
=A;XI;=1575x215.18=338.90kN
C
c
= 0.
67x
f cu xb xa 0.67 x30x250x62.37
- 1.50 = 208.93 kN
279
Computing at the C.g.
M =c (!...-!!:.)+C (!"'-d') + T(!"'-d')
U c22 s2 2
Mu = 208.93 x(350 - 62.37) + 338.90 x(350- 50) + 547:83 x (350 -50) = 332.63 kN.m
2
Pu=Cc+Cs-T=O
Point 6 (pure aXial tension)
The final loading case to be considered in this example is the concentric tension. The
strength of the concrete is completely neglected and the steel is in pure tension. Noting
that the tension force is negative, P u equals
p = - I). (A + A')
u 1.15 s s
Pu = -400 (1575 + 1575) = -1095.7 kN
1.15
Mu=O because the section is symmetrical
The interaction diagram for the previous column is drawn in the following Figure.
3500
3000
2500

2000
,....::
1500
"

1000
-d
cd
0
500
0
-500
-1000
-1500
,--p
re compress on, point 1
------
k-= point 1 ( compressio n failure)
\
\.
column equation
----
........
--
-..,./
/
--
----
\
V--

...--

pure bending
(point 5)
'" pure ten

I I
o 100 200 300 400 500
Moment (Mu), kN.m
Interaction diagram for Example 7.3
280
.,-
--
......
balanced
(point 3)
te
(p
nsion failur
oint 4)
600 '
7.3 S.ections to Eccentric Compression Forces
To an eccentnc section, one has to know .
matenal properties as shown in the frame below. the applIed forces, moments and
Design Problem
Given P M f
: u, u, cu, fy
Required . b t A A'
, , 5, 5
Assume : b, t
Determine' A A' S, 5
Three approaches are available fi
compression force: or the design of sections subjected to eccentric
1. Interaction diagrams
2. Mus approach.
3. Design using curves
A trial section (b, t) is assumed and the . Co
S I t
. remlorcement areas (A A ') d .
e ec mg a tnal cross section for me b b' S> s are etermll1ed
task. However, when the eccentrici :f su to eccentric forces is not an eas;
can be established by designing e me
1
?e: IS sn:
aII
, an approximate trial area
the other hand, when the eccentric' 1 It IS sU?Jected to axial loads only. On
obtained by designing the section eb.member IS large, the trial area can be
as IllS su to bending moments only.
281
Photo 7.3 Eccentrically loaded section in a reinforced concrete tower
7.3.1
Design Using Interaction Diagrams
Interaction diagrams can also be used as design tools when prepared in special forIllS.
The horizontal axis in the design interaction diagrams represents normalized (non-
dimensional) bending moment Mrlfcub t
2
, while the vertical axis represents the
normalized axial load P rlieu b t. These interaction diagrams are valid for designing
members subjected to eccentric compression forces, whether it fails in compression or
tension. However, they were prepared for sections with compression steel of more
than 40% of the tension steel (i.e:a.= 0040, 0.60, 0.80, 1). Thus if the designer need to
use lower ratio of the compression reinforcement (especially in tension failure zone),
the use of the interaction diagram is not attainable.
282
The interaction diagram is usually divided into four zones as follows (refer to Fig. 7.6)
1- Zone A (e/t<0.05): In this zone, the design of sections is attained by
applying the equation for tied columns and the applied moment is
ignored.
2- Zone B (compression failure Pu>P
b
): The design of sections in this zone is
performed by using the interaction diagrams directly.
3- Zone C (tension failure Pu<Pb) : The design of sections can be performed
according to the ratio of the compression reinforcement as follows:
a) If the ratio of the compression steel is equal or greater than 0.4, the
use of interaction diagrams is preferred.
b) If the ratio of the compression steel is smaller than 0.4,
(1)approximate methods (Mus)can be used (as explained later) or
(2) eccentric design charts. The use of the approximate methods
(Mus) should be limited to sections subjected to relatively small
compression forces otherwise it may lead to unsafe designs (as
explained in the next section).
4- Zone D (P .lieu b t <0.04): In this zone, the compression force is completely
ignored and the section may be designed as if it is subjected to moment only.
Zone A
Design as a
tied column
..t::>

0.04
,
:e/t=0.05
,
zone
tension
failure
zone
=d-d'
t t
A's
tro:o

ZoneB
balanced load
ZoneC
41::00 ..... -- use the interaction diagram if
ZoneD
design as simple bending
a>OA, eccentric design charts, or
approximate method (Mus
approach)
M,/.fcu b I
Fig. 7.6 Using interaction diagrams and design zones
283
The use of the interaction diagrams can be summarized in the following steps
1) Estimate the cross section dimensions ifnot given using a trial section
2) Determine the required diagram with the givenJ;" a. and S
if!!" '5, 0.2 use uniform steel chrats
t
if !!..(0.2 -0.5) use top and bottom steel a = 1
t
if!!" >0.5
t
use top and bottom.steel a = 0.4-1
3) Calculate the following terms
P" Mu
feu b t ' feu b t
2
.
4) Locate the reinforcement ratio p, and interpolate if required.
5) Calculate area of steel using
j1 = P x feu X 10-4 , As = j1xbxt or AS',o,al = j1xbxt
6) Compute the area of the compression steel (case of top and bottom steel)
A' =aA
7) Check that the total areaosf steel sis higher than code minimum requirement
A; + As > O.OOSb x t (columns)
As >0.225 JJ:: ffy b xd and (1.3 As) (beams)
. . d' (. t a) the minimum area of steel
If the point falls inside the mteraction mgram pom . '. d' (. t b) the
should be used as shown in Fig. 7.7. If the point falls Wlthm the pom. '
desi of the cross-section should be carried out normally. If the pomt falls
outsr;e the boundaries of the interaction (point c), this mdlcates that the cross-
section dimensions are inadequate and must be mcreased.
unsafe, change
c / cross section
-
use interaction
diagram
Fig. 7.7 The use of the interaction diagram
284
Appendix B contains interaction diagrams that can be used in design of eccentrically
loaded sections with top and bottom reinforcement. An example of such diagrams is
shown in Fig. 7.8. Appendix C contains interaction diagrams for sections with uniform
reinforcement.
Steel yield stress
feu xbxt
0.65
0: ,......
0.60 +---+-.....
L-...o.-+-iI .... f
y
=240 N/mm2
0.55
0.50 70
---1/ .. .,._ .... _ ....
0.45 ..
.'
I
0.40 .. -:.t.
I I ,.-
0.25
"
0.20
Enter with Pu/fcu b t 1.50
.. :00
0.1 0 .. b,....jo
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
Fig. 7.8 An example of an interaction diagram with top and bottom
reinforcement(Appendix B)
, 285
Example 7.4 . .
.' . d' grams knowing that 1t 1S
Design a reinforced concrete. c?lurnn. usmg mteractlOn 1a
subjected to the following strammg actlOns
P
u
=1400kN. '
Mu=295 kN.m
The material properties are
=30N/mm
2 I 250mm-l
=280 N/rrun
2
Solution
Step 1: Determine the suitable design interaction diagram
e _ Mu _ 295 -0.32
"'i- pxt-1400xO.65
since elt =0.2---+0.5 use 0,=1.0
Assume cover=40 mm
t -2xcover _ 650-2x40 - 0.9
,; = t -, 650 , 2
Using chart in Appendix B with S=0.9, fy=280 N/mm
Step2: Calculate the non-dimensional terms
1400 x 10
3
=0.287
feu b t 30 X 250 X 650
Mu _ 295 X 10
6
- 0.093
feu b (2 - 30 X 250 X 650
2
Step3: Calculate As, A's . .
Locating the point in the chart and determining P =2.8, (compressIOn fallure )
J.l = P fcu 10-4 = 2.8 X 30 x 10-4 =0.0084
As = J.l b t = 0.0084 X 250 x650 = 1365 mm
2
---+(4$22)
A's= a, As= 1 x 1365 = 1365 rrun
2
---+(4$22)
286
compression
zone
0.287
0.093
Step 4: Check Asmin
failure
The minimum area steel for short columns is 0.008
A,.min = 0.008xbxt = 0.008 x 250x650 = 1300 mm
2
fy=280 N/mm
Z
u=).O
balanced point
As,total= As+ A's =1365 + 1365 = 2730 l11ni >As,min ....... o.k
E
E
o
l{)
<0
287
2#12
7.3.2
Design Using Mus Approach
If the eccentricity of the applied compression load is relatively small (above the
balanced point), the tension steel does not yield and the section lies on the
compression failure zone as shown in Fig. 7.9.a. However, all points lower than the
balanced failure-point represent a case in which the section is partially cracked and the
strain in the tension steel is greater than the yield strain as shown in Fig 7.9.b. This is
defined as the tension failure zone. Although it is possible to derive a family of
equations to evaluate the strength of sections subjecteq to combined bending and axial
force, these equations are tedious to use and cumbersome. Interaction diagrams can be
used to design sections in the tension failure zone. The available interaction diagrams
were prepared for sections having equal amounts of steel on both sides or with a
maximum difference of 40 percent between area of tension steel and compression
(a=A'/As=OA). For sections in the tension failure zone, it is more economical to place
most of the reinforcement in the tension side.
There is analytical method for designing such type of sections called the Mus approach.
The approximation in this method comes from neglecting the compression steel
contribution in the calculation.
x
1
0
.
003
a- Compression failure
compression
zone
reinforcement
b-Tension failure
[
" y

/ ......
Fig. 7.9 Strain distributions of sections subjected to eccentric compression
288
In the Mus approach, the moment' t k b .
Eq. 7.10. It shoul? be and called Mus as given in
that the type offaIlure is a tension fiat'l d has to be evaluated to verify
ure.
Referringto Fig. 7.10, the external
moment Mus about the tension steel equals to:
M =P xe
where us us .. .................... , ..................... (7.10)
t
e
s
=e +2'-cover ............................................ (7.11)
or alternatively Mus can be written as
Mus =Mu +P., .................................. (7.12)
Taking moment of the internal forces abo t th .
external moment Mus u e tenSIOn steel and equating it to the
Mus
0.67/ b a a f
(d-2')+A;l.;S(d-d') .................. (7.13)
Pu
-e-
A'
5
I
. -._+_.-.
d'
=fJ
c.g
'-.-.-.-
'-'-'- -
Pu
C,
Cc
'-'-'-'-'-' -.-._.-._._.
-----.--1 .... ...................-........-...-......-.....-----.,..-----
-1
T=As /yll.15
Fig. 7.10 Design of sections subjectedto tension failure
289
e
Equilibrium of internal forces gives
A fy
s 1.15
0.67 fcu
b
a _p +A' fy ........................................ (7.14)
1.50 u s 1.15
'Substituting with Mus expression in the previous equation gives
_ Mus Pu '( (l-d'ld)
As - (d fy 11.15 - fy 11.15 +As 1- (l-a 12d) ..................... (7.15)
2
To simplify the previous expression, the third term in Eq. 7.15 is neglected
A = Mus
s (d fy 11.15
2
P.,
.. .............................. (7.16)
fy 11.15
The first term in the equation can be determined using design curves for section
subjected to pure bending such as (Cl-1 or R-ro).
Equation 7.16 (Mus)gives the same solution as the strain compatibility in case of A' s=O.
Furthermore, equation 7.16 gives a very close solution if the applied compression
force is relatively small (PuP
ub
) and consequently the values of a are usually small.
On the other hand, as the applied compression force increases and gets closer to the
balanced load, the assumption of ignoring the effect of the compression reinforcerp.ent
in Eq. 7.15 becomes unconservative especially with high ratios of compression steel.
Figure 7.11 presents the ratios of the required area of the steel when using the Mus
approach and those when using of strain compatibility method. It is clear that the
calculated area of tension steel using the Mus approach is much less than that
calculated using the strain compatibility method; leading to unconservative results .
The area of the tension steel using the Mus approach can be \tj that of the strain
compatibility method (interaction diagram). On the other hand, the area of the
compression steel obtained using the Mus approach can be as high as three times that
obtained using the interaction diagrams. Thus, the use of Mus approach should be
limited to sections with relatively small compression forces in which the values of a
are usually very small.
290
It is clear from Fig. 7.11 that deviation between the area of obtained using Mus
approach and the interaction diagrams increases when the load level increases.
4.0
3.5
f,=360 N/mm
2
Mu/f" bt
2
=0.10
3.0
'2
0
2.5
.'"

!
2.0
-;;;-
1.5 :s
6
00
1.0
If
.s
0.5
til
p::
0.0

/;=0.9
stet I

b=250 mm t=700 mm
7
I'
-'

---

----
te sir st*1
,
r--...
...........
0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18
Load level (P,/Icu b t)
. Fig. 7.11 Comparison between area of steel calculated using the Mus approach and
that calculated from the interaction diagram for sections in tension failure zone
Photo 7.4 Bridge column during construction
291
Example 7_5 .
. . fi ure below if it is subjected to an ultimate
Design the. concrete sectIOn shown 111 Ig. t f 150 kN m
. "' ce of 220 kN and ultimate bendmg momen 0 . compreSSIOn lor
2 0.=02 r =30 N/mm2 h =360 N/mm .
Jeu
Solution
o
o
on
250mm
A's I '----1
I As
)
Step 1: Assume failure condition ..
I h to assume the failure condItIOn .
Since we do not have the moment is relatively high)
Assume that Pu<P
b
tensIOn at u .
e == M u == 150 == 0.682m
P
u
220
Step 2: Determine area of steel .
Using the approximate method (tension calculate the moment about tenSIOn
steel Mus. Assume that the concrete cover IS 40 mm
d ==t -cover == 500-40 == 460 mm
(
500 ) 1 kN
M =M +P -2 -40 x 1000 =196.2 .m
us U u 2
e =e - cover=0.682+ 0.50 - 0.04 == 0.892 m]- Another method to calculate Mus s 2 2
M =P xe ==220xO.982=196.2kN.m
us u s
'. Mus _ 196.2 X 10
6
= 0.1236
RI = f. b d
2
- 30 x 250 X 460
2
cu
292
00=0.16
Using simple bending curves with compression steel in Appendix A, with (a=0.2) and
d' /d = 0.1, it can be determined that:
ill = 0.16
A ICI' b d P" 0 30 220 x 1000 _ 2
s =OJ-
j
X ---= .16-2S0x460 360/1.1S -830.S6mm
y Iy Irs 360
A; = a OJ ;: b x d = 0.2 x 0.16 6 ~ x2S0x 460 =306.67 mm
2
Note: The strain compatibility method (calculations not shown) gives
As=841 mm
2
and A's=310.5 mm
2
, Which is very close to the approximate solution
because the applied load is small and far from the balanced load and the compression
steel ratio a is small.
Step 3: Verify failure condition
690 690
c
h
= 690 + Iy d = 690 + 360 460 = 302.285 mm
Applying the equilibrium equation
P
= 0.
67x
fcu b (0.8 c
h
) A; xly As xl
y
ub +-------
1.5 . 1.15 1.15
p - 0.67x30x250 (0.8x302.285) 306x360 830x360 64
uh - 1.5. + US 1.15 5 kN> p"
Since Pu<Pub, This it is a tension failure mode as assumed.
293
7.3.3 Design Curves For Eccentric Sections
As mentioned before, Mus approach for designing eccentric compression sections
should be limited to sections subjected to tension failure and with relatively small
compression force. This. section presents new design charts prepared based on the
strain compatibility principle and the equilibrium of forces and can be used to
. accurately design sections subjected to tension failure whatever the value of the
compression force. '
The following procedure is adopted to develop the charts. The neutral axis depth is
first assumed and the corresponding strain in the steel is calculated for a concrete
compressive strain of 0.003. To achieve equilibrium, a trial and adjustment procedure
is performed. If the summation of the tension and compression forces is not equal to
the desired load level, another value for the neutral axis depth is assumed and iteration
is performed. This procedure is continued until the equilibrium is achieved.
Consider the design interaction diagram shown in Fig. 7.12.a which were prepared for
certain value of 1;, and a, l;;. Each curve in the chart is equivalent to cutting the design
interaction diagrams by a horizontal line at a certain load level (Rb=Pulfeu b t). This
gives a group of points with different values of the normalized moment (Mu/feu be)
and the reinforcement index p. The normalized moment values were plotted on the
vertical axis and the corresponding values of ill are plotted on the horizontal axis and
are calculated using the following relation.
OJ= pXly X 10-4
These charts fill the gap that was not covered by the interaction diagram (from a=O to
a=0.6).
Fig. 7.12.a Development ofthe design charts
Appendix D contains design charts that can be used in the design of eccentrically
loaded sections. An example of such diagrams is shown in Fig. 7.12.b.
294
"!....
oJ::)
0.26 r--;:::r==:=c==::r::::=;-]I'-.-li-Y--'
0.22
u .
0.18
0.10
0.06 +---;---;---;---'9---;---;--+--+--+----1
o 0.04 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.2 0.24 0.28 0.32 0.36 0.4
Ol
Fig. 7.12.b Eccentric design curve for load level of 0.2 (Appendix D)
The design steps for section subjected to eccentric forces in the tension failure zone
using the proposed charts can be summarized in the following steps
Design steps for using eccentric design charts
1. Determine the appropriate design curves by calculating the load level R

h-
feu b t
Puis positive for compression force and negative for tension force
2. Enter the chart with the applied normalized moment capacity (M./fcu b r)
and the appropriate value for a
3. Locate the steel index value 0) (interpolate if necessary)
4. Calculate As and A from
and
295
Example 7 .. 6 . .
Design a reinforced concrete section if it is subjected to an eccentrIc compreSSIOn
force using ..
A- Interaction Diagram
B-Approximate method
C-Design curves for eccentnc sections
Data
M
u
=250kN.m
2
feu =25 N/mm
solution
P
u
=700kN
fy =360 N/mm2
A-Interaction Diagram
b=250 mm t=700 mm
s=0.9 a=0.6
Using interaction diagram for fy=360 N/mm2 ,a=0.6, and s=0.9
The point is below the balanced point, thus it is a tension failure
700 x 10
3
=0.16
feu bt 25x250 x700
Mu _ 250x 10
6
0.082
feu b t
2
- 25 x 250 x 700
2
Locating the point in the chart and determining P =1.30
!l = P feu 10-
4
= 1.3 X 25 X 10-4 =0;00325
2
As =!l b t = 0.00325 X 250 X 700 =570 mm
2
A's= a As= 0.6 X 570 = 341 mm
balanced point=0.2
0.20
0.16
296
2
M./fcu b t
B- Approximate Method (Mus)
Since it is a tension failure mode the approximate method (Mus)can used
cover = I-" xt
2 2
d = 700- 35 =665 mm
t 250 0.7
e =e+--cover=-+--0.D35=0.672m
$ 2 700 2
M U$ = p" x e$ = 700 x 0.672 = 470.5 kN.m
d' 35
-=-=0.05
d 655
470.5 x 10
6
=0.17
25 x 250 x 665
2
Using simple bending curves (R1-ffi) in Appendix A, with compression steel (a=0.6)
and d' /d=0.05
700 x 1000 = 188 mm2
360/1.15
A; =a 0) feu b x d =0.6x 0.21 x250x 665 = 1455 mm2
fy 360
It can be concluded from this example that the approximate method did not give a
valid reinforcement area of steel solution as the compression reinforcement is greater
than the tension reinforcement, and the area of the tension steel (188 mm
2
) is less than
obtained from the interaction diagrams (570 mm
2
). The main reason for this big
difference is that Rb (0.17) is very close to the balanced load level I (0.20)
C-Vsing Design curves for eccentric sections
R 700 x 10
3
=0.16
" feu b t 25 x 250 x 700
250 X 10
6
= 0.082
25 x 250 x 700
2
1 Obtained from the interaction diagram (refer to the figure in the previous page)
297
M.
feu b t 2 -". ... __ _
feu b t Iiw .... _ ..
0.082
m=0.058
m
m=0.040
m
. 60 N/ 2 (a=O 6)
Using charts in Appendix D Wlth fy= 3 mm. ' . .
I Do -0 1 nd Do =02 ffi can be obtamed as follows. For load leve a .,
and ffiRb-<l.z = 0.040
Using interpolation ffiRb-o.16= 0.0472
A feu
$ = 0) fy -. 360 .
2
A' = a A.= 0.6 x 574 = 344 cm
S '. of steel calculated from the charts is exactly as
It is clear from Fig. 7.13 that the area. thod (M ) aives unconservative
the interaction dlagrams an . d the approxlmate me us 0'
tension area of steel.

1600
Iii1 Approximate
1400
IB Interaction
1200
II Load level curves
--- Me
e
1000
'-'

Q)
....
800
til
'-
<:>
0$
600
Q)

-<
400
200
0
Tension Steel Compression steel
'mate method interaction diagram and
Fig. 7.13 Comparison between the approxl . I '76
Eccentric load curves III examp e .
298
7.4Sections Subjected to Eccentric Tension Forces
subjected tension force are some times encountered in frames and t .
mem The desIgn of these types of members depends on the enSIOn
ECP 203 states that concrete strength must be com letel i of th.e
the is inside the cross section. In this case th: ::
carne so e.y y remforcement as shown in Fig. 7.14.a. However if the tension
force, Tu: hes outSIde the cross-section, part of the section will s b' t d
compreSSIOn as shown in Fig. 7.14.b. u e to
a- Small eccentric tension
d-d'
e5,--
2
See section 7.4.1
y

.".
compression
zone
y

."
b- Big eccentric tension
d-d'

2
See section 7.4.2
Fig. 7.14 Sections subjected to eccentriC tension force.
299
7.4.1 Sections Subject to Small Eccentric Tension Forces
In members subjected to small eccentric force, the whole section is subjected to tensile
strain and the concrete strength is completely ignored. The eccentricity of the applied
tension force and moment must be within the cross section, or
d-d'
e s,-- ............... : .................................. (7.17)
2
Only the steel reinforcement act against the applied tension force with no concrete
contribution as shown in Fig. 7.1S. The developed force in each layer of steel is
calculated according to its distance from the applied load and is given by
. d-d"
esl =---e ................................................ (7.18)
2
d-d'
e
s2
=--+e ............................................... (7.19)
2
Calculate the developed tension forces T/ and T) (T/ is always> T)). To calculate T
I
,
take moment of forces about point 0 in Fig. 7.1S as follows:
TI =Tu X (7.20)
T2 =Tu -TI ........................................................ (7.21)
Calculate Asb As)
AsI = i
y
................................................. (7.22)
As2 = T2 ................................................. (7.23)
i
y
I1.1S
...-____ ...-_A_s2_--. i
d
0 TpAs2 jyll./S
.--,--'-' -... -.-. --r--
d -d'
2
c.g
'-'-'-'-' '-'-'-'-'-'-' .-.-._._._.-._.-._.-.-.
e
I--_____ -Tu
Asl
-L._.-L_-...-..... ..... ------.-.. --1---------
_L.......
.\
b
Fig. 7.15 Equilibrium of a section subjected to a small eccentric tension force
300
Example 7.7
Calculate the reinforcement required for a concrete section of (250x600 mm), if it is
subjected to Mu=30 kN.m and Tu= 300 kN. Knowing that fy=400 N/mm2 andJcu=30
N/mm
2
Solution
Step 1: Calculate e
s
l and e
s
2
e=M
u
= ~ = O l m
1'. 300
Assume that the distance from the centerline of steel to concrete is 50 mm
d'=50mm
d=600-50 = 550 mm
d-d'=550-50=500 mm=O.5 m
. d - d' 0.5 (II . .)
since e < --< - < 0.25, sma eccentric tensIOn
2 2
Since the member is small eccentric section, concrete strength is completely neglected
and all the tension force is resisted by the reinforcement.
d -d' 0.5
es' =--+e=-+O.1 =0.35 m
2 2
~ O m m
.. r-.................. ~ ~ ........... r ........ .. ...... .. .. .....

250
Tu=300 kN 100
ASI
-'---'--............. -. ........ - ...- .......- ..............- .......1---___ __
I I
250 rnm
301
- r-
step 2. Calculate the developed tension force
e 0.35 OkN
T.
- T x_
s
_,_ = 300x.-- = 21
1- u d-d' 0.5
T
'=T -T. =300-210=90kN
, u 1
Step 3: Calculate Asl,As2
__ T._I_= 210xl000 = 603.75 mm
2
(3<1>16)
ASI - fy 11.15 400/1.15
__ T._2_= 90xlOOO =258.75 mm
2
(2<1>16)
AS2 - fy 11.15 400/1.15
!
0.2255o 250 x 600 "" 462 mm 2
400
A . = smaller of
smlll 1.3x603=783mm
2
=462mm' <As1o.k

216
o
o
\0
........ 316
Final design
302
7.4.2 Sections Subjected to Big Eccentric Tension Forces
This case is usually found in reinforced concrete tanks, tunnels and aqueducts, in
which the eccentric tension force lies outside the cross section "big eccentricity",
creating tension on the nearside and compression on the far side. Thus, the concrete
contributes to the strength of the section. This part is. represented by the part E-F in the
interaction diagram shown in Fig 7.3. However, since this part is not represented in
the interaction diagram as explained before, the same approximate method (Mus) used
in sections with compression forces is used here with minor modifications The
distance es shown in Fig. 7.16 is given by.
M
where e=_U
Tu
t
e =e --+COver ............................................. (7.24)
s 2
The moment about the tension steel Mus equals
Mus =Tus =Mu -Tu(i-cover) ......... ..................... (7.25)
The problem can be solved using curves with double reinforcement (Rl-()))
Compute
Locate 0) from curves using the desired compression steel ratio a. and calculate As
A = a/...cu b d + Tu ....................................... (7.26)
s I
y
I
y
/1.15
A' =a OJicu b d ............................................... (7.27)
s I
y
d'
. . ~ ~ .
_.-.-.-.-.-.-._.-._.
e
e
s
Fig. 7.16 DeSign of sections subjected to big eccentric tension force
303
Example 7.8 .. .
DeSIgn a tenSIon mem . . ber (250 x 650 mm) if it is subjected to eccentnc axIal tenslOn
force of 200 kN as shown in figure.
fy=400 N/mm
2
fcu=35 N/mm2
concrete member
250 x 650-
Solution
i
i'
I
H
0.65m
200kN
0.9m
T =200 kN (tension)
e:O.9 m (outside the cross section -4 big eccentric tension)
Mu =0.9 x 200 =180 kN.m
Assume concrete cover of 50 mtn --> d=650-50=550 mm -->d'id =50/600=0.10
t 0.65 0625
e =e--+cover=0.9---+0.05=. m
s 2 2
M =T e =200xO.625=125kN.m
us u s
Mus .125xl0
6
=0.0397
Compute feu b d
2
35x250x600
2
From doubly reinforced tables or curves with a.=OA d' Id=0.1 0, and R=0.0397
From the curves --> 0)=0.048
. - a/...cu b d + u = 0.048-x 250 x 600 + = 120 mm
T 35 200xl000 5 2
As - I
y
I
y
11.15 400 . 400/1.15
A; = a OJ;; b d = 0.4 x 0.048 ::0 x250x600 = 252 mm 2 ~ (2<1>16)
650mm
l l i O ~
<j
~
t
2 <ll 16
Sl 4 <ll 20
e
N
304
~ (4<1>20)
7.5 T -Sections Subjected To Eccentric Forces
T-sections subjected to eccentric forces are often encountered in the girders offramed
structures. Design interaction diagrams are available in design format only for
rectangular sections. Preparations of such diagrams for T -section would be unrealistic
because many variables are encountered such as Bib and is/t ratios. The approximate
method can be used to transform the T - shapeq sections to members subjected to
bending only using Mus approach. The design steps are the same as those explained
before in section 7.3, however, the designer has to check the location of the neutral
axis (a=O.8 c), and determine the area of steel using the (CI-J) as follows.
. a<t A = __ u_,_+ u
- , 'fy J d - fy 11.15
[
M P
A =
, M P
a >t A = u, + u
....................... (7.28)
, s fy 11.15 (d -t, 12) fy 11.15
where is is the slab thickness and Puis the applied axial force (negative in case of
compression and positive in case of tension)
where e
s
is measured from the c.g. of the T-section as shown in Fig. 7.17 and
determined from the following relations:
~ u
I
c.g
Mus =P" xe, ................................................ (7.29a)
e, =e +(d -z) (compression) .................................. (7.29b)
e, =e -Cd -z) (tension) .......................................... (7.29c)
N
I
I
c.g
N
0_._._.-.- _._ '-j-' '_.-._.-.- -'-
. . '. _ ......._ .._-.............. . ..........._ ..........
e, =e+(d-z)
a ..Eccentric compression
j
j
I As
. . ..... _ ..._ ..__ .._.__ ... -
P
u
.i
e, =e-(d -z)
b-Eccentric tension
Fig. 7.17 Definition of e
s
in T-sections
305
Example 7 .. 9 . . .
Design the T -section shown in figure if it is subjected to the followmg strammg
actions.
P
u
=600 kN (compression)
Mu =450kN.m
l:be material properties are
feu =25N/mm
2
fy =240 N/mm
2
H!OOmm I
'-I ----41 .i
(
I . I
Solution
o
o
t-
As=?
~ - - - - - - j ~
250mm
T
100mm
Since the member is T -section, we
approximate method should be used
can not use interaction diagrams and the
d = 700- 50 =650 mm
e= Mu = 450 =0.75 m
p" 600
100x 1800x50+6QOx 250x (600/2+ 100) _ 209.1 mm
z = lOOx 1800+ 600x 250
e =e +(d -z) =0.75+(0.65-0.209) = 1.19 m ,
M =P xe =600x1.19=714.5kN.m
us u s
JFs
us
d=Cl --
!cuB
[714.5xl0
6
650=C 25x1800
Cl=5.15
: Using the (Cl-J), determine cld ratio
306
.: E.. <E..) :. E..) =0.125
d d
min
d
min
0.125
c=0.125 x 650=81.25 mm
a= 0.8 c = 65 mm
since a< ts(100 mm), get J from the curve using c/d=0.125
J=0.826
J
714.5 X 10
6
600 x 1000 = 2670 mm 2
240 x 0.826 x 650 240/1.15
A..chosen = 6 <l) 25
I
3 12
I
I

I
I
E
I
E
0
0

E
Ie

2;-12
E
0
0
,....
- 6;-25
...-.
-
I 250mm I
307
Example 7.10
For the cross section shown in the figure below calculate the moment capacity from
the first principles. The material properties are fcu=25 N/mm2 and fy=240 N/mm2
p u =600 leN (compression)
(
Solution
o
o
r-
I
1800mm I I
\--. ------J -L
As=2014 mm
2
L. ....... __ ._ ... _
1-1
250mm
Assume thata<t., apply the equilibrium equation, and assume that 'Yc=1.5 and 'Ys=1.15
a
0.67 feu
8=\800 mm I 1.5
rr: :
700 100 .-._._.-.-.-._.
I
c = 0.67f<u B a
c . 1.5
i A
s
=2014 mm
2
LT-=A-, -f)-LI5
250
p = .67 fcu x B x a _ As 1;.
k .u 1.5. 1.15
. 600x1000 = .67 x25x1800xa 2014x240
1 - 1.5 1.15
f: .
. ,Ii: a=50.67 mm < t" our assumption is correct
308
The axial force P
u
is located at a distance e from the plastic centroid. For simplicity it
shall be assumed that the plastic centroid coincides with the c.g.
z = 100xI800x50+600x250x(600/2+100) =209.1 mm
100x 1800+ 600 x 250
The moment capacity of the section about the c.g equals
M = C (z-!!.)+Tx(d -z) = 0.67 !cuBa (z-!!.) + As xi;. x(d -z)
u c 2 1.5 2 1.15
M. = 0.67 x25x1800x50.67 (209.1- 50.67)+ 2014x240 x(650-209.1) = 372.8kN.m
1.5 2 1.15
Photo 7.5 Reinforced concrete columns during construction
309
Example 7.11
Design the T-section shown in figure if it is subjected to the following straining
actions '
P
u
=150 kN (Tension) Mu=850 kN.m
fcu=30 N/mm2
600mm I
1-1 ----II -L
--I 1
T
E
E
o
In
co
'-_. __...-._...-
Solution
A=?
L.....- s
I---i
250mm
lOOmm
Since the section is T -section and subjected to tension force, transformation using the
approximate method must be made
d = 850 - 50 =800 mm
M 850
e=_u =-=5.667m
P
u
150
calculate the c.g of the section
z = 100x600x50+ 750x 120x(750/2+ 100) 305 mm
100x600+750x120
e
s
= e-(d -z) = 5.667 -(0.8-0.305) = 5.172 m
E
E
o
o
00
.l!:,
I
-,
: J g
. " I c.g N
_ .. -"1-.- ._._._._._._._.-. 8
!
N
! ..,:, '"
! As t
. . ... __........................._ ........ _ ...._ ......... _ .. -........

I
I
310
t.=1
800
.t ________ _
600mm
I--l
250
Mus P. xes = 150x5.172e 775.75 Idi.m
Mus
leu B
a
0.67 leu .
--1.-5-
--I t--
J:;=1f4-...-- C _ 0.67 leu B ts
r 1.5
T=As fJI.l5
800= C1 775.75 x 10
6
30x600
-+ C1=3.85
Using the (C1-J), determine c/d ratio
c=0.21 x 800=168 mm
a= 0.8 x 168 = 134.4 mm
= 0.21
d
Since a(134.4 tllOO mm), neglect the part in the web and calculate As using
A = Mus. + P. 775.75 X 10
6
. 150xlOOO
s Iy IU5 (d -t
s
12) Iy 11.15 400/1.15x(800-100/2) +400/U5 = 3404mm
2
Choose 6<1> 28 (3695 mm
2
)
E
E
o
..,
co
I 1
250mm
311
." , ..
7.6 Analysis of Irregular Sections
7.6.1 General
Reinforced concrete sections can take any shape. Irregular cross-sections are usually
encountered in shear walls where irregularity comes from either the shape of the
cross-section (ir the distribution (if the reinforcement. For these sections, the
development of the interaction diagrams follows the mentioned procedure.
Referring to Fig. 7.18, any point falling inside the interaction diagram is considered
safe (point A), while any point falling outside the diagram is considered. unsafe (point
B).
The adequacy of the section is satisfied by ensuring that for the same axial load, the
calculated moment capacity is greater thap. the applied moment. Thus comparing
points C & F indicates that point C is considered safe because Pu=Pn and Mn>Mu
Point A (safe)
+
Point C ( safe)
Pu=P
n
-------------------+--
I
I
I
M"
Actual curve
PointE
Mil
Moment
Fig. 7.18 Analysis of irregular sections
312
7.6.2 Strength of Shear Walls
Shear walls are usually encountered in tall buildings to resist lateral loads initiated by
wind or earthquake. The analysis of these walls should be based on strain
compatibility and equilibrium of forces as shown in Fig. 7.19. The calculation can be
carried out in tabulated form or using spreadsheet" like EXCEL. The design procedure
can be summarized in the following steps:
1. The shape of the cross-section is usually chosen to fit the architectural
requirements of the structure.
2. The structural engineer usually assumes the concrete dimensions and the
reinforcement distribution. Some codes of practice give recommendations
regarding these issues.
3. The neutral axis distance is assumed and the internal forces are evaluated. The
stress in each steel bar is given by
lsi = 600x C -d
i
-5,/Y .................... (7.30)
c rs
The force in each layer of steel equals the stress multiplied by its area
F.i =/Si xAsi (positive if compression) ............................... (7.31)
4. The assumption of equivalent stress block is used, and the distance of the
compression block is evaluated as (a=O.8 c). The concrete force is divided into
areas Ad then multiplied by the stress (0.67 !cul'Yc).
P'"i = 0.67x/cu Ad ................................................... (7.32)
rc
5. The section nominal ultimate axial capacity P
n
is the sum of concrete and steel
contributions as follows:
P
n
= if F.,i +irF.-; .................................................... (7.33)
;=1 i=l
This procedure is repeated until the condition of Pn=P
u
is satisfied.
6. The nominal moment capacity Mn is computed by summing the moments of all
the internal forces from its c.g to the plastic centroid of the section (X
p
)' Thus
the moment capacity equals:
M n = if F.,; XYi +if F.-; (X p -d;) ............................... (7.34)
;=1 ;=1
313
7. The section will be considered safe if the calculated axial P n
the applied force P
u
(within 5%) and calculated moment IS greater than t
applied:
P =p
n u
and Mn 2': M
u
...... :(7.35)
8. If the calculated force is less than applied force, -increase the neutral axis
distance to increase the axial load capacity.
9. If Pn=Pu but the calculated moment is less than the applied moment (Mn<Mu)
increase either section dimension or reinforcement or both
t
!
0
0
U
0
0
p.;
0

0
Acl
b
l 0

.!
0
0

..
0
0
!Y2
o <i
+
c
Esi
0.003
0
0
0
Ps9 Psg F,? Fs6 FsS
0
Fs4 !
0
0
a
Fig. 7.19 Forces and strains in the shear wall at ultimate
314
Example 7.12
The shear wall shown in figure is subjected to the following straining actions
Pu=12600 kN .
Mu=7520 kN.m
fcu=30N/mm
fi=400 N/mm
2
Determine the adequacy{Safety) of the cross section

b.O

0

.'

~
0\ 0- 0\

- - -
"
eo eo e e
N N N N
0\ 0\
.... ....
eo eo
N N
.... ....
Solution
Step 1: Find the location of the N.A.

0

V")
I'

....

0\
.0\
....
e e
N N
.... ....
Since the location of the neutral axis is unknown, a trial and adjustment procedure is
carried out. As a first trial, assume that the neutral axis distance c=700 mm .
;. a = 0.8c = 0.80x 700 = 560mm
Step 1.1 Forces and moments in steel
Since the section is symmetrical, the c.g. and the plastic centroid coincides.
Xp=t/2= 1 050 mm
Calculate the applied eccentricity e
u
e == Mu = 7520 = 0.5968 m
u P
u
12600
Calculate the strength reduction factors Yc and Y8.
315
(
7 0.5968)
Y
c
=1.5x 6--3- =1.45 <1.5 ...... Y
c
=1.5
(
7 0.5968)
Ys = 1.15 x '6--3-. - =1.11 <1.15 ...... ys =1.15
The stress at each bar at distance d; from the compression face equals .
c -d 700-d. 400 NI 2
f
=600x __ i =600x '::;-::;347.8 mm
si C 700 1.15
The force in each layer of steel equals the stress multiplied by its area by number of
bars in the layer (positive in compression)
. 2
The area of one bar 19 A8i is 283.53 mm
350
12<1>19 .: 12<1>19
Acl
.

t

+

,
,

~ ~
t
l

e e 595

'" '"

875
dj
C=700
\..,:-__ -L _____ = : : : : : : : : __ _; 0.003
FsB Fs7 FS6 F.s
Fs4
316
Layer No of d
i isi
bars, ni mm Nlmm
1
1 12
50 347.8
2 12 300 342.9
3 2
600 85.7
4 2
900 -171.4
5 2 1200 -347.8
6 2
1500 -347.8
7 12 1800 -347.8
8 12
2050 -347.8
Total
Step 1.2: Force and moment in concrete
a= 0.8 x c = 560 mm
Fsi
kN
1183.4
1166.5
48.6
-97.2
-197.2
-197.2
-1183.4
-1183.4
Ps=-459.99
Since a > flange thicimess, divide the compression zone into two zones, the flange and
the web. The force developed in each layer equals
F. = 0.67xfcu A. _1_= 0.67x30 A _1_=0.0134A
CI Y
c
CI 1000 1.5 d 1000 ci
t2 =560-350=21Omm
The following table summarizes the calculations
No ti hi Aci Fci
nun nun nun
2
kN
1 350 1750 612500
8207.5
2 210 400 84000
1125.6
Total
Pc=9333.1
P
n
= fFsi + fFci = P. + = = 8873.11kN
1=1 i=1
Since P n (8873.11 kN) is less than the applied load P u (12600 kN), thus location of the
N.A. must be adjusted.
Note: The corresponding Mu=12106 kN,m (calculations not shown)
317
Step 2: Adjust c, and Recalculate P n
Since the calculated normal force is less than the applied, try increasing the neutral
axis distance c. After several trials, it can be found that the neutral axis distance that
gives the axial force of 12600 kN is 1303 rum
c =1303 mm
Step 2.1: Forces and moments in steel
The stress in each bar isi equals
f
. =600 1303-d, ::;;347.8 N Imm
2
SI 1303
1
FSi = lsi x (ni x ASi) 1000 (kN)
The bending of each bar about the c.g equals
t .. 1
M. =F (--d.)x- (kN.m)
sr SI 2 1 1000
Layer No of As; d;
lsi
bars, ni mm
2
mm Nlmm
1
1 12 283.53 50 347.8
2 12 283.53 300 347.8
3 2 283.53 600 323.7
4 2 283.53 900 185.6
5 2 283.53 1200 47.4
6 2 283.53 1500 -90.7
7 12 283.53 1800 -228.9
8 12 283.53 2050 -344.0
Total
318
Fsi tI2-d; Ms;
kN mm kN.m
1183.4 1000 1183.4
1183.4 750 887.6
183.6 450 82.6
105.2 150 15.8
26.9 -150 -4.0
-51.4 -450 23.1
-778.6 -750 584.0
-1170.3 -1000 1170.3
Ps=682.2 3942.8
Step 2.2: Forces and Moments in Concrete
a=0.8xc=1042,4 nun t2 =.1042.4-350=692.4 min
The force developed in each layer equals
F. = 0.67
x
/"" A _1_. _ 0.67x30 _1 __
c, Y
c
c/1000- 1.5 ACI1000-0.0134Acl
,
No ti hi A.i Fci YI Mci
nun nun nun
2
kN mm kN.m
1 350 1750 612500 8207.5 875 7181.56
2 692.4 400 .276960 3711.26 353.8 1313.05
Total P
c
-1t918.8 8494.61
P
n
= I,Fs; + fFcl = P. + p" =: 682.2+11918.8 = 12600kN
;=1 ;=1
Mn= I, M
si
' + fMc/ =3942.8+8494.6 = 12437.4kN.m
;=1 1=1
Step 3: Conclusion
M
n
{l2437) > Mu(7520) , the section is considered safe I
16000 -
14000
P,,@c-15 0--' ...
14375
12000
~
10000
'-
::l
Po<
8000
12600
!\@.c::I!
~ \. 12600
.-
.
,
I! ,

.

I: .. ,

,

I:
,

,
Pu@c=70 mm---t .. !aS73.1 ,
,

,

.

,

6000
,
,
,

.

.
4000 .
,

,

.
2000 ,
,
.

,
7520. ll2437
,
.
Simplified
interaction
diagram
0
o 2000 4000 6000 8000
Mu
10000 12000 14000
Simplified interaction diagram for shear wall presented in example 7.12
1 Calculation for c= 1500 was not shown
319
7.7 Interaction Diagrams For Circular Columns
The same procedure used in developing the capacity of rectangular columns is used
for circular ones. However, the ECP-203 does not permit the use of the equivalent
stress block in developing circular section capacity. The depth of the neutral axis is
assumed and the resulting compression zone is a segment of a circle. Since the stress-
strain curve is parabolic and the width of the cross section 'varies along the depth of
the neutral axis, an integration procedure must be followed. In order to calculate the
compressive force resisted by the concrete, the compressed zone is divided to n
segments with height ti and width Wi as shown in Fig. 7.20. The width of the segment
Wi is given by
WI = 2 h l x(2r-hJ ............................................ (7.36)
Where hi is the height of the segment from the top
The corresponding concrete force at the center of gravity of each segment is evaluated
as follows.
i=1
Cc = LW I xtl x/a .............................................. (7.37)
i=n
where/ci is the concrete stress at the c.g of the segment.
0.003
Concrete section
strain stresses
anti forces
concrete
segment
Fig. 7.20 Internal forces and strains distribution in circular columns
moment of this segment is determined by mUltiplying the force by the distance to
column center Of gravity Yi'
;=1
Muc = LW
I
xt; x/
ci
xy/ ....................................... (7.38)
320
Summing all the forces and the moments of all segments gives the total concrete force
and moments about the column center of gravity. The number of bars in the column
affects the shape of the interaction diagram. This is because the position of both
compression and tension steel varies according to bar arrangement with column height
giving different strain distribution. Therefore interaction diagrams for circular sections
are computed by assuming a continuous ring. Placing 8 bars in the column or more is
sufficient to validate this assumption. The interaction diagram is normalized to
concrete column radius rather than the total area of the column (nr2) as follows
The reinforcement area is obtained by multiplying the column area with the
reinforcement ratio as follows
As,IOlal = Jl (Jr r2) ............................................... (7. 39a)
Appendix E contains interaction diagrams for circular column based on the above
procedure. Example of the developed interaction diagrams is given in Fig. 7.21.
Similarly, interaction diagrams for hollow circular sections can be prepared as shown
in Appendix F. The reinforcement area in this case is obtained by multiplying the net
column area with the reinforcement ratio as follows:
ASJOlal = Jl Ac .................................................. (7.39b)
Ac =Jr(r
2
-r/) ............................................... (7.39c)
Where rand ri are the external and internal radius respectively.
Photo 7.6 Circular columns during construction
321
Steel yield stress
-'-
Fig. 7.21 Interaction diagrams for circular sections (appendix E)
322
Example 7.13
Design a circular column to resist the following straining actions:
P
u
=5600kN
M
u
=830kN.m
feu =40 N/mm2
J;, =360 N/mm2
Solution
Since the section is circular and is b' su ~ e c t e d to eccentric force, use interaction
diagrams for circular sections.
D 800
r=2"=T=400mm
Calculate the following terms
~
feu r2
5600x 1000
40x4002 =0.875
~ 830x10
6
feu r3 40x4003 = 0.324
Assuming 40 mm concrete cover, r'=400-40=360 mm
r' 360
;=-=-=0.9
r 400
Using the interaction diagram with 1;=0.9,J;,=360 N/mm2
p=2.5
323
Jl = pxfcu X 10-4 = 2.5 x40x 10-4 = 0.010>J..Lmin (0:008) .. : .. o.k
~ . . 2
Assume that we shall use 84>10 stirrups per meter and Asp for 4> 10nun =78.5 mm
The volume of the stirrups in 1 meter equals
Vs = nx Asp X (7l' X Ds) =8x78.5x(7l'x720) =< 1420502 mm
3
. . 0.25 7l' 2 3
V
smio
=--x-x800 xl000=1256637 mm < Vs ... o.k
, 100 4 .
800mm
~ \
no min
20 18
84> io 1m'
324
Example 7.14
Design a spirally reinforced column that is subjected to a nonnal force of 1100 kN and
bending moment of 180 kN (factored values). The material properties are as follows:
!CU = 30 N/mm2
h =400 Nlmm
2
hp = 240 N/mm
2
Solution
Step1: Estimate cross section
Interaction diagrams for circular sections is used to calculate the capacity of the spiral
column by neglecting the contribution of the spiral under eccentric loading .. The spiral
reinforcement will be added after using the interaction diagram for confinement only.
Since the column dimension is not given, assume a middle point on the interaction
diagram such as Pu/fcu r2=0.9
1100x 1000 = 0.9
30x ,.2
r=201.8 mm, try r=250 mm and D=500mm
Step2: Calculate the following terms
1100xlOOO =0.5866
feu r2 30x250
2
Mu 180xl0
6
=0.384
feu r3 = 30 x 250
3
Assume concrete cover of 30 mm, r'=250-30=220 lllin
220 =0.88
r 250
Using the interaction diagram twice with and
and

f.J = pxlcu X 10-1 = 2.4x30xlO-
4
= 0.0072 <I-Lmin(O.OlAc or 0.012 A
k
)
325
500mm
I' 440mm
I L-.-..:..:....-----j
"I
12<D16
130mm
{
0.0IX7rX2502 = 1963 mm
2
A,.min = 0.012x7rx2202 =1824 mm2
Choose 12 <D 16 (2400 mm
2
)
Step 3: Spiral design
The minimum volume of stilTup for spiral column is used to calculate the required
pitchp.
- 0 36 leu (A - A ) = 0 250
2
-7rX 220
2
) = 1993 mm
2
V,p,min -. X I e k 240
J'P
Using 8mm spiral with Asp=50 mm
2
p
7rx50x440 =34.67 mm
1993
8/30mm
326
Example 7.15
Design a hollow circular core shown below to resist the following straining actions'
P
u
= 30000 KN .
Mu = 19000 KN.m
feu = 30 N Imm
2

fy = 360 N Imm
2

Solution:
3.00m
No.1: Calculate the following terms: .
the core is hollow circular section and .. .. . ..
mteraction diagrams for hollo '1 .. IS subjected to eccentnc force use
w clrcu ar sectIOns. '
D 3000
r =2=-2-=1500 mm
Ac = Jr[(I500)2 -(qoot] = 3.27 X 10
6
mm
2
=3.27m
2
P
u
30000 x 1000
leu Ac = 30x(3.27xI0
6
) 0.306
19000x10
6
30 x (3.27 x 10
6
)x 1500 0.129
. Step No.2: Design of the reinforcement:
As .
SUmIng 40mm concrete cover, r'=1500-40=1460 mm

r 1500 .
r
i
lIOO
-;: = 1500 == 0.75
327
Using the interaction diagram for hollow circular sections (Appendix F)
fy = 360 N Imrn
2
, <;, = 0.95, r/r = 0.75
Therefore p = 3
f1 = pxlcu X 10--4 =3x30xlO--4 =0.009>Jlmin (0.008) ..... 0.k
ASJolai = f1 (Ac) = 0.009 x (3.27 xl0
6
) = 29340 mm 2 (96<1> 20, 30159mm 2)
Step No.3: Stirrups design:
Assume that we shall use 71jJ10/m' stirrups perimeter and Asp for IjJ 10 mm = 78.5 mrn
2
The volume of the stirrups in 1 meter equals:
For outer diameter:
Vs = n x Asp x(JrxD.) = 7x78.5x(Jrx2920) =5.04 X 10
6
mm
3
For inner diameter:

Vs = n xAsp x(JrxDJ = 7x78.5x(Jrx2120) =3.66xl0
6
mm
3
:,V"olal = V'inner + V,outer =3.66xl0
6
+5.04xl0
6
=8.7xl0
6
mm
3
20
Note: Since the outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter, about 60% of the
reinforcement is assigned to the outer diameter and about 40% of the reinforcement is
assigned to the inner diameter.
328
7.8 Interaction Diagrams For Box Sections
The development of non-traditional interaction diagrams is performed for box section,
which is frequently found in building and bridges. The construction of the diagrams is
similar to those for rectangular sections. It is obvious that the capacity of the box
section is greatly affected by the area of the internal void. Thus, in developing the
interaction diagram the t11ickness of the concrete wall must be specified and is given
as a ratio from the section width and depth (at and a b) as shown in Fig. 7.22
p -....
U I

e
i
(:
l;t

As.to"I/S
1
Fig. 7.22 Distribution of the reinforcement in box section
If the neutral axis is inside the top flange, the concrete force and moment can be easily
evaluated exactly as rectangular sections. However, if ilie neutral axis is outside the
top flange the area of the void must be subtracted to obtain the exact area of the
compressed concrete. The ECP-203 concrete stress-strain curve was used in
developing the charts. The developed compression force in the concrete C
c
is
evaluated by integrating the compressed area with the stress-strain curve and
subtracting the void area.
The reinforcement area determined from the interaction diagram is the total area of
steel and should be uniformly distributed around the cross section and in both sides of
the section (i.e. each face will have 118 of the total area) as shown in Fig. 7.22.
The interaction diagrams are normalized to the net concrete column area Ac rather than
ilie total area ofthe column as follows
and
hit Ac hu Ac t
The reinforcement area is given by multiplying the reinforcement ratio with ilie net
concrete area Ac as follows:
A'JOUlI = J.l Ac .. (7.40)
Ac =b t -void area
An example of the curves is shown in Fig. 7.23 and the rest is given in Appendix G.
329
Steel yield stress
0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.0 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.24
Mu
(
t 1;t
AS,tota IS
As,totaliS
Pu-1o- AS,lotalf8
! AS,total/8
e ! L ,--.-.,
t:=
la/
V
c 1=
I- b'i 1==1
. .- _._. [,< _. 11
J 110.... 1'\
IV' I As totalf
= =;,;, '" As totall8 I
AS,totalfS
M"
Ac = net area of the concrete
f1 = P J;." X 10-4
l( = A
As,fotal J-l cl
I f nl nteraction diagram for box section (appendix G) Fig. 7.23 An examp e 0 a
330
Example 7.16
Design the box section shown in figure if it is subjected to the following straining
actions
P
u
;"'9000 kN
Mu' ;'2700 kN.m
The material properties are as foHows
feu =30 N/mrn2 '.
fy =360 N/inm
2
Mu

-)
0
.-
0
on
1
1000mrn
Solution.
Interaction diagrams for box sections are used to design the given member.
Since the thickness of the concrete walls is not given assume a=0.15, thus
at= 0.15 (1500)=225 mrn
ab=O.15 (1000)=150 mrn
o
o
or)
....
I" 700mm "
225
1000mm
331
150
-I
o
or)
o
....
The net area of the concrete Ac equals
A = 1500xl000,..700xl050 = 765000 mm
2
e .
9000 x 1000 =0.3921
30x765000
2700 X 10
6
= 0.078
30x 765000 x 1500
From the diagram with fy=360 N/mrnZ, l;=0.95, a=0.15
p=6.2
J1 = P x feu X 10-4 = 6.2 x30x 10-4 = 0.0186
As,lOtnl = J1 Ae = 0.0186x 765000 = 14229 mm
2
Choose the area of steel multiple of eight and more than 24 bars
Choose 56 <l> 18 (14250 mrn
2
)
10 <1>18
4<\> 18 at each comer
<\>8I200mm
00
-<
e
o
10 <1>18
10 <1>18
I .. 1
1000mm
332
;;..,
.....
:g
'"
,.,
+
.-.
"
to:.
"
:!5
~ I
~ I N
I N
~ ~
:;
VI II
'"
N
S
~ t
-
G)
tI.l
e
.2
c
0
'i
c
G)
I-
en
c
0
..
U
GJ
fn
U
"C
..
C
GJ
U
U
W
...
0
C
."
'iii
GJ
a
.-.
"
0:.
"
:!5
-
G)
C.)
..
.2
c
0
'iii
III
e
Q.
E
0
0
333
';:l
"<:!
f ~
..::
..,
"," I
,..;
'>:!
~
Q)
x
I
1\1
E-,= h= '"3
II
u
II
i
h-
hN
U
~
I I
..,.:;:
h-12 h
N
I2
~ ~
II II
N
"," ","
7.9 Columns Subjected to Biaxial Bending
7.9.1 General
Designing a rectangular cross section for biaxial bending and axial load is a
complicated procesS because the direction and the position of the neutral axis are
difficult to establish. Furthermore, since the strain over the cross section varies linearly
in both directions as shown in Figure 7.24, considerable computation time is required
to establish equilibrium.
Neutral axis
\ 0.003
\
Compression strain
Tensile strain
Neutral axis
Column cross section
Fig, 7.24 Strain distribution for columns subjected to biaxial bending
The failure surface of sections subjected to biaxial bending isa three-dimensional
surface as shown in Fig. 7.25. Any combination of P
w
M
ux
, and M"y falling inside the
surface is considered safe, but any point falling outside the surface is considered
unsafe. The surface consists of infinite number of interaction diagrams as follows:
1. Position 1 represents the uniaxial section capacity in x direction in which the
neutral axis is parallel to x-direction (Mwl
2. Position 2 represents the uniaxial section capacity in y-direction in which the
neutral axis is parallel to y-direction (Muy).
3. An inclined neutral axis such as position 3 represents the case of column
under biaxial bending (Mux> M"y).
Another representation can be made by cutting the failure surface with horizontal
planes called load level. This approach is adopted for preparing the design aids
presented in the Appendix H of this book.
334
Load
Position I
Plane of constant P
u

e Position 1

position 2

Position 3
Fig. 7.25 Failure surface for columns subjected to biaxial bending
7.9.2 Exact Analysis of Biaxial Bending
The ru;alysis of subjected to biaxial bending is performed using compatibility
of and eqUIlIbnum of forces. Defining the neutral axis distance from the origi
as XNA WIth an angle rjJ as shown in Fig. 7.26. The strain at any steel bar equals to n
c-d
lisi = ........................................... (7.41)
where di = Xi sin(rjJ) + Yi cos() and the neutral axis distance c equals
c = x NA sin(rjJ) ................................................ (7.42)
be that a positive strain indicates compression and a negative strain
m lcates tensIOn. The developed stress in each bar equals to
lsi =Es Xlisi = 200, 000 X li
si
=600
c
-d
i
:::;/Y .................... (7.43a)
. c rs
I. =600
c
-
di
<I)'
s, c - Y
s
..................................... (7.43b)
The total force in each bar is
F.i = ASi xlsi ............................................. (7.44)
where Asi is the area of each individual bar
335
y

For use with
interaction
diagrams
Fig. 7.26 Stress and strain distributions for a column under biaxial bending
The moments of the reinforcement M
sx
;, M
syi
is taken about X and Y axis respectively
for each bar as
MSXi =F.I XYi ................................................. (7.45)
M syi = F.i xx i .................................................. (7.46)
The ECP-203 does not allow ti:le use of the equivalent stress block in the compu!ation
of the capacity of biaxially 10aded columns, thus an integration process must be
performed. The compression zone will be divided into srriall areas Ai and multiplied by
the corresponding. stress !ci. This procedure is used in a computer program developed
for the propose of preparing biaxial interaction diagrams. The compressive force
developed in each concrete segment is given by
Fa = lei Ai ................................... : ................... (7.47)
However, the previous procedure is not suitable in hand calculations. For hand .
computations, the equivalent stress block is used. Depending on the compression zone
shape, it is divided into two or three areas and the developed force. in each area equals
F. = 0.67 xl cu A . ............................................. (7.48)
CJ rc '
336
I,
The moment of the concrete compression force in each segment equals the individual
compressive force mUltiplied by the distance from the axis X and Y as follows:
Mcri =F;,/ xYc/ ....................... (7.49)
Mcy/ =F;,/ XXci . (7.50)
The total resultant capacity of the section P
u
equals to
P = '" F. + '" F . ............................................. (7.51) u n a
The total forces and moments are assumed to be located at the plastic centroid. For
sections with symmetrical reinforcement, the plastic centroid coincides with the center
of gravity. Thus if one needs to calculate the total moments MIL .. Muy about any point
rather than the plastic centroid (point a in Fig. 7.26), the moment of the resultant force
(Pu) should be taken into consideration as follows
M =Pxy-("'M .+"'M .) .......................... (7.52) tLt u S.tl L..J cn
M"y =P., xx -(IMs)'/ + I McJ'/ ) .......................... (7.53)
where x and y are the distance from the plastic centroid to the assumed axes. For
symmetrical sections x=bl2 and y=t/2.
It should be noted that the reduction safety factors depend on the eccentricity, and the
resultant eccentricity (e/t-) is used for the calculations of these factors as shown in Fig.
7.27.
where
t
e
, = (i J +( e; J ..................................... (7.54)
reinforcement
e M"J'
......=--
b P"
plastic centroid
Fig. 7.27 calculation of the eccentricity for a section under biaxial bending
337
Example 7.16 . . .
Calculate the biaxial column capacity for the neutral axis pOSItion shown 111 the figure
below knowing that:
leu= 25 N/rom
2
2
h = 400 N/rom 825 mm
400mm
T E
E
:5
"<t
Solution ..
. bl k assumed to be vahd 111 such a
For the sake of simplicity, the stress the following steps:
case. The calculation of the capaCIty can be suromanze 111
Step 1: Moments due to Forces Developed in the Steel Bars
c= 825 sin (30) = 412.5 rom
The strain in the steel equals
c -d. 412.5-d/
&,/ =O.003x-
c
-' =O.003x 412.5
Where d. =x. sin() + y / cos() =x/ sin(30) + y/ cos(30) , ,
,.
825mm
x
,.
400mm
._._._.-.-. ....-----'"
cp=30
4<1>28
Xi
y
I
"
338
Fl
Positive strain indicates compression and vice versa. The stress in each bar equals:
f
lsi = 200,000 x 8
si
::;-L.
Ys
Since most of the section is in compression'(e/t is small). Assume e/t=0.27.
Yc 0;7}d.6
(
7 0.27)
Y
s
= 1.15 x '6--3- ",,1.24
Thus concrete and steel safety factors equals Ys=1.24 and Yc=1.6. This assumption will
be verified later. The area of one bar CI> 28 mm equals=615.75 mm
2
The force in each bar equals
The moment capacity of the section is calculated by taking the moments of the forces
about any point (for example point 0). The moments of the forces resisted by the steel
reinforcement Msx;, Msy; are taken about X and Y axes. The moment of the resultant
force P
u
should be considered since point 0 does not coincide with the plastic centroid.
Calculations of moments due to forces developed in the steel bars
Bar XI Yi
d
i E.si lsi Fsi Msxi M
syi
mm mm mm N/mm2 kN kN.m kN.m
I 40 40 54.6 0.00260 322.6 198.63 7.95 7.95
2 360 40 214.6 0.00144 287.8 177.21 7.09 63.80
3 40 360 331.8 0.00059 117.4 72.31 26.03 2.89
4 360 360 491.8 -0.00058 -115.3 -71.00* -25.56 -25.56
Total 377.15 15.50 49.07
*(tension force)
339
Step 2: Moments due to Forces Resisted by Concrete
The equivalent stress block is 0.8 of the neutral axis distance
x'= 0.8 (825) =660 mm divided to rectangular and
Since the compression zone is trapezoidal, it will be
triangular as shown in figure.
t\ =(x'_400)xtan=(660-400)xtan30 =150.Umm
t2 = 400x tan = 400 x tan 30 = 230.94 mm
825 nun
I
X I' x'-660 nun
.... -'"'7 "":::'/$';-3'0 .-.--.--r-..,..-r-r--'1Tl
'<''' ....
I.()....... ......
q
- ao
'Ii'
* u
133.3
400 x t
2
A =--
2 2
t2
Y
=t +-
c2 \ 3
t
i
j
+
y
.....
.....
o
V')
_ 0.67 x fcu = 0.67x25 Ai (kN)
Fe; - Yc Ai 1.60 1000
0.67 feu
Ye
. . . fi . the sum of the individual
The moment of the concrete compresSlOn orce IS,. ollows
compressive force multiplied by the distance from the aXIS x and y as fi
M cs; = Fe; x (kN.m)
(kN.m)
340
Calculations of moments due to forces resisted by concrete
No shape bi ti Area Xci Yci Fci Mexi MCYi
mm mm mm
2
mm mm kN kNm kN.m
1
c::J
400 150.11 60044.43 200.00 75.06 628.59 47.18 125.72
2
~ 400 230.94 46188 133.33 227.09 483.53 109.81 64.47
Total 1112.12 156.98 190.19
Step 3: Total Forces and Moments in Concrete and Steel
Pu = LF'i + LFci
P
u
= 377.15+1112.12 = 1489.27 kN.
Since the section is symmetrical, the plastic centroid coincides with the c.g. Thus the
location of the section compressive force P
u
(the resultant) is at 200 mm from both X
and Y axes. Since the moment is not taken at the plastic centroid of the section,
contribution of the P
u
must be taken into consideration, thus the total moments about
point 0 equals
M
u
)' = P
u
xx-(LM".j + LMcyj)
Mux = 1489.27 x20011000-(15.50 + 156.98) = 125.36 kN.m
M
u
)' = 1489.27 x 20011000-(49.07 + 190.188) = 58.6 kN.m

341
x 'i
i
.. y
Step 4: Check reduction safety factors
e)' =" M ux = 125.36 = 0.21 m
P
u
x t 1489.27 x 0.40
~ = M
u
)' = 58.6 = 0.098 m
b p. xb 1489.27 x 0.40
e
t'
(
7 0.24)
Y
e
= 1.5 x '6--3- = 1.63,,; 1.6 ...... o.k
(
7 024)
y, = 1.15 x '6--3- = 1.25,,; 1.24 ...... o.k
o
X ..... -.-. ..-------,

:+Pu
ex --: l--

---,----

400
.1
342 ..
1
..
y
\ :" "" -
-...., . : -: . ~
',' ' . ~ , ...-
'. , .... : \
,
.
.'":.:,, ...
, ... -,,' ,"
7.9.3 Minimum Eccentricity for Biaxially Loaded Columns
The Egyptian code states that for columns subjected to biaxial bending, the moment
applied on either direction can be neglected if the eccentricity caused by this moment
is less than code minimum eccentricity of 0.05 tor 20 mm. The column in such a case
will be designed as ifit is subjected to a uniaxial bending as shown in Fig. 7.28.
Design for Pu, & Mo.t
NeglectMuy
Design for Pu & Muy
Neglect Mu.,
b
Design for Pu only"
Neglect Mux and M
u
.,
Fig. 7.28 Minimum eccentricity requirements for biaxially loaded columns
Photo 7.7 Eccentrically loaded columns in a multi-span concrete bridge

Example 7.17
Determine the reinforcement required for 1
a column subjected to biaxial bending with 'i' Muy=12 kN.m
the following data: w-I
Pu= 960 kN Mux=480 kN.m i _ 700 mm
fcu= 25 N/mm
2
C---- -1:--
f. = 360N/mm
2
y
Solution
I--l
300mm
The minimum eccentricity in each direction is the bigger of 0.05 of the column
dimension and 20 mm .
300
e . =0.05x--=0.015m (orO.02m)
x.mm 1000
700
e - =0.05x--=0.035m
y.mm 1000
Muy 12 0 I tM
e =-- =-=0. 125 m<exmin, neg ec lIy
x p" 960 .
Mux 480 - " M
e = --= - = 0.5 m >ey min DesIgn lor ux
J' p., 960 .
Thus design as if the section is subjected to uniaxial bending P
IU
Mux
960 x 1000 = 0.183
25 x 300 x 700
M ux 480 X 10
6
= 0_1306
feu b (2 = 25 x 300 x 700
2
Using interaction diagram with (,=0.9 fy=360 N/mm2, a=l(top and bottom)
p=2.7
J1 = pxfcu X 10-4 = 2.7 x 25x 10-4 = 0.00675
As= Jib t = 0.00675 x 300 x 700 = 1418 mm
2
(3 <1>25)
A: =As =1473mm
2
Please note that the two <1> 16 is added to
satisfy code spacing requirement.
344
3 <1> 25
2 <1> 16

o
o
r--
7.9.4 Biaxial Interaction Diagrams
The design of sections subjected to biaxial bending can be greatly simplified by using
interaction diagrams. The horizontal. plane (con$.ti:mt load level) is the chosen
representation of the failure surface. A computer program was prepared to carry out all
the required calculations. The program can be in the following steps
1. The neutral axis is first assumed with certain inclination angel the forces
and moments in the reinforcement steel are evaiuated.
2. The force in the concrete' is determine(r tbrough the integration of the
idealized concrete stress strain curve {not the equivalent stress block/with the
compressed area. .
3. A trial and adjustment procedure is performed by changing the neutral axis
inclination and/or position until the equilibrium is achieved.
4. Having determined the desired load level, moments are evaluated and a point
in the interaction diagram is plotted.
5. For the same reinforcement inde'x (p) and load level R
b
, several neutral axis
positions are assumed and the corresponding bending moments are plotted
forming a curve on the interaction diagram.
6. The area of the steel determined from the charts and should be uniformly
distributed along the cross section.
7.9.5 The use of Biaxial Interaction Diagrams
The use ofbiaxially interaction diagrams (refer to Fig. 7.29 and the appendix H) can
be summarized in the following steps.
1- Evaluate the load level Rb using the following equation
R -
b - !cub t
2- Calculate the non-dimensional biaxial moments quantities
and
3- Locate the reinforcement index p from the required load level chart using the
previous non-dimensional moments. If the desired load level is not
available, use interpolation to find p using charts of higher and lower value.
4- Calculate the total area of steel using the following
f.L=pxfcu x10-4
As.total = f.L b t
This area of steel should be dIstributed uniformly (uniform in area) along the
. cross section perimeter. There should beat least three-four bars in each side
oftpe column to ensure uniformity
. 345
. am was re ared to carryout the computations t? construct
diaia!. of the
biaxiallyload column is shown m FIg. 7.29. The rest 0 t e eSlgn al
Appendix H.
0.26 r--

0.24 f;::: r--..
0.22 ........

Load level
0.20 r----.......
........
0.14 r-- '" '" I'.. !'\. '\..
0.12 ...... ""i'-... '" "1\."1'\. 'I\. I\.
0.10 '\. '\ '\ '\ '\
0.08 NOetermine p 1'1\. K 1\ \ \ \ \
I-
I-
0.06 "\ \ !\ 1'\ 1\ 1\
0.04 I f\ \ \ \ \ \ \ !
\ \ {\-b-\+\ ---\+-+I-\:-t- i
0.02 1\''1 \ , 1 ill
0.00 0 .,2 0.04 0.06 0." 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 " 0.22 0.24 TMO281

;t.,.. Muy feu b t
t
-Yo-
N.A
AS.lotaI/4 t-"-iJ-l
t-. A,.tntul = J.l b t
7.29 Interaction for biaxially load columns (appendix H)
346
Example 7.18
Design the reinforcement for a short column subjected to biaxial bending accompanied
with compressive force using the following data:
feu =35 Njmm
2
/y =360 N/mm
2
P
u
=1200kN
Mux =215 kN.m
Muy =65 kN.m
Solution
I
~ Muy=65 kN.m
I
Mux=215 kN.m mrs
('-'-0]
I-l
250mm
Step 1: Calculate the following terms
R ~ 1200xl000 0.228
b fcu b t J5x250x600
215 X 10
6
= 0.0683
35 x 250 x 600
2
M .. ,
0.28
feu t b
2
0.26
0.24
0.22
0,20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.0495
0.04
0.02
0.00
-
f y=360 N/mm2
~
.... 1'-- c,"ll.llJl..
Rb = 0.20 ')
r-- I'--
.........
t-....
"-
r--
to- I'--
.........
"-
'"
:--..
I-.......
"'"
"'
"-
"-
~
:0-
r.--.....
"'"
"'
'-
"-
~ ~
-I'--
""
.........
'"
~
"

24
'-
i'--
"
"'
"'" '-
~ '-2
"-
'"
,
'"
""'-
"
"'"
'-
'-1
""
'-
"
"
-
"-
I'.:
"' "
""" "
4
,"
-
'12 r...... \..
,
i\.. \.
:.......
"
" "'
"'
10"\
"'
'\ '\ "\ "\ "\
"- "-
~
'"
"\ "\ '\ \ '\ '\ '\ '\
IE$
X ~ "i\.. '\
.'\
\ \ \ 1\ 1\
f\
1\ f\
, .\
\ \ \ 1\ 1\
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0,2 0.22 0.24 O ~
0.0683
347
Step 2: Calculate reinforcement area
Since the desired load level Rt,=0.228 is not available in the biaxial interaction
diagrams (see Appendix H;/y=360 N/mm2, t;;=O.8), interpolation is performed between
Rt,=0.2 and Rt,=O.3
Rt,=0.20
Rt,=0.30
-> p=5.0
-> p=6.8
Interpolating for Rt,=O.228 --P =5.5
Jl = P feu 10-4 = 5.5 x 35 X 10-4 =0.0193 >J.lmin (0.008) and < J.lmal
O
.
04
)
A
-" b t = 0 0193 X 250 X 600 = 2895 mm
2
=28.95 cm
2
s,total- r .
Choose 12 18.
AJ4 =411>18
leach face
5cjl8/m'
\-
-\
348
7.9.6 ECP-203 Design Procedure for Biaxial Bending
calculation procedure for sections sUbjected to biaxial bending is laborious. Many
design codes including the Egyptian code adopt the use of the simplified methods for
designing members subjected to biaxial bending.
The approximation used in the ECP-203 is to assume that the interaction curve can be
represented by two straight lines. Then, transferring the two applied biaxial moments
int? one magnified (increased) uniaxial moment either or depending on the
ratio of the applied moments and the load level. Fig. 7.30 shows the ratio between the
section capacities in each direction.
M",.
b'
M'
-y
b"
-
M,.
b'
1
Mx
a'
A/4
a 'a
A/4
a'
M>M,+P (y)My
M:
a'
Interaction curve
Mx
M",
a'
---------.{-----.-. X
b
Fig. 7.30 Developemtn of the ECP-203 design method
349
The angle A can be calculated as
tan A. =
M' M _x __ x
a' a'
My
b'
..................................................... (7.55)
where Mx is the design moment, and is the magnified.moment
Defining J3 as tan A gives
M; _Mx =pMy ................................................... (7.56)
a' a' b'
M' =M +p(a')M ............................................. (7.57)
x x b' y
similarly
b'
M' =M +P (-)M .............................................. (7.58)
Y Y a' x
The previous equations are the basis of the code-siu:plified. . in _which
value of the factor J3 was determined from the compansons With the blliXl.al mteractlOn
diagrams.
Muy
J, t b
2

0.16
0.14
0.12
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.04
o
Mux
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 !cu b t
2
Fig. 7.31 Load contour for different reinforcement ratios and load levels.
350
Fig. 7.31 shows that for the same reinforcement ratio, the moment capacity for
colunms with low load level is more than the moment capacity of columns at higher
load levels (above the balanced point). Also, the angle').. differs from one load level to
'another, and a constant value cannot be used. Thus, using').. determined from high load
level (Rb=O.5) will lead to unconservative values of M' x for load levels near the
balanced point (Rb =0.2) (point A instead olpoint B). The actual variation off3 (tan ')..)
with load level is nonlinear. However, the code approximates the relation with a
conservative straight line given in Table 7.2 or the following equation.
f3 = 0.9-& ~ 0.6
2 ................................................... (7.59)
sO.8
Table 7.2 Values of 13 for different load levels
Rb =
~
SO.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 ~ 0 6
leu b a .
13
0.8 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.60
Figure 7.32 represents the actual values of f3 determined from the strain compatibility
method versus the code approximate values. It can be seen that code value will yield
always a conservative design than using the interaction diagrams. The average area of
steel using the simplified method is about 10-20 percent higher than the actual vales as
shown in Fig. 7.32. However, better accuracy can be hardly obtained from such a
simplified design method
0.9
0.8
0.7
P 0.6
0.5
0.4
Code values
----
---
/
~
-.......
--
---
---
..........
~
Actual values
/
..........
..............
--
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
o 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
. Load level, Rb
Fig. 7.32 Comparison among actual and code values for f3
351
Design steps for biaxially loaded columns with uniform reinforcement
1- Calculate the applied load level using
2- From Table 7.2 or Eq. 7.59 determine f3 factor, use interpolation if required
if
Mx > My then M' =M +f3(a')M
a' b' .T X b' Y
3- Locate a point on the uniformly distributed steel uniaxial interaction diagrams using
~ M; M;
and (f b' 2 or
f
b 2 )
feu b a cu a cu a
4- Calculate the total area of steel by determining the reinforcement index' p
f1 = P xlcu X 10-4
AS/
Olal
= f1 b t >Asmin
This area of steel should be distributed uniformly (uniform in area) around the cross
section perimeter. There should be at least 3->4 bars in each side of the column to ensure
uniformity as shown in Fig. 7.33.
SMu
y
A,j4 i ex P
\
iE
u
)
1
"j
e
y
1
U
Mux
-i-'-'
_._. _._.{_.
............... A,j4
a a' sa
V

A,j4
IE
b
I
)1
IE
b
Fig. 7.33 Reinforcement details for biaxially loaded columns
352
Ex.ample 7.19
Design a comer column in a braced building ifit is subjected to
Pu =1620 kN
ex = 0.068 m
e
y
= 0.2345 m
t::u =30N/mm
2
fy =280 N/mm
2
Pu=1620kN
ex=0.068 m
Solution
Since the column dimensions are not given, assume load level of 0.3 and assume
column width of 250 mm. Thus;

fcu
b
t 30x250xt
t=720rom
Try a column with 250x750 mm
Determine the actual load level Rb using the follOwing equation
Rb
1620xl000
0.288
fcu
b
t 30x250x750
From Table 7.2 and using interpolation between Rt,=0.2 and R
b
=0.3, or directly use
Eq.7.59
Rb 0.288
/3=0.90-
2
=0.90-
2
=0.756
Calculate the applied moments using the given eccentricities
M x = p" .e
y
= 1620 x 0.2345 = 380 kN.m
My =p".ex =1620xO.068=110kN.m
Assume concrete cover = 30 rom, and the distance from the centerline of the
reinforcement to the concrete surface 45rom
353
a'=750-45 =705 mm
b' = 250- 45= 205 rom . aken about
Smce x a . . M I '= (380/705) > (Myfb') =(110/205), the design moment will be t
x. Using Eq. 7.57 gives
, (a')M =380+0.756(705)11O=665.99kN __m
Mx =Mx +/3 b' J' 205
M; 665.99 x 10
6
=0.158
fcub t
2
= 30 x 250 X 750
2
750-2x45 =0.88
t; 750 I 2
. .. l' teraction (uniformly distributed steel) /y= 280 N mm Usmg umaxla m
Since S=0.88 use interpolation
For S=0.9 p =14.0
For S=0.8 p =16.0
Therefore for S= 0.88 ->-> p=14.4
J.l = 14.4 x 30 x 10-4= 0.0432> J..lmin(0.008) and :J..lma.(0.06)
- b t = 0 0432 x 250 x 750 = 8100 rom
As,total - J.l 6 J. 28
Thenum ero b fbars should be the multiple of 4, thus choose 1 'f .
The bars are distributed equally on the four sides. .
16 cl> 28
6 cl> 81m'
I I
250mm
354
"
I
It
I
"

7.9.7 Biaxial Bending in Unsymmetrically Reinforced
Sections
Sections with unsyrrunetrical reinforcement are often encountered in shear walls
and .columns with high rectangularity ratio. From the
of VIew, plaCIng the reinforcement in the direction of the large moment is more
the ECP 2?3 provides a simple method for designing biaxially loaded
sectIOns m WhICh the steel IS not uniformly distributed.
This simplified method is based on magnifYing the applied moments by a moment
factor Ub was introduced to modify the design
m both dIrectIOns accordmg to the load level and the ratio of the applied
bIaxial momen!s. The magnification factor Ub was evaluated after the examination of
exact solutIOn of the unsyrrunetrical interaction diagrams
l
( as the one shown in
Fig. 7.34). The code permits the use of this simplified method until a fairly high load
level of Rb :=;;0.50 gIVen by Eq. 7.60a. If Rb>O.5, biaxial interaction diagram with
uniform steel or the simplified method (7.9.2) may be used. The magnified moments
about X and Y-axes; Mix and M'y, are modified by the same factor Ub provided that
(p" / f cu b a) :=;; 0.50 as follows:
R - p"
b -f-';- .................. (7.6Oa)
cu a
M,: =ab Mx ............................................. (7.60b)
M; = ab M y (7.60c)
0.18 ___ ---.
f. b 2 P,/fcuba=OJ
cu
a
0.16
fy = 360 N/mm2
0.14 =.9
.................
0.12

0.10

0.08
0.06 r ........
0.04
0.02
QOO M.
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24fcub a
2
Fig. 7.34 Biaxial interaction diagram for unsymmetrically reinforced sections{l)
'I Developed by the authors
355
The uniaxial bending interaction diagrams (top and bottom steel only-Appendix B) is
used twice to calculate the area of steel for each direction.
This approach is easy to use in routine and the same
results obtained through the interaction deSIgn curves for biaxIally loaded members
with unsyrrunetrical reinforcement. The suggested values of Ub are given in .Table 7.3.
It can be noticed that the values of the coefficient Ub are syrrunetncal about
(M/al)/(MyIb') =1 (case of uniform steel). It.can also be noticed from Fig: 7.35 that the
general practice of designing rectangular remforced concrete beams subjected pure
biaxial bending (Rt,=0) twice by using the design moments My.
magnification (ub=l) is valid. However for sections .subjected to bIaxial ":Ith
normal force this assumption will yield unconservatlve results, as the deSIgn bendmg
moments need to be magnified.
1.9 -r---"'---""--""--,---r---r--,--.-.--,
(M,/a') rvyb')-
1.7 +--+--.J--+-?+-*-f--i--t--t--t-l
... . .....

1.1
0.9
0.7
o 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5

Fig. 7.35 Actual values of Ub for rectangular cross sections
356
Table 7. 3 values of ab for rectangular cross sections

.
3
00
2 1
,
0.5 0.33 0
Rt,-P ul feu b a
1 1.2 1.25 1.30 1.25 1.20 1

0.2 1 1.35 1.50 1.75 1.50 1.35 1

0.3 1 1.25 1.35 1.4 1.35 1.25 1
'R
b
-O.4 1 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 1
Rb 0.5** 1 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.70 0.65 1
* This is. a case For cases in which My does not equal to zero, value of 10 is
sufficIent for Interpolation
** If Rb>0.5, biaxial interaction diagram with uniform steel or the simplified method
(7.9.2) may be used
Photo 7.8 BiaxiaUy loaded corner column in court house
357
. rnrnetrical
D,esign Steps for biaxially loaded colurnns With unsy
reinforcement
1- Calculate the applied load level and moment ratio using
R Pu Mx fa'
b = j-b and M fb'
cu a y
. .' 'f euired
2- From the table determme ab factor Rb ::;0.50 , use mterpolatIOn Irq
M; =a
b
M,
M; =a
b
My
. the reinforcement
3- Use Top and bottom steel interaction diagrams twice to determme
index p, calculate the total area of steel.
M' p _4
Using __ x_ and __ u_ determine Jix =' P x feu xl 0
feu b a
2
h" b a
M'
Using--
J
-' -and determine Ji
y
=' pXhu xlO
feu a b
2
feu b a
A ' 4 bt
-2!. =' /I b t and - =' Ji
2 rx 2 y .
, . d at the opposIte face
The area of steel determined for each direction should be duphcate
as shown in Fig. 7.36. The total area of steel equals
0.67 feu
a a'
'Yc

K b >1
. I reinforcement
Fig. 7.36 Analysis of sections with unsymmetn
ca
358
Example 7.20 .
Determine the unsymmetrical ':6 .
subjected to biaxial bend' . h
rem
orcem.ent requIred for a short interior column
C I
mg WIt the folloWIng data'
o umn SIze 300 x 800 mm .
'Pu =1440kN
Mux = 580 kN.m
Muy =120 kN.m
t;,u = 30 N/mm
2
fy = 400 N/mm
2
! Muy=120 kN.m
Mux=580 kN.m

i
n-
I
i
i
'-"1"- 8
i 00
I
'--i-
I
Solution 11 --,
300mm
Step 1: Calculate the magnified moments.
Assuming concrete cover 40 mm, thus
a'=800-40=760 mm
b'=300-40=260 mm
Calculate
Mux/ a' 580/760
MUy/b' 120/260 =1.65
Rb 1440xlOOO
!cub a 30 x 300 x 800
Note that the comer bar is
divided between x and y
directions
0.20
A,x/2
- -
-
0
0
0
\0 0
00
r--. <"'I
lb JI
r--.
(Ij
-
-
Asy!2
y.
"'"
I
i
l\ i
',. I'":,'
I
i
I
-j_t .
< ..; ..
J \ 1

1< >1
300
359
Muy
Asy/2

Mux
-f-___-- X
A,x/2
From Table 7.3 in this text and by using interpolation ub=1.587

.
3
1 1
00
R,,-Pul feu b a
Rb::>O.1 1 1.2
1
25
l:30
Rb=O.2
'2<:

r(1.7)
Rb=O.3 1 1.25 1.35 1.4
R
b
=O.4 1 0.95 0.95 0.95
1 0.65
0.7}

Mux . ab = 580 (1.587) = 920.2 kN.m
Muy . lX!J = 120 (1.587) = 190.4 kN.m
Calculate the non-dimensional quantities:
M: 920.2 x 1000 x 1000 = 0.159
feub a
2
= 30 x 300 X 800
2
M;, 190.4 x 1000 x 1000
--- 0.088
fcu a b
2
- 30x800x300
2
r = 800-2x40 =0.90
':>a 800
Sb = 250-2x40
250
0.5 0.33 0
1.25 1.20 1
1.50 1.35 1
1.35 1.25 1
0.95 0.95 1
0.70 0.65 1
Using the regular uniaxial interaction diagrams with symmetrical reinforcement top
and bottom (fy=400 N/mm2, 0.=1)
Step 2: Area of steel for M 'x
l;.=0.9, = 0.20, M: 2 = 0.159, the reinforcement index (Px) equals
fcu
ba
fcu ba
Px = 3.4
/lx = P x feu 10-4 = 3.4 x 30 X 10-4 = 0.0102

(AsJ2) = /lx b a = 0.0102 x 300 x 800 = 2448 mm
2
360
(@each side)
Step 3: Area of steel for My
r =07 M;, , .
., f. b - .20,--- = 0.088, the remforcement mdex (Py) equals
cu a fcua b
2
py= 1.6
Jiy = Py feu 10-4 = 1.6 x 30 x W
4
= 0.0048
(AsyI2)= J1y b a = 0.0048 x 300 x 800 = 1152 mm
2
Step 4: Final design
As.min = 0.008 x 300 x 800 = 1920 mm
2
As.total = Asx + Asy = 2 (2448 + 1152) = 7200 mm
2
> A . s,mm
A"lolal 7200
P = b x d = 300 x 800 = 0.03 < (J1max=0.04 for interior column)
(choose 12 28, 7389 mm
2
)
(@each side)
Note: The comer bar is divided between x direction and y direction
[Asxl2 = 5 25 (2454 mm\ Asy 12= 3 25 (1473 mm
2
)]
E
E
g
co
130omm 1
.
,
......
5#25'
__ ..JA ___ _
1
361
7.9.8 Circular Columns under Biaxial Bending
Biaxial moments applied to circular sections can be transformed into equivalent
uniaxial bending. This procedure is possible because the bending strength of circular
columns is the same in all directions due to the complete symmetry of the section.
Thus the design of a circular column subjected to biaxial bending (as the one shown in
Fig. 7.37) is the same as the one subjected to uniaxiaLbending but with a resultant
uniaxial moment equals
Mu ................................................. ... (7.61)
Reinforcement
".
Reinforcement
,,-
,,-
,,-
y
P"
resultant moment MtI
X'
Fig. 7.37 Circular sections under biaxial bending
The previous procedure is valid in case of using almost uniform steel distribution. The
use of at least 12 bars is considered sufficient to ensure uniformity.
362
Example 7.21
Design a circular column in a braced building if it is subjected to:
Pu =560 kN
Mux =275 kN.m
Muy =140 kN.m
feu =25N/rom
2
fy =240 N/rom
2
Solution
Muy=140 kN.m
~
D=600rom
.. j Mux=275 kN.m
The column is subjected to biaxial bending moments. It can be designed to withstand a
resultant moment Mu
Mu = ~ M + M ~ ,
Mu =.J275
2
+140
2
= 308.58 kN.m
Assume concrete cover of 30 rom
I' = = 300 - 30 = 0 9
~ r 300 .
P. 560x1000
feu r2 = 25 x 3002 0.2489
Mu=308.58 kN,m
D=600rom
363
Using interaction diagrams for circular sections (Appendix E).t;= 240 N/mrn2, S=O9
p=6.8
Ji = p feu x 10-
4
= 6.8 x 25 x 10'" = 0.017 >flOlin (0.008) and < flOla>< (0.04)
A,.total = Ji 1( j-2 = 0.017x1(x300
2
= 4806 mm
2
Choose 16 + 20
I
D=600rom
1
Reinforcement detail
6q,I O/m'
16 q, 20
Assurningthat the lateral reinforcement is 6 +lO/m', thus the volume of the stirrups v..
equals (At.<+10)=78 rom
2
):
v, = n1(xD
k
A
h
= 6x1(x550x 78 = 808645 mm
3
0.25 1( 2 0.25 1( 6 2 1000 706858 3 V k
V . =--x-xD xIOOO=--x-x 00 x = mm < , ....... 0.
,.mm 100 4 100 4
364
7.9.9 Interaction Diagrams for L-Sections
L-section columns are often encountered in the comers of buildings. Most of these
columns are subjected to bending in addition to the normal force. Since L-sections are
not symmetrical about either axis, evaluating their strength is very complicated and
time consuming. In addition, the eccentricity of the applied load with respect to the
local axes affects the resistance of the section. Developing interaction diagrams for L-
sections is a design tool without any approximations. The construction of the
interaction diagram for L-sections is similar to that for rectangular columns subjected
to biaxial bending, but the neutral axis has to be assumed in one of four positions as
shown in Fig. 7.38.
The developed charts are limited to columns that are symmetrical about a 45 axis as
in Fig. 7.38. Furthermore, the width of the column b is defined as a ratio from column
height il. =..
t
steel bars
2
Fig. 7.38 Different positions for the neutral axis in L-sections
The load level is determined by normalizing the applied compressive force with the
net concrete area Ac.
Rb ................................................ (7.62)
feu Ae
Ae =b xt +b(t -b) = 2xt xb -b 2 ......... , ......................... (7.63)
365
The moment is normalized with respect to the net concrete area Ac and the section
thickness t.
Muy and MIL<
feu Ac t feuAe t
The area of steel should be at least 16 bars and should be a mUltiple of 8 to ensure
uniformity and equals
A {=lJxA ....... : ................................. (7.64)
sJoltl r c
An example of these charts is shown in Fig. 7.39, the rest of the charts is given in the
Appendix 1.

j", A I
"
0.18
0.16
--La! :1;
0.14
0.12
"
vlf" fJ9
I
l)M..

0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.0
0.0
.f).0
.f).o
.f).0
.f).o
.0.1
-0.1
.f).1
.f).1
1\1 '\
\
2
,,:,\,
0
"\
2
4
6
8
0
I
2
6<-
rl
Fot
L
4
J
6
f;!"
i ,
8
Interaction Diagram for L-Sections
f
y
=360 N/mm
2
, ;1..=0.35, R
b
=0.20
)I' I H-1.,
1x .J
,
-
1'--.

- !--
j.....-
-
..........
r-...... 1'--
\
'M.
Vt'""
-r-.
-
r---.
1'............
''-'..!...
/'
-......
r-..... r-......
r--... ...... ...............
-
/ r-. r--..... !"'--..
'"
!'..

, .........
0 i'-.. 1'..""" 1\."-
r-...\ 1\\
......
1\.. .........
l"'-t'\. 1\.'\
f\
.'\.
1\.'
\
'\
'\ \' \ 1\
['\.'\
L\ \ \ 1\\
I,
'"
1'0 1 \
-"
\
''''
-0 :s:
"'-
J I 11 \ \
'"
.......
i""""
)
I I
I':
t'-...
...........
IJ
/ II
..........
t-...: t'--... .' .) I 1>=16
-.......:
t-... v
B ......
f.. b-i--
I
lL'
... CD
.,
,... - ,...
o 0 0 ci

f.. A, I
Fig. 7.39 Biaxial Interaction Diagrams for L-sections (appendix I)
366
Example 7.22
Detennine the area of steel required for an L-shape reinforced concrete column that is
subjected to the following straining actions:
P
u
=950kN
Mux =180 kN.m
Muy =115 kN.m
:t;,u . =25 N/mm2
fy =360 N/l11Ili
MuriiS kN.m
Solution:
Calculate the area of the concrete section Ac
A = 500 x 250+ 250x 250 = 187500mm
2
c.
b 250
A =-=-=0.5
I t 500
Note that the direction of the given moments will produce a compression in zone 1,
thus the nonnal force will be as shown in figure.
Calculate the following terms
R 950xl000 0.202
b fcu Ac 25 x 187500
180xl000xlOOO 0.0768
fcuAc t 25 x 187500x500
115 x 1000 x 1000 =0.049
feu Ac t 25 x 187500x500
367
,
: P
u

Referring to chart (in Appendix I) with Rt,=0.2, 11.=0.50, (,=0.85 the compression zone
in the first quarter of the chart, the reinforcement index p can be obtained as follows
p= 10.2
J1 = p fcu 10-
4
= 10.2 x 25 x 10-4 =0.0255
As.total = J1 Ac = 0.0255 x 187500 = 4781.25 mm
2
The area of steel should be at least 8 bars and should be a mUltiple of 8
4781 .
Area of one bar =--=299 mm
2
16
As.chosen= 16 20, 5026 mm
2
16 20
54>10/m'
I"

. 411

11/

54>10/m'
. I II"
368
8
SLENDER COLUMNS
Photo 8.1 Unbraced slender columns at Rice University; USA.
8.1 Definition of Slender Columns
Consider a very short colurrm subjected to increasing axial load, eventually the
compressive stress is exceeded and compressiori' failure occurs. Now consider a
relatively slender colurrm subjected to increasing axial load, whep the load reaches a
certain value, the column begins to bend about its weaker axis and deflect laterally.
The colurrm is said to have buckled.
For a pin-pin ideal column (without any imperfections) the buckling load (also ,c!llled
Euler load) is given by
1(2 (El) .
~ =--2 - ................................................ -. ....... (8.1)
. L
in which EI is the flexural rigidity and L is the 'column lengtli.
369
a is likely to buckle when either the length (L) is increased or the
:xural (EI! IS reduced. Up to Euler load, for a perfectly straight member, the
c .lumn IS any lateral deformation. However, at Euler load, the column
be "unstable" equilibrium, in which it will buckle laterally with
magmtude. The previous behavior is applied for perfectly straight
column, which. almost does not exist in reinforced concrete industry. Columns will not
be exactly vertical and loads are always slightly eccentric.
Figure 8.la shows a pin-ended column before loading. Assuming that the column is
at an .eccentricity e, then it will laterally deflect by an amount 0 as shown in
Fig: 8.lb. ThiS lateral deflection increases the moments for which the column must be
deSigned. the. symmetrically loaded column shown here, the maximum moment
occurs at mid-height where the maximum deflection occurs.
The moments at the ends of the column are:
(a) Before loading
(b) During loading
)
p
Sec. A-A
Fig. 8.1 Straining actions for a deflected column
Me =Pe ..... : ............................................... (8.2.a)
For eqUilibrium, the internal moment at mid-height must be
M =P(e+o) ................................................... (8.2.b)
A slender column is defined as a column that has a significant reduction in its axial
load capacity due to moments reSUlting from lateral deflections of the column.
370
Figure 8.2 shows an interaction diagram for a cross-section of a reinforced concrete
column. This diagram gives the combinations of axial load and moment, which are
required to cause failure of a very short column. The dashed radial line is a plot
for the end moment on the column in Fig. 8.1 b. Since the load is applied at a constant
eccentricity, e, the end moment, Me' is a linear function of P, as given by Eq. (S.2.a).
The curved solid line O-B is the moment Me at mid-height of the column, given by
Eq. (8.2.b).At any given load P, the moment at mid-height is the sum of the end
moment, Pe, and the moment due to the lateral deflection,-Po. The line O-A is referred
to as a load-moment curve for the end moment, while the line O-B is the load-moment
curve for the total column moment. If the column is slender, failure occurs when the
load-moment curve O-B intersects the interaction diagram for the cross-section at
point B as shown in Fig. 8.2. Because of the increase in maximum moment due"to the
secondary moments, the axial load capacity is reduced from A to B. This reduction in
axial load capacity results from what are" referred to as slenderness effect. Since,
failure still occurs at one of the points of the interaction diagram, it is called material"
failure.
For very slender columns, failure occurs well within the cross-section interaction
diagram because of the pronounced second-order effect (slenderness effect). This type
of failure is called stability failure. In this type of failure, the collapse load of the
column (point C) is less than the actual material given by the interaction diagram.
o
p
Pe
Interaction diagram
lor column crosssection
Failure oint
A Short column
Failure point
Slender column
M
Fig. 8.2 Loads and moments in short and slender columns
371
8.2 Classification of Buildings
The Egyptian Code ECP classifies concrete structures as being braced or unbraced.
Many concrete building structures are braced by providing shear walls, cores, or
elevator shafts. The stiffness of these elements is considerably higher than the
columns themselves and may be assumed to attract all horizontal forces (Fig. S.4a).
An unbraced building is the one that resists the lateral loads by the framing action of
the beams and the columns or that is provided with flexible shear walls (Fig. S.4b).
According to the ECP-203, a building that does not contain shear walls is considered
unbraced.
According to the Egyptian Code, a building that contains shear walls or cores that
extend the full building height can be considered braced at a certain direction if they
were symmetrically distributed and satisfY the following equation:
a =Hb ~ ~ ~ < 0.60 for n;?:4 ................... (S.3a)
< 0.20+0.1n
for n < 4 .............. (S.3b)
where
Hb = height of the building in meters above foundation
N = sum of all unfactored vertical loads of the building (total working gravity
loads)
LEI = sum ofthe flexural rigidities of all the vertical stiffening elements
under service conditions.
n = number of stories.
E =4400ff":
It should be mentioned that a building can be considered braced in one direction and
unbraced in the other depending on the distribution ofthe walls on plan. Fig S.4 shows
examples of braced and unbraced structures. To check the bracing of a building in the
two directions, one has to calculate the values a" and ay as follows:
(bracing in x-direction) ................................................. (S.3c)
(bracing in y-direction) ................................................. (S.3d)
Example S.l illustrates the application ofthe above equations
372
373
~
0
N
:0-
CI.l
u
U
~
0
......
OJ)
-r---r--t
.8
'E
0
0
---
N
~
en
.S
t--
N
"0
-
.....
.E
......
0
---

. .g
0
~
. ....
en
en
<':I
-U
('<'l
00
ci>
.....
p;..
(a) No shear walls or core)
Unbraced structure
Stiff shear
(c) shear walls system
Braced structure in X& V directions
Stiff shear walls
(b) (shear walls system)
Unbraced in V-direction
Braced in X-direction
Stiff shear walls
Core
(d) shear walls+core system
Braced structure in X& V directions
Fig. 8.4 Examples for braced & unbraced structures
374
8.3 Braced and Unbraced Columns
Columns located in braced structures are referred to as braced columns. Columns
located in unbraced structures are referred to as unbraced columns.
Eccentrically loaded braced slender columns are subjected to additional moments due
to the fact that the center-line deviates from the original vertical (un-deformed) shape.
This is called additional moments due to member stability effect (Fig. 8.Sa).
Unbraced columns are subjected to additional moments due mainly to lateral drift
effect, which occurs due to the fact that each story is laterally shifted with respect to
the one below (Fig. 8.Sb). Member stability effect still exists but has a minor effect.
It should be noted that member stability effect results in additional moments in braced
slender columns. On the other hand, lateral drift effect results in additional moments
in unbraced short columns as well as in unbraced slender columns. In unbraced
slender columns, however, member stability effect might increase the additional
moments.
Deformed
shape
P
e
P
a) Braced column
Relative displacement.
between column ends
:E
OJ
'iii
.s::
c
E
::l
o
()
t--->---lP
P
B
Deformed
shape
b) Un-Braced column
Fig. 8.5 Braced and unbraced columns
375
8.4 Slenderness Considerations in the Egyptian Code
This section outlines the procedure adopted by the Egyptian Code for slenderness
consideration.
8.4.1 Code Definition of Slender Columns
The degree of slenderness is generally expressed in terms of the slenderness ratios
H
i!" = b ......................................................... (8A.a)
or
H
Ai = ----!- ................ : ........................................ (8A.b)
1
in which
i = if. ........................................ : ................ (8.5)
and
He =k Ho ...................................................... (8.6)
where
He = the buckling length or the effective height ofthe compression member.
b = the column dimension perpendicular to the axis of bending.
k = length factor which depends on the end conditions of the compression member
as well as the bracing conditions.
H., = unsupported (clear) height of the compression member.
= the radius of gyration of the. cross section and can be taken as 0.3 b for
rectangular section and 0.25D for circular section. For other shapes, I may be
computed for the gross concrete section.
According to the Egyptian Code, slender columns are defined as those that have
slenderness ratios greater than those mentioned in Table (8.1) but not more than those
mentioned in Table (8.2). The minimum area of steel for slender column is given by
As min = Jimin xb xt ...................................................................... (8.7a)
Jimin = 0.25 + 0.052 ~
(for rectangular columns) ......... (8.7b)
Jimi. := 0.25 + 0.015 Ai
(for other col\ll1JI1s) .................. (8.7c)
376
1 Table (S.l) Limits of Slenderness Ratio for Short Columns
Column Status At or Ab AD Aj
Braced 15 12 50
Unbraced 10 8 35
Table (S.2) Limits of Slendernes!! Ratio for Slender Columns
Column Status At or Ab AD Aj
Braced 30 25 100
Unbraced 23 18 70
8.4.2 Unsupported Height of a Compression Member (Ho)
The unsupported height Ho of a compression member shall be taken as the clear
distance between floor slabs, floor beams, girders or other members capable of
providing lateral support for the compression member. Where capitals or haunches are
present, the unsupported length shall be measured to the lower extremity of the c a p ~ t a l
or haunch in the plane considered (see Fig. 8.6). It should be noted that the bucklIng
length may be different in X-direction than Y -direction as shown in Fig. xx
a) Slab-beam type b) Flat plates c) Flat slab with
columns heads
Fig. S.6 Unsupported length of columns (Ho)
377
8.4.3 Effective Height of a Compression Member (He)
Columns supported by hinges and rollers do not exist in real structures. The ends of a
real column are retrained against rotation by their supports, and moments always
develop. The effective length concept can be established by examining the
deformation of the buckled column with that ofa pin-pin column.
The buckling length or the effective height of a compression member (H.) is the
distance between the points of inflection of the diagram representing the buckled
shape of the member. It depends on the end conditions of the column and whether it is
braced against si4e-sway or not.
The definition of the effective height is illustrated in Figs. 8.7a and 8.7b for braced
and unbraced columns, respectively.
For braced columns, k is the smaller of:
k =[0.7+0.05 (a
l
+a
2
)] ::; 1.0 .............................. (8.8a)
k =[0.85 + 0.05 (a
min
)] ::; 1.0 ................................. (8.8b)
For unbraced columns, k is the smaller of:
k = [1.0+0.15 (a
l
+a
2
)] ~ 1.0 ............................. (8.9a)
k =[2.0 +0.30 (a
min
)] ~ 1.0 .............................. (8.9b)
where
aj, aZ = Ratio of the sum of the column stiffness to the sum of the beam
stiffness at column lower and upper ends respectively
amin = Smaller of al & az
The coefficient a is given by
a = ~ ~ ~ i b j ~ j ......................................... (8.10)
378
Where
Ec = modulus of elasticity for columns
Eb = modulus of elasticity for beams
I c = gross moment of inertia of the column cross-section without considering the
steel reinforcement
Ih = gross moment of inertia of the beam cross-section
Lb = clear span of the beam
Ho = clear height of the column
Special cases
- a=1.0 for a column connected to a base designed to resist column moment
- a=10 for a column connected to a base that is not designed to resist moment.
- a=1.0 for simply supported beams framing into a coluPmn.
Notes:
- When calculating the flexural rigidity of the beam cross-section that has a T shape or
L shape, the width of the flange is taken as follows
B isthesmallerof{16t,+b}/2 or (L
2
/5+b)/2
B is the smaller of (6t, +b)f2 or (L
2
!10+b)f2
for aT-section
for a L-section
The Egyptian Code permits the use of the gross moment of inertia of the beam section
and allows taking the effect of cracking of the beam through using half the value of
the gross moment of inertia of the beam section.
- The ratio (a) may be calculated in flat slab construction on the basis of an
equivalent beam having the width and the thickness of the column strip of the slab
in the direction of analysis.
As a simplification, the Egyptian Code gives the values of the factor (k) for four cases
of end restraint condition. The values of (k) are given in Table (8-3) for braced
columns and in Table (8-4) for unbraced columns.
379
r
J.P.
\
\
\
\
\
,
He
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.P.
tp
(1)k=1.0
(
I.P. I
I
I
I
I
I
Ho
I
I
He
p
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(1) k=2.0
I
4 I.P.
\
,I.P.
I]'
II.P.
(2) k=O.50
-----...,
Inflection point
(I.P.)
------
~ p
\ J.P.
,
\
\
\
I
I
I
I
I
(3) 0.50 < k < 1.0
(a) Braced columns
,
,
\
\
\
I.P.'
\
\
\
p
\ (2) k=1.0
I
---------
pt ---------
(3) 0.50 < k < CD
(b) Unbraced columns
F i g ~ 8.7 Effective heights of columns
380
Table (8-3) Values of (k) for Braced Columns
End condition at bottom
End condition at top
1 2 3
1 0.75 0.80 0.90
2 0.80 0.85 0.95
3 0.90 0.95 1.00
Table (8-4) Values of (k) for Unbraced Columns
End condition at bottom
End condition at top
1 2 3
1 1.20 1.30 1.60
2 1.30 1.50 1.80
3 1.60 1.80 -
4 2.20 - -
The four conditions are as follows:
i) Condition 1: The end of the colunm is coimected monolithically to
beams that are at least as deep as the overaU dimension. of the colunm
.. in the plane considered. Foundation designed to withstand moments is
considered in this category.
ii) Condition 2: The end of the colunm is connected monolithicaily to
beams or slabs that are shallower than the overall dimensionsofthe
colunm in the plane considered.
iii) Condition 3: The end of the colunm is connected to members which,
while not specifically designed to provide restraint to rotation of the
colunm, nevertheless, provide some nominal restraint (ringed base).
iv) Condition 4: The end of the colunm is unrestrained against both
lateral movement and rotation (i.e cantilever colunm).
Note: The unsupported height of the colunmmight be different in the two orthogonal
directions (X- and Y- directions). Figure 8-8 shows an example for such a case.
381

y
Case 1
p
u
\
I
!
i
X-direction Y -direction
--
I
Case 1-top I 3-bot. 1-top I 3-bot.
H2
I
I
Ho H1 H3
I
K 1.60 1.60
I
'H
I
3
I
I
He 1.6 X H1 1.6 X H3
').."
').."b
1.6 X H
j
')..,,=1.6 X H
J
b
t t
H1
I
Case 3
I
\
I
I
I I
-l-
I

i xb t: X t
b= 2000 t= 2000
Madd .0ti
Fig. 8.8 Effective height for an unbraced column
382
8.5 Design Moments in Slender Braced Columns
The Egyptian Code takes into account the increase in the applied moments in slender
columns by adding to the original moment an additional moment. The additional
moment is assumed to occur due to interaction of the applied load with the lateral
deflection of the column.
8.5.1 Calculation of the Additional Moments
According to the Egyptian Code the additional moment (M "dd) induced by the
deflection (t5 ) is given by:
MtUld = P 0 .............................................. (8.11)
Figure 8.9 illustrates a case of a rectangular column subjected to additional moments
in two directions.
y
I

i
I .. .. I
b
Fig. 8.9 Calculations of additional moments
If the columns is slender in t direction (about X-axis in Fig. (8.7))
x
,4,2 t
= -'- .................................................... (8.12)
2000
M odd(X) =P
u
' 0, ............................................... (8.13)
If the columns is slender in b direction (about Y-axis in Fig. (8.7))
b
=- ................................................... (8.14)
2000
M odd(r) = P. . Ob ........... (8.15)
383
For circular columns of diameter (D)
II? D
= _D_ ................................................ (8.16)
2000
For columns with a general shape
;e t'
=-' - ............................................... (8.17)
30000
where
t' = column dimension in the direction considered (in mm).
Aj = slenderness ratio using the column radius of gyration i, given by Eq. 8Ab.
8.5.2 Design Moments
Assume a braced slender column subjected to two end moments Ml and M2 and the
M2 is the larger of the two end moments. Figure (8.10) shows the distribution of
moments assumed over the height of a typical braced column. Mi is the initial
moment at a section located near the mid-height and is calculated from:
M
j
= OAM
1
+ 0.6M 2 ;;:: OAM 2 (8.18)
For columns subjected to double curvature, the sign of the moment is taken negative.
The design moment for braced columns is taken as the largest value of:
M
j
+M(Uld ...................................................... , .... (8.19)
Note:
The axial force in a column may be calculated based on the assumption that the beams
and slabs transmitting force into it are simply supported. For the case of interior
colurrms supporting approximately symmetrical arrangements of beams, the end
moments (MD and (M
2
) may be assumed equal to zero. This assumption does not
apply to columns of flat slab construction for which moments transferred to colurrms
are dealt with explicitly by the code. The initial moments in exterior columns may be
estimated as given in Table (8.5).
384
t
I
i
j
I
I
I
i
I
I
1
I
End condition
of column
Initial moment
from analysis
bigger moment
Additional
moment
Madd
~
Madd
~
Fig. 8.10 Initial and additional moments in braced slender columns
385
Table (8.5) Design Moments for Exterior Columns
Position of moment Moments for frames of one Moments for frames of two
bay bays or more
Moments at foot of upper Ku M
f
KuM
f
column
K, + Ku +0.5 K" K,+ Ku+ Kb
Moments at head of lower K,M
f
K,.M
f
column
K, + Ku +0.5K" K,+Ku+
K
"
Where
M f = bending moment at the end of the beam framing in the column, assuming fixity
at both ends of the beam.
K" = stiffness of the beam
K,= stiffness of the lower column
Ku = stiffness of the upper column
Photo 8.2: Shear walls and slender columns during construction.
386
8.6 Design Moments in Unbraced Slender Columns
The Egyptian Code takes into account the increase in the applied moments in
unbraced slender columns by adding to the original moment an additional moment.
The additional moment is assumed to occur due to interaction of the applied load with
the lateral deflection of the column. It should be mentioned that unbraced short
columns are also subjected to additional moments due the relative displacements of
the ends of the columns.
8.6.1 Additional moment
Unbraced columns are generally connected to floors that are rigid enough in their own.
plane to induce equal deflection (side-sway) to all columns under lateral loads. In such
a case an average deflection may be applied to all columns. This deflection can be
assessed from the following equation:
t5,w = Lt5ln ........................................... (8.20)
where
<5 av = average deflection at ultimate limit state of the floor
<5 = deflection at ultimate limit state for each column calculated from Eqs. 8.12
n = the number of the columns in the floor
After the calculation of (<5 av ), any values of the (<5) more than twice (<5 av ) should
be ignored and the average recalculated. In such a case, (n) in Eq. (8.20) should be
reduced appropriately.
Madd P . t5,w ........................................ (8.21)
8.6.2 Design moments
Assume an unbraced slender column subjected to two end moments Ml and M2 and
the M2 is the larger of the two end moments. The distribution of moments assumed
over the height of an unbraced column is shown in Fig. (8.11). The design moment for
unbraced columns is taken as the largest value of:
P e
min
(8.22)
where
M 2 is the larger initial end moment due to design ultimate loads.
Fig. 8.12 summarizes the calculations of Madd in rectangular slender columns
according ECP-203
387
End condition
of column
Stiffer end joint
less stiff end joint
Initial moment
from analysis
+
+
Additional
moment
01--1 I
Madd Ml + Madd
may be reduced in proportion to
the ratio of the stiffness of the less
stiff to the stiffer joint
Fig. 8.11 0 Design moments in unbraced slender columns
388
Design
moment
Short if
Long if
I Braced I
A< 15
15 < A< 30
Not accepted if A > 30
K-factor (Table 8.3)
I Columns I
I
l
IUnbracedl
A< 10
10 <A < 25
A>23
(Table 8.4)
o l ~ ______ ~
~
~
I fvldd P. D I
D=-
av n
~
~ D
Fig.S.12 Calculations of Maddin rectangular slender columns according to ECP-203
389
til
C
E
::s
'0
u
1;
c
m
-;
CD
a
=
s
.s
o 0
...... y
VI 1:.:

(J)
390
Example 8.1
Figure EX-8.1 shows a structural plan of an eleven story residential building. The
following data are given:
Thickness of the flat plate at all floors = 220 mm, flooring=1.5 kN/m
2
, equivalent wall
loads = 2 kN/m
2
and the live load = 3 kN/m
2
The height ofthe ground floor is 5.0 m
and that of the typical floor is 3.0 m. The weight of the core, the walls and the
columns can be assumed equal to 20000 kN. The concrete cube strength
feu =35N Imm
2
It is required to check the bracing condition of the building in both directions.
Solution
The building is provided with a core and 2 shear walls to increase its capacity to resist
the lateral loads. According to the ECP 203, the following equation is to be used to
check whether the building is braced or unbraced .
where
Hb The total height of the building above the foundation level
N Total unfactored vertical loads acting on all vertical elements
LEI Summation of flexural rigidity of all vertical walls in the direction under
consideration
Step 1: Calculation of N
Weight of typical floor = Own weight + Flooring + Equivalent wall load + Live load
= 0.22x25+1.50 + 2.0 + 3.0
= 12 kN/m
2
Total Weight of floor = Area x Unit weight
= (26.00x34.00) x 12
= 10608 kNlfloor
Total Weight of Building, N
= No. of floors x Weight of floor + weight of core, walls and columns
= 11 x 10608+20000
= 136688 kN
391
cp
I
cp
I
cp cp
I 26.00m I
cp
I
5.0m 5.0m 6.0m 5.0m 5.0m
i
I
I I I I
-----1-----i------t------$-------
I I I I
iii i

I I . I ' I
1 t =10.35 m 1 i
I ____ ---;---\. I _____ I
\

R.C. Wall i i R.C. corel i RoC. Wall i
(0.35 x 4.20) iii i

iii i
iii 1
----I------t------*------I------f/1lIJ-
iii i
iii i
I t I I
i
L
Figure Ex-S.l. Plan of a Typical Story
392
Step 2:Calculation of the moment of inertia of the core and the walls
The core resists lateral loads in the X- and the Y -directions. The walls resist lateral
loads in the Y -direction only.
For the Core
Y = 3 x 0.35 x 3.85 x 2.275 + 6.3 x 0.35 x 0.175 = 1.53 m
3 x 0.35 x 3.85 + 6.3 x 0.35
3 x 0.35 X 3.85
3
. 6.3 X 0.35
3
Ix = + 3 x 0.35 x 3.85 x (2.275 -1.53)2 + + 6.3 x 0.35 x (1.53 -0.175)2
12 12
Ix = 11.30m
4
I)' 3xO.35
3
x3.85 + 0.35x6.3
3
+2xO.35x3.85 (6.3 -0.175)2 =31.19m
4
12 12 2
For the Walls
E
o
N
-<i ,--_
I = 0.35x4.23 = 2.16 m3
x 12
I
x
=2.16m
4
I
= 4.2xO.35
3
)' 12 -zero

Step 3: Calculation of Hb
Height of the building above the foundation
=10 x 3.0 + 5.0=35.0 m
y
1
6
.
3om
!
393
0.35
II
x

r--
:t-
I
u
X_
II
I

Step 4: Check bracing condition in V-direction (Calculation of a,.)
The lateral bracing of the building in Y -direction is achieved by the core, = 11.3 m
4
and the two shear walls.
E = feu N/mm
2
E =4400$5 = 2.6xl0
4
N Imm
2
= 2.6x10
7
kNlm
2
LEI x = EL(/ x(core) + 2xI x(wall)) =2.6x 10
7
x(11.30+ 2x 2.16) = 4.06x 10
8
kN.m
2
a =35.0x I 136688
,. 4.06x108
= 0.64 > 0.60 Un braced Structure in Y-direction
Step 5: Check bracing condition in X-direction (Calculation of ax )
The bracing of the building in X -direction is achieved by the core, Iy = 31.19 m
2

LEI,. =Ex Icore = 2.6x 10
7
x31.19 = 8.1x108 kN.m
2
a =35.0x 1136688
Y 8.1 x 10
8
= 0.45 <0.60 Braced Structure in X-direction
CD
Braced in X-direction
394
1
I
Example 8.2
Design the rectangular column shown in the figure below to support a factored load of
1500 kN. For simplicity the column may be assumed hinged at the foundation level.
The column is considered unbraced in x-direction and braced in y-direction. The
material properties are leu = 30 N Imm
2
and h = 360 N Imm
2

o
\0
ci
o

o
V!
o
o
00
N
beam 250x6 0
0.45
Elevation
Y.
450
beam

I
X
395
Solution:
Step NO.1: Considering the moments developed in t-direction (My)
The column is considered unbraced in X and Y directions as no lateral resisting system
is provided.
Clear height of the column, Ho = 6.6- 0.6=6.0 m
The top end of the column is connected monolithically to beams that are deeper than
the dimension of the column (condition 1), while the bottom end of the column is given
as hinged condition (condition 3).
From Table (8-4), the effective length factor k = 1.60.
The effective height, He = k Ho
He = 1.60 X 6.0 = 9.60 m
H 9.60
A.
nplan
=-' =-- = 21.33 >lOandnot more than 23
I t 0.45
The column is classified as slender column in the direction considered, and additional
moment is developed.
o=}}xt 21.33
2
x 0.45 0.102m
2000 2000
M,.{d =P
u
xo=1500xO.l02=153kN.m
Mlotal(in_Plan,) =Mu + M'dd
':M
u
=0
:. Mlolal(in-Plan.) = 0+ 153 = 153 kN.m
:. My =153 kN.m.
y
I

I
g I ffi--L-.- -.-.- X II .
.0 I
I
t=450
Step No.2: Considering the moments developed .in b-direction (Mx)
Clear height of the column, Ho = 2.80 m (the largest ofthe two heights)
The top end of the column is connected monolithically to beams that are deeper than
the dimension of the column (condition 1), while the bottom end of the column is given
as hinged condition(condition 3).
From Table (8-4), the effective length factor->-> k = 0.90.
He =0.90 X 2.80 = 2.52 m
A.OUlorpl.ne = :. = = 8.4 <10
The column is classified as short column in the direction considered, and no additional
moment is developed.
396
= Mu + Madd
:. M'O,.(OU'Orp'ane) = 0
:.M, =0
..
Step No.3: Design of the reinforcement:
The column is subjected to uniaxial bending, calculate the follO\ying terms:
1500xl000 =0.37
30x300x450
M). 153xl0
=-----...,.- =0.084
f
bt2 30x300x450
2
cu
t; 450-2x40
450
Using the uniaxial interaction diagram (top & bottom steel) (Appendix B)
From the diagram with fy = 360 N Irnm
2
, = 0.80, a, = 3.5
1.1. = 3.5 x 30 x 10-4 = 0.00875 < 1.1. max (0.05) (external column).
As = 1.1. b t = 0.00875 x 300 x 450 = 1181 rnm
2
As =A: =1181mm
2
As.,o,al = As +A: = 1181+1181 = 2362 mm
2
1.1. min = 0.25 + 0.052 x 21.33 =1.359 %
As. min = 0.01359 X 300 x 450= 1834.65 mm
2
< As. total
Choose 5 18 top & 5 18 bottom (As.,otal= 2544 mm
2
)
I' 450 mm .1
397
Example 8.3
Design the rectangular column shown in the figure below to support a factored
eccentric load of 500 kN (own weight of column may be neglected). The column is
connected to a footing that can resist moment. The material properties are feu = 25 N
Imm
2
and fy = 400 N Imm
2

beam 250x700
c-l- -I- c
beam
250x700
Elevation
beam
250x700
o X
y
SecC-C
Fig Ex.8.3
398
1500KN
;-A
In-plane direction
Sec B-B
Solution:
Step 1: Considering the in-plane direction of the column (Mx)
Since the structure is not provided by lateral resisting system, it is considered
unbraced. Clear height of the column, Ho = 6.0 m
The top end of the column is unrestrained against both lateral movement & rotation
(cantilever column) (condition 4) while the bottom end of the column is connected to
a footing that can resist moment (condition 1). From Table (8-4), the effective length
factor, k = 2.20.
He = 2.20 X 6.0 = 13.20 m
H 13.20
A,n.plane =_e =--=22>10andnotmorethan23
t 0.60
The column is classified as a slender column in the direction considered, and an
additional moment is developed.
O=A
2
xt 222XO.60 =0.145
2000 2000
M",h/ =P;, xo=500xO.145 = 72.5KN.m
Mtotal,(in.plane) = Mu + Madd
':M
u
=500xO.50=250KN.m
:. Mtotal,(in-plane) = 250+ 72.5 = 322.5KN.m
:. Mx =322.5 KN.m.
250 Kn.m
250Kn.m
Original
moment
+
72.5 Kn.m
Additional
moment
399
250 Kn.m
322.5 Kn.m
Total
moment
Step No.2: Considering the out of plane direction of the column(My)
Clear height of the colunm, Ho = 6-0.70 = 5.30 m
The top end of the colunm is connected monolithically to beams that are deeper than
the dimension of the colunm (condition 1), while the bottom end of the colunm is
connected to a fo<;,ting that can resist moment (condition 1).
From Table (8-4), the effective length factor ..................... k = 1.20.
He =1.20 X 5.30 = 6.36 m
iLou,ofplane = = = 21.2 > 1 0 and not more than 23
I
I
I
beam 250x700
I I
L I
I
.( t ,/" ., JI I
The colunm is classified as slender colunm in the direction considered, and additional
moment is induced.
0= iL
2
xb = 21.22 xO.30 0.067
2000 2000
M",i</ =P,. xo=500xO.067=33.5kN.m
Mto1al.(OU'ofplane) = Mu + Madd
Mtotal.(ou,ofPlane) = 0+33.5 = 33.5kN.m
:. My =33.5KN.m
400
300
"""""nJ
! .
i
Mu=CO
Madd(y)=33.5
y
Step No.3: Design of the reinforcement:
The colunm is subjected to the following straining actions(compression force+ biaxial
bending)
Pu= 500 kN
Mx= 322.5 kN.m
M
y
=33.5 kN.m
Determine the load level Rt, as follows:
Rl 500xl000 =0 III
, feu.b.a 25x300x600 .
Since Rb <0.2 ....... (3 = 0.80
Assume that the concrete cover = 40 mm
a' = 600-40 = 560mm
b' = 300-40 = 260mm
SinceM
x
la' =(322.51560) >My Ib' =(33.51260), the design moment will be taken about x.
Using equation 7.57 in this text gives the uniaxial magnified moment.
M' =M + p(a')M
x x h' Y
560
= 322.5 + 0.8 x (-) x 33.5 = 380.2 kN .m
260
Biaxial
401
Uniaxial
M' 380.2x10
6
x =0.141
f
bt2 25)(300x600
2
cu
t; 600-2x40 =0.9
600
Using uniaxial interaction diagram (uniformly distributed steel)
From the diagram with fy = 400 N Imrn
2
, S = 0.90 --p = 8
J.1 = 8 x 25 X 10-4 =0.02 < Jlmax (0.05) (external column).
~ total = J.1 b t = 0.02 x 300 x 600 = 3600 mrn
2
J.1 min = 0.25 + 0.052 x 22 =1.394 % < J.1 o.k.
Choose 12 <1> 20 (3770 mm
2
)
6 81m
ij
o
o
<0
:--
'--
.. /)
/)

I .. 300 .I
4S?O 20
2S?O 20
2 S?O 20
4S?O 20
Column Reinforcement
402
Example 8.4
Fig. Ex-8A shows a plan and a sectional elevation of a workshop. It is required to find
the straining actions acting on column C1 at the ground floor level knowing that it is
subjected to an axial load ofa factored value of 2700 kN and an initial moment in X-Z
plane (My)of a factored value of 400 kN.m. /cu=25 N/mm2 and h =360 N/mrn2
Solution
In order to find the design moments for column C1, it is required to investigate the
effects of the slenderness ratios of the column about its principal axes. Since the
building contains no shear walls, it is classified according to the Egyptian Code as
unbraced. Accordingly, all columns are unbraced columns.
Step 1: Calculation of the ultimate deflection in the X-direction
To calculate the average ultimate deflection in the X-direction, one has to calculate the
deflection 8 for each column. The following table summarizes the calculations:
ColUl1U1 Top Bot. k
Ho He b ort
f....
8
x
(m) (m) (m) (m)
C1 1 2 1.3 8.0 10.4 0.65 16.00 0.083
C2 1 2 1.3 8.0 10.4 0.60 17.33 0.090
C3 1 2 1.3
4.0
5.2 0.5 10.40 0.027
C4 1 2 1.3 4.0 5.2 0.5 10AO 0.027
Note: Since the floor beam is thicker than the column dimension under consideration,
the top condition ~ considered case 1. Since the semelle is shallower than the column
dimension under consideration, the bottom condition is considered case 2. From Table
8A in this text, it can be determined that k=1.3.
Where
0Ci = deflection at ultimate limit state for C
i
in the X"direction
= A/.b
2000
= He
b
= kHo
k = 1.3 {From Table 8.4 of this text with end condition (2) at bottom and (1) at top}
403
300x900 ,
- - - - - -
13
0
r.:
13
,
,
8
1

il v>1
N,
v>'
1
C: !
'C2 300x900
0 - - - - - - -
.,f
-
e
0
r.:
(Typ.)
,
,
8 1

y

,
V>
1
N
,
1

,
C4
300x900 C3 '
- - - -
10.0 m
1
III iii
--=-x----l
, 111 111
{ I r---rr:a.,-l[-j--fll-seC'-AOA ---f
r- 11-----=----1
,
1
I
!
i '-1..1 (250 x 450)
t 1O.Om
Elevation
Fig. Ex-8.4
404
300 900 x
-
300x900
- -
(Typ.)
x
300x900
- - -
- -
,
1
,
1
,
1
C2'
- -
,
1
,
1
,
1
C4:
- -
I
1
i

I
I
O(NX = LOx, where n = the number of columns
n
o = 0,,1 +
2XO
C2 +
2X0
c3 +4Xo,,4
avx
9
o =
0.083 + 2 x 0.090 + 2 x 0.027 + 4 x 0.027
=0.0472m
avx
9
Note that none of individual B is larger than 2 Bavx(O.0944)
Step 2: Calculation of the ultimate deflections in the V-direction
To calculate the average ultimate deflection in the Y -direction, one has to calculate the
deflection 0 for each column; the following table summarizes the calculations.
Column Top Bot. k
Ho He
b ort
A.
Oy
(m) (m) (m) (m)
CI 1 2 1.3 8.0 lOA 0.65 16 0.083
C2 1 1 1.2 4.0 4.8 0.3 16 0.038
C3 1 2 1.3 8.0 lOA 0.5 20.8 0.108
C4 1 1 1.2 4.0 4.8 0.3 16 0.038
LO
O(NJ' = --Y ,where n = the number of columns
n
o = OCI +2xoC2 +
2X0
c3 +
4XO
c4
(NY.
9
avy
0.083+2xO.038+2xO.l08+4xO.038
=0.0589m
9
Note that all the values of B are less than 2 Bavy
Step 3: Calculation of the additional moments
Additional Moments in the X-Z plane (My) = P oavx
= 2700 x 0.0472
= 127044 kN.m
Additional Moments in the Y -Z plane (Mx) = P Oavy
= 2700 x 0.0589
= 159.03 kN.m
405
Step 4: Calculation of Final Straining Actions for Column Cl
p =2700 kN
My (X-Z plane)
(Y-Z plane)
= 400+127.44 = 527.44 kN.m
= 159.Q3 kN.m
It should be noted that in spite of the fact that the column was subjected to an initial
uniaxial moments, slenderness effects have resulted in the column being subjected to
biaxial moments.
y
I
My+Madd(y)= 527.44 kN.m
I
EEJ
159.03 kN.m
--t---)--- X
I
650
Straining actions for column Cl
Step 5: Design of the reinforcement:
The column is subjected to biaxial bending; determine the load level Rb as follows:
Rb 2700xl000 =0.256
feub.a 25x650x650
From Table (7.2), using interpolation, get p = 0.772
Assume concrete cover = 40 m;n,
a'=650-40=610mm
b' = 650-40 = 610mm
SinceMy 1 b' = (527.7/610) >Mx 1 a' = (159/610), the design moment will be taken about y.
Using equation 7.58 'of this text (Chapter 7)
, b'
My =My +
a
610
=527.7 +0.772X(610)xI59 = 650.50kN.m
406
y y
I I
'My 5277
__ .2
Biaxial Uniaxial
650.5 x 1 0
6
= 0.095
25 x 650 x 650
2
( 650-2x40 ::=:.0.877
650
Using the uiliaxial interaction diagram (uniformly distributed steel) fy = 360 N Imm
2
S=0.90 -7 p=4.8
S=0.80 -7 p=5.8
Using interpolation -- p = 5.03
[l = 5.03 x 25 x 10-4= 0.0126 < [l max (0.04) (internal column).
A.,total = [l b t = 0.0126 x 650 x 650 = 5313 mm
2
[l min = 0.25 + 0.052 x 16 =1.082 % < [l ...... o.k.
Choose 20 <l> 20 ( 6283 mm
2
)
Or 16 <l> 22 ( 6082 mm
2
)
610/m

r
L...-

--,
a
10
<0
I.
20#20
650
Altemative (1)
.1
for column reinforcement
407
610/m

..
k,
16#22
I.
650
.1
Alternative (2)
for column reinforcement
Example 8.5
The frame shown in Fig. Ex-8.S is a part of the structural system of a braced structure.
It is required to find the bending moments in the exterior columns. The unfactored
dead and live loads of the exterior beam for all floors may be assumed equal to 32.0
and 12.5 leN/m, respectively. The columns may be flssumed fixed to the foundations.
Solution
Table 8.S gives the values of bending moments in the exterior column.
For the case of frames with two bays or more, the values of bending moments in the
exterior column are as follows:
where
Bending Moment in the lower of upper column is equal to
and Bending Moment in the upper of lower column
is the fixed end moment of the beam
is the flexural stiffness of upper column with two fixed ends, K = 4E1u
u hu
is the flexural stiffness oflower column with two fixed ends, K{ = 4EI{
h{
is the flexural stiffness of beam, K{ = 4E1b
hb
hu,h{ the height of upper and lower column respectively
the length of beam
the moment 'of inertia for upper column, lower column and beam
respectively.
408

0.40
k--
0.40

0.40
k-.-
S
0.40 0
I()
.<f
-
j
6.50
j
- - -tt - '-,
,R ,
l<-
I
'G
,
- - -t:t--
,F ,
I
,E ,
- - -
,D ,
I
,c ,
- - -tt-
,B ,
I
, ,
I A I
j
2L50m
j
6.50 8.50
- -!:f- - 11'"- ==IF- -"= r
I: ,
I I
, ,
-
-tj----
-u -- - - --1:1-- -- --
, ,
I I
, ,
- - - -t:I- - -

, ,
I I
beams
, ,
- -to- - - - - - -
Girder / , ,
I I
, ,
I I
Semelles/
(250 x 700)
- All exterior columns are 300x400mm
at all floors
- All interior columns are 400x400mm
at all floors
- All girders are 25Ox700mm
Fig. Ex-8.5 Elevation of an industrial building
409
M
f
=w)/ 112
Wu = lAx wD.L. + 1.6x wL.L.
Wu =1.4x32.0+1.6x12.50=64.8 kN/m'
The beam is assumed fixed from both sides, thus
M
f
=W u xe /12 = 64.80x6.5
2
/12=228.2kN.m
::1 wu=64.8 kNlm'
:;1111 Illllllll
I I
Mr2282 flfu, A1l

Bending moment diagram
For Column AB
K(AB) = 4 x .-!...(0.30) x (0040)3 14.50
12
= 1.42ExlO-
3
kN.m
For Column CD, EF and GH
4I(CD)
K(CD)=---
h(CD)
1
K(CD) = 4 x -(0.30) x (OAW /3.30
12
= 1.94ExlO-
3
kN.m
For the Girders
Kb = 4Ib
Ib
Kb /6.50 = 4Axl0-
3
kN.m
12
410
Bending Moment at joint Band C
1.42 X 10-
3
x228.2=41.76 kN.m
1.42 xl0-
3
+ 1.94 X 10-
3
+4.4 xl0-
3
1.94xlO-
3
x228.2=57.05kN.m
1.42 X 10-
3
+1.94 xl0-
3
+404 xlO-
J
Mb ....
404 X 10-
3
x228.2=129.41kN.m
1.42 xlO-
3
+ 1.94 xlO-
J
+4.4 xlO-
J
Bending Moment at joint D, E, F, and G
1.94E x 10-
3
x228.2
1.94ExlO-
3
+1.94ExlO-
3
+4AExlO-
3
=53046 kN.m
Bending Moment at joint H
K(GH) M
K(GH) + 0.0 + Kb f
1.94E xlO-
3
. x 228.2 = 69.8 kN.m
1.94E xlO-
3
+0.00+4AE X 10-
3
411
Example 8.6
Figure Ex-8.6 shows a part of an industrial building that is braced in the two
orthogonal directions. The cross-sectional dimensions of the columns are 300 x 300
mrn. Also shown in this figure is the bending moment diagram acting on columns AB
& BC in the X-Z plane. The bending moments acting on these columns in Y-Z plane
(out-of plane) can be neglected. Columns AB and BC are also subjected to axial
forces of values of 700.0 kN and 450.0 kN, respectively. It is required to find the
straining actions acting on columns AB & BC.
Solution
Step 1: Analysis of Columns in the X-Z Plane (in-plane)
Step 1.1: Check slenderness limits of the columns
a) ColumnAB
Clear height of the column, Ho = 6.40 m
The top end of the column is connected monolithically to beams that are at least as
deep as the overall dimension o f ~ t h column in the plane considered (Condition f).
The bottom end of the column is connected to a semelle that is deeper than the column
(Condition f). From Table 8.3, the effective length factor, k = 0.75
The effective height, He = kH 0
He =0.75x6.40=4.80m
H 4.80
Ab =_e =--=16 >15 and not more than 30
b 0.30
Hence, column AB is classified as a slender column in the X-Z plane
b)ColumnBC
Clear height of the column, Ho = 7.80 m
The top and bottom ends of the column are connected monolithically to beams that are
at least as deep as the overall dimension of the column in the plane considered
(Condition f) for top and bottom. From Table 8.3, the effective length factor, k ==: 0.75.
He =0.75x7.80=5.85m
H 5.85
Ab =_e =--=19.5 >15 and not more than 30
b 0.30 .
Hence, column BC is classified as a slender column in the X-Z plane
412
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
~
r
1,.
III liB
1-1-
a
0
<'I
i
e
0
<-
.- 00
r-:
e
0
..,f
B
b--
L
e
0
"'" .,.;
q
A
-
I
Semelles \ 7 .
250x700mm
C
1\ Beam
250x800mm
1\ Beam
250x60Omm
1\ Beam
250x800mm
1
~ ~
00 0
0
f--f
0.30
Sec.l-
1,.
I
I1f -u-.
I
1-1-

I

I

1

-I
I
111
Moments in columns
AB and Be (kN.m)
Fig. Ex-8.6 Elevation of an Industrial Building
413
Step 1.2: Compute the Additional Moment in the X-Z plane(in-plane)
The additional moment, M aclcl = P.6
a) Column AB
162
6=--t =--x0.30=0.0384m
2000 2000
Maclcl = P.6 = 700 x 0.0384 = 26.88kN.m
b) Column BC
195
2
Ii =-' -xO.30=0.057m
2000
Macld = P.6 = 450xO.057= 25.65kN.m
Step 1.3: Compute the Design Moment in the X-Z Plane (in-plane)
The design moment, M.!es is the larger ofthe following values:
1) M2
3) Ml + (Madd /2)
where
M
j
=0.4M
1
+0.6M
2

a) ColumnAB
M, =-60 kN.m
M2 = 153kN.m
2) Mj + Madd
4) P.e
mill
(double curvature)
Mi = -0.4x60+0.6x153= 67.8kN.m 0.4M
2
The design moment is the larger of the following values
1) 153 kN.m 2) 67.8+26.88 = 94.68 kN.m
3) 60+(26.88/2) = 73.44 kN.m 4) 700x(0.05xO.3) = 10.5 kN.m
Accordingly the design bending moment, M.!es for column AB = 153.0 kN.m

414
b) ColumnBC
M\ = 83kN.m
M 2 = 111kN.m (single curvature)
M; = OAx83 +0.6x 111= 99.8kN.m > O.4M 2
The design moment is the larger of the following values
1) 111 kN.m 2) 99.8+25.65 = 125.45 kN.m
3) 83+(25.65/2) = 95.83 kN.m 4) 450x(0.05xO.3) = 6.75 kN.m
Accordingly the design bending moment, M.!es for column BC = 125.45 kN.m
Step 2: Analysis of Columns in the Y-Z Plane (out-of-plane)
Step 2.1: Check slenderness limits of the columns .. .
a) ColumnAB
Clear height, Ho = 6.40 m
The top end of the column is connected monolithically to beams that are at least as
deep as the overall dimension of the column in the plane considered (Condition 1).
The bottom end of the column is connected to a semelle that is deeper than the column
(Condition 1). From Table 8.3, the effective length factor, k = 0.75
He =0.75x6.40=4.80m
H 4.80
Ab =_e =--=16 >15 and not more than 30
b 0.30
Hence, column AB is classified as a slender column in the Y -Z plane
415
b) Column BC
Clear height, Ho = 4.0 m
The top and bottom ends of the column are connected monolithically to beams that are
at least as deep as the overall dimension of the column in the plane considered
(Condition 1) for top and bottom. From Table 8.3, the effective length factor, k = 0.75
He =0.75x4.00=3.00m
. H 3.00
Theratlo Ab =_e =--=10.0< 15
b 0.30
Hence, column BC is classified as a short column in the Y -Z plane.
Step 2.2: Compute the additional moment in the Y-Z plane
The additional moment, M add = P.O

O=--t
2000
ColumnAB
16
2
0= --X 0.30 = 0.0384m
2000
M add = P.O = 700 X 0.0384 = 26.88kN.m
Step 2.3: Compute the Design Moment in the Y-Z Plane
Since the initial bending moments in the Y -Z plane were neglected, the design
moments in that plane can be considered as the larger of the following two values:
a) ColumnAB
1) 26.88 kN.m
2) P.e
min
2) 700x(0.05xO.3) = 10.5.kN.m
Accordingly the design bending moment in the Y-Z plane for column AB = 26.88
kN.m
b) ColumnBC
Since the column is classified as a short column the design bending moment in Y-Z
plane is equal to zero.
416
I
I
Summary
The following table gives the design straining actions for columns AB & BC.
Axial Force
(kN)
Column
700
450
Mde (X-Z) plane
(kN.m)(Mv )
153.0
125.45
Step 3: Design of the reinforcement:
a) Column AS:
M
de
(Y -Z) plane
(kN.m) (M
x
)
26.88
0.00
The column is subjected to biaxial bending; determine the load level Rb as follows:
R 700x1000 =0.194
b feu.b.a 40x300x300
From Table (7.2), get j3 = 0.8
Assume concrete cover = 30 mm,
a' =300-30= 270mm
b' =300-30= 270mm
Since My 1 a' = (153/270) > Mx 1 b' = (215.9/270), the design moment will be taken about y.
Using 7.58 in this text (chapter 7)
b'
M; =My +
a
270 :
=153+0.8x(-)x26.9 = 174.5KN .m
270
M' 174.5x10
6
--y- =0.162
feub t
2
40x300x300
2
; 300-2x30 =0.8
300
Using uniaxial interaction (unifonnly distributed steel) fy = 360 N Imm
2
, = 0.80
Therefore p =12.2
f.l= 12.2 x40x 10-4= 0.0488 < f.lmax (0,05) (external column).
As. total = Jl b t = 0.0488 x 300 x 300 = 4392 mm
2
Jl min = 0.25 + 0.052 x 16'=1.082 % < f.l ...... o.k.
Choose 12 <l> 22 ( 4562 mm
2
)
417
6[15
I. 300 _I
Column AB
Note: Since the reinforcement ratio is high (4.8%), therefore it is advisable to increase
column dimensions to decrease reinforcement (calculations not shown).
b) Column BC:
The column is subjected to uniaxial bending; determine the following terms:
_ Pu __ 450x1000
0.125
feu.b.a 40x300x300
M 125.45x10
6
u =0.116
fcu b t
2
40x300x300
2
Using uniaxial interaction (uniformly distributed steel) fy = 360 N Imm
2
, = 0.80
Therefore p = 7.5
Jl = 7.5 x 40 x 10-4= 0.03 < Jl max (0.05) (external column).
As. total = Jl b t = 0.03 x 300 x 300 = 2700 mm
2
12 <l> 18 ( 3054 mm
2
)
Jl min = 0.25 + 0.052 x 19.5 =1.264 % < Jl ...... O.k.

1_ 300 .. 1
Column BC
418
12#18
-- -- -- .-
I
-,

LO
C')
i
12#22
-- '--
-- -- --
Column Lap splice
9
REINFORCED CONCRETE FRAMES
Photo 9.1 Reinforced concrete frames at Dullas airport, USA
9.1 Introduction
This chapter covers the topic of reinforced concrete frames that are used as supporting
elements for halls. The object of a hall is to cover a limited area that has to be utilized
for a certain purpose such as meetings, sports, storage, exhibitions and industry.
419
9.2 Definition of the Frame
A frame is a structure in which the rigid connections between the girders and the
supporting columns are utilized so that the internal forces due to the loads are resisted
by the combined action of the girder and the columns i.e. the bending moment Mo is
distributed among the girder and the columns (Fig. 9.1). In a simple girder, vertical
loads are resulted in vertical reactions (Fig. 9 .1 b), while in a frame; vertical loads give
vertical and horizontal reactions (Fig. 9.1a).
J'ig. 9.1 Frames versus simple girders
w

L L
t
a) Frame
t t
b) Simple Girder
The magnitude of the bending moments resisted by the columns depends on the
relative stiffness Kr of the girder with respect to the columns. The bigger the value of
K r' the smaller is the moment resisted by the columns.
H Ib -'.
Kr=-'- ................................................................... (9.1)
L Ie
height of the column.
span of the girder.
gross moment of inertia of the beam.
gross inertia moment of of the column.
,In order to achieve a good distribution for the bending moments in frame members, it
is recommended to choose the concrete dimensions of the frame members as shown in
Fig. (9.2)
420
1
I
I
I
I
I

!
l

,.
i
Member
tg
tl
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
L
Recommended value
U(12-16)
(0.8-1.0) tg
0.67 tl
0.60 tg
According to design
0.67 t4
A.ccording to design
!
"'I
Fig. 9.2 Dimensioning of the Frame.
421
Link
9.3 The Choice of the Type of the Frame
The choice of the fonn of a frame is generally governed by the external and internal
architectural considerations as well as the purpose at which it is used. The statical
system depends on the conditions at the supports.
Two hinged frames are generally used on medium soils as they are not sensitive to
displacements of the supports. Figure (9.3) shows several types of two-hinged frames
that are extensively used in industrial buildings and workshops. Figure (9.4) shows a
two-hinged framt'? that supports stands.
Fig. 9.3 Examples of two hinged frames
Fig. 9.4 A two hinged frame supporting stands
422
Statically determined three-hinged frames (Fig. (9.5)) are used on weak soils that may
be subjected to small horizontal or vertical movements ofthe bearing hinges.
Fig. 9.5 Examples of three-hinged frames
On good finn soils, fixed frames may be used. In this system, the internal stresses due
to temperature changes and shrinkage are relatively high and must be considered.
A two-hinged frame with a tie is shown in Fig. (9.6a). Adding a tie to the frame
reduces the bending moment in the girder. In order to prevent the sagging of the tie,
hangers might be provided at convenient distances. The frame is twice statically
indeterminate and hence, the bending moments developed at different sections are less
than the case of the two-hinged frame without a tie. The rigid tie at the top of the
columns gives a better distribution of the internal forces in the columns and the girder
although this does not necessarily more economic solution because of the complicated
formwork and the big amount of steel in the tie and the hangers. It gives however a
smaller horizontal thrust on the foundations. A frame without a tie is simpler and
architecturally more acceptable than a frame with a tie and hangers. If the foundations
of a frame cannot resist its horizontal thrust, a tie may be arranged at the bottom
hinges to resist the thrust as shown in Fig. (9.6b). In this case, the frame is once
statically indeterminate. For elastic ties at foundation level, the horizontal force
developed .at the foundation level is smaller than that of two hinged frames without
ties or with rigid ties. The result is that the comer moment is smaller and the field
moment is bigger.
(a) (b)
Fig. 9.6 Examples of two-hinged frames with a tie
423
Continuous frames can be used to cover areas in which the dimensions are too long to
be spanned by single-bay frames (see Fig. (9.7. Continuous frames are generally
high grade statically indeterminate. If the frame is symmetrical in shape and loading,
as generally the case in roof structures, the horizontal reaction at the intermediate
column will be almost zero. In such a case, the frame may be constructed with a
slender intermediate column, which can be assumed as a pendulum. The system in this
form is only twice statically indeterminate.
Fig. 9.7 Continuous frames
424
.. .. .. .. ...
.. .. .. .. ..
] [
-
~
~ .
< ~ , ~ W I
Fig. 9.7 Continuous Frames (Continued)
9.4 Layout of a Hall Supported by RIC Frames
In big covered halls, reinforced concrete frames are usually used as the main
supporting element. In order to get relatively reasonable dimensions of the frames, the
spacing between frames should be in the range of 5.0 ms to 7.0 ms.
Figure (9.8) shows the layout of the supporting elements ofa hall that is 18.0 ms wide,
20.0 ms long and 5.0 ms clear height.
The main supporting element can be chosen as a rectangular frame. The frame are
chosen to span in the short direction (18.0 ms) arranged every 5.0 ms.
Continuous secondary beams supported on the frames are used in the roof of the hall
in order to get reasonable slab thickness.
In order to get reasonable wall area (15-25 m
2
), wall beams are usually provided at the
sides of the halls.
In case of a weak soil, semelles are provided at the foundation level in order to
connect the footings together to reduce the effect of differential settlement. Otherwise,
they could be provided at the bottom end of the frame leg to support the wall above.
It should be mentioned that frames are rigid in their own plane and are very flexible in
the out-of-plane direction. Hence, it is essential to provide beams that connect the
frames perpendicular to their plane. In many cases, these beams are already existent
through the provision of wall and roof beams.
425
E A
o
~ 10-
o
ci
N
II
o
lei
~
I
E
'" .8 0
~ i l
'" x
-0
:il e:
8
C\I
CD
(JJ

Frame
OOx130
BI
6x3.0=18.0 m
o
o
lei
Sec. A-A
-10-
I
Figure 9.8 Layout of a Hall
426
A
Semelle 250x500 /
RIC footing
Wall beam
250x500
Semelle
250x500
I
II
J
9.5 Reinforcement Detailing of Rigid Frames
The art of detailing of reinforcement in rigid frames should follow the general rules of
mechanics of reinforced concrete as a composite material. It should also be simple and
practical. Figure 9.9 shows some typical details. Other reinforcement details could
also be accepted.
1- Detail-1 shows a frame joint that does not resist moment (a joint between a link
member and a frame girder)
2- Detail-2 shows a frame joint that does resist moment. The column is a link member
and the frame girder has a cantilever part.
3- Detail-3 shows a frame joint designed to resist the moments that developed due to
the rigid connection between the girder and the column. The moments applied to the
joint produces what is so called "closing joint". The hogging moments of the girder
are resisted by the tension column reinforcements. It should be noted that the tensile
forces in the reinforcements results in a force F = T 12 , that produces splitting tensile
stresses. Diagonal reinforcement (As = T /(fy / Ys) ) might be provided to participate in
resisting the splitting tensile stresses.
4- Detail-4 shows a frame designed to resist the moments that developed due to the
rigid connection between the girder and the column. The moments applied to the joint
produces what is so called "opening joint". It can be seen that the reinforcement of the
column has not been used to reinforce girder. If the tension reinforcement is
continuous over the sharp corner, failure of the cover will take place due to the action
of the resultant force F.
5- Detail-5, Detail-6 and Detail-7 show reinforcement detailing of rigid connections in
frames in which the girders have cantilever parts.
6- Detail-8 shows the detailing of a double cantilever from the frame leg.
7- Detail-9 shows a broken part ofa girder ofa frame creating an "opening joint". The
bottom reinforcement of the frame girder has to be discontinued at the broken part in
order to prevent cover saplling.
8- Detail-lO shows a broken part of a girder of a frame creating a "closing joint". The
bottom reinforcement has not been discontinued at the broken part since the resultant
of the tension force is inward and has not affect the cover.
Figure 9.10 shows a typical reinforcement detailing ofa frame.
427
!
!
[L[ _"'-===========
Link
member
Fig. 9.9 Detailing of Frame Joints (Detail-I)
r 1 "
~
~ ~ = = ~ - - - - - - - - - -
---"
,/ ,
~ ~ + - - - - - ~ ~ r ,
\'-"'" _/
Link
member
Fig. 9.9 Detailing of Frame Joints (Detail-2)
428
Diagonal Rft.
429
430
~ - : \--
431

, /
T \ F T
<JF
1
ll) ll)
N N
'& '&
<") '<t"
L.J
\
\
\
Fig. 9.9 Detailing of Frame Joints (Detail-lO)
432
I
,
I

red
bd
1r:J
411118
.....iQ!L...,
Section (2-2)
gj
'&
'"

'&
N
I
1500
[ ]
N N
e. e.
N
'"
Section {1-1)
,
.
ll)
N
[)I
'&
'<3"
DI
N
gj
e. '&
'"
....
I I
21l'J12
21l'J12
21l'J12
Section (3-3)
Fig. 9.10 Typical reinforcement detailing of a frame
433
5(2l10/m
ll)
N
'&
<")
\'-
9.6 Hinged Bearings
The most commonly used type in concrete structures is the lead plate hinge. The
design of this type is explained as follows.
In this type of hinges, the normal component of the hinge is transmitted to the
foundation by bearing through 20 mm thick lead plate arranged at the middle of the
column foot. The horizontal component H is resisted by shear resistance of the
connecting bars As that are protected from rusting by 20 mm thick bituminous
material as shown in Fig. 9.11.
Fsp ... ___ _

plate
I I
Fig. 9.11 Details of Lead hinge
___ Fsp
In order to have acceptable hinge action, the length of the lead plate t' must be smaller
than or equal to one third of the depth of the column at the position of the hinge
measured in the direction of the required rotation.
The lead hinge can accordingly be calculated in the following manner:
:' (fb = 0.67
1cu
r::. & 2 ..................... (9.2)
t Y
c
V7 VA'
434
(f = 0.67
1cu
xt
bt h Yc b xt'
(f = 0.67
1cu
(
bt b Yc V?
The area of the steel dowels As is given by
H
As = 0.8(ry/Ys) ................................................... (9.3)
The normal compressive stresses are transferred from the breadth of the column t to
the breadth of the lead plate t'in a height h approximately equal to the breadth t of the
column. Therefore, a splitting tensile force is developed along this length. The
transverse splitting force Fsp is approximately equal to one forth of the vertical force
(N/4). This force must be resisted by horizontal stirrups of area A" = N 14 arranged
f),/ys
at the end of the column in a height h=t.Fig. 9.12 shows the graphical representation
of finite element model of the hinged base. Far from the lead plate the stress
distribution can be considered uniform. Stress concentration can be easily noticed at
the connection between the frame leg and the lead plate
h
Compressive
stress
Column end
Stress
Fig. 9.12 Finite element model for the hinged base
435
Example 9.1
It is required to design the frame shown in the Figure below and Fig. EX9.1. The
ultimate load including dead and live loads is 100 kN/m'. The horizontal reaction at
the base equals = 293.7 kN.!cu= 25 N/mm2 and.t;,=360 N/mm
2
.
Frame spacing =5.0 m
Slab thickness ts=120 mm
The frame may be consideredunbraced in its plane and braced in the out of plane
direction.
Wu= 1 00 kNlm I
293.7
---..
_r---- 293.7
,.
6.0m
.,
7.5m
1 .
6.0m
Fig. EX 9.1
436
o
10
N
o
10
cO
to
ci
E
0
to
q A
to - -
0
tri
Semelle
I:
250 x 500
6.00
Plan
Sec. 1-1
7.50
19.50 m
Section A-A
Fig. Ex.-9.1
437
i
.1
wall beam
250 x 500
6.00
A
-I--
: 1
Solution
Step 1: Calculations of the reactions
The sloped length of the frame L' equals
L' = .J6.0
2
+ 2.5
2
= 6.5 m
wu=JOOkNlm'
293.7
a
293.7
Y
a
Yb=1025
6.0 7.5 6.0
Since the frame is symmetrical in loading and in geometry, the vertical reaction equals
w 100
Y
a
= Y
b
=_u x(2xL' +7.5) =-x(2x6.5+7.5) = 1025 kN
2 2
438
Step 2: Calculations of Normal, Shear, and Bending Moment
The calculation of shear and normal force for the sloped elements can be obtained
using the following formula
B = tan -1 = 22.6
N =H; xcoS(B)+Vi xsin(B)
Q =V; xcos(B)-H; xsin(B)
(normal force)
(shear force)
Positive direction is given in the figure below
2
1025
VI =Y
a
=1025 kN
.
.
I
'"
V 2 =Y
a
-w u xL' = 1025-100x6.5 = 375 kN
section H V
1 293.7 1025.0
2 293.7 375.0
N
Q
665.3 833.2
415.3 233.2
The normal, shear and bending moment are shown in the following figures.
439
233.2 375
293.7
93.7
shear force diagram
1025
normal force diagram
bending moment diagram
440
Step 3: Flexural design of critical
Because of frame symmetry, only five sections need to be designed as shown.
3
4
critical sections locations
Step 3.1: Design of Section 1 (400xl400)
Assume t = span
g
Take tg=1.4 m=1400 mm
Section 1 is subjected to the following straining actions:
Mu= 2113.3 kN.m
Pu=293.7 kN (compression)
It acts as aT-section and the width B is taken as:
1
16ts
+b 116X120+400 = 2320 mm
0.7xL 0.7x19S00
B smaller of -s-+b= S +400=3130 mm
CL CL SOOO mm
B= 2320 mm
Assuming that the distance from the c.g of the steel to the concrete surface is 80 mm,
the effective depth equals
d = t-80mm =1400-80 = 1320 mm
IfPuff
cu
b t is less than 0.04, the normal force can be neglected
293.7 X 1000
0.021 < 0.04 ........ neglect normal force
2S x 400x 1400 feu xbxt
The design will be carried out as if the section is subjected to moment only.
Assuming that the neutral axis is within the flange and using C-J curve gives,
441
d Mu
leu xB
1320=Cl 2113.3xl0
6
25x2320
-> C1=6.91
The point is outside the curve(C1>4.8), thus use c/d)min=0.125
a = 0.8xc
min
= O.lxd = 0.10x 1320= 132 mm
Since a(132 mmt.(120 mm), our assumption is not valid, because the neutral axis is
outside the flange. According to clause 4.2.1.2.f of the ECP 203, one can neglect the
compression force in the web and assume that a=ts' Accordingly, As equals
A = ______ __ . __
, l
y
/1.15x(d-t,/2)
2113.3x106 =5357 mm2
360/1.15 x (1320 -120/ 2)
0.225 .. K.
bd
0.225.J2sX400x1320=1650mm2.J<A, o.k
Iy 360
1.3A, = 1.3 x 5357 = 6965 mm 2
Use 12<1>25 (5890 mm
2
) & use 4<1>18 (about 17% of As) as stirrups hangers
Step 3.2: Design of Section 2 (400xl400)
Section 2 is a rectangular section with the following straining actions:
Mu= 2055.6 kN.m
Pu= 665.3 kN (compression)
If P uffcu b t is less than 0.04, the normal force can be neglected
665.3 x 1000 .
--------- = 0.047 > 0.04 ........ nonnal force cannot be neglected
25 x 400 x 1400
fcu
xbxt
Section 2 is located in the girder of the frame. Hence, it is recommended to limit the
amount of the compression steel (if needed) to 40% that of the tension steel. Mus
approach for the design of this type of sections can be utilized
l
if tension failure
occurs. Assuming that tension failure occurs (P u <Pub)'
t (1400 ) 1
Mus=Mu+Pu (z-cover)=2055.6+665.3x -2--80 x 1000 =2468 kN.m
AI . 1 t 2055.6 1.4 05 3 71
ternativey,e =e+--cover=--+---O. =. m
'2 665.3 2
Mus =p"xe, =665.3x3.71=2468kN.m
442
2468 X 10
6
= 0.1416
25 x 400 x 1320
2
d' 1 d = 80/1320 = 0.06
Since no curves are available for d'/d=O.06, one can use design curves or tables with
d' /d = 0.1 (conservative). From the curve, it is clear that the ultimate capacity of the
section for 0.=0 is exceeded, thus 0.=0.2 is used.
From the curve, ()) = 0.185
f. 25 2
A' = a liJ....E!!.. b x d = 0.2 x 0.185x -x400x 1320 = 1357 mm
3W
R.=0.1416
Check failure condition
C = 690 d 690 1320 = 867.42 mm
b 690+ Iy 690+360
Applying the equilibrium .equation
p = 0.67x25x400 (0.8x867.42) + 1357x360 4658x360
ub l.5 1.15 1.15
Pub = 2066255N = 2066.2 kN> p" (tension failure as assumed)
For practical considerations, the reinforcement for section 2 should be equal to that of
section 3. Thus
Use 12<1>25 (5890 mm
2
) Top
Use 4<1>25 (1963 mm
2
) Bottom
443
Step 3.3: Design of Section 3 (400x1200)
t, ::0.8tg ::0.8x1.4::1.2m
t2 ::0.67t, ::0.67x1.2::0.80m
The column is subjected to the following forces
Mu= 2055.6 kN.m
P
u
=1025 kN (compression)
The frame column has a variable cross section, for buckling calculations; an average
column width at 2/3h is used.
2 2
t =t
2
+-(t,-t
2
)=800+-(1200-800)=1067 mm
avg 3 3 \
Semelle
250x500
footing
No Semelle
In this direction
Buckling analysis in the out-of-plane direction
From Fig EX9.1, Ho = 3.25 m (from the foundation level to the wall beam)
Since this direction is braced, the effective length factor k can be obtained from Table
8.3 with case 1 at top and case 1 at bottom (the semelle is larger than the column
dimension). Thus, k=0.75.
H. =k xHo = 0.75x 3.25 =2.44 m
H 2.44
A,=-' =--=6.1< 15 (case of braced columns)
b 0.4
Thus, no additional moments are induced in the outcOf-plane direction
444
Buckling analysis in the in-plane direction
The frame column is unbraced and the height of the column is measured
from the bottom of the frame girder to the base (Ho) and is equal to
Ho =h =7.0 m
The effective length factor k can be obtained from Table 8.4. The top part of
the column is considered case land the bottom part is considered case 3
(isolated footing with no semelle). Thus k=1.6 and the effective length He
equals
He =kxHo =1.6x7.0=11.2 m
The slenderness ratio A is calculated using the average column thickness not the actual
section width, thus A equals
A,= He = 11.20 =10.50
ta'C 1.067
Since A is greater than 10, the column is considered long and additional moment
calculation is required.
15= A,2 X ta'C = 10.50
2
x 1.067 = 0.0588 m
2000 2000
emin = 0.05 x t a'C = 0.05 x 1.067 = 0.053 m < a
Thus the lateral deflection due to buckling is larger than the code minimum
eccentricity. The column is subjected to an axial force of P
u
=1025 kN and the
additional moment equals
M add = p" X 15= 1025 x 0.0588 = 60.25 kN.m
M IOI = M u + M add = 2055.6 + 60.25 = 2115.85 kN.m
2055.6
60.25
2115.85
Original moment (Mu)
Additional moment (Madd) Total moment(Mtot)
445
It is recommended to use compression steel in frame column not less than 40% of the
tension steel to allow for moment reversal initiated by lateral loads such as wind or
earthquake. Columns in frames is preferred to be designed using the interaction
diagram with compression steel ratio (a=O.4-+0.80) depend on the magnitude of the
moment. It should be noted that the actual member thickness of 1200 mm is used in
the design.
feu xbxt
1025xl000 =0.085
25 x 400x 1200
2115.85 X 10
6
= 0.147
25 x 400 x 1200
2
The factor l; equals
S t -2xcover
t
1200-2x80 =0.867
1200
Using interaction diagram withh=360 N/mm2, a=OA
At l;=O.8 p=5.1
Atl;=0.9 p=4.6
Using interpolation for l;=O.867 gives p=4.8
fJ = px feu x 10-4 = 4.8 x 25 x 10-4 = 0.012
As =,uxb x t=0.012x400x1200=5760mm
2
A; =aA
s
=0.4x5760 = 2304 mm
2
As.roral = A; + As = 5760 + 2304 = 8064 mm
2
(12<1>25, 5890 mm
2
)
(6<1>22, 2280 mm
2
)
Since the column is long the minimum reinforcement ratio is .
,umin = 0.25 + 0.052 A. = 0.52 + 0.052 x 10.5 = 0.8%
As.min = 0.008xbxt = 0.008x400x1200 = 3840 mm
2
< AsJor ....... o.k
Step 3.4: Design of Section 4 (4OOx800)
This section is subjected to pure compression (P
u
= 1025kN). From the detailing of the
frame the section will be reinforced with 6<1>25 and 6<1>22
Ase =6x491+6x380=5226 mm
2
446
1
P" = 1000 (0.35 x 25 x (400 x 800) + 0.67 x 360x 5226) = 4060 kN > (1025) ..... .o.k
A,=6<ll25 A',=6<ll22
~ [ j ] ~
1 4<ll12 I
~
800mm
1
Step 3.5: Design of Section 5 (4OOx 1400)
Section 5 is subjected to the following straining actions
Mu= 1410.2 kN.m
415.3xl000
25 x 400 x 1400 = 0.0296 < 0.04 ........ neglect normal force
feu xb xt
From section 1-+-+B= 2320 mm
1320=Cl 1410.2xl0
6
25x2320
C1= 8.46
The point is outside the curve, thus c/ d)min=O.125
. a = 0.8 x c
min
= O.lxd = 0.10x1320 = 132 mm
Since a(132 mmt:.(120 mm), our assumption is not valid, because the neutral axis is
outside the flange.
A Mu 1410.2xl0
6
=3575 m 2
s fy 1 1.15 x(d -t
s
12) 360/1.15x(1320-120/2) m
Use 8<1>25 (3927mm
2
) & use 4<1>18 as stirrups hangers
447
Step 4: Design for Shear
Ideally, the critical section for shear should be taken at distance of di2 from the
column leg. However for simplicity the value of the maximum shear from the shear
force diagram is used.
Qu=833.2 kN
833.2xl000 =1.58 N/nun2
qu bx d 400x 1320
The applied shear qu should be less than the maximum shear stress qu,max
qu.ma>< =0.70jN =2.85 N Imm 2 ... >qu(1.58) ... o.k
The presence of the compression force increases the concrete shear capacity of the
section by the factor Oc , where
Pu 665.3 x 1000
Oc =1+0.07x-=1+0.07x =1.083 <1.5 ..... o.k
. Ac 400 x 1400
qcu = Oc x 0.24 (7: = 1.083 x 0.24 {25 = 1.06 N Imm2
Vr: ViS
Since qu > qcu, the frame has to be provided with special reinforcement for shear ..
qsu = qu - qcu = 1.58- 1.06 = 1.047 N I mm2
2 2
Assume that steel yield strength ofthe stirrups is 280 N/nun
2
. Since the frame girder
equals 400 nun, the code requires {our branches of stirrups. Try 10 nun (78.5 nun2)
ASI =4x78.5=314 mm
2
The required stirrup spacing can be obtained using code equation (4-22)
sxq xb=A x I
YS1
su sl 1.15
sx1.047x400=314x 280
1.15
s=182 nun, rounding to the lesser intege; number -7-7 s=150 nun
ASImin = 0.4 xbxs =.Q:iX400xI50=85 mm
2
< A,,(314) ... o.k
. Iy 280
Use $ 10@ 150 nun in the inclined part of the girder and $ 1O@ 200 mm elsewhere.
Note: use 10 $10 at the foundation level.
448
SlS9

llS9
It)
It) (') N

N
I
N
... <0
N
N

<0
'?
('<)
g
rIl
449
I
"""
Q)
E

LL
Q)
;
'0
Ol
J;
:m
o
c
Q)
E
Q)
e
J2
c::
'm
0::
Example 9.2
The frame shown in the Figure below and Fig Ex. 9.2 is to be designed for a new
factory in the Six of October City. The ultimate load including dead and live loads is
75 kN/m'. The horizontal reaction at the base equals = 127.56 kN.jcu= 30 N/mm2 and
/y=360 N/mm
2
.
Frame spacing =5.0 m.
Slab thiclmess =120 mm, bg=350 mm, tg=1200 mm.
The fraine may be considered unbraced in its plane and braced in the out of plane
direction
wu=75 kNlm,(H.P)
'111'1'1'
H,=126.56
-
a
9.0m
1
9.0m
Fig. EX 9.2
450
I , I
b
..
s

00
0
0
m
0
0
m
WO'g
I=l
0
'';::
0
II)
'" rJl
'"
Ey

%
II)

0
(') Q)
en
C'I

E 0\
0
.
<Xi

bO
ii::

gen
(')

451
Solution
Step 1: Calculations of the reactions
The vertical reaction equals
75
fa = fb =2x (18+2 x 3.5) =937.5 kN
Ha=127.56 __ a
I t Y.=937.5
1J:5I' 9.0 9.0
Step 2: Calculations of normal, shear, and bending moments
I I I
The calculation of shear and normal force for the sloped elements can be obtained
using the following formula
N =Hj xcos(8)-Vj xsin(8)
Q =V
i
xcos(8)+Hj xsin(8)
(normal force)
(shear force)
where 8 = tan -1 = 16.7, Positive direction is given in the figure below
3 v
N
3
H
section H V N
.'
Q
1 0.0 -262.5 75.4 -251.4
2 127.56 675.0 -71.8 683.2
3 127..56 0.0 122.2 36.7
4 127.56 -675.0 316.1 -609.9
The normal, shear and bending moment are shown in the following figures.
452
71.8
937.5 937.5
Normal force diagram
683.2
609.9
127.6 127.6
Shear force diagram
1824.3
1364.9
1020.5
Bending moment diagram
453
Step 3: Flexural design of the critical section
Seven sections need to be designed as follows
4
Critical section locations
Step 3.1: Design of section 1 (35OX12OO)
The girder section is given as 350xl200 mm.
8
Section 1 is a rectangular section and is subjected to the following straining actions
Mu= 1557.6 kN.m
Pu= 0 kN
Assuming 70 mm concrete cover to the c.g. of the reinforcement
d = t-70mm =1200-70 = 1130 mm
To use the R-ro, calculate R
R
Mu 1557.6x106 =0.116
30x350x1130
2
From the chart with R=0.116, the. reinforcement index w=0.158
A =cox
fcu

s fy 360
, {0.225 b d 0.225..J30 x 350 x 1130 = 1354 mm 2
As.run = smaller of fy . 360
1.3As = 1.3 x 5207 = 6769 mm 2
Use 12<1>25 (5890 mm
2
) & 6<1>16 ,(about 20% of As) as secondary steel
454
.J<As o.k
Step 3.2: Design of section 2 (350x12oo)
Section 2 is aT-section and is subjected to the following straining actions
Mu= 1557.6 kN.m
The effective width B is taken as
{
16tS +b {16X120+350=2270mm
0.7xL 0.7 x 18000
B smaller of --+ -5-+ b = 5 + 350 = 2870 mm
CL --+ CL 5000 mm
B=2270mm
IfPu/feu b t is less than 0.04, the normal force can be neglected
122.2x1000
30 x 350 x 1200 = 0.0097 < 0.04 ........ neglect normal force
feu xbxt
Assuming that the neutral axis is within the flange and using C-J curve gives
Mu =11301 1557.6x106 =7.47
feu xB 30 x 2270
The point is outside the curve, thus C/d)mill=0.125 andj=0.825
a = 0.8xc = 0.1xd = 0.1x 1130= 113 mm
Since a(113 mm)<t,.(120 mm), our assumption is valid.
A = Mu = 1557.6x106 =4641 mm2
S fy xjxd . 360xO.825x1130
{
, 0.225 b d = 0.225..J30 x350xl130=1354 mm2
Asmin =smaller of fy 360
1.3As = l.3x4641 = 6033 mm 2
Use 10<1>25 (4909 mm
2
) (actual detailing=1225)
Section 3 is a rectangular section with the following straining actions
Mu= 1824.3 kN.m
Pu= 71.8 kN (tension)
.J<As o.k
Since the normal force is tension, it cannot be neglected. Mus approach is used to
calculate the area of steel
455
Mus =Mu +P
u
('!'-cover) = 1824.3+ (_71.8)X(1200 -70)X-
1
-=1786kN.m
2 2 1000
R1 1786x 10
6
0.133
feu bd
2
30x350 x1l30
2
The resulting Rl is greater than the singly reinforced section (0.=0). Thus use simple
bending curves with compression steel (0.=0.2) and d' /d = 0.1
m=0.174
A, = a> feu b X d + = 0.174x 350 X 1130 + 71.8 X 1000 = 5964 mm
2
fJ' y, 360 360/1.15
A; =aa>feu
h 3@ .
Use 14<1>25 (6872 mm
2
) Top
Use 4<1>25 (1963 mm
2
) Bottom
Because section 4 has an inverted slab and is subjected to negative bending, it is
designed as T -section as shown in figure
Mu=459.4 kN.m
The effective width B is taken as
456
J
I
,
f16t,+b P6X120+350=2270mm
B smaller of 1 CL CL = 1
5000
mm
B= 2270 mm
d = t-cover = 900- 50 = 850 mm
IfPu/fcubt is less than 0.04, the normal force can be neglected
75.4x1000
30x 350x900 = 0.0079 < 0.04 ........ neglect normal force
feu xbxt
Assuming that the neutral axis is within the flange and using C-J curve gives
Mu =8501 459.4x10
6
=10.3
feu X B 30x 2270
The point is outside the curve, thus c/d)mil1=0.125 andj=0.825
a=0.8xc=0.8xO.125x850=85 mm
Since a(85 mm)<ts(120 mm), our assumption is valid
A = Mu
,
459.4x10
6
181 2
------= 9mm
360 x 0.825 X 850
_ 1 0.225.JJ:: b d = 0.225 Eo x350x 850 = 1018 mm 2
A,min -smaller of fy 360
1.3A, = 1.3x 1819 = 2365 mm 2
Use 4<1>25 (1963 mm
2
) (Actual detailing 6<1>25)
Step 3.5: DeSign of section 5 (350x12oo)
t, ",0.8tg =l.2m
t2 =0.67t, ",0.90m
The column has a variable cross section starting from 900 mm at the footing and 1200
mm at the top. The column is subjected to the following forces
Mu= 1364.9 kN.m
Pu=937.5 kN
For buckling calculations; an average column width measured at 2/3h is used.
2 2
tava =t2 +-(tl -t
2
) = 900+-(1200-900) = 1100 mm
3 3 .
457
"-
c
......
II
...,
...,

Semelle
250x500
......
c
......
II
:t:
No Semelle
In this direction
Buckling analysis in the out-of-plane direction
From Fig EX9.2 Ho = 4.8 m (from the foundation level to the wall beam)
Since this direction is braced, the effective length factor k can be obtained from Table
8.3 with case 1 top and case 1 at bottom (the semelle is larger than the column
dimension). Thus, k=0.75.
He =k xHo =0.75x5.3=3.975 m
A = He = 3.975 = 11.36< 15 (case of braced columns)
b 0.35 .
Thus no additional moments are induced in the out-of-plane direction
Buckling analysis in the in-plane direction

The height of the column is measured from the bottom of the beam to the
base (Ha), as shown in Figure above.
Ho =10.lm
2 2
Since the column is unbraced in this direction, the effective length factor k
can be obtained from Table 8.4. The top part of the column is considered
case 1, and the bottom part is considered case 3 (isolated footing with no
semelle). Thus k=1.6, and the effective length He equals
He =kxHo =1.6x1O.1=16.16 m
458
The slenderness ratio Iv is calculated using the average column thickness not
the actual section width, thus Iv equals
A = He = 16.16 = 14.7
t"vg 1.1
Since Iv greater than 10, the column is considered long and additional moment
calculation is required .
c5=A
2
xt
avg
= 14.7
2
xl.1=0.119 m
2000 2000
emin = 0.05 x t"vg = 0.05 x 1.1 = 0.055 m < c5
Thus the lateral deflection due to buckling is larger than the code minimum
eccentricity. The column is subjected to axial force ofP
u
=937.5 kN and the additional
moment equals
MaM =P., xc5=937.5xO.119=111.3kN.m
Mfof = Mu + M add = 1364.9 + 111.3 = 1476.2 kN.m
1364.9
111.3
Original moment (Mu)
Additional moment (Mudd)
feu xbxt
937.5 x 1000 = 0.074
30x350x1200
1476.2xl0
6
=0.098
30x350x1200
2
The factor t; equals
t; = t-2xcover = 1200-2x70 = 0.87
t 1200
Using interaction diagram withJ;,=360N/mm2, 0.=0.4, and
459
1476.2
Total moment (M,a,)
Atl;=0.8
Atl;=O.9
p=3.0
p=2.5
using interpolation for l;=0.87 gives p=2.65
P= pxlcu x10-4 =2.65x30x10-4 =0.00795
As = P x b x t = 0.00795 x 350 x 1200 = 3339 mm
2
A; = a As = OAx3339 = 1336 mm
2
As.total = A; + As = 3927 + 1520 = 5447 mm
2
(8<1>25, 3927 mm
2
)
(4<1>22, 1520 mm
2
)
Since the column is long the minimum reinforcement ratio is
Pmin = 0.25 + 0.052 il. = 0.25+0.052x14.7 = 1.014%
As,min = Pmin X b x t = 0.01014x 350x 1200 = 4258 mm
2
< As,lot ...... .o.k
Step 3.6: Design of section 6 (350x1200)
Section 6 is a rectangular section and is subjected to the following straining actions
Mu= 1479.9 kN.m Pu= 316.1 kN
IfPu/:t;;u b t is less than 0.04, the normal force can be neglected
316.1x 1000
30x350x1200 0.025 < 0.04 ........ neglect normal force
leu xb xt
The design will be carried out as if the section is sUbjected to moment only.
To use the R-co, calculate. R
R= Mu
leu xbxd
2
1479.9xl06 =0.1103
30x350xl130
2
From the chart with R=0.1103, the reinforcement index aFO.148
!, 30
A =ll.Ix-!Lxbxd=0.148x-x350x1130=4877 mm
2
s Iy 360
0.225..JJ::bd 0.225$oX350xl130=1354mm
2
.J<A
s
o.k
I, 360
1.3As = 1.3 x 4877 =6341 mm
2
460
This section is subjected to pure compression (P
u
= 937.5 kN). From the detailing of
the frame the section will be reinforced with 4<1>25 and 4<1>22
Ase = 4x 491+4x380 = 3484 mm
2
The minimum percentage of reinforcement J.l for this long column is 1.01 % (refer to
step 3.5)
Asmin = = 1.01 x350x900 = 3194 mm
2
<.Asc ...... o.k
. 100 100
p" = 0.35 x leu xAc + 0.67 x Iy xAsc
p" = _1_(0.35x30 x(350x900)+0.67 x360x3484)= 4147 kN > (937.5) ...... o.k
1000
As=4<1>25

Q
4<1> 12
900mm
A's=4<1>22

!
This is a column section and the procedure of calculations is similar to those presented
in section 5. (M
u
=1020.5 ,Pu=937.5
Step 4: Design for shear
The critical section for sheax: is at d/2 from the face of the support
Q.u = Q-wu xC;' +%) = 683.2-75XC;2 + = 595.82 kN
595.82 x 1000 =1.506 N/mm2
qu bxd 350xl130
The applied shear qu should be less than the maximum shear stress qu,max
qu,max =0.7{F.i =3.13 N Imm
2
'" >qu(1.506) ... o.k
The presence of the tension force (Pu=71.8 kN) decrease the concrete shear capacity of
the frame by amount of 8
1
where
461
<5 =1-0.3x P
u
=1-0.3x 71.8x1000 0.949
, Ac 350x1200
q =0., x 0.24 1:: = 0.949 x 0.24 (30 =1.019N Imm
2
'" Vl.5 Vl.5
Since qu > qcu, the frame has to be provided with special reinforcement for shear.
qsu :dqu - qcu =1.506_1.019 =0.997 N Imm
2
2 2
Assume that steel yield strength of the stirrups is 360 N/mm
2
Try two branches of
stirrups with 10 mm in diameter (78.5 mm
2
)
AS/ =2x78.5=157 mm
2
The required stirrup spacing can be obtained using the following
b A
lyS/
sxqsu
x
= S/x1.15
sxO.997x350=157x
360
->-> s=142.8mm.
1.15
Use 7lO/m' (s=142 mm). This amount is greater than the minimum given by
Mb M 2 2
AS/,min =-1 x xs = 360 x350x142=55.2 mm <AS/(157 mm ) .. n.k
y
Note: For the middle third part of the girder and columns where the shear force is
small, an amount of 5 101m' is used. At the intersection of the column and the
footing the stirrups is increased to 10 101m'.
462
463
<0

<0
N

'a
N
o
o
Ol
E
N'O

N 10
1200
Sec. 1-1
Sec. 4-4
N

'a
N
6S1tS25
2S1tS12
5S1tS10/m
2S1tS12
10
N
'a
N
.1
2S1tS12

0
2S1tS12
0
0 0
5S1tS10/m
2S1tS12
Sec. 2-2
1200
Sec. 5-5
900
Sec. 7-7 Sec. 8-8
Reinforcement Detailing of the Frame (Continued)
464
2S1tS12
2S1tS12
7S1tS10/m
2S1tS12
Sec. 3-3
APPENDIX A
Design Charts for Sections
Subjected to Flexure
465
Area of Steel Bars in em 2 (used in Egypt)
Area of Steel Bars in mm 2 (used in Egypt)
 Weight
Cross sectional area (cm
2
) Weight Cross sectional area (mm
2
)
mm kg/m' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 mm kg/m' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
6 0.222 0.28 0.57 0.85 1.13 1.41 1.70 1.98 2.26 2.54 2.83 3.11 3.39 6 0.222 28.3 56.5 84.8 113 141 170 198 226 254 283 311 339
8 0.395 0.50 1.01 1.51 2.01 2.51 3.02 3.52 4.02 4.52 5.03 5.53 6.03 8 0.395 50.3 101 151 201 251 302 352 402 452 503 553 603
10 0.617 0.79 1.57 2.36 3.14 3.93 4.71 5.50 6.28 7.07 7.85 8.64 9.42 10 0.617 78.5 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 785 864 942
12 0.888 1.13 2.26 3.39 4.52 5.65 6.79 7.92 9.05 10.18 11.31 12.44 13.57 12 0.888 113 226 339 452 565 679 792 905 1018 1131 1244 1357
14 1.208 1.54 3.08 4.62 6.16 7.70 9.24 10.78 12.32 13.85 15.39 16.93 18.47 14 1.208 154 308 462 616 770 924 1078 1232 1385 1539 1693 1847
16 1.578 2.01 4.02 6.03 8.04 10.05 12.06 14.07 16.08 18.10 20.11 22.12 24.13 16 1.578 201 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1810 2011 2212 2413
18 1.998 2.54 5.09 7.63 10.18 12.72 15.27 17.81 20.36 22.90 25.45 27.99 30.54 18 1.998 254 509 763 1018 1272 1527 1781 2036 2290 2545 2799 3054
20 2.466 3.14 6.28 9.42 12.57 15.71 18.85 21.99 25.13 28.27 31.42 34.56 37.70 20 2.466 314 628 942 1257 1571 1885 2199 2513 2827 3142 3456 3770
22 2.984 3.80 7.60 11.40 15.21 19.01 22.81 26.61 30.41 34.21 38.01 41.81 45.62 22 2.984 380 760 1140 1521 1901 2281 2661 3041 3421 3801 4181 4562
25 3.853 4.91 9.82 14.73 19.63 24.54 29.45 34.36 39.27 44.18 49.09 54.00 58.90 25 3.853 491 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 4909 5400 5890
28 4.834 6.16 12.32 18.47 24.63 30.79 36.95 43.10 49.26 55.42 61.58 67.73 73.89 28 4.834 616 1232 1847 2463 3079 3695 4310 4926 5542 6158 6773 7389
32 6.313 8.04 16.08 24.13 32.17 40.21 48.25 56.30 64.34 72.38 80.42 88.47 96.51 32 6.313 804 1608 2413 3217 4021 4825 5630 6434 7238 8042 8847 9651
38 8.903 11.34 22.68 34.02 45.36 56.71 68.05 79.39 90.73 102.1 113.4 124.8 136.1 38 8.903 1134 2268 3402 4536 5671 6805 7939 9073 10207 11341 12475 13609
Area of Other Steel Bars in em 2
Area of Other Steel Bars in mm 2
 Weight
Cross sectional area (cm
2
) Weight Cross sectional area (mm
2
)
mm kg/m' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 mm kg/m' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
6 0.222 0.28 0.57 0.85 1.13 1.41 1.70 1.98 2.26 2.54 2.83 3.11 3.39 6 0.222 28.3 56.5 84.8 113.1 141.4 170 198 226 254 283 311 339
8 0.395 0.50 1.01 1.51 2.01 2.51 3.02 3.52 4.02 4.52 5.03 5.53 6.03 8 0.395 50.3 100.5 151 201 251 302 352 402 452 503 553 603
10 0.617 0.79 1.57 2.36 3.14 3.93 4.71 5.50 6.28 7.07 7.85 8.64 9.42 10 0.617 79 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 785 864 942
13 1.042 1.33 2.65 3.98 5.31 6.64 7.96 9.29 10.62 11.95 13.27 14.60 15.93 13 1.042 133 265 398 531 664 796 929 1062 1195 1327 1460 1593
16 1.578 2.01 4.02 6.03 8.04 10.05 12.06 14.07 16.08 18.10 20.11 22.12 24.13 16 1.578 201 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1810 2011 2212 2413
19 2.226 2.84 5.67 8.51 11.34 14.18 17.01 19.85 22.68 25.52 28.35 31.19 34.02 19 2.226 284 567 851 1134 1418 1701 1985 2268 2552 2835 3119 3402
22 2.984 3.80 7.60 11.40 15.21 19.01 22.81 26.61 30.41 34.21 38.01 41.81 45.62 22 2.984 380 760 1140 1521 1901 2281 2661 3041 3421 3801 4181 4562
25 3.853 4.91 9.82 14.73 19.63 24.54 29.45 34.36 39.27 44.18 49.09 54.00 58.90 25 3.853 491 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 4909 5400 5890
28 4.834 6.16 12.32 18.47 24.63 30.79 36.95 43.10 49.26 55.42 61.58 67.73 73.89 28 4.834 616 1232 1847 2463 3079 3695 4310 4926 5542 6158 6773 7389
32 6.313 8.04 16.08 24.13 32.17 40.21 48.25 56.30 64.34 72.38 80.42 88.47 96.5 32 6.313 804 1608 2413 3217 4021 ~ 5 5630 6434 7238 8042 8847 9651
38 8.903 11.34 22.68 34.02 45.36 56.71 68.05 79.39 90.73 102.1 113.4 124.8 136.1 38 8.903 1134 2268 3402 4536 5671 6805 7939 9073 10207 11341 12475 13609
466
467
Values of a. and f3 for solid slab with live loads less than 5 kN/m
2
r 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 104 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
ex 0.35 0040 0045 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80
13
0.35 0.29 0.25 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09
a. and f3 values for two-way hollow block slabs (Marcus values)
r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
a. 0.396 0.473 0.543 0.606 0.660 0.706 0.746 0.778 0.806 0.830
f3
0.396 0.333 0.262 0.212 0.172 0.140 0.113 0.093 0.077 0.063
a. and f3 values for paneled beam slabs (Grashoffs values)
r 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
a. 0.500 0.595 0.672 0.742 0.797 0.834 0.867 0.893 0.914 0.928
f3
0.500 0.405 0.328 0.258 0.203 0.166 0.133 0.107 0.086 0.072
Coefficients of equivalent uniform loads on beams
L/2x 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
a. 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.853 0.870 0.885 0.897
f3
0.500 0.554 0.582 0.615 0.642 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722
468
2
0.85
0.08
2.0
0.849
0.053
2.0
0.941
0.059
1.9 2.0
0.908 0.917
0.737 0.750
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
"
Z
-Q
Z
W
m
w
...
A.
:E
-fI)
0
t-
Q
W
t-
U
-
W
or-
..,

m

:::)

tn -
.a
tn
ca
Z
t-
- 0
-
t-
U
W
fI)

0
II.
=
c(
::c
u
z
"
-fI)
W
Q
--- -- --- ------ --- -- ---
--, ._---- -------------- -----_. --- -._-
--- ------ -- --- ------ ---
"\
--.;. -: . ......
: :
, . ..-- ...... - _ .... _- .- ...... - ---
t 0017= JOj Woo
( __ : __ _________________

\
J--+;--

+1
1---;-;- .-:-- \<1--1----- --
\

'"
..t::)
"1::1

;:;;:
..<:)

e
-: ;-.-- .-+- -- ---- -- --- - -IS" --- II
\I
Q2
,,<;"

N 'U':;;;; \
-. .b
-: -h-- -.- 1----1- --I--t--l'",,--t--+---
I '-
0::'
1---;- :-':--+--f-
i\.
'.
N
"!
o
o
"!
o
ro
..-
o
<D
..-
0
-.;t
..-
0
N
'":
0
0
..-
0
ro

0
l() -.;t C')
d d d
N
..-
d

d d d 0 0 0 d dod
nf
0
469
8

-..J
o
(1
2.65
2.69
2.78
2.83
2.90
2.95
3.00
3.05
3.10
3.15
3.20
3.25
3.30
3.35
3.40
3.45
3.50
3.55
3.60
3.65
3.70
3.75
3.80
3.85
3.90
3.95
4.00
4.05
4.10
4.15
4.20
4.25
4.30
4.35
4.40
4.45
4.50
4.55
4.60
4.65
4.70
4.75
4.80
4.85
J c/d em.x/C
0.696 0.500 fv=240
0.703 0.480 fv=280
0.717 0.440 fv=360
0.723 0.420 Ifv=40
0.732 0.395
0.738 0.379
0.743 0.364
0.748 0.350
0.753 0.337
0.757 0.324
0.761 0.312
0.765 0.301
0.768 0.291
0.772 0.281
0.775 0.272
0.778 0.263
0.781 0.254
0.784 0.246
0.787 0.239
0.789 0.231
0.791 0.225
0.794 0.218
0.796 0.212
0.798 0.206
0.800 0.200
0.802 0.194
0.804 0.189
0.806 0.184
0.807 0.179
0.809 0.175
0.810 0.170
0.812 0.166
0.813 0.162
0.815 0.158
0.816 0.154
0.817 0.150
0.818 0.147
0.820 0.143
0.821 0.140
0.822 0.137
0.823 0.134
0.824 0.131
0.825 0.128
0.826 0.125
0.02
,,?>,. ;:... 0.04
"II 0.06
o
o
N
DESIGN CHART FOR SECTIONS SUBJECTED TO
SIMPLE BENDING (R and T-sections)
FOR ALL GRADES OF STEEL AND CONCRETE
5.6 0.68
5.4

Mu
[ if" " ... A. "-"-"-,--""-
I,. J d I,. 11.15
5.2 fru B
As = ./ 0.70
if A Mu P
u
/'
1 a>t
s
'"s-
5.0
1,-11.15 (d-tsI2) 1,-/1.15
\ "/
4.8
:\
./ 0.72
4.6
I
\
J/
4.4
I
0.74
I
"\. C1
V
4.2
I
I
/:
U 4.0
I
0.76 ..,
"'
,/
I
/'
3.8
I
I
-""
/'
3.6
I
0.78
I
;/
..........
3.4
V
.............. "
I
3.2 0.80
I
/'
...............
cmaxfd (t able 4-1)
3.0
I
V
-........
2.8
I--.
0.82
/
0: 0':'"

2.6
o . <.0
"
";j'
II : 'Ii
I
.!b- :
2.4
.?:--' ,?-
0.84
'tl
0.10 J: 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0040 0045 0.50
o 0
g
e
c/d
CJ
o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a
o N N N NNW w w w
00 0 N m 00 0 N m 0 N m 00
0

II
=0" ;..,\
1:>..=
I
a
m
til
E: e
"" (;to 0.08 +--l--
e e e e
il 3 g il
x x x C5
Z
(")
0>..
Ii" .;-, 0.1
0
1+ 0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0' 0' 0' 0'
"""I "'1 "'i "'1
..-+, ,<I'"'+) ,<""'"
II II II II
-l:> Vol N N
00\00 -l:>
000 0
z z z z
3' 3' 3'
3 3 '" 3
N I-.J N W
)0 til :c
_ c 3>
- "
.t ...
" C. ."
(") 0
II I I ry
s 0.26

om"
;; a a
...... 0
0 C
.:: til c:a
... - I'"
:;: -<
0.28

0.30
0.32

c. .1
,""
0.34 pi.
0.36'
0.38
OM
0.42 1o'Ja'r-....
0.44 )
OM
0.48 A r\..,
0.50 Cl'l
-+I l<-
n r
:J>..
iD " " .110. I'" m
.. m -
.: c:a z
m ."
-.! Z 0
a "
C) - (")
. z m
C) G) a
(II
til
m

o
Z
til
G.l
::r
o
:::l
CD
3'
Qo
m
3'

3'
'<
o
CD
(J)
cO'
:::l
Q,
::0
CD
:i'
0'
Cl
CD
a.
()
o
:::l
(')
*
(j)
"i
c:

m
G'l
5
::J
CD
3'
S/O
m
3'
2:
3'
'<
o
CD
Ul
cO'
=>
9-

s'
0'
g
0-
()
o
=>
@
ro
C/l
2"

CD
Ul
0.38
0.36
0.34
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
C\I
0
ci
DESIGN CHART FOR DOUBLY REINFORCED SECTIONS
SUBEJCED TO SIMPLE BENDING.
All types of steel (table 4-1). d'ld=O.10
O)max for fy =240 N/mm
2
2
[.J2/'
V
0
O)max for fy=280 N/mm
J
,"
2

2
V-
A
.
/.
a= .5

V

A.
=U.4
-::fl I<

!"!I"c
-=u.
0.1

1.1
II"""
lI'

/
v <0 <Xl 0 C\I v <0 <Xl 0 C\I v <0 <Xl 0 C\I v <0 <Xl 0 C\I v co <Xl 0
0 0 0
.,.. .... .... .... .... C\I C\I
C'!
C\I C\I C') C') C') C') C') v v v v
"'<I:
a.q
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci 0 ci ci ci ci ci ci ci dP ci ci ci 0 0
0)

A.'
A. =OJbd hll
fy fylys
A' =a OJbd fa,
, fy
A.
I.
b
'I
472
APPENDIX B
Interaction Diagrams
(Top and bottom steel)
473
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
fc.xbxt
Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections
(Top and Bottom Steel)
474
As = J1 xbx t
d-d'
(=-
t
M.
h. xbxt
2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.15
0.10
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3
475
J1 = p feu xlO-4
As = J1 xbx t
d-d'
(=-
t
M.
feu xbxt
2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
476
As = J.l xbx t
d-d'
s=-
t
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
477
J.l = p feu xlO-4
As =J.l xbx t
d-d'
s=-
t
Pu (Top and Bottom Steel)
feu xbxt
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26
478
J.l= p feu X 10-4
As = J.l xbx t
A.: =axAs
d-d'
(=-
t
feu xbxt
I ~ ~ .
~
~ . ~ .
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26
J.l=p feu xlO-4
Mu
(
As =J.l xbxt
d-d'
(=-
t
479
fcu
xbxt
0.75
16 <:>

?'?l
,??:>.' Q) N
cd
"" ,Y- o; N' <;y.
<::);.'
. 0.70
:
. f =240 N/mm2

:
. y
: .........

: a=O.60
.......

I?':
S=O.90
: ..........
.

'.'"
N'

r0
.
.
.'
: ...........
.
.
.
. ()'.'

N

. .

.
1'..'

" 10.--
0
0

K K
.. '

e .. '
Eo--:
N

X
............

IX
.. '
".'
.'
:
?'
K ,-"
.......... .
:
K .'
.'
.. '
:'\
[)(

0 N
K)
(\."

\ ..
..........
. . : . ,\,Q
. \ .. '
\.,,,
1\':X
.X
K\
K"-

.'
, . .

K'"
. . .
..\ .. ' .
. . ..# ....
..
:' :"
..
.1."
1'"
II .'
. <]-
".,
)"1
\
'\')
1.50 .. .' .. '
: .:
...... t
.. j,", ........
.J. .. .. .......
, .. .. '
. . ........
.'
.'
: :
.... , .. "
1I ....
II' .'
:/
. /.
/.
v. ...
... ]
.l J ..

, , .
::; ;::; .<)
.'
: .. : ..<i
.'
.' .' .. '
: ,. : ....
........
[7:
[;7'
V"
V:;
II
.. J' '.J .
V"
v."J

..
.'
"j'
::' :::" ..:,
.... " ........ ........ '"'
... / .......... .. ........
........
' ............
ftR V V V
V"
V"
V/
/
..
: ......
.. - .....
/
1/
V
..........
./.
.l,.
1 /
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26
480
,u=Pfeu xlO-4
As =,u xbx t
A; =axAs
d-d'
(=--
t
Mu
feu xbxt
2
feu xbxt L ___________________ ---'
0.75 . ,,,-,
0: 0':' c y <::) .. -, () ... '
0.70
f
y
=240 N/mm2
0.65 a=O.60
:,t\..: '
0.60 ....... :"'I.f.----l--i---I----:f--+++-I S=O.80

0.55 :." I,:'--l ")(",,,"
"
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26
,u = p feu X 10-4
As =,u xbx t
d-d'
(=--
t
481
Mu
feuxbxt2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Pu
feu xbxt
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
:
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
o
'"'- <t?:
cii
<J
<::>;-
f
y
=240 N/mm2
:
a=O.60
S=O.70
-
1.50
.......
---2.00
3.00
0.00
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22
f.l=P!ru xlO-4
As = f.l xbx t
d-d'
(=--
t
482
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Pu
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24
483
f.l=p!cu x10 -4
As = f.l xbx t
d-d'
(=--
t
f.
xbxt2
cu
f.u
xbxt
o
""=
Interaction Diagram for Rectangular Sections (Top
and Bottom Steel)
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24
484
j.J=p!cu xlO-4
As = J.i xbx t
d-d'
t;=-
t
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Pu
fcu
xbxt
0.65 r--..,-;:::-:-;---r---;:::-y-----r"""7i
c:f
0.60
<5..1
<:):.'
0.35
0.30
: :
0.25
:
:
0.20 :
:
:
:
0.15
0.10
0.05
o
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08
0.1
0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18
j.J= p!cu X 10-
4
As =J.i xbxt
d-d'
t;=--
t
485
0.2
p. (Top and Bottom Steel)
fc.xbxt
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3 0.32 0.34
As = Jl xbx t
A; =axAs
d-d'
s=-
t
486
~
!
I
I
I
J
1
487
Jl = P feu X 10-4
As = Jl xbx t
A' =axA
s s
d-d'
s=-
t
P
u
hu
xbxt
0.85
0.80

: 0,

P:'

$"

-.
n D'

c).
:
.l'-.
f
y
=280 N/mm
2

,
: :
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
a=l.O
I,.,
.'"'
1"-.."

,
S=O.7
,
: .....

,

V
ri."'- .. '\
['....
,
i ........
,

K) f".... ..........
K"
X

,
! ...........
F--

f'...>

" "'"
':"'-.,
K
,",
;--: ...........

r.<"
rxX
tx
X i'.,.

.? ",.

rx)'
r-x:--':

Kx" ,,'\
..0 1:\:
,,'
; ......

?\
C'x'

t\,::\
"'\
. .
: \
X

x:.

K..: ',,\:

.'
.
i\',.

..
,.\

\ .. I)""
.

. . ' . .
........ . , , .
. . '
..'
'
: .'
, .
}."
}.,
11::: :: :)
.. /
'j' 'j
V ..
, . ' '
1
:
.. ........
" ,' ..
.'
.'
..'
.
:::::::
fI::)
"J
:/
/.
V. V.
v.")
"J . /
.
.. .' . .'
' ..
.' ..' ..
f,:,,:::;
........
V: V'
V"

1/ V;;, v/
v,/
..:: ..::
............ -
.... ; ./
V
........
.. j ..- ....
.. " ....
..: ... .
:z,
V
V
V7 V2
"/ 1/
V V/
v/
V
.. \
.. '
"/
I
" ......
"
........
f\.,
"'\
I't
.... j
j ..
_ ........

7

J:T
.AjJj

.' )S'
,.'

..........
""
.'
"lOi
.. ----
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28
As=J.Lxbxt
d-d'
s=-
t
488
fcu
xbxt
0.05 V VVvV /
0.00
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3 0.32
489
As = J.L xbx t
d-d'
s=-
t
J.l = p /C" X 10-4
As = J.l xbx t
A; =axA,
d-d'
t;=-
t
490
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
491
J.l = p j", x 10 -4
A, = J.l xbx t
d-d'
t;=-
t
hu
xbxt
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
I--
0.45
--
0.40
I--
-
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
: :
.
.
.
0.15
.
.
' ..
"
: ....:: ..
: ::.::
:" .. ...

0.10
0.05
0.00
(Top and Bottom Steel) -
cg; 9

<:;)1

:
T

,....
c:'/
r-:
r:::i : <:;)'.

:
., f
y
=280 N/mm2
:'
0
7</
.
a=O.60
.
: ........
.
:" 0
l;=O.90
'- :
.",
't-
.
:""
"
. .
. .
\:Y'

-r#
tr$
r0 K R'
,,' .

L'::

.
t': R 0 K' 0 K K
1.(

0- 'Y x: X' 0

.'
;<

A

\.."\
.:'\
.. ' .. '
.'
.. " .... -
r
.: \
.X
X

.. "\
)(
\:"
'(.
.. .... '
..
\..
.. ........
.'
)-'.,
\':
r) ..

K' :\
.'
..
,,,'
\. 1.5f
,/' ,,'
..
:t
.. J'
f
r

i\\ l'\ .

. .
.. ......
.. ," .... ,,' ..
.'
} ..
.. ........
.. '
.' .' ?or
...
. ' ,. .. " ..
I' /:' .
I"
/ ..
I. v
....
..)
.\ .
........
/.. ..
. . . . '. .. .....
. '
" .
.. ......... . ... / ... "" .... ,.,',#
........ .........
.. ' 3.0C
}(
:'/
.:;
'.;
'.j
"./
.. /. .j- ./
'J"
. .
"J
........ . ' .. J ........
.' .'
........
.. .
7
:7.
r' /. ...
r" / / I 7 I / t.
"7
.. :.. ..
/
:" ......
./ / / / /
/ /
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3
492
f.i=pfcu
x10
'"
As = f.i xbx t
A; =axAs
d-d'
t;=-
t
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Pu
feu xbxt
As = f.i xbx t
A; =axAs
d-d'
t;=-
t
493
P
u
fcuxbxt L---_______________
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
0 cl?:'
I
'Q'
0
o .: y.: c).
<::),
/.

':i
:'''
f
y
=280 N/mm2
<::)'.'
:""\

:
a=O.60

. "

: .
.

:"'..

.
S=O.70
""
.
.
:,
0(

.

:,
"'.-
. .
.
\):.'
.
.
;0

; # ,; ,

".
.

K"
K
"
,.#.,#
. (j',C
f----,

R
V(
lX' D<
""",

1\,..
", ,
.'
.r-

X' X

K

9 ..
[\.:
.'
.'
.' 0.(
x
\?\

k<

:\'" ?':
.. '
.' . . .
\. " K
, ....
.'
.. '
: , .
\.\ ,)( K\
\-\
i\'\
'"

. .
:
\ .
" . .' .. ' "
. .
J ....
IY"
)"

\\
l'\
1.5
.
. :
,,: " .
. .
' "j
: : "
, ,'", , .

.. '
" .: " "
':':;::; : ".:;
'j'
'J.
..

2.0(
. . . ,/ .I' " .. , .... , ...
.. '
V
: . : ,",' .... , ,;" ..
.'
........ J ........
.: :' ::.'
"" "
V"

..
f!
V"j
"./
.j ...

/: :' ...... ..
" ... -; .. /.
: " ,',":
.........
..........
.. --- ..
. .. -

V
V
V'
V:7
f7
[7/ V./
:: .... :::
.- ... -

'/'
i\'
:." .. :::
... ;
. '
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24
494
fJ. = p feu X 10-
4
As = fJ. xbx t
d-d'
t;=-
t
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
P
u
fcu
xbxt
L-. _______________ --l
0.70 -'----"'-S!.Q. . ..,... : "----rT"'<F:':-:-:' -r---...-;-r-Ir,.' --'cV>=:.- .
'-'." p': C):' cy
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26
495
As = fJ. xbx t
d-d'
t;=-
t
hu
xbxt
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
I'----;
0.35
0.30
;
0.25
;
0.20
;
:
:
0.15
: ......
0.10
0.05
: . :
j:'/::;:

,
0:
:f::'

I
.. , C?;
"'-
c . ,:
CY,
CY:
:"\

:
f
y
=280 N/mm2
:

:
a=OAO
:
.
s=O,80

:t/:)
"
I\..
. .

t:
.
.
f;t

0( ,:

.......
'"
'.'
.'
:
:X
rx:\

, . .,'
: . \. ..
.'
...........
.'
l\")
, .
K\ [\\ K\
K\\
K
.. '
. :
'1"
:r ....

\\ l\\ ,\
, . . .
: ."
...

. ,
,. ," .'
/.,
]'j
, .. '
::'<:;::

/ ..
.\)

..
I" .....
.<i
.. . .' .'
.. .. .... .. '
."
.. - ....
" .... "
::/
.... ," ....
1/ V
V,
v .... ;.
i .. v. ..... ) .\\
:.
. " ......
.. .....
... j
'" ........ .. ........ .........
. .. ,
........
.. .....
0.00

'j/
7-V
:.:: " ...... : /.
V'"
/ VJ
J I.
.. .....
.... . " ........
',;.
.. ::':
./ /

<::I:.'
.
I

... ,
A'
9:'
":9,(
.
......
:V':
.'
1.5C
.. '
.. ?:Q(
3.0(
. ..........
1\
1/
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24
496
j.i = p feu xIQ-4
A, = j.i xbx t
d-d'
t;=-
t
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
P
u
fcu
xbxt
0.70
.0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
0
:
:
;
;
0;
"
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22
497
j.i=pfc"xIQ-4
A, = j.i xbx t
d-d'
t;=-
t
p-
frnxbxtk-______________________________________
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
q
:'

r
C'li

..
" .'
'-J
1 I I.' I I
.
........
:
..........
. .
fy 360 N/mm2
I-.;..:-
:"
, .
f--

..........
..........
.....
.
.
.
a=l.O

""C"
I"""
s=O.9

L:...-
"-
:
.

""'4
"
.
I--
:,
,0
,

.
.
.C"\ .
'f--.. 19.......
"-
N
"""
,.'
.
.

.
: K .
.

;-;.
r-......
,
,

.......
.......... ... C'I
t""""-
""'i"

:--..

... ,
x'
I'> .'

7"- ..z:

'X.. ':-..
K >' .....:.

" .....
r\..

J'...
"

.......
r-.....
"
.:-....

">
'\
.' ,
.'
r""

t':...

K
X
" .. ' R
"

>.
.. "
.'

' . .:J .
.. '
: 1'\,:

t--.:.' r><
1\. .. 1:'>( )
1'\:
,
.
.'
:

!,
".
r<
.""
.. '

f-\(
"
.
.
:i\' . \;
K:
" .''1

r\.
.'\
.1'\: .

....,

"

...
..'
.. '
: ... .. , .. '
)).

.)
r-r"
")
"'
[) . .
... )
):
.
.. .. '
..'

, '
. ,
: ...
-/: -::i
.. '
Il
. .,
I
.'
il.
.. J
'I"
1
. . :
..
' " "j
."
. ,
. ,
.
. .
':/
I ... " ...... If,
f/, V
'j
v j
.'
..V.-
.j If

:,"
....: ...
";""
. ,
"
.. ' j .. - .. '
."
:,.::::
"" .....

...............
/.
.:/.
.. '
[7..
f7
.'
V
."
V
/

/
' ..... ;:',;'
.. '
.. ' .. ;I
.. ' ./

\ .. .. ....

V
.'-/
".
V
1/
V
/
V
/.
V
V ,', ./ / j
0 N '<t CD co 0 N '<t CD
0 0 0 0 0 ....
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
co 0 N '<t CD co 0 N '<t CD co 0 N
N N N N N (') (') (') (') (') '<t '<t
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
M_
A's
Pu I._ xbxt2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.35 :: /) "':'or-..:.K'\.;-" .. '\ .
0.30 :: :'IX.[\.' X,'.) """ .50
0.25 :' '.\: .. \>-\. '.\ :) .. , r\ .. i\-""\" .. , ""
0.20 .' '.'1 . i/. .-1" 1.' ... II I .j . "'!I ./- .1 :,:.
: :' :: .. : >/' .r .. ', .. ' . .-"1 1/ .' .' .' 1 .' -' .' . 'J
0.15 '. ::. :.1.< .. ) .. ' V j .j ... , . .' J 1/
: .... ' . ... . . ,.. .. J .' - .' Ii" / If'
A's Pu
. M_
feu xbxt
2
jJ = p fe" X 10-4 Cs
jJ=pfe" X 10-4
(
498
As = jJ xbx t
A; =axA
s
d-d'
t;=-
t
T
As = jJ xbx t
Cc
d-d'
t;=-
t
499
p.
feu xbxt
1.00
:
:
R:
,.; :
f:
b'?" ........
.'1 1

1
.......
f
y
=360 N/mm2
:"

.
:"
t'-..
. a=l.O
:"
1'.. ...r'-v

:1'.
"':

.
. .
",-'
.....
j'{

f'i'
f'...
.
. .
rs.
.
.
: ....
"' .......
K' tz.:'
"-
K f'..-' f'.....
.
.
.
:'

,,-:-
:,

"
K

1'.'
:"
)-.

"
)10("
)"....
."
f',. ...
1'... K
)<

. ,
"-
K :x- X
). .'

:'-.,
.'"

1'0.:" b<
><
"
.X
.
.
.'"
I,\: I"X X
.X

K.

\..

:\('
K K.

r\: !X .
.,,\

.' '\ ........
-(
t\.
.,'
. .'"

f'(.
'\,
,\..
,\: ':\: ''\. '\
.. '\
."
.' 1\' .
I C\.1:
'1--

I

.

.

.,'
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
:
:
: ,I I
: . .

',,,

..
.'
.
.. ' .. '
i\ ....
"
\. "\. "\. .'\.

.. '
I\.
0.00
:
.
.
.:: ''j,
." ,/. .. '
II' II I.,
.f'
,.J'
'7 .J
!2,.OC : .' :f .'
. . '
.' "
.
., ,
t/'
rL:
1- L
"j
....
v'
j"
tI 1/,
:},QC
.
.' .
. ,
.'
, . .J "')
" ,
, .' .: ., ',' .. ,',',' , .' .. ' ......
;'::','.:: .:.:::::;::
',./
":/ .-j. , j,
.......

' .
"
"'/
" .

::); :: :;
V- .. ,
v" v'
V
!: ....
j o.
o N " CD
000 0
ci ci 0 ci
A's pu
<X)
a
0
a N '<t

0 0 0
v- ..
v..
V'
[7,
'/ '/
V 1/ 1/ / / /
co <X) a N '<t co <X) a
N N N N N C')
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
J.l= p leu X 10-4
As = J.l xbx t
d-d'
s=-
t
500
N '<t
C') C')
0 0
M.
feu
xbxt
'
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
a N
a a
0 0
'<t co <X)

N '<t
a a 0.
0 0 0 0 0 0
A's pu
co <X)

0 0
Cs
Cc
501
J.l = p lell x 10-
4
As = J.l xbx t
d-d'
s=-
t
M.
feu xbxt'
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0 C'4 '<t <0 00 0 C'4 '<t co 00
0 0 0 0 0
.,..
..- ..- ..- ..-
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A's
Pu
502
0 C'4 '<t
C'4 C'4 C'4
0 0 0
Jl=plcu xlO-4
As = Jl xbx t
d-d'
,=-
t
<0
C'4
0
00 0 C'4 '<t
C'4 C'") C'") C'")
o 000
Mu
leu xbxt
2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.80
0.75
0.70
0 C'4
0 0
0 0
A's
1.50
'<t <0 00 0 C'4 '<t co 00 0 C'4 '<t
0 0 0 ..- .,- .,- .,- .,- C'4 C'4 C'4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
co 00 0 C'4
C'4 C'4 C'") C'")
o 0 0 0
Pu Mu
Jl= p/cu X 10-4
leu xbxt
2
As = Jl xbxt
d-d'
t;=-
t
503
p.
leu xbxt
0.85
;:: :'
'<):
c{;
$"

0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0045
DAD
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
C? ci >....;
c--.'
,,'
C). :
:, .........
"
:
.
.
#
:r-.....'

:
.
. f
y
=360 N/mm2
. . a=O.60
:'"
K" &" r-......
s=O.90

\) .. '
"-

"
K
,..::-
.
.......

A
" "
,
.
:, .
.
. .
I""?'.
'>-

[)(
l's
.
.
0,\:
I:--
:-- :'"
;-....,
,,'i--
"

;;::.
SJjQ
x x i'..:

'" "
'<'

""

1>< ......
rx'>

.'

s: '. ...
,':'
x ....... x ......
K

K:"
.
.'
r\. .
\. \.
'.,
,,?,
x. <. K

.' ""\

..' :\3l'
\. .. '
..

".
\.,
."\

\:
.. '
.
r'x' .
\..
.
.. \
x ,':.">0

.,\
.,.\

.
,.' ,,'
.'\:
1,,\ 1'\
. .'

1-p.0
.' :\ .' .. '
; .:
..
:>"
iJ"

.\'
.,\
I\.
.. '\
..
..
'/'1
"

..
\.
\." \.
2.00 .. . ,
.'
.. '
.' , ...
..
,.',i
i ,','
:1
:;::j
.. , .. '
/" l'.
.J.
.-/
........
.. :'\
... '\
.. " '\
. .
. .. . ' ..
/ ........: ' .. ...
.'
.,'
........
\
q . .QQ
I I:'
....' .." ..
':.:.:;
.. '
'.-)
... /. ../
/ ....
r I
) :'::.:: :':::::'::
........
7
. ....
"-j
......
,.'
."
. . V:::'
7-
'./
...... -
T'
V
.' .
..
f."-'.i
........
/
a N
""
<D <Xl a N
""
<D
a a a a a
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
A's
Pu
504
/
<Xl

ci
/
/ / /
a N
"" N N N
ci ci ci
jJ= pIC<I X 10-
4
As = jJ xbx t
d-d'
s=-
t
<D
N
ci
J
I
/
<Xl a N
""
N C') C') C')
ci ci ci ci
Mu
leu xbxt
2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
a N
""
(0 co a N
""
(0 co a N '<t
a 0 a a a ...- ...- ...- ...- ...- N N N
ci ci c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i
(0 co a N
N N (") (")
c:i c:i c:i c:i
A's
Pu
Cs
jJ=plcu x10 -4
Cc
As = J1 xbx t
A; =axAs
. d-d'
As
T s=-
t
505
!c. xbxt L--___________ ----=----____ ---.J
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
C?
:
:::: :

... -.
........ ("',.
."'.
.
C),--::-
:
f
y
=360 N/mm2
,""

:
:
a=O.60
I
""
)(

.
.
.
S=O.70
.

-.......'"

r;.J
:'\.
, ..
,,)
'5Z.. '"
<>
.
.
.
:"
.
.

.
;""-
""" ....
K"
,,"\.
.
.:>'
.
-
:.'" >4
\i.. ....... ,)<

.'"
2<.....
.

":'.. ........

, "
, '"
X'"
K X" x"-
, ,

I:---:
, .....

.......
.X X' ix,:"
x'\
><
\}'
...:
" .'
.'
: :
,,,
.X
X K':'
\'"

i'\ .'

.. " ....
)\
X.
\>
:X (\

.,'

.'
r\

: ' '
..
, . , .
.... *' ,'\.. \) .:\ f\.''\
,.'\ f\"
. ,
}'
.. ).,

\ .. ,
\
,.\
"

..
: "
, . ..'
\ .
. , .. ,' .. '
. . ' "
.,'
. '
.........
n nn
: .'
' .
-;:;:,:; j:
'Z"
/:. / ..
J.

,.\
...
": .. ,,: :
............
....... -
' ..
........
.. '
j::::::

:':? ".j ::.-';
... '/
... .J
...... ./ .. .)
.. ). \ .
(Y>"
" , ",
"j. ........ .. , .. '

"7
:::/
l"::. ' y...:.,
/0" / ..
/
/ / / / I. / ,llh
.. ': 0"/
./
0 N -.:t (0 to 0 N -.:t <0 to 0 N -.:t <0 co
0 0 0 0 0 ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... N N N N N
0 0 ci 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ci 0
A's
Pu
M.
feu xbxt
2
J.l=p/cu xlO-4
As = J.l xbx t
d-d'
(=-
t
506
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.45 :"'-. .
=--i--,. "'t '-"'1; .......... ><.. .... . ...
0.40 .. ' .,' '
0.35 x. ........ "'-.:V" ",:\' .' 0"
. " i "Y' x'X .,... .' 0 A (\
0.30 . ", x X .:' ..... I'X.:"'." ".'\, " .. 0 0 .'
. '''1\,''': X \. ).t' '\.
0 N -.:t <0 to 0 N
0 0 0 0 0 ..... .....
ci 0 ci 0 0 0 ci
A's
Pu
-.:t <0
..... .....
0 0
507
to 0 N
..... N N
0 0 0
Jl= p feu X 10-4
As = J.l xbx t
d-d'
(=-
t
-.:t <0 to 0
N N N C')
ci ci 0 ci
feu xbxt
0.80
0.75
0 ;2,
::::'
iif.:
f/ If''

0 o : ,,': <:::I:'

,
f
y
=360 N/mm2
.('
:
N.
,
a=OAO

,

,
s=O.80

'"
:'
:"

,,,
, ,
,
,
,
:'\"

, , ,

,
,
,"
,
,"

:'" "

G
,,,
0 tx
e
!!(
.' "Ie
F--.

h

('X i\.),(
tx'<
t<
.
"
. ,'
... 0.('
" "

K:
r('\
l'< 0 1<'\
"

1\"-
.... ..
..........
.'
"
.: )<
X K'>-X ')

\\
\\
"
..........
,),.9
, .
........
, .
rx.,' {\ \\
\\
\\
"
. ,
. '
..........
. '
. ,
, ,
, .'
,,\,
J:
"

.. /- ......
, '
::'). .\',

\\
\\ ,,\
.VV
, '
..........
: :
............
........
. ,
.' r\. .'
..........
.
"::;: ..:; .. :/ 'j:'
:/
.).
).

.
..'

.7:'!Y
..
. , . ........
.. ..........
I : .'
. ........
.' .' ':l nn
i/.)
.. " ...... ,'
'::./
/ ....
It. ...
II .....
/ .. .... \

\\
........ -
..:: ..::
v. ...
f\'" ...... .... .. ...... ........
............
................ #0-
..

V ..
V
. /.
"7
/ J
) } )
\\
. ..
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
0 N
"'"
<0 co 0 N
"'"
<0

0 N
0 0 0 0
"'"
<0 co
0 N N N N
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
N
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
A's Mu
feu xbxt
2
A, =J.L xbxt
A; =axA,
d-d'
t;=-
t
508
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
feu xhxt
o
o
ci
N
0
ci
A's
"'" 0
ci
Pu
<0 CO 0
0 0
ci ci ci
N

ci
509
""'.
<0 CO

ci ci ci
J.L = p feu X 10-4
As =J.L xbxt
d-d'
t;=-
t
0
N
ci
N
"'" N N
ci ci
Mu
feu xhxt
2
Pu
Interaction Diagram for Rectangular sections
h"xbxt L-________________________________________
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
..
I.;? :
ct
Y l'$t'

C'\
I'-..
r--
":
I';'
I T.' I "1

: :
: .......
N.
,
fy-400 N/mm2
I-
,
: ......... K
.........
,,:
: a=l.O

."
.......
r-....
["<.:
'"
s=O.9
,"-i
K
.........
I--
."
'"
, ,
,
, ,
t"Z
.........

"
, ,
Q\
.t-....
""
, ,
t..- ....:. .... 1':'...
b'
"

K.
.........
1'0...
""
I"i'"

r-:...
"""
t:'-..
"'-
i'...

1;0-
",i- t:'..
):
"'-
K
",
"
K
')
r:....

,(,
t..-L.:. kt: I"-,. :-....
f'.-- "'t< /' .......,'
........
"-
,
"
K '!- :J'..
"'-
r'..
lX
.r:
r.-x.
"f'\..

.. '
"
.).;
.'
." lie> f'."
/'
"
IX IX
,>
IX:
I'
I\.
:'\ "
r'\
G-
"

.'

1\.,:
Ix
",,' )"
1<:'
r><
,I\:' 1,\ 1=,\ IA
,,'
, I'\.
)\'
I"
K
"",
K.

K
,
r-x
"
1"\
:
. : ,1\.,' ", .
.'
1'\..' I\.
:
: X,

IX",

,1'( ,\
.
",'
"
.. .... -
K
"
I'\.
"'
IS
;:;x
,,' 11...
:
:
: ,
, .
::\ " ....
!\-'
,"\ ,,'
1\,
.'
'\

.. '
K
"
, , ' ,
" 1\
.
.. . ,

,:1
':: ..
fl.
"
I I
."
i/. ,.! tt
I?
,
. '
, ,
.'
.. '
J . '
' , .. '
" ,
.
, '
"i .
..............
v..
,,;
..7
" ./ V 'j
/. ..
;-
., 'If'
.
:,':'
.... ',' ..' ,.'
.. -)
.. '
", ., ' , .
..'
.

v.: .
. /.
v:
V
,,'
''/
.. '
..
."
r/'
.. '
IT
/
/
./ V ..
\\;
V :7
V '/ V ./
17
V
V
/
V
/ 17 ,', J
0 N "<t <0 (IQ 0 N

<0 (IQ 0 N "<t
0 0 0 0 0 .... .... N N N
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
<0 (IQ 0 N "<t <0 (IQ 0 N "<t
N N
'" '"
'" '" '"
"<t "<t "<t
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M"
A's
Pu
leu xbxt
2
f.1 = p leu xlO-l
As = Jl xbx t
(
d-d'
t;=-
t
510

I
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0 N
0 0
0 0
A's
Interaction Diagram for Rectangular
Sections
"<t <0 (IQ 0 N
0 0 0 .... ....
0 0 0 0 0
"<t <0 (IQ
.... .... ....
0 0 0
0
N
0
N
N
0
g
c:i 0 ci ci 0 ci 0. ci
o N
"<l; "<l;
o 0
Pu
leuxbxt2
y,
Cs
Cc
511
f.1 = p feu X 10-1
As =f.1 xbxt
=axA,
d-d'
t;=-
t
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
p.
fc. xbxt '-----------------------'
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
c.
: ;:: <I).
-1

Jr.,
lr

"': I" ";i,
i'

I,'
t I I
,
f
y
=400 N/mm2
r:c---
:"-
""- :
,

: ........
"

:
0.=1.0
"'"
.",
: s=O,7

:""-
.

':'

)';. ""- :1"..
.
......
!'..:'
I'.s K
"'-
.: .........
.

.
.........
':'

.......
.
r-... .
"
.: .........
L> .'7"
I'. K
"',
""
.'"
!'.." .C'

::-.... )of'..
K
1)<
" ,
1><'
",1(5.

...-M

,
K
I"
:'-.
,"",
...
,,'X.
1'0-.:'
,
"

=
: ......
"
0i'

" ......
K,'
X

"
. ,,\3'
..""",.... X
.. ',
....
,C'
..........
. ,
K K l'X..
.. ""
x' X
'"'\
:\. .'
iii...
"
(\:' ,
,,'
"\
x

D'<
.x
",
f\;: '\..'
,,\
"
"
t\. "
:
:
'X
,,'X ' ,;...: 0'
K'" :\:
'\
1\"

........ ',\.\J
. ,
"
"
,
K,' lx:.

" ,
"
r\ f,\ '\
,-, ""
... 1\' " 1\" '
"

. ,
'-\
1.\,

'\
,)
, ,). :
. ,
,," " ,:.,,,

"
........
1\ r\.
.......
, ,
: ' ,
':}
:: .. ", ...
II',
1
,,1
",
II
'.1'
'j Ip.!
' , ' , .'
, . .' ,
"
i.j., .......
" ",
" . , " .
(/
:::1
" ........
v
V"
:/'
'') 1/"
V L
,3.(
. ,
. :.:':" ::.' .. : ......
, ,

",/
........
"/
" . ','
"
"
..:::,
,,'
v,: V'
'/ '2
"

v'
'v
7
"
v ::.::: ..........
........ ,,'
, ' "-/ L
S)
:!:": v..'
V
/.
"/
",.
'/
V / L
L'V '/
.. '
L
.,
0 N CD co 0 N CD co 0 N CD co 0 N CD 0 0 0 0 0 ..... ..... ..... ..... .....
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d
A's
(
512
N
d
N N N
d d d
As =p xbxt
d-d'
{;=-
t
N C') C') C') C')
d d 0 d d
M.
feu xbxt
2
'1
,
g
o 0 ci 0 d 0 0 0 0 0 d d 0 0 0
CD co
C') C')
c5 d
o N

d 0
A's Pu
M.
feu xbxt
2
513
p=p!c"xlO-4
As = p xbx t
d-d'
{;=-
t
<0 0()
(") (")
ci ci
A's Pu
Mu
514
As = J.l xbx t
d-d'
/;=-
t
feu xbxt
2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
a N '<t
a a a
ci ci ci
A's Pu
515
J.l= pjcu X 10-4
A, = J.l xbx t
d-d'
/;=-
t
Mu
feu xbxt
2
feu xbxt L--_________________ ---.J
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
: t?:
",f'
OJ'

c" r . : b':

<,
."
:
, ,

f'.. t'-.. : :
f
y
=400 N/mm2
.....

:,
,:
::, :
a=O.60
'
. "
'<!

:,
'-::
s=O.90

:'"
"

"
\(
,
,
"-

"-
"x
,
,
,
D:O:
-
,
,

;.--
-:.... '-./
,
"
"

,
.
,
I=--
r.--..
"-
)\
'"
>
'"

pY
I--
K
f"\

"X
">-.:'
0;9'>

I:--

I.', [?\

,x'

1:'0:.)-
)(

1\'
",
"
N N 'x X
)(
X
,X
,'"
\'\

"

\.,
"
,,'
"
\.
,

,X
"
/\
.\
'\
'-\
'\
'\
' "
"
",
, ,
\'
\,
X '\ '\
'\
'\
'\
,'\
.'\ .50
. ' . ,
/\
\"
K'
K,
K'
\'

1\
"
1\ f\. .
"
, :

,.'
, , .,'
, ,
, '
""
.. .. .. "
,:,,,
,r
':)
"\
,)
" "' 1'\.' '-
.' "\
..
. .
...

1\:, '
..
, . . :
' " \
r\. r\., '

.. '
"
..
, -
::1
' -
fI'-
l
11-' 'J . .\
,.\ .\
'\ \
'\'
: : :
: ........:
" ,
...... ; .... "
J
3.00
" , ", ,,'
:.::'::;

1-::
/.
1/,' '
'/ ',)
).,
-/
,"
-....
7
)
\ " " ':.J
", .-- ..
J
z' '/
,,,
v" "/ /
/
V
'/
/
/
/
.. ': ....
j I
0 N "<t" <0 00 0 N "<t" <0 00 0 N "<t" <0 co 0 N "' CO OJ
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A's
Pu
N
0 0
516
N N N N C"') (") C"') C"') ('f)
0 0 0 d ci c:i ci 0 ci
JI.= p feu X 10--4
Mu
hu xbxt
2
As =JI. xbxt
d-d'
t;=-
t
.. ..
I
I
feu xbxt
0 N "<t" <0 00 0 N "<t" <0 00 0 N "<t" <0 00 0 N "<t"
N N N N N C') C') C')
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0' 0 0
A's
Pu
Mu
feu xbxt
2
. JI.=pfcu xlO--4
As = JI. xbx t
d-d'
t;=-
t
517
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
a N '<t
a a a
d ci ci
<0 'co
a a
a ci
A's Pu
518
Jl=plcu xlO-4
As = Jl xbx t
d-d'
s=-
t
0.30 i./: ") , ...
0.25 ','::, .. \'. 'X" X .. ,\,,1\ " "\ ).:\J\ 1 ..5D
' . , " I. .\:).. " L)' .
A's
Pu
519
f1 = p leu X 10-
4
As = Jl xbx t
d-d'
s=-
t
Mu
I' xbx (2
Jcu
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0 N
0 0
ci ci
(
'<t CD co 0 N '<t CD co 0 N '<t CD
0 0 0 N N N N
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
co
N
ci
Mu
A's
Pu
feu xbxt
2
Jl=pfcu xlO-4
As = Jl xbx t
A; =axAs
d-d'
t;=-
t
520
0
C')
ci
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Pu
feu xbxt
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
0
0
ci
N
o
ci
(
I ....
,,'\
A's
CD
o
ci
co 0 N '<t
a -c-
ci ci d d
521
Jl = p feu xl 0-4
As = Jl xbx t
A; =ax As
d-d'
t;=-
t
o
N
ci
N
N
ci

.' I
CD
N
ci
APPENDIX C
(Uniform steel)
522
(Uniform Steel)
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24
J.l=p!cu xlO-4
As.roral = J.l b t
d-d
r
t;=-
t
523
GhOneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
(Uniform Steel)
feu b t
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22
Pu

J
1
b I
J.l=p!cu xlO-
4
As.roral = J.l b t
d-d
r
t;=-
t
524
(Uniform Steel)
h,bt L-____________________________________
525
f.l==pfc" X 10-4
A",o",1 == f.l b t
d-d'
t;==-
t
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
(Uniform Steel)
O.4C
o 0,02 0,04 0,06 0,08 0.1 0,12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26
526
A,,,o,al == f.l b t
d-d'
t;==-
t
(Uniform Steel)
527
As.talal = fJ. b t
d-d'
(==-
t
v.

fea b t
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
(Uniform Steel)
0.05 : 0.1C :' 0.1
O'f, ' . "
O.

: f
y
=280 N/mm2
N
:
S=O.7
:

K
,
,
: .....
, ...........

,
,

,

,
:"
,
: ...........
N"

k""
.x
:""-.
K

'12 .....

><-.
......... "

X" lX X"
..............
. :

<X.

X X:
...
5,"
U . .,l
0.3
OAf
u.

0.6(
"
:
:
: .......

()(

X',

... 0.7
.'
:"X l)()
"X

" .
y'\'
.\-.. \
.' O.S(
, . ,
.'
............
. ,..-\
.:\ .. ,
l:::'r
.'
.
.. '
1.0(
, ' ........
. ' .
" ..... .. '" , .... ..'
.. ..........
.... ' ,,,i
.J': .. : 1: ":y'
J. ...
...
.. '
.
.'
.'
.'
.. .'
.. '
, '
................ ........ .'
1 ""
. .
. .. .. .. .... .,'1
.'
...
:::::)
':1
/. .. )
... /
I'"
.. /
.r . ./-
.........
........< ..<:
.. .. : ....
-J-' '
,.:W(
:
............ ..........
"
.... ....
, .
V:"
;(::j
1.-,/
j" l .. t
t'}
:" :> ..
......................
"/
........
"/
.. .. 3.0(
" ,
........
.. ........
.. .... --
.. .. ---

\'i,;
ti'(
.. ::: .. :::::::
0
7;
/ ..
'I";
./ / I /
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 O.OS 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22
fJ. == p fea X 10-4
As.tatal = fJ. b t
d-d'
(=-
t
528
Ma
ha b t
2
(Uniform Steel)
0.95 .v. e/t= .1Q'
: .........
0.15:
a N .... eD 0() a N ....
a a a a a
d d d d d d d d
529
eD 0()

d d
a N .... eD
N N N N
d d d d
f1. = p f,,, X 10-4
d-d'
t;=-
t
0()
N
d
0.35
, 0.40
0.45
a N
C') C')
d d
M"
fe" b t
2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy

fa< bt
a N
a a
d d
(Uniform Steel)
.... eD 0() a N .... eD 0() a N ....
a a a
...,.
N N N
d d d d d d d d d d d
f1.=Ph" X 10-4
A . total = f1. b t
d-d'
t;=-
t
530
eD 0()
N N
d d
M"
feu b t
2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy

fa, bt
:
:
..
Uniform Steel
,v.v ..
e/t= .10 : 0.15
f,a-

.",
;,

:
fy-360 N/mm2
"
K
S=O.7
:1"-. .....
r--,.?
,,"
:', .......
t--..I'
'"

,
,
,
,
1=24
,
,
:', " ,,:"
"

.
,
.
:"
'"
:'",
)(

,
,
: .......... '-..;.
"

K'''
.:"

'"
K' rvx-.

""
!"'.
"
"11
r\/ K) '''\
.. "
,)(
IX' .' ,
:"

"

X
[X"
...

,X
X
1)(
L\('
\
.'
,., ..... . .

rx'\
.,'\.,
t\,(
X'. f'(> r\"\
,,"
, ..
1\ ....
.,'
: ,\
.\..
F\' l':\"" "'\.
..
l'x"
r\ .. \
"
. .'
. ,
l\""
. '\
.
. ,
.fr
.. ' '
t
.... , . ,
.. , ........
.' ,
, " .' .,' ..' ........
, ,
J< f'
.... -r
.. '
.. '
:
,
, " .......
.'
.' ........ , ........
.'
.' .' ..
.
,
:: : ..: .. ..
'1--- ,
".:/
'/"I}
.. '
.' ...... .... :) .'
.'
.'
. .... .. '
".1 .... 1'
1.. ..
. :/::",.: ..:
y'
../-.
'/" fl"
-:,- ........ .. ......
.. .. --
0.30

t) At)

,
0.50
.'
O.!iO
"
O.:W

1.QO
. 1:?Q
.2.00
,.<l . .u.v
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00

F\ ..

i"i: :
:,=/ ........
l{:',;
":y
...... - .. ,::/
'L
'.7'
".j
".t ...... -
",j'
11- ..
, .. 1
I 1/
V
.I .I I.
0 N '<t <D CICl 0 N '<t <D 0 a
C!
0 0
c:i c:i a c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i
531
CICl a
N
c:i c:i
r
A'Jolal = Ii b t
d-d'
4,=--
t
N '<t <D
N N N
c:i c:i c:i
M"
fc" b t
2
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy

/C" b t
(Uniform Steel)
Ii = P fe" x'lO-4
As.,o,al =.Ii b t
d-d'
(=-
t
532
,3.0
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
(Uniform Steel)
g g
o c:i d ci
00
o
d
o N "d" ID co
-r- .,.... .,....
d ci ci d c:i
533
o
N
d
N
N
d
"
jJ = P fa, X 10--4
As.totol = jJ b t
d-d'
t;=-
t
0.3!
.. ' "
.'
<0000
N N '"
d d ci
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0 N
0 0
d d
(Uniform Steel)
"<j- <0 00 0 N "<j- <0
0 0 0 ...... ...... ...... ......
d d d d d d d
,
-e-
534
"
00 0 N
...... N N
d d d
jJ = P!cOl X 10--4
ASJotal = jJ b t
d-d'
t;=-
t
0.35
n '"
"<j- <0 00
N N N
d d d

!cOl b t
2
APPENDIX D
Design Charts for Sections
Subjected to Eccentric Forces
535
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
""
o
ci
Ultimate Limit Design Chart for
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=240 N/mm2
Rb = -0.10 (tension)
=0
/.
C; =0.9
#
rs

....

II'
o
....
ci
N
....
ci
'<t
co "" 0 ....
ci
.... .... N
ci d 0
a=
N
N
ci
0
536

IP"
0.4

.3

01
<D
co
N
ci
1.2
""
N
ci
o
M
ci
N
M
ci
'<t
'" ci
Rb=-L
feu bxt
A =mxfCUbxt
s fy
A; =a As
co
M
ci
""
M
ci
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=240 N/mm2
Rb = -0.05 (tension) a 'u.
C; =0.9 /
IA
7

v
u

A
6:4

.3

V

J#F
U
ft

i/
,-
V
V
R=-L
b feu bxt
A =mx fc'"bxt
s fy
A; =a As
537

Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
0
0
0
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=240 Nfmm2
Rb=O
1;,=0.9
~
/ ~
V
I/J

.3
~ ~
~
~
0.2
~
~ ~
~ o .
~
fo'a:
0
~
V
~
V
/
/
N
"'"
U) 00 0 N
"'"
U) 00 0 N
"'"
U) 00 0 N
"'"
co 0 co co ... ..- ..- ..- ..- N N N N N (') (') (')
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d 0 0 0 0
ro
R ~
b- fcu
bxt
jI:=
/
V
In
U)
(')
0
clIO:'
A =OJX feu bxt
s fy
I b I A; =a As
538
.6
~
~ 5
.
00 co
(')
"'" 0 0
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
co
co
0
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=240 Nfmm2
Rb = 0.05
1;,=0.9
~
~
/
r
N
0
0
"'"
U) 00
0 co co
0 0 0
I I
b
co N
;!
U)
..- ..- ..-
0 d 0 d
0 =(J
6/
V
V
~
VOS
./
~ 0
. ~
L ~
V'
~
~
V
.3
t/:: V
~ ~
V
o.
~
V.
v
~
~
~
n
V
'"
u
00 0
..- N
0 0
N
N
0
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
odd d d d d ci d
ro
R ~
b-fcubxt
A =OJx
fcu
bxt
s fy
A; =a As
539
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Design of Reinforced Concrete Stru t '.
Cures
Eccentric Sections
0.30
0.28
f
y
=240 N/mm2
Rb=0.10
1;;=0.9
0.12 +--+--+--+--l!--.I-
0.10 +--+--+---+--
b I
~
co
....
ci ci
co 0 N
.... N N
ci ci ci
ro
540
'<I' co
N N
ci ci
co 0 N '<I'
N <'> <'> <'>
ci ci ci ci
R
- Pu .
b---
feu bxt
A =cox
feu
bxt
s fy
A; =a As
co co 0
<'> <'> '<I'
ci ci ci
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.30
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=240 N/mm2 L
a.=0
~ ~
0.28
Rb = 0.20
1;;=0.9
V
V
V
V
p.5
0.26
V
V
V
V
J
0.24
~
V
v- 10.4
V
/
./
V
0.22
V
V
V V
V
V I .3
0.20
V
V
V
v
V
V
V 1/ V
0.18
~ ~
V
V
P' .2
/.
V
V
V
0.16
~
~
V
17
V
"'" (
1
V' V
V
V
V
0.14
~
~
V
V
l...-
a.'
0
t::--: V
~
0.12
0.10
V'"
0.08
ro
R ~
b feu bxt
A =cox
fco
, bxt
s fy
A; =a As
541
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Stru t }'
cures
0.2 6
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
Eccentric Sections
fy-280 N/mm2
S =0.9
tx = l

IP'
.6

/.

05

....
"--.L
,
co 0 N
o .... ....
ci ci ci
I I
b
co
....
ci
o
N
ci

0.1
=(J
N
N
ci
542
0)
co
N
ci
co
N
ci
o
..,
ci
N
..,
ci
'
..,
ci
co
..,
ci

/'" bxt
A =f1Jx/'" bxt
, /'
A;=a A,
co
..,
ci
I
I

"
J
I
I
i

Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=280 N/mm2
S =0.9
A

vO.

0.1

,J

LI
.,

V
a= 0.6
/
IA

04
g S
dod ci dod d d d ci d d d d
o N
.., M
ci ci

c:i c::i 0 ci
0)

b- fc"bxt
A ==OJx
fcu
bxt
s fy
A; == a As
543
I,
Eccentric Sections
0.30
f
y
=280 N/mm2 (1= 0.6
V
Rb=O
S=0.9

17'
/

V

V
IV."

014

0.3

V .2

10-
V
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
i1
0.12

0.10

V
0.08
0.06
/V
0.04
0.02
/
0.00
0 N '<t CD CX> 0 N '<I' CD CX> 0 N '<I' CD CX> 0 N '<I' CD CX> 0
0 0 0 0 0 ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... N N N N N M M M M M '<I'
d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d

m
R - P"
b---
h bxt
A =liJX le bxt
s Iy
I
b I
A; =aA
s
544
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0
0
d
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=280 N/mm2
Rb = 0.05
S=0.9
/

t/

0.4

lh

V

0.1

=0

1/
"
N '<I' CD CX> 0 N '<I' CD CX> 0 N '<I' CD CX> 0 N
0 0 0 0 ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... N N N N N M M
d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d
m

b - le bxt
-,j

u.
'<I'
M
d

A = liJX I"" bxt
s Iy
I"
1
A;=a As
b
545
.6 /
V
v
V
V
CD CX> 0
M M '<l;
d d 0
Eccentric Sections
0.32
f
y
=280 N/mm2
V
Rb = 0.10
= .6
I; =0.9
//
...
v

V
V

V
/

t/'
V
",0

V

/
In ""
k%
V
V

V .......

.I.! .-

....-
0.1
:,......-

=

0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10

II'
17'
0.08
0.06
0.04
0 N "<t co co 0 N "<t co co 0 N '<t co co 0 N '<t co co 0
0 0 0 0 0 ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... N N N N N M M M M M '<t
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci

co
R -
b---
feu
bxt
A =OJX feu bxt
S fy
I"
b
1 A; =a As
546
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy

feu bt
2
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0
0
ci
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=280 N/mm2
Rb = 0.20
I; =0.9
V
V
V
V
V
/ V
V /
,/
7 l/
V
'/"
V
0.3
/ ,/ / ./

V
/"
V
0.2
/ ./ .......

V
V
V
.....
V
0.1
/' V

t%

V
V
I..-
=
t...--'

t:/

N "<t co co 0 N '<t co co 0 N '<t co co
0 0 0 0 ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... N N N N N
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
c}lO:
co
t
b
I
547
0:=0
V
/
V
V
V
/'
V
.5
I/'
V

v
0 N '<t co co 0
M M M M M "<t
ci ci ci ci ci ci
R -3-
b - feu bxt
A =OJx
fcu
bxt
s fy
A; =a As
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=360 N/mm2
Rb = -0.1 (tension)
i; :::0.9
l7
a 0.6
/

V
0.5

rY

( =0
...I11III

II'
co 0 N oot CD co 0
0 ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... N
c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i
(HO:
,oO
b
I
N oot CD co
N N N N
c:i c:i c:i c:i
Ol
548
o
..,
c:i
N
..,
c:i

b fcu bxt
A ={Oxfeubxt
s fy
A; =a As
CD
..,
c:i
co
..,
c:i
'1."

I
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
Eccentric Sections
fy:::360 N/mm2
Rb ::: -0.05 (tension)
i; =0.9
A

0.4

<'3
0.2
O.
a=O
...

/
a=
A
I"
V
oot CD co 0 N oot CD co 0 N oot CD co 0 N oot
0 0 0 ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... N N N N N
.., .., ..,
c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i
Ol

b- feu bxt

V'
D.5
CD
..,
c:i
(HO:
A = {Ox feu bxt
s fy
I
b I
A; =a As
549
/
co 0
..,
oot
c:i c:i
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
0
0
0
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=360 N/mm2 a = O. I:i
Rb=O
V
1; =0.9
/

/.

0.4

riG

V

V V.I'
0:
IN= n
I"

/'
;'
/
/
N .r CD ClO 0 N

CD ClO 0 N .r CD ClO 0 N .r CD
0 0 0 0 .... .... .... .... N N N N N M M M M
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 c
00
cHO:

b -
feu bxt
A =OJxfcUbxt
s fy
I" b I
A; =a As
550
V
ClO 0
M .r
c c
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
M"
feu b t
2
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=360 N/mm2
Rb = 0.05
1; =0.9

/ t2"

V 0.4
6

/"
'"

/' 0.2

n
-

,
rY
/
/
.5
/
'/
,
0.04
0.02
N .r CD ClO 0 N .r CD ClO 0 N .r CD ClO 0 N .r CD
0 0 0 0 .... .... .... .... .... N N N N N M M M M
c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c
00
cHO:
p"
R=--
b feo, bxt
A =OJxfeubxt
s fy
A; =a As
I
b -I
551
L
ClO 0
M .r
c c
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
M"
feu b t
2
0.32
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=360 N/mm2
0.30
Rb = 0.10
1;;=0.9
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
~
~
If'
0.08
0.06
0.04
N oo:t CD <X) 0 N
0 q 0 0 .... ....
c:i 0 c:i c:i c:i c:i
b " I
IT
/
VV
V
V
V"
L ./
~
V
~
V
U.'1
/ V
k%

V
L
o.
~
~
V
A t -,
~ ~
V
........
0.1
~
~
~
0.=0
oo:t CD <X) 0 N oo:t
.... .... .... N
<'!
N
c:i c:i c:i c:i 0 c:i
co
552
CD
N
c:i
<X) 0 N oo:t
N M M M
c:i c:i c:i c:i
R ~
b - h" bxt
A =aJxh"bxt
S fy
A; =a A,
CD
M
c:i
1= o. 6/
V
.5
<X) 0
..,
oo:t
c:i c:i
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.1 2
0.1 0
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=360 N/mm2
Rb = 0.20
1;;=0.9
/
L
V
l/
V
V
V
V
/ /
~ ~
'"
V
V
V
V n-:t
V

/
V
V"
~
V
~
./ L
0 2
~
~
/
i"
V
~
~
~ V
o.
~
~
V

~
~
I--
p,= ~
/J. ~
V
I--
~
/'
=
. ~
/
/
/ 1.5
V
/'
V
V
0.4
0.0 8 t---
~
0.0 6
0
0 N oo:t CD <X) 0 N oo:t
0 0 0 0 0 .... .... ....
c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i c:i
(HO:
R ~
b- fc"bxt
A =aJxfc"bxt
, fy
I' b "I
A; =a A,
553
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
ex>
0
ci
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=400 N/mm2
s=0.9
01
0=0
..01IIII
/
I'
0 N

co ex> 0
.... .... .... .... N
ci ci ci ci ci ci
b ' I
0;=

V
/
f
/

i/

.2
N
"""
co
N N N
ci ci ci
(j)
554
ex>
N
ci
0 N
"""
M M M
ci ci ci

leu bxt
co
M
ci
A =OJx!cubxt
s Iy
A; =a As
ex> 0
M
""" ci ci
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
M"
h" b t
2
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
Eccentric Sections
fy=400 N/mm2
s=0.9
A
=(
.6/
/

u.
f"

0.20

V
.,
0.18

0.16
p.2

..l1li 0 =0

"
./
,
/
V
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
"""
co ex> 0 N
"""
co ex> 0 N
"""
co ex> 0 N
"""
co
0 0 0 .... .... .... .... .... N N N N N M M M M
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
(j)
cHO:
P
u
R---
b- lcubxt
A =OJx
lcu
bxt
s Iy
A; =a As
I' b I
555
V
ex> 0
M
""" ci ci
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Mu
/.U b t
2
0.30
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=400 N/mm2
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
Rb=O
V
s=0.9
=(

O.r:;
/
IA

v
A-
lA

B-1
c = 0

,...
./
V
V
/
s 8
odd d d d ci dod ci d
co
556
0 N
NNMMMMM
ci ci ci c:i ci ci c:i
R
- P,.
b----
leu bxt
A =OJx
leu
bxt
s Iy
A; =a As
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Mu
leu b t
2
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.0 6
0.0 4
0.0 2
0
0
ci
Eccentric Sections
fy=400 N/mm2
Rb = 0.05
S=0.9

'/
1

u.-v

,,-
/
N
'"
co 0 N
'"
co 0
0 .... .... .... .... .... N
0 0 0
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
co
557
/

V
.&.
N
'"
N N N
ci ci ci
/
( =(

V
/ o.

1/1

1-'014-
co
N
ci
0
'" ci

ci ci c:i d ci
R --.L
b- IC"bxt
A =OJxlellbxt
s Iy
A; =a As
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=400 N/mm2
Rb = 0.10
=(
V
i.7'
=0.9
V
V
/
V
V

/'
V

v
,;0.4
/.
...,,-

V

V
VI"

v
I---
0.2
V

l.--
i--'"
J,...-
17
-.r <0 co 0
'"
-.r <0 co 0
'"
-.r <0 co 0
'"
-.r <0
'"
0

0 ... ... ... ... ...
'"
'" '"
'"
'" '" '" '"
M
'" 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ro

I, -
feu bxt
A =wxfCUbxt
, fy
A; = a A,
I" b' 1
558
0
'<t
0
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
Eccentric Sections
f
y
=400 N/mm2
Rb = 0.20

... V
v
V
V
V ....
./
V
V
V
V

V V
V
V
"" ...,,-
V

V
V
L.- V I'"
V

V

V
IQ.2
V
V
..

v

V L-

I:x=

V
a=
V
... V
V'
'"
g
d d dod d dod C d d d d dod 0 ci
ro
,- b' ,
559

b- fcu
bxt
A =wx
feu
bxt
, fy
A; =a A,
APPENDIX E
for Circular Sections
560
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
w
~
Interaction Diagram for Circular Sections
o ~ 0 ~ 0 ~ 0 ~ 0 ~ 0 ~ 0 ~ 0 ~
o 0 ~ ~ N N ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ m ~ ~ ~
o 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
r/
';=-
r
f1=pfcu xlO-
4
561
1.8 ...----.--...---..-....,..-r---r---r---rr---r--:r---rl-...,..''""T"I-'T"I-:"''-,-I-,
e/r= .1" '.
v n ~ : '
1.7 '-----I---t--f-:I............. 'f
y
=240 N/mm2
r- :, ..... ,: 0.0':
o
o
o
~
o
o
o
~
c::i
~
~
o
~
N
o
o ~
~ ~
o c::i
562
~
~
o
r/
q=-
r
o
~
o
~
~
c::i
f1 = p feu x 10-4
o
m
o
~
m
o
[gJ
~
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0 I!)
0 I!)
0 I!)
'<I" '<I" I!) I!)
<0 <0
0 0 0 0 0 0
~
j", r'
r'
~ =
r
Jl = p j", X 10-4
A',lolal = Jl 7f r 2
563
o to 0 to 0
00,- ~ N
c:i d 0 ci ci
P
u
-+-
I
LO 0 LO 0
('\J. ('t) (t) -.::t
ci ci 0 ci
564
T3
T2
T,
* g ~ g ~ ~ ~ g
d ci ci 0 ci 0 ci ci
r'
4=-
r
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Design of Reinforced Concrete St
ructures
IIJ
~
0 LO 0 LO 0 LO 0
0 0 ...... ...... N N
LO 0 LO 0 LO 0 LO 0 LO
0
(') (') '<t '<t
0 0 0 0 0
LO LO
~
<0 t- t-
o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Pu-f- 0.67 feu
~
Mu
i fell r3
(
e r'
~ =
r
T4
f.l= p feu X 10-4
T, AS.lolaf = J.i 7C r 2
T,
T,
565
r'
~ =
r
f.l=pjeu xlO-4
566
, .
i
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
II]
~
0 t!) 0 t!) 0 t!) 0 t!) 0 t!) 0 t!) 0 t!) 0 t!) 0 t!) 0 10
0 0 ~ ~ N N C') C') '<t" '<t" t!) t!) <D <D r- r- oo (X) 0> 0>
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ci ci ci 0 ci ci ci ci
Pu -t- 0.67 hu
Mu
I
(
e
r'
q=-
r
T.
fJ= P feu X 10-4
ASJofal = fJ 7r r2
T3
T2
T,
567
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
C'
r.
P
u
-+-
i
T,
T2
T,
568
q ~
r
fJ=pfeu xlO-
4
A - /Iff r2
S.fOlat - r
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
10 0 10 0 10
~
10 0 10 0
d
N N
'"
'"
10 0 10 0 ci ci ci ci c:i
~ 10 10 <0 <0 l'- l'- co 0 ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
P
u
-+- 0.67 ~
I
r'
;=-
r
P=Ph" X 10-4
569
P
u
-+-
i
570
T,
T2
T,
r'
;=-
r
P = P hu x 10-4
2
As.lolal = f.l ,. r
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
II1
~
to 0 to <:) to
"'f"- C'\I N ('I") ('t)
ci 0 0 ci d
o to 0 to 0 to <:)
"d" " LO to CD CD t-
ei ci ci d ci ci ci
q ~
r
to 0 1O 0 lD
t- CX) co en Ol
ci d ci d ci
jJ = p feu x 10-4
As,total = jJ 1l: r2 ,
571
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
rIl
~
o I() 0
o 0 ~
ci ci ci
to 0 1.0 0
't"- C'\I C\I C"')
ci ci ci ci
Pu-f-
i
to 0 to, <:) to 0 to 0 to
('t) ~ ~ to to CD CD t- t-
o ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
T,
T2
T,
572
rt
q=-
r
jJ=pfcu x10 -4
As,total = jJ 1l: r2
o I()
co co
ci ci
APPENDIX F
for Hollow Circular Sections
573
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Interaction Diagram for
Hollow Circular Sections
f
y
=360 N/mm2
s=O.95 , !l. = 0.95
r
0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60
r'
q==-
r
f.l==picu xIO-4
574
q ~
r
f.l==pj<u xIO-4
575
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.3
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0040 0045 0.50 0.55 0.60
p -e.-
U I
i r'
,;=-
r

Ac = 11: '(r
2
-r/)
r
As,lolal = J1 x Ac
576
I
fell xAc
1 . 0 -.---.--rorr-....... _.,...... ---;:...,t5".;r \ ---"3>i?:s:1 .. '
;. a' . . <::::i' "," "," "," 1::>;' <;:) "
'fj': : 0: : :' : : . . . ..'
I---+--.:!'..,.;.J: :' :' .: . . f
y
=360 N/mm2
0.9 : 1'--...(--- r--..:': :' ---- : S';'O.95 , !l = 0.80
1---1-_' l . : r
0.8 !' : :'
":l / :': ./ ...... ...-... . ..,/ ')'?'
.'
:,1:''''1'' K .,. . . " . .
0.7 . l'<K'" ....... . .' ." .' .' c%'
: . .' .... / ..- 1;:19.
:( :<K ........ ..--' .. "-- .....
0.6 K ".:'XIX .:t'... . ..- ./ .... .y.-
1'---+-...:.....;. l ;.(...- .: .: .... K. .. ./ ./ ...... '
"" l ........ 1'>'..: V'x l" ". .' .'
0.3
0.2
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0040 0045 0.50 0.55 0.60
p -e.-
U I
i
577
r'
,;=-
r
J.l= p/cu X 10-4
Ac = 11: (r2 - r/)
As.total = J1 x Ac
M"
0.8 :" '/ ...... .
1---"';-';"":,,- . .' . . .
0.3
p -e.-
U I
i

r
JL=p/cu xlO-4
As,total = JL x Ac
578
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0
;.
'if':
"",
....
......
"i'
0 0:
:
p -e.-
U I
579
r'

r
JL=p/,u xlO-
4
As.total = J-l x Ac
I,
;
"
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
~
icll xAc
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
<\t' "',
c:::;:' <;:).:
0:
I :
"',
f
y
=360 N/mm2
: s=O.95 , !i = 0.60
:
r
: "
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
3.0
.-.-
4.0
........
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
p -.-
u I
M"
Mu
(
e
i r'
~ =
r
f.l=p/cu XJO -
4
580
APPENDIX G
for Box Sections
581
[I
f
:
Interaction Diagram for Box Sect"lons

feu A,
0.85
0.8
0.7
0.7
0.6
0
5
0
5
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
:
:
:
:
:
:
...........
:'f'....
:,
'"
"-
t"--...
"'"
""'-
f'..
'"
'"
"'
:--..
t'-....
"-..
i .........
""
'"
"'-
"
:"-....
........
i'...
'"
'"

...........
"-

...............
.........
t"--... I'-..
"-
..........
......
t'--.
"\
I\.
fJ'
\
}
..IV
/V V
/VV /"
'"
t--...
........
'"
...........
" ........
"-
""
I'"
"'-
"-
I
J
V
/
./
I I I
f
y
=360 N/mm2
s=O.95
"'-
cx.=O.l
i'-..
"
""-.
"-
'"
"
"'-
"
""'-
'"
........
'"
"
........
"'-
D=2{
........
,
"
""-
'\
I\.
"-
........

'"
"
"-
"'\
"
"
r\. f\. 1\
1"-
"
'\ \ In\ .n\ .. \ \ .n \
...
J J
7 / 7 / / J J J
'/
V
V / / / / ./
[7
V / ./
v
V
II
0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22 024 . 0.26 0.28
Mu
(
t l;;t
Pu-lo-
I
AS,tota1fS
cI
- -----------
As totallS
582
t;=(d -d')/t
Jl = pxJcu X 10-4
AS/
olld
= Jl Ac
l' Ghoneim & Elmihilmy Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures

..
!;j.
I
w

I

;;

'M

'I

I

11
I
I

"
,
I
I

i
I
I

L Interaction Diagram for Box Sections
0.80
0.75
0.70
0:65
U.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
I--
:
:
:
I
.. ft f'.....
f'...
'"
fy-360 N/mm2
:1'-.......
'"
i"'-"
S=O.95
cx.=0.15
r.........
'"
'"
"
I'-..
: ........
......

'"
"
........
"
r-.... r--..
: ........
........
'"

'"
"
........
'"
"'-
r--..
: .........
.......
'"

'"
'"
.........
........
t......
t-....
""
t-....
:""'-
.........
t"--... i'-..
'"
"-
"-
......
I'-.......
,
,"
"-
......
i'-..
'"

"'-
"-
...........
t\.
'"
"-

:'"
"'"
'i
r"-...
"-
'"

'"
'"
'\ '\
""
:
"'
",-"
"
.......
t".... If\.
"- "-
\
\1"
I\..
:
"
'"
"
........ '\
,
"
\
"
"-

=2
1\
\4
6 8 10 12 14
16 18
I
J J
II
/ I
/
V
V
[7 -;; -;
-;
7 7 7 7
./
V
V
/ /
j
V
V
V II / /
20
0.05
0.00
0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28
As,total/S
e
cJ
- -----------
Mu
(
t l;;t
As totaVS
583
t; =(d -d')/t
Jl = pxJcu X 10-4
AS/alai = Jl Ac
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
~
Interaction Diagram for Box Sections ]
/" Ac
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
:
:
:
. ""'-
Ii"'-.. ~
: ~ ~
t'..... ~
:""
t'-...."
I'-...
:'
""
b-...
1""'-
'"'"
......
I'-.. t'.....
!"'"
...........
"" r-......
:'"
"'"
.........
I'-..
~
""
""-
:
" "
'\.
p=2
/
/
v
L
./
V
V
~
~
'"
""
"'"
'"

'"

'"
"'-
~
1'-.,,'
"-
~
," ," "
'"
'" "
r-..
'"

"

"
'\
\4 , ~
1/
1
/ I /
'/
/ V
V. / /
fy-360 N/mm2
s=O.95
a=O.20
i"'"

""-
"'-
"
'"
' ~ ~ ~
"
""
'"
f\
,
"-
~
"
\ \ \
\p
20
\ \ f\
\
\
1 '1
, 14 16 18
/ / / I
V
/
I
/ I I
/ / / / /
0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.24 0.26
e
Mu
(
t 1;t cI
- -------- --
584
t;=(d -d')/t
p = pxf cu xlO-4
ASJotai = pAc
feu Ac
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
:
:
:
Interaction Diagram for Box Sections
............
: ~
"-
fy 360 N/mm2
: ~ ~ ~
s=O.95
........
""

a=O.25
t'..... i'....
: ........
.........
~ ~
"'-
"
,
:'
'"'"
"" ' ,,-'
""-,,
"-
..... .........
!""'-
...........
,""
i'.." ," ,'"
,""-
......
!"'"
............
...... ""- ""-
'"
"
""- ""-
:",
"" "
"
'" "
"'-
"'" "'"
.: ...............
"
""
'" '"
I'"
I'.-. ~ 1\ 1\
"'" '"
1"-
""
"'-
~
~ \
\
\ ~
=20
'\. r\."
'\
\ \ \
\ '
~
p=
\ ~
\6
8 10 \ 12\1 \ 16
1\ 18 '
) )
J
J I
/ / I
II I
/ I I I
/ / / / I / /
/
/
./
V
V V /
/
V J
I / I
0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.'12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.24
e
cI
- -------- --
Mu
(
t 1;t
585
t; =(d -d')/t
p= pxfcu xlO-4
ASJotai = pAc
APPENDIX H
for Biaxially Loaded Sections
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
MlIy
J::tb2
0.20
0.18
i

0.16
1
'---
0.14

----
0.12
-
0.10
r-+--
0.08
I--..J..
I
t-:-
0.06
i
I..-
I
Ft=::
0.04
I
I
.
r=fY
0.02
i
1
0.00
INTERACTION DIAGRAMS FOR BIAXIALL Y
LOADED SECTIONS
I
i
i ,
i
f
y
=240 N/mm2
I
I
; i
1 i I
(, =0.80
--+-... I
\
\
i :
Rb =0 I
[':::
!
--
i I \
'l
i
I
i
i
; I
I't
I
...............
I
K ....... , ,
i'
J"
."
i'...;
i
t-....
'-
i
t-....
"'"
"-
f'.... =241

N
"'-(22 1\..'
,
r-......
,
,
f'
"I',," ."
20 I"
)... i
i
t--......i
"\,18
'\L "-
i
..........

N.6f
t\..

\. '\ i

i"-..
t"\ 'i\.
1\: \
\ I
t-! '\l
1\.,
I\.
:\
'\ i\i
,
i
I
f"..,,"

1\ f\ \J r\ 1\ .\
\1
i'-t..
"-
II!
\j
i\
\
1\
\1 1\
-,
r\ i\
I \

'\ 1\1\
"
\/ 1\
'{4
-,

1\
1\ \' 1\ i\
"
1\ i \
1\
'1
\: i\
1
\ i ,
1\
,
I
1
\
i \ I
11 1\ i \
\ i !\ \
!
l-
l-
I-
,
!
j
i
,
.
!
,
i
i
i
!
I
;
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
cg:]

P
R
h
=-"-
fe" bl
Jl = P j,," X 10-4
A . ,o,o' = J.l b I
587
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
M
lly
J:tb2
0.20
r--+-
1
0.18
'-- I
i
---r::
0.16

I--l-.
i
0.14
"-
I
,-

0.12
R::

0.10
I

0.08
0.06
t--J.........
1--\
\"""
1
0.04
0.02
1
i
0.00
1
LOADED SECTIONS
! I
1
i
T
i I

f
y
=240 N/mm2
!
i
(, :::0.80

""'"
:
r--....
!
Rb::: 0.10 i
r-L f'-.
i"
I
i I
i
I
1"-
1 i i
r-. I ; !
i"""
........... N N
i
1
i
I

.........
,"
.... 1""-
"'
I
i !
I
1::.:
"
"-
p=2 t

"
f"':
N 1\..
"\
I\...
.
I 22
1"
"-
"" i"'-
1\..2 "\'
t\.
f': 1'-... '1::
1"'\8
I\. '\
"
I
N.
""
i'-..
"'\1
"'iii

'\1\.
1'\1 '\ i
r-....:
'"

.1?K
'{

\\
l" I': 1\.1
,"\.l
t\.!\
,,\
"
i\

"",
['\.1_
I\. I'\.
'{
1\' \ 1\ \
\
i
I
i
I
i
I
r-.....i i'-... '6
r\
\

,
r\ \ 1\1
1\4 \. 1\ \J 1\
.\
\
1\ \ \
i r"<
,
1\
\1 '
1\ \
,
\ 1 \
I
\
1\ \ I\T\
,
1\ 1
,
I \
-,
1\ 111 1\ 1\ \ 1\
I-
r-
I-
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
588

b fc"bt
Jl = P j", xlO-4
A."o,a' = J.l b t
cg:]

Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Design of Reinforced Concrete
0
0.1 8
LOADED SECTIONS

,
I I
f y==240 N/mm2
l-
t-
r-I
f".-
'"
I 1
i-t--
1--""
r-.... !
i
i
1;; ==0.80
Rb == 0.20
I ........
"
,
I-
l-
f-
-,.........
6 f..- !
"-
f',.. "I 1
rq:::
"-

0.1
I
I
,
1
i
i
,
I
--;--
b.L
.......... .........
i" i t....
'"
'-.1 i
! 1 :
N--1--....1
'"
I'-
"-

!
,
r--.... i
I
[
j
0.14
i-
f" t-.
"-
......... f',
I'...
"
I'\p-2
I i
I
r-... l\.
I-- I'.. I'- 'I'-.. "'

I
I
i
.....
F'".......... " ",,-

,
I\.
:
i ....... r-.... I'-. "I\..
'I.
\. '
1\.
I-- "
1'--.. l" [': ]'\.. "\ l14
" "
'\ I\.
i-- ""r-... "' '" No.2"
r\.
'\ ,r\. \
b.. ....... "]'\.." '\ p 1\.
1'\ " 1\ r\
\

i
J'... '" ,8 '\ '\ 1\ r\
\
/\
\
1\
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
, I'. '" 1\
\
1\
\
1\ \
"I\. . I\. \
T\ /\ \
-1\
\ \
"i\\ f\
'\ '
.\ \
,

I '\ ' 1\ \ \ i.\
.\
1\ \
! /\ \ \ \ ,\ \:
1
0.04
0.02
0.00
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
IX]

f.L = p I,u xlO-4

As,total = J.i b t
As total 4 1---1
, I b I
589
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
May
INTERACTION DIAGRAMS FOR BIAXIALLY
LOADED SECTIONS
--;:ti7
0.20
1
\
I 1
\
i
,
i
t--
f
y
==240 N/mm2
It--...
\
\
1;;==0.80
F"'"
r-.L
.......
l'.....
1
Rb == 0.30
FF=-.
I
1'---.
\
..... ;
N-
l' r-....
.......
N-"" t--...l
I \
\
l-.....
\'-..

I
t---..\
I
"!" ",1
"
't'...
\
r-
f""....
......

t'-,.l .......
"-
'"
1
t-.
r-..
i'-
-....
i'-.
i'.. l'.
'l\..
\
'!-...
-",

"-: I"
I'" '" "
20 I'\.
l"-
t-

I'
to... ""-
f'..
"'l\.
,
N-..
.........
"
"
"'I. is
N
I'\.
"

I
l'
" 1'..14 '"
l"\.
1\. '\
"
I
t-..,.i

\'.- I"-.
t'\..1.
"

" ' '\
\\. \
t-l
.......... r-...,
,"
t"\.
-..,
"\
"1\
\
'\
[\
0

'"
f'...
"
I'\.
'\
r\
, "
i\ f\
\
8
.........
r-..., 1""-
"
1,\ 1\ I\.
\ f\
\
"'1\.
\
i\ \
\
1\
"
1\
\
2
\
,'<;
\\
\
\ r\ \
\
1\

!
l\
' . \ r\
'\
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.0
,
f-
f-
l-
!
\
i
!
\\
\
\
\\
I
\
0 0.0 0.12 0.14 0.16
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08
0.1

b fea bt
f.L=p/",xIO-4
As,tatal = J.i b t
590
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
D"'9" of R,,"ro,"" C'"=" SO,"",,, 1 Ghooolm & ElmlhUm,
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00

INTERACTION DIAGRAMS FOR BIAXIALL Y INTERACTION DIAGRAMS FOR BIAXIALL Y
LOADED SECTIONS I, M", LOADED SECTIONS
77il

;% 0.20 \; I. \
I.-i--I--+--l--+-+++-+--t--t--t--t-H f y=240 N/mm2
i 0.18 : ' 1 I \ I i 1; =0.80
i! iii i Rb = 0.50

0.16 i. ! 1 iii
I 0.14 l-+-: I -+--+: +-T-', -+-+! ,-t\ i I
i.,. 0.12 r-!- \ " "1' ' I, \ !
}j!, ' -t'-{... I' I: I I i
0.10 t-1--_ iii i I
p!=24 i' i i ! !
....... ....b--+'
0.08 . ;;:;.",., i i I !
.......
r+-r--... \ i'-.. 1"-' \. 1 \ \ I \
0.06 l"- I I'\. '\ \\ \ \
I
, 0.0 \. i \. 1\ \ ;
, 4 i 1\ !\ \1 r'\ i \ i
I: 0.0 . \ \ \ \1 \
2 i \ i\ \ \ \ \\ \ I
I \ \ \ \ \ \1
i
1
i
I I I
,
!
I
f y=240 N/mm2 f-
, ;
,
I i
, 1; =0.80 f-
Rb = OAO
--r-..
i
, -
i

, I
,
-.;......".
r--......
f'..
I
, ,
I
r--i-
I
.........

,
I
!
........
,i
'-I
i
\

-.....
1'-.
'"
I i
,
r---:-
"-
r-..,.I
'-l
"-
y=2
,
:
\
,
,
r--;::
"
i"
'''\
22 :"\
,
I

i'--....
l"'l
"
'\.20
'\,J \.1
i
:
,
I
r-i-..
. """ ,
"
t\..1
"
\. iii "\ l'\.
"
I
""
'-l
i\.i j"
I
r'\ -....L
.
! .....
.........:.
'"
'\ ;\
'\
\:
I
I
.
-r........
:'

f\
i\ !\
'1.. r.... I
,
r--l.. 'K '{10 r\ ! \

1\ ' ,
:\
,
,
! '.....1
8 !\ '-\ \\ i\ \
1\ '
i'..
\6
\1 '
1\ \' 1\ ; \ l
,:
\
I

iY \
\ 1 \ 1\
\1
i
f-
-
f-
I
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
2 0.00
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16
[KJ

R
- P"
h---
J,.u b t
x
.-.-.,.
0.67 t,u
As/oral = J.l b t
591

r
r,
F
Itt
I'
iL
x
A,.,o,nl = J.l b t
592
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Design of Reinforced C'" ,',
oncrete Structures', '
LOADED SECTIONS
0.2 0
I :
,
I
-
-
0.1 8
! Fy=240 N/mm2
l-
i
S =0.80
l-
i
Rb = 0.60
0.1 6
! !-
i
,
I
,
0.14
i
,
0.12
;
0.10 i
-
!
:
,
! ,
r----
I
1
--
r-- !
I 0.08
0.02

' .........
N
,
,
:"'-.
p=24
---
,
l'l22 "\:
'"
20 i \
\
--
------- t::---.

1\
,
\

i
16
\/

,!
"-
\1
1\ \
1
;
\i
\ I \ i\
1
,
0.06
0.04
0.00
o
0.02 0.04' 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18
Y" r---,

As,lota,l4 I ex P
t-- u
1+
P
Rb =-"-
h"bt
x
.-.-.,.
0,67 f,"
-y,-
A','OWI = J-L b t
593
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
i
LOADED SECTIONS
j
!
I
I
,
i
I
I
f y=280 N/mm2
r-+-t-.J I
i !
1 I I I
I i K
r r-+--....
i
-t--r-..J i'-
I
: .......
r-....
I
I
:-
I-k
i ......
I"--!--
i
K
:
;--.-...
i
r-r-
r--i 1'-
,
1 N
i
i'-!....
I ......
I !
t--t-
!

1 ;--....
!
H--

J
; ........
,,!
r-
1"--.:
l\:'
, , .......
6 !
,
, ....
i"'..i 4
"{
i
!
i\ i\ I-

,
"
i \
i
,
1
Y"

I
N
!

!
I'-.,!
i'"
"l
I
1
"'
i'.!
"
'Ii?

1\.1
1\
\.
,
,

i\
1\
i
As total/4 ! ex p
, i+
u
i
! :
i'-..i
r-...
!
N 'k
I'
I '"'

'"',
"
t'-..!

18
r'\.
f'....i16
14 f\,. [\.
"i

f\. J'\
r\.i I\. ! '

\
1\
L\.
\i
t\ , ,
'I \,
1\
1\
x
._ .......
0.671,"
-y,-
594
1; =0.80 I
I
Rb= 0
1 !
:
I
,
i
, I I 1
I
i 1 I
i I
I I
!
" !P= 4
! I I
I
22'K.
I
i
I
i
i
1\.1 i i
i
'J\:

I
i i
!
I\.!"
j !
1\. '\ 1"\:
1
\.1" i\
\
:
'{
'\J \ J
1\
1\ \ \'
\:
1\
! \
\
J
\ \1 1\ : \ i
'\ \ \1 l\ 1
i\
I ,
!\
!\ \ [l
i
i 1\
; ,
\ 11
!
'I \ "
i\
li

h-
ieu bt
p=p!" x 10""
As,total = J.l b 't
I----
I----
I----
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy

LOADED SECTIONS
feu t b
2
0.2 2
r-r--L
,
i
;
k
i

,
: i
f
y
=280 N/mm2
l-
i
I i"'-
!
!
,
s=0.80 I-
, ;
:--
r-.l
! ...........
,
I
I
Rb = 0.10
I-
...... i
t--t-
I'-}..

r", ! ,
I
,
0.20
0.18
i
...........
....... i
"
I
:-
K
"t--,. , "" :"
!
i
I'-.
"-
0.16
r-+-
,

"'-
'" "

,
!
I
f'-.! I'...i 1'...:
....
-..
I\.'
i
0.14
,-

"'-

'"
r--. 1 N

""

f':i
t\.
'\
!
0.12
i :"
:'
:"\,

'"
"\. '\L
,
,-

"
'"
"\..1
:,
:'\
"':
,
0.10
r--...
:' t-.....'
r"-.! "- :'\
'\ '\
1\;
!
'"
l".
"
'\l
I\. ; \ :'\ \.
0.08
.........
r--...., N

j\
1\ '\
1,,\
r\
,\
,
k i'
1,\
61'\ 'K \J. \.: '\ 1\
\j
1\
!
0.06
I N "l.4
1'\1 1\ ! '" i\

\ 1\ :\ \f
I
i "\, 2 1\
,
'{
1\1
'\
\ \' 1\
:\
1
0.04
i ! \.i \.
\
f'\ '\
\! .\
\ \1 '\
,
,
\.
\:
1\
. ,
:\ \i
. ,
i\ \i
0.02
0.00
I
i\
,
. \'
i\ 1 \
:\
\ \ 1
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22
y.
,;+..,. Muy
As,total4 ! ex p
t- u
1+
p
R&=-"-
/,,, b t
x
p=p/cu X 10-4
-y,
As.total = f1. b t
595
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
M"y LOADED SECTIONS
f:tb2
,
0.22

j
:
f
y
=280 N/mm2
l-
N--N
i
,
I I
, i
s=0.80
f--
r-L
i

"
I
i
,
Rb = 0.20
I-
i
"'h....
',,",
t'-.....i

I
:
0.20

t-.L
r-....... l'

,
j
i 1 ,
I--h N
"l
,
:
I
, ,

,"
.......
r--....: ....
I'-.
, ...... j
,
I i
j
, r-..,
,
j-
T-.....
,
"k
i
i
i
!
r+-
t'-.....; N N
f',.' 1 \
,
I
,
I
!"--....
:'
:'"

"-
2'\..
i
I
\
t--:
i
K
"'-
"
"l No

,
, I
It-.
!
r-......' .
",:
" i "
"- i"
18 1'...
"-
'\L
i

"

"

l'\.l
t\.: :"\
!
I

"'t
No.4! " :'\
, .'\J.
1\.:
i
:"
:,

).,.
'\t
1\.; i\ l\. i
t--! i't "l
"l

'
1,\
\i
1\ 1 \
1
I ........... r-..,I .......
r-... :"

1... '\ i\
:\
1\
"'{

1
"-
'"

r\ 1\ :\ \ 1\
\\ '\
'" i "-
4
:'\
:'\
'(
1\
:\
1\1
,
\:1
,
i
,
1(
'\l
\; l\ '\ \:
1\
11
:}
1\
i
:\
\\
"-
\:
;\
1\
i

\i
,
i I
1\1'
\\
\\ 1\
! \
\
\1
1
1\
U
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1
0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18
0.2ei:]

b- /C'llbt
As,totnl = f1. b t
596
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
M"y LOADED SECTIONS
--;::;;;z
0.22
0.20
!
!
.,
l"-
I"--
i
!
......... !
,
f y=280 N/mm2
l-
i
-....
r-....
,
I
C, =0.80 -
r-.......... .........
......... "
I
:
Rb = 0.30
-
I i
i
"1'
,i
N
i
i
,
1 ......
0.18
.... N
I'
f".. 1"-
I
1 I I i
,
.........
.........
,
"
-.......,-
'k "l
! !
I
,
0.16
, .........
,
i'-..i
,,! ", I
r
i
.........
r-...
...........
,
"-
r"-. 1'-.....
,
p=24
!
! 1
0.14
t--..
I ........
"'-
i'. N
"-
?::'
,
1
........
N ""., 1'-
"-

"-
"(
,
: 20 i
0.12
r-'
........... ,!
i'. "'{."
"
,1'-
,
,
r"-'
""
1'. i"\. :"\ \. '\t
,
0.10
-
.........
'-
,I
N14 '\J '\. \.!'- I\.
,
I"--
'-
'-
1'.. f'.. !"\. ,\.
'\. \.1 \i
i
0.08
........

f'. K \. \.1 i\.1\ 1\ \J. i
....
.........
""
"\.
"-
,
\. '.J. \ '\
0.06
r-.
........
"
1,\ \. I\.
"
1\ i\ \. \
,
1,\
\. , \ \1 i\i \ \1
0.04
\.
\1 \ 1\
\
}..
'\ \[ ,\
\

\
1\
i\ 1\ \l \1 \
0.02
0.00
\! \
\ \1 I i\ f\
\[ ,\
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22
597

b hu bt
As,lolul = J.l b t

Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
M", LOADED SECTIONS
J::il7
0.22
0.20
I I !
i I
I ,
fy =280 N/mm2
l-
i
I
I I
I
;
I I
C, =0,80
f-
I
:
,
,
! ......... !
,
: ,
Rb = 0.40 l-
i '-b,. !
!
i
i
\
.........;... 1
!
i
,
I
j
,
,
,

i
"'-t
,
l
I
I
i
,
i I
r-....
I
"'h. i""r-...
,
1
!
I
l
I"--
;
, , ,
0.18
0.16

I
"'L 1'-.
I ! ,
, j I
I
...... r-
I
"
,
r"-.
,
,
!
,
!
t--.. '
i
'i
, 1
i
...... 1
""""'"
I "'l
'"
1"- i
I
-I
!
.....
'-l
1"-......
i
"
"-..1 ,,"
i
I T
I ,
0.14
0.12
--l. -........J 'k l'\.. N
I
1
1
!
1
I 'i-.....
: ...........
:
,I

\.i \.1 !
1
i I
0.10
i"'-....... 1
..........
""

,
:
i
! I
-.... 1"'-
' ...... 1 '1J "I\.
'\
i"
1\
!
!
1
K
'to..... N4
'"
'\
'\l
,: \[ i
-.... ......... i
'r........!
i\.1
'\
:\
"
!\ i\ i\ i
1
,
1-....... N.o
'\
'\
\!
\
1 \
:\ !\
1
!
-'
,
,. ......
\.8
"
\ r\ '\ \1
\: \1
i
,
........
\ I
-k
1\.6
\
\1
!\ i\ 't\ 'X
\1 \
\41 \
\ \
\i :\ ;\ \
\: I
,
\
,
I
\1 I \
!,\
\i
\
1\ \ 1\
i
0.08
0.06
.0.04
0.02
0.00
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22

bfa, b t
Jl= P j,u X 10-4
As"o,al = J.l b t
598

Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Mil)'
-;::tb2
LOADED SECTIONS
0.22
I
;
i
0.20
:
; f y=280 N/mm2 t--
;
S =0.80 t--
Rb = 0.50
t--
0.18 i
; ! i
,
0.16
,
I
,
!
I
;
i
i I I
,
;

:
0.14
--......
I
;
,."
---

I
!
'- . I .....
""
i I :

.........
"'-
i
:
t"";-.

-"
,

,
,
,
,
" .
:
j
'\.
I
:-....
"'-i
"
N(
'\ '\

........
"'-
1'\18[
'I
\ i ,
I
I
"'"

'\ \ 1\:
! I ! I
:
l
t:---..... \

\ \ \
:
'\.12 \: 1\ \
1\
\ :
';'\
.n\ \ \1
11.
i\ :\ ,
J \ ;\
\ \ 1\
,
i\
!
j
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22
x
. -.-..
0.67 f,"
-y,-
599
P
Rb=_u-
/,.j, b t
f.J = p !cu x 10'"
AsIOI,,' = Ii b t

LOADED SECTIONS
I
f
y
=280 N/mm2
S =0.80
Rb = 0.60
i
i i
I
I
:
0.10 -r-r-..L)""... i
j
i
_1 i .... '.J :
I
I
I
0.02 .: \ ! !\! i \ 1\ I !
t--
-
-
\ \1 \! 1\ i \; J
0.00 -l---L-....t--L.-I--1.I.--l---LL-.jl-...L-..lf---l-4---.J..-f--lL-t-...I...--!----'--+---'---I
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22
x
.-.....
0.67 f"
-1,-
600

h-
Ie bt
f.J = p I,u x 10'"
As,oln' = Ii b t
CE:J

Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
Design of Reinforced Concrete St
r-----------__________
LOADED SECTIONS
0.28
0.16
0,=360 N/mm
2
r--...

s =0.80 i'-...
t--::r--.....
'"
Rb =0
r--....
"-
r;;;;::::r---...
'"
"
,
""- "-

""
'"

r--....

'"
"
"""\
"
"
f'.....
I\...
=24

'"
""

t'--..
"

""

"
"-
18 "\
"'"

r-...
K: r'\.

"""

'"

"\
"
'\ "\
"-
I\.

"-

"'"

"\
'\ '\ '\
'\
\
1\
t--",
"
"

K !\ \ \ \
\
1\.8
r\
!--r--.....

'\
'\
\ \
1\
"-
r\. t\ f\ f\
f\
"
r\ ''\
\ '\
'\ \ '\ \
\ '\
f-....
.Il
1 .\ \ '\
\ \ \
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
l-
I-
o
\ \ 1
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28
x
0_.-"
0.67 feu
-1-,
601
P
Rb =-"-
1,,, b t
f.l=p/;" X 10-4
As.fOfol = f.I. b t
CE:J

LOADED SECTIONS
J-
0.00 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28
x
.-........
0.67 lou
-1,
602

b- h"bt
As.fofal = f.I. b t
CE:J

0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
t--
f--
r--
F--
t--
t--
-......
.......
'-
r-
r-.........
r-........
LOADED SECTIONS
f
y
=360 N/mm2
........
'"
':"0.80
'-
'"
"'-
Rb = 0.20
t--.....
'"
'"
"
"
t---...... I'..

"
I'..
"
'"

'"
"-
"
"-

'"
f'...

""
"
"'
"'

'"

I'... f'...
24
f'.--
""
"
"'
"-

'"
r-... I'..
'"
'"
"-
"
"
"'
'\
rz
"
r.....
'"
r'\.
'"
"
" " "
,,"
I\. '\
'\ '\
I\. '\
I"-
"-
"-12 f'\ I\. I\.
'"
"
"
'\
rt>"
1\." 1\."
1\"
1\\
\
\
I\.

'"
"
'\ \
\ \ \ \ \ \
I'"
\ \ 1\
f\ 1\
,
\
\ 1\
f\ 1\
,
\
\ -\ \ \ 1\
l-
I-
1\
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28
x
-yo
603

b- [,,,bl
11= P leo X 10-4
As.rotal := p b t

"ll
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
M
lly
LOADED SECTIONS
J::tb2
0.28
0.26
f
y
=360 N/mm2

r-........
(, =0.80
Rb = 0.30
............
r-........
-.........
'"
............
"""'"
!...
--

"'"

'"
""-
t-,.., r.....
i'---
.........
"-
'"
""-
'"
h.. r-....
I"-
........
'"
'"
'"
"
"-
=24
t--....
'"
'"
"
'"
'"
'"
I'"

'\
b
"
-....
'"
""" f'..
,'"
'"
'\
t-,..,
-....

"
"

'"
I""
1"'- r-
"-

"-
'"
"

1\ f\
t--... "10
"
"

'\
'\
'\ '\
\ \
\
\
.............. 1\ 1\ \. 1\
I"
'\ '\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ 1\
1\
, ,
,
\
\
\
1\ 1\ 1\ 1\ 1\
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1
P
R :=-"-
b '/Cli hi
ASJoral := p b I
604
I-
I-
0.2 8
0.2 6
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00

:--...

r---..
:-.....
r-...
:-.....
LOADED SECTIONS
f
y
=360 N/mm2
S =0.80
Rb = 0040

" "-

""'"
,
"-
............
""
"'-

" r--......
"
l"-
"

"
I\.. p"

..........

'"

"'-
"'"
"
"-

"\
........
,

" ""
" K
"
K .........
"'-
""-
"

'\
'\
i\. \ \ \

'"
'\ \ '\
\
\
\
"\
'\ i\
1\
'\.
\6
i\ \ \ \
,
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ .\ .\ \
l-
f-.
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28
x
._0-""

y,
605
R
- P"
b---
f.,,,bt
p = p fa< xJO-4
As.toto' = J.L b t
CE:J

Design of Reinforced Concrete structures
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.26
0.24
0.22
LOADED SECTIONS
i
f
y
=360 N/mm
2
1;,=0.80
Rb = 0.50
0.20
i--.
r--....
r--.....
-
-.......

...........
0.18
""'-

"
r--....
I'-...
--
-.......
.......
""-
""-
p=24
:--....
i'\..
-.;;;;::.
I'-.......
........

""-
t--....
I\..
-
i'--.
.........
"-

I"
'"
'\

-
'"
'"
....
I'-
"
1"\
"\

6
.....

'\
\
\
1\

1\
[\
t\
4
1"\ \ \
\
\ \ \
\
2
"
\
"
\ \ \
\
,
f\
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.0
0.0
0.0
0 U 4
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.2
x p = p x 10-4
.-.-.

606
-
l-
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08

0.04
0.02
0.00
--
r--
r--
r--
I--.
---
---
LOADED SECTIONS
f
y
=360 N/mm2
S =0.80
Rb = 0.60
-.......
"'"
..........

..........

-.......

"-
"
t"{=*

............

'"
'\
'\
t\.
20
\..
............

"
\
\
"'
'0
\ \ \ N4

\
\ \ \ '\
\
\ \ \ \
1\
f-
f-
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28
x
.-......

Yc
607

b-
hu
bt
J.l= Ph" X 10-4
As.roral = Jl b t
CE:J

Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
. LOADED SECTIONS

0.30
f
y
=400 N/mm2
--
r--.
s =0.80
...........
Rb=O
----
:--
I'....
0.28
0.26
--
-.......
"-
i'...
r--...
C--
.....

..........
"
-.......
"-
0.24
0.22
::--
...........
'"
"
r-.... "-.. :-....
r-
..........

"

r-...
"-
r--
"'

"
"

"-

r--....
I".....
4

.....
f" "
I'\.
I'\.
r--
'"
"
2 ......
"-

I'"
"
"
,
t\.
t'.....
I\.
0
r--
'"

'\

\
.............

'"
10
r\...
1\
8
-
'"

"\
'\
\ \ \'\ '\ '\
t\.
:--...
\
\
" 1\
6

"
r-..
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
-
f-
\
1'\ '\

1\
I\.
\ \ \
4
1\ \
\
"
1\ 1\ \
0.0
o. 02
o. 00
--
1\ \ \ \
\
\
'\
o 0.020.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26
x
.-.....
0.67
-1,-
608
P
u
Rb=f. bt
cu
Ai.roral = Jl b t
\
0.28 O.3
CB:J

Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
May LOADED SECTIONS
t:tl7
0.3 0
8 f--
f
y
=400 N/mm2
.... '"
l-
t-- 1; =0.80
'",
.......... R
b
=0.10
l-
f-...
r-..
"""
"

"
........
"-
"
........

"
'"'-....
I"'-...
..........

. "
"-

r--
"-
0.2
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
,
"'-
I'-.
'"
.....

24
t:--
I\..
..........
""-
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
o

"

t--.
i'.. f'....
"'
i'....
''''
"-
"l
,
'"

"
I--.
I\..
'"

'\
"
,
"

t-...
'"
"

'\
"
'\ '\
"
"-
r-..
r\ I\. r\

"
.....
f'\. .'\ \ \ \ \ \
.......
'"
2'\
'\
'\
,
\ '\
1\
',\
\
f\ \. \ \
1\ \
\
\
\
\ \
, , , ,
, ,
i\ !\ '\
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3
x

609
As"oUd = Ji b I
CE:J

';'1 <.

li',l ..

11

...
d ,
il
..
..
I
>:
'.

LOADED SECTIONS
I-
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26

b /"" bl
P. = p feu xlO-4
As"o,al = Ji b I
610
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
LOADED SECTIONS
f y=400 N/mm
2
r--.........
b... S =0.80
r-.....
.'"
Rb = 0.30
b.. I'...

.......

["'-..,
""

........

['...
1'-0...

"- "
....
"
"-
f'\.

I"-
'"
.......

"

t:--...

'"
"-
"
....

4

"-

.....

'"
"-
"

!'{o

..........
l\..
'"
"-
"\

1'\

No6
t-
f-
""
"
I"\.

'\
'\
"\
l\..
12
I\.
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
o

"
" '\.

'\ \
\ \
\ '\
i""-...
I"'- 1\
..........
"-
"\
"\
l\. r\
\

_'\
\
1\6 1,\
'\ \ \
\
'I
r\
[\
!\
f'1 1\
--"-
1
II \ \ \
\ \

0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3
y... ux
As,tota,/4 p feu b (2
! + u
x
-1-,
611

b-;;'"bt
A"totnl = f.l b t
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
r--.....
p---......

f"'...
r---.....
r---
r--.
LOADED SECTIONS
fy =400 N/mm2
S =0.80
Rb = OAO
I'.....
t:..........
f".-
.......
['.......
........
r---.... .......
'"
........
r-...
'"
"
"
I"\.
"'-
0=2
"

.",
"-

"

'"
"
I'"

'"
....

"

'"
"-
6
'"

........

'"
"\
'\
I\.
" '"
--",
'"
"
'"
I,
'\
'\
" "\
f'\. 1\ 1\
........

Ii'"
'\
'\
"I
f\ 1\ \ \
_\
I\. 1\
..........
\ \
\
\
\
f\

\
, ,
1\ \ \
_\
1\
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
x
.-........
0.67 foo
y,
612
P"
R=--
II h." ht
A"totnl = f.l b t
:\
\
r-
r-
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
LOADED SECTIONS
0
8
f y=400 N/mm
2
l-
0.2
0.26
t; =0.80
Rb = 0.50
~
0.24
0.06
,.........
-....;::::
~
.... r---...
~
""
-.....;;;::
~
~ "-
~
t--...
........... '"
"
I'"
"-
t\..
~
'"
"""
r-.....
'"
"
"\
~ = 2 ~
r-.
K
......
'"
,
~
'\
"'-
~
I\.
~
"-
!':
"-
~ ~ ~
'\
I\..
...........
"-
'\ 4 ~
" ~ '\ \
r-.....
~ r\.
"'" r'\.
~ '\ '\
'\
\
\
r-..
r\
'\
,
r\ 1\ 1\ 1\ \ \ \
r-..
8
~
~ 6
\ \ \ \ .\
\
,
~
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.04
0.02
0.00
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3
x
. - .......
0.67f",
-1,-
As,total
613
A"'O',,I = JI b t
[KJ
~
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
t'--
F--
t--
""-
-..
r--.
r.......
LOADED SECTIONS
-
f
y
=400 N/mm2
t; =0.80
Rb =0,60
-.
'"
i'o..
.......
'"
'"
'"
...........
~
"-
~
"'-
"

""
"-
II\,. ~ =
4
~
~
~
~
t\. i\. I'i'o.. 20
~
..... "
'\
\
\
1\
"
"
""
IV
1\ f\ 1\ \
14
1\
~ \ \ \
\
,
,
"
1\
Y
\
~ ~ 1\ \
l-
l-
o 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3
x
.-....
0.67 tou
-1,-
614
P
R --"- h-
fe" bt
JI = pfeil x 10""
As,total = f1 b t
[KJ
~
, -
APPENDIX I
for L-Sections
615
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
fy=360 N/mm2, s=0.85, A=0.35, Rb=O
11 = P feu x10-4

y
616

>,

Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
0.18
X-
0.16
0.14
0.12
.i
;-,ley
Mux
I-- -

V
I
M. V
I
I
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
-0.02
\ \ 1\
\ .\
\ .. \'
\
, -0.04
-0.06
-0.08
-0.10
-0.12
-0.14
-0.16
-0.18
17

ux
e.,i
IV iy
Interaction'Diagram for L-Sections
f
y
=360 N/mm2, s=0.85, A=0.35, R
b
=0.20
),
ux I rb,
r--
t'-...
. 7x

_ ..J
i"'-
....
'"
\ i
L--
'"'"-.
"-
r---..... vi M,n
V -
-

>--...

----...,..
7
f"..
........
"
,,-"
-
I-.... I".....
"
,,"'"
t'-.
[".
f'- 1'.."
"
1'\.'
,'\
\\
"
1\."

f'\ \.\ i\
1\
\
\ \ 1\
[\.\
1\

\ \\ 1\

,
\ \ 1\ '\
K:
,
f'o....

I'.. ./
IJ
........
"...,.
'"
0 :::--...
'0
u
/ J
['.::
t'
t'---.
--
J 7
IV
J
-'"
..... r-....
I.)A
V
Muy
......
I ;t-

nJ- -
.V!
617
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy

...L
h" Ac t
0.18
x-'
0.16
Jnid;
-;._.-1.
)

I:--Y! V ux
0.14
uy
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
-0.02
-0.04
-0.06
-0.08
-0.10

II-::-
-0.12
-0.14
M
'-V
-0.16
Interaction Diagram for L-5ections
fy=360 N/mm2, l;=0.85, "-=0.35, R
b
=0.40

r--....
P:i
""- Mux
f.t
r
-.........
r---...
"-
( -.- If
..
i'--
l":
l'"
"\ 11 l-
I--
vl-M
"

,..."\
....... 1--""
f
"'-

r-...."

'"

['\

i\.."""
0
1\ \ \
"\
f\.'\
C'\
1'\."'

\' \ 1\ ,\
"
[\
'"

,,\
\
\
.\ \
"'

l\:
"\

,..."'-
:\'

S
r\ .....
," \
1\

['-.....
t---
\
\ 1\ 'r\
.....
R
r...... 2
\
\

f'-....
"-
1&
-"
) ..... _I':

I Pl
if
y
lX"
f'=1:' .
Mu ,\
N '<t <0 co ..... N '<t <0 co 0 0 0 0
ci
..... ..... ..... .....
ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci

feu Ac t
h11l
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
I
-0.18
co <0 '<t N
...... ..... ..... ......
9 9 9 9
f
y
=360 N/mm2, l;=0.85, ",=0.25, Rb=O
N '<t <0 co ..... co <0 '<t N 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
C!
9
C!
9 9 9
ci ci ci 0
c;>
J1 = p feu xlO-4
hlQ
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy
fy=360 N/mm2, s=0.85, ),,=0.25, R
b
=0.20
0.18
x-
0.16
0.14

I-- .'
h. Vy
'--
MUJ
r

I C1
lx-
U fY r--
r-...
.. 1. . .:!3
-
.....
0.12
-
-l'"'"-
r-....
I"-......
K
\
t
0.00
rJ.--- r-
r-...

f'....

!-AU
r
""
.....
'"

f-
C""'"- r--.....
I (
......

l' ."-
.'\
r\ . '"
[1\
1\
\ \
'"'-

,\ '\
i\ \
\ r\\
'r\.' l\' 1\\ \
[\\
1\\ !\\
l\ \
l\ 1\\

f\. ' \

1\' \

"

,
1\ 1
\
1\ ,
\
'\

I
"

;::-r-E
I) 8 10 1,
Fl6
"
"r
j
)
.........

..........
J I}

0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
-0.02
-0.04
-0.06
-0.08
-0.10
-0.12
f"'-...
r::::::
./

Muy 1&..;-.1

7

iii ..
!re;
!y

rt ..
_M
ClO co '"':::;:--"
..-
y:
-0.14
-0.16
-0.18
ClO co ""
c c c
999
co 'ClO
..- ..-
ci d
y
620
I
J.
Ghoneim & Elmihilmy

c !CU A t
0.18

._.,k
0.14

P
u
ey
0.12

"-
...
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
-0.02
-0.04
-0.06
-0.08
-0.10
-0.12
f& ... 1
.pulkJ
6
1'1.. lre;iy
M. .
8
-----
-0.14
-0.1
-0.1
f =360 N/mm2, s=0.85, ),,=0.25, R
b
=O.4
y
-.....
............
t"..... 1\ .. I n
i"'-.....
r.....
"'I'..
rv ..
U r-
\ \
.............
"
"-
\
r
"-
r.....
,
i'-.
'"

".,;-'
:-.....

I'\.. '"
"
,""

"-
1'..'
'-
1\

['(

",-'
"-
1\ '
\
"-
,,'
,'\. ['..,
f"'-
'" "-
'"
1\ ,\
1
"
1\.."
0
[\.
r\.:
1\..'
\..
1\\ 1\\
I,
"' 1\.."
."\.
1\.' 1\
\
,\
r-.
F"
'\
l'\.
"
,\
.\
1'\ r-
'\
r\\ \
, ..........

\
1\ '
r---..
- J
t'-:.::
=16

ru . ...J.>.y
I _.-1
,r
,
co CD "' N "l""" CQ (0
"" N C
C C
"" co
ClO ..- N
"" S 0 0 0 ci "l""" "l"""
co ClO
"l""" "l""" "l""" "l""" c::i C! q
ci9Qci' qq c:; 9
e.
621
C ci ci ci c:i ci
Pu
R
b
=--
feu Ae
J1 = p feu xlO-
4
A s,total = J1 Ac
..- ..-
o 0
Units Conversion Table
REFERENCES
Io transform from To Multiply by
S1-units French -units factor
Concentrated loads
IN kg 0.1
1 kN kg 100
1 kN ton 0.1
Linear Loads 1m'
1 kN/m' tim' 0.1
Uniform Loads 1m2
kN/m
L
tlm
2
0.1
N/m
L
kg/m
l
0.1
kN/m
l
kg/m 100
stress
N/mm
l
(, 1 MPa) kg/em 10
kN/m kg/em 0.01
kN/m ton/mol 0.1
Density
N/m
3
kg/m
J
0.1
kN/m' tOll/m
j
0.1
kN/m' kg/m
3
100
Moment
---.:
kN.m tOll.m 0.1
-
N.mm kg. em 0.01
-
Area
m
L
em
L
10000
mm--z
em
L
0.01

622
623
ACI Committee 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
(ACI 318-02), " American Concrete Institute, Detroit, 2002.
Alexander, S., and Simmonds, S., "Tests of Column-Flat Plate Connections",
ACI Structural Journal, V. 89, No.5, Sept.-Oct. 1992, pp. 495-502.
Ahmed S., Shah S., "Stress-Strain . Curves of Concrete Confined by Spiral
Reinforcement", ACI Journal Proceedings, Vol. 79, No.6, Novernber-
December 1982, pp. 484-490.
Amin Ghali, and Rene Favre, "Concrete Structures: Stresses and
Deformations", Chapman & Hall, New York, 1986,348 pp.
Arthur H. Nilson, "Design of Concrete Structures", Twelfth Edition, McGraw
Hill, 1997, 780 pp.
Bazant, Z., Cedolin, L. and Tabbara, M., "New Method of Analysis for Slender
Columns", ACI Structural Journal Vol. 88, No.4, pp. 391-401, July-August
1991.
Claeson, C. and Gyltoft, K., "Slender Concrete Columns Subjected to Sustained
and Short-Term Eccentric Loads", ACI Structural Journal Vol. 97, No.4, pp.
591-601, July-August 2000.
Chester Siess and Nathan NewMark, "Rational Analysis and Design of Two-
Way Concrete Slabs", ACI Journal Proceedings, Vol. 45,1949, pp. 273-315.
Corley W. G., and Jirsa J. D., " Equivalent Frame Analysis for Slab Design",
Journal of the American Concrete Institute, Vol. 67, No.ll , November 1970,
pp. 875-884.
CSA Committee A23.3, "Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings," CAN3-
a23.3-M84 Canadian Standards Association, Rexdale, Canada, 1994, 199 pp.
Denis Mitchell and William D. Cook, "Preventing Progressive Collapse of Slab
Structures", Proceedings ASCE, Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 110,
No. ST7, July 1984, pp. 1513-1532.
ECCS 203-2001, "The Egyptian Code for the Design and Construction of
Reinforced Concrete Structures ", Housing and Building Research Center, Giza, :
Egypt.
624
Eurocode 2, "Design of Concrete Structures-Part 1: General Rules and Rules
for Buildings (EC-2)" European Prestandard 'ENV 1992-1-1:1991, Comte
European de Normalisation, Brussels, 253 pp.
Gardner N., and Shao x., "Punching Shear of Continuous Flat Reinforced
Concrete Slabs", ACI Structural Journal, V. 93, No.2, March-April 1996, pp.
218-228.
Hawkins N., "Shear Strength of Slabs with Shear Reinforcement", Shear in
Reinforced Concrete, SP-42, V. 2, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, 1974,
pp.785-815.
James G. MacGregor, "Reinforced Concrete- Mechanics & Design", Prentice
Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Second edition, 1992, 848 pp.
Kenneth Leet, and Dionisio Bernal, " Reinforced Concrete Design", Mc-Graw
Hill, New York, 1997, 546 pp.
Mohamed Hilal, "Design of Reinforced Concrete Halls", Marcou & Co, 1987,
364 pp.
Mahmoud El-Mihilmy, "Toward A Rational Design of RC Sections Subjected
to Tension Failure", Journal of the Egyptian Society of Engineers, V. 40, No.2,
April 2001, pp. 17-24.
Mahmoud El-Mihilmy, "Design of Biaxially Loaded Reinforced Concrete
Sections with Unsymmetrical Reinforcement", Journal of Engineering and
Applied Science, Cairo University, V. 48, No.4, August 2001, pp. 637-653.
Mahmoud El-rnihilmy, " Refined Analysis of Slender Reinforced Concrete
Columns", Journal of Engineering and Applied Science, Cairo University, Vol.
51, No.2, 2004.
Mahmoud EI-Mihilmy, Mashhour Ghoneim, and Heba A., "A Simplified Strut
and Tie Model For Slab-Column Connections ", Engineering Research Journal,
University ofHelwan, Vol.93 , pp. C63-C82, 2004.
Mashhour Ghoneirn and James MacGregor "Behavior of Reinforced Concrete
Plates under Combined Inplane and Lateral Loads", ACI Structural Journal, ~
91 No.2, Mar. - Apr. 1994, pp 188-197.
Mashhour Ghoneim and James MacGregor "Prediction of the Ultimate Strength
of Reinforced Concrete Plates under Combined Inplane and Lateral Loads",
ACI Structural Journal, V. 91 No.6, V. 91 No.1, Nov. - Dec. 1994, pp 688-
996.
625
Mashhour Ghoneim, "Strength of High-Strength Concrete Slender Columns
Under Eccentric Compression Loads", Journal of Engineering and Applied
Science, Faculty of Engineering, Cairo University, Vol. 49, No.6, Dec. 2002,
pp. 1157-1176.
McHarg, P., Cook, D., Mitchell, D. and Yoon Y., "Benefits of Concentrated
Slab Reinforcement and Steel Fibers on Performance of Slab-Column
Connections", ACI Structural Journal, V. 97, No.2, March-April, 2000, pp.
225-234.
PCA, "Notes on ACI 318-95:Building Code Requirements For Structural
Concrete With Design Applications", Skokie, Illinois, 1996,818 pp.
Robert Park and Thomas Paulay, "Reinforced Concrete Structures", A Wiley-
Interscience Publication, Wiley, New York, 1975, 769 pp.
Sayed Sherif, Mashhour Ghoneim., Ashraf EI-Zanaty, and Shadia EL-Ibiari,
"Behavior of High-Strength Concrete Circular Columns Confined with Spirals
and Hoops under Axial Loads- Part (1) Experimental Results", Scientific
Bulletin, Faculty of Engineering, Ain Shams University, Vol. 34, No.3, Sept.
1999, pp. 1-12.
Sheikh S. A., and Yeh c., "Tied Concrete Columns Under Axial load and
Flexure", Journal of Structural Engineering- ASCE, Vol. 116, No. 10, pp. 2780-
2800, October 1990.
Stephen P. Timoshenko and J.N. Goodier, " Theory of Plates and Shells", Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1964,364 pp.
Tories Brondiem-Nielson, "Ultimate Limit States of Cracked arbitrary
Concrete Sections under Axial Load and Bending", Concrete International:
Design and Construction, Vol. 4, No. 11, November 1982, pp. 51-55.
Tsao W. , and Hsu T., " Behavior of Biaxailly loaded Square and L-Shaped
Slender Reinforced Concrete Columns", Magazine of Concrete Research, Vol.
46, No. 169, Dec 1994, pp. 257-267.
Yamada T., Nanni A., and Endo K., "Punching Shear Resistance of Flat Slabs:
Influence of reinforcement type and Ratio", ACI Structural Journal, V. 88, No.
4, Sept.- Oct., 1992, pp. 555-563.
626
o.:lk.] ) ) U"t.pS1 JS J.foJI
.:l! .<:!II 4..&WI . '1 . 1 'WI 4..l
y
L....Jl .. 11 .
(.);!J .Jl ..r-' ua...r-;o
4,ji) Jij IF. O.:lk.] ) 4"j.:lL. ) j.m 'j
) ylY" ',?4 yly,J u-- y.,?. ',?l
. u-- u-,.:l -,fi)!1 )
b. I 1- I "iiw 0 '11A 1 . 11 :l!\:lS..I1 II y I . 11 ,",W' II .c..lJ
y I..Q l.S""' -' ..r-. ..J-"'. '"67'.. (5..7"' u Y"
:.)\:lll .:l,l.;:JI .)c 41...1.;.JI J)l:;.. U--
Rconcrete @
" .. if" '0 i tl.:l,l)!1
C!jjlllJ y;..llIJ :i..c41Jl t)411 F.
627
About the Authors
Professor Dr. Mashhour Ghoneim: is a Professor of Concrete Structures at
Cairo University. He obtained his Ph.D. in Structural Engineering from the
University of Alberta, Canada. He participated in the development of the
shear and torsion design provisions of the American Concrete fustitute Code
(ACI 318). He supervised several researches for the degrees of M.Sc. 'and
Ph.D. related to the behavior and stability of reinforced concrete members,
particularly under seismic actions. He is the author of many technical papers'
in reinforced concrete.
Professor Gl10neim is a member of several professional committees
including the Standing Committee for the Egyptian Code for Design and
Construction of Concrete' Structures, the Standing Committee for the.
Egyptian Code for the Use of FRP in Construction Fields, the Standing
Committee' for the Egyptian Code for Design and Planning of Bridges and
Intersections and the Committee for the Egyptian Code for Masonry Works.
He participated in the design of many projects in Egypt and abroad. Some of
the most notable of these projects are: the Library of Alexandria (the
Bibliotheca Alexandrina), the bridge over Suez Canal, City Stars Complex in
Cairo, San Stefano Grand Plaza in Alexandria and the Quay Walls of North
AI-Sukhna port and Port Said East Port.
Dr. Mahmoud T. EI-Mihihny: is an Associate Professor in the Department
of Structural Engineering at Cairo University. He holds two bachelor
degrees, one in Architectural, Engineering and another in Structural
Engineering from Cairo University. He also has two Masters' degrees in
Architectural and Structural Engineering. Finally, he obtained his ph.D.
from Auburn University, USA, in Structural Engineering.
Dr. EI-Mihilmy teaches undergraduate and graduate courses in the design of
reinforced and prestressed concrete structures. He published numerous '. I
techriical papers in respected journals worldwide. He is a member in the
ACI, ASCE as well as the Egyptian Society of Engineers. He has served on
many professional committees including the Egyptian Code for Design and
Construction of Concrete Structures for the Development of Design Aids as
well as the, Egyptian Code for the Use ofFRP in Construction Fields.
He was engaged in the design of a number of large-scale projects both on the
international and national levels such as MGM-Hotel in 48 Vegas, USA,
and Conrad Hotel in Cairo. Finally, He was av.;arded the Ahmed Moharem
Prize 2005 in Structural Engineering.
628
RIC F.rames

BOOK - Design of Reinforced Concrete Structure Mashhour Ahmed GhoneimV02

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

BOOK - Design of Reinforced Concrete Structure Mashhour Ahmed GhoneimV02

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

RIC F.

I I' I I' I I'

__ aloMa 20% 1/

For inner diameter:

Anda mungkin juga menyukai